B229 SM

B229 SERVICE MANUAL
002733MIU
B229 SERVICE MANUAL
B229 SERVICE MANUAL
002733MIU
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies. NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION. All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered trademarks or the property of their respective companies. They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other affiliation with Ricoh products.
2006 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
WARNING
The Service Manual contains information regarding service techniques, procedures, processes and spare parts of office equipment distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this manual should be either service trained or certified by successfully completing a Ricoh Technical Training Program. Untrained and uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury, damage to property or loss of warranty protection. Ricoh Corporation
LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE B229 GESTETNER GS 106 COMPANY LANIER RICOH LD215c Aficio 615C SAVIN SGC 1506
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. * DATE 07/2006 COMMENTS Original Printing
B229 TABLE OF CONTENTS

INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................1-1
1.1 BEFOREHAND...........................................................................................1-1 1.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................1-2 1.2.1 ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................1-2 1.2.2 MACHINE LEVEL..............................................................................1-3 1.2.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS ...............................................1-3 1.2.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ...............................................................1-4 1.3 COPIER INSTALLATION ...........................................................................1-5 1.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS ........................................1-5 1.3.2 ACCESSORY CHECK ......................................................................1-6 1.3.3 BEFORE INSTALLING A COPIER....................................................1-6 1.3.4 INITIAL SETTING............................................................................1-11 1.3.5 CHECKING THE NOZZLE PATTERN.............................................1-11 1.3.6 HEAD GAP ADJUSTMENT.............................................................1-12 1.3.7 SUB SCAN: SEND ADJUSTMENT .................................................1-13 1.3.8 MOVING THE MACHINE ................................................................1-15 1.3.9 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE ..................................................1-16 1.4 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION ...........................................................1-18 1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................1-18 1.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .......................................................1-18 1.5 ARDF INSTALLATION .............................................................................1-19 1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................1-19 1.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .......................................................1-19 1.6 ADF INSTALLATION ................................................................................1-23 1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................1-23 1.6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .......................................................1-23 1.7 ONE-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT ..............................................................1-27 1.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................1-27 1.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .......................................................1-27 1.7.3 OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY GRIP HANDLE OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT...............................................................................................1-32 1.8 TWO-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION ...................................1-34 1.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................1-34 1.8.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .......................................................1-34 1.8.3 OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY GRIP HANDLE OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT...............................................................................................1-39 1.9 DUPLEX UNIT INSTALLATION ...............................................................1-40 1.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................1-40 1.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .......................................................1-40
SM i B229
Rev. 01/2007
1.10 HEATER KIT INSTALLATION............................................................ 1-51 1.10.1 COMPONENT CHECK.............................................................. 1-51 1.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ................................................. 1-52 1.10.3 OPTIONAL TRAY HEATER ...................................................... 1-57 1.11 FUNCTION UPGRADE OPTION INSTALLATION ............................. 1-62 1.11.1 COMPONENT CHECK.............................................................. 1-62 1.11.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ................................................. 1-62 1.12 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT INSTALLATION................................ 1-66 1.12.1 COMPONENT CHECK.............................................................. 1-66 1.12.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ................................................. 1-67 1.13 OPTIONAL COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT ........................................ 1-68 1.13.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ................................................. 1-68 1.14 CONTROLLER OPTIONS.................................................................. 1-71 1.14.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................... 1-71 1.14.2 POSTSCRIPT3 INSTALLATION ............................................... 1-72 1.14.3 PICTBRIDGE INSTALLTION .................................................... 1-72 1.14.4 JAVA VM OPTION INSTALLATION.......................................... 1-73 1.14.5 WIRELESS LAN (IEEE 802.11B) INSTALLATION.................... 1-74 1.14.6 IEEE 1284 INSTALLATION....................................................... 1-74 1.14.7 IEEE 1394 INSTALLATION....................................................... 1-75 1.14.8 BLUETOOTH INSTALLATION .................................................. 1-75 1.14.9 USB HOST INSTALLATION...................................................... 1-76 1.14.10 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT TYPE D (B735)......... 1-76 1.14.11 REMOTE COMMUNICATION GATE INSTALLATION .......... 1-80 1.15 KEY COUNTER I/F UNIT TYPE A ..................................................... 1-82
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ................................................... 2-1
2.1 PM TABLES ............................................................................................... 2-1 2.2 PM COUNTER ........................................................................................... 2-3 2.2.1 HOW TO RESET THE PM COUNTER ............................................. 2-3 2.2.2 PM COUNTER RESET LIST ............................................................ 2-4 2.3 CLEANING PROCEDURES ...................................................................... 2-5 2.3.1 MAINTENANCE UNIT ...................................................................... 2-5 2.3.2 PRINT HEADS.................................................................................. 2-6 2.3.3 TRANSPORT BELT .......................................................................... 2-8
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 3-1
3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS .............................................................................. 3-1 3.1.1 SCANNER UNIT ............................................................................... 3-1 3.1.2 PAPER FEED ................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.3 IMPORTANT..................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS....................................................... 3-2
B229
ii
SM
3.3 EXTERIOR COVERS AND OPERATION PANEL......................................3-3 3.3.1 REAR COVER...................................................................................3-3 3.3.2 REAR ENGINE UNIT COVER...........................................................3-3 3.3.3 TOP LEFT FRONT, LEFT FRONT AND INTERFACE COVER ........3-4 3.3.4 RIGHT DOOR ...................................................................................3-4 3.3.5 BY-PASS TRAY ................................................................................3-5 3.3.6 FRONT COVER ................................................................................3-5 3.4 OPERATION PANEL..................................................................................3-6 3.5 SCANNER UNIT.........................................................................................3-7 3.5.1 EXPOSURE GLASS..........................................................................3-7 3.5.2 LENS BLOCK ....................................................................................3-7 3.5.3 EXPOSURE LAMP............................................................................3-8 3.5.4 ORIGINAL WIDTH/LENGTH SENSOR ...........................................3-10 3.5.5 SCANNER MOTOR.........................................................................3-10 3.5.6 LAMP STABILIZER .........................................................................3-11 3.6 ENGINE....................................................................................................3-12 3.6.1 ENGINE UNIT .................................................................................3-12 3.6.2 CONIJ (CONNECT INK JET MODULE) ..........................................3-15 3.6.3 MAINTENANCE UNIT .....................................................................3-15 3.6.4 INK COLLECTION TANK ................................................................3-16 3.6.5 SUB SCAN ENCODER AND ENCODER SENSOR........................3-17 3.6.6 MAIN SCAN DRIVE MOTOR ..........................................................3-19 3.6.7 SUB SCAN DRIVE MOTOR ............................................................3-19 3.6.8 FLUSHING GATE UNIT ..................................................................3-20 3.6.9 TRANSPORT BELT UNIT ...............................................................3-20 3.6.10 CHARGE ROLLER ....................................................................3-22 3.7 PAPER FEED...........................................................................................3-23 3.7.1 PAPER FEED MOTOR ...................................................................3-23 3.7.2 REGISTRATION CLUTCH ..............................................................3-24 3.7.3 REGISTRATION ROLLER ..............................................................3-24 3.7.4 PAPER FEED, PAPER TRANSPORT AND DUPLEX CLUTCH .....3-26 3.7.5 PAPER FEED ROLLER AND FRICTION PAD................................3-26 3.7.6 PAPER END SENSOR....................................................................3-27 3.7.7 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SWITCH....................................................3-28 3.7.8 BY-PASS FEED ROLLER AND PAPER END SENDOR.................3-29 3.7.9 REGISTRATION SENSOR .............................................................3-30 3.7.10 ONE-SHEET BY-PASS PAPER END SENSOR........................3-31 3.7.11 PAPER SIZE SWITCH...............................................................3-31 3.8 PAPER EXIT ............................................................................................3-32 3.8.1 PAPER EXIT TRAY.........................................................................3-32 3.8.2 PAPER EXIT UNIT ..........................................................................3-32 3.8.3 PAPER EXIT SENSOR ...................................................................3-33 3.8.4 JUNCTION GATE SENSOR ...........................................................3-33 3.8.5 PAPER EXIT MOTOR .....................................................................3-34 3.9 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS.................................................................3-35 3.9.1 CONTROLLER BOX .......................................................................3-35
SM
iii
B229
3.9.2 CONTROLLER BOARD ..................................................................3-35 3.9.3 NVRAM AND DIMM RAM ...............................................................3-36 3.9.4 IO BOARD.......................................................................................3-37 3.9.5 PSU BOARD ...................................................................................3-37 3.9.6 IPU BOARD.....................................................................................3-38 3.9.7 BCU BOARD ...................................................................................3-39 3.10 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT .......................................................................3-40 3.10.1 PREPARING FOR TEST PRINTING .........................................3-40 3.10.2 ADJUST PAPER FEED .............................................................3-40 3.10.3 NOZZLE BLOCKAGE CHECK ..................................................3-41 3.10.4 ADJUST PRINT HEAD POSITION ............................................3-42 3.10.5 REGISTRATION ........................................................................3-44 3.11 COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING ...............................3-45 3.11.1 PRINTING..................................................................................3-45 3.11.2 SCANNING ................................................................................3-48 3.11.3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ......................................................3-49
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING..................................................................4-1
4.1 SERVICE CALL..........................................................................................4-1 4.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .........................................................4-1 4.1.2 SC TABLE .........................................................................................4-2 4.2 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE .....................................................................4-31 4.2.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................4-31 4.2.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ...................................................4-31 4.3 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING ...........................................................4-32 4.3.1 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR EXPECTED PROBLEMS IN THE FIELD .......................................................................................................4-32 4.3.2 POOR QUALITY IMAGE .................................................................4-33 4.3.3 POOR PRINTER PERFORMANCE (MISCELLANEOUS)...............4-36 4.3.4 UNUSUAL NOISES.........................................................................4-38 4.3.5 MAINTAINING THE PRINTER HEAD CONDITION ........................4-39 4.4 IMAGE TEST MODE ................................................................................4-41 4.4.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................4-41 4.4.2 IPU TEST ........................................................................................4-41 4.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS..................................................4-42 4.5.1 SENSORS.......................................................................................4-42 4.5.2 SWITCHES .....................................................................................4-44 4.5.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .........................................................4-46
B229
iv
SM
SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES .......................................................................5-1
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE.....................................................................5-1 5.1.1 HOW TO ENTER THE SP MODE .....................................................5-1 5.2 SP MODE TABLES ....................................................................................5-3 5.2.1 SP1-XXX (FEED) ..............................................................................5-3 5.2.2 SP2-XXX (DRUM) .............................................................................5-8 5.2.3 SP3-XXX (PROCESS) ....................................................................5-11 5.2.4 SP4-XXX (SCANNER) ....................................................................5-14 5.2.5 SP5-XXX (MODE) ...........................................................................5-30 5.2.6 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS).............................................................5-72 5.2.7 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG)....................................................................5-73 5.2.8 SP8-XXX (HISTORY) ......................................................................5-90 5.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE ...................................................................5-132 5.4 SCANNER SP MODE ............................................................................5-138 5.5 USING SP MODES ................................................................................5-139 5.5.1 ADJUSTING REGISTRATION AND MAGNIFICATION ................5-139 5.5.2 DISPLAY APS DATA (SP 4301 1).................................................5-139 5.5.3 MEMORY CLEAR .........................................................................5-139 5.5.4 INPUT CHECK (SP 5803) .............................................................5-141 5.5.5 OUTPUT CHECK (SP 5804) .........................................................5-146 5.5.6 SERIAL NUMBER INPUT (SP 5811) ............................................5-148 5.5.7 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD (SP 5824/5825) ...............5-148 5.5.8 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE............................................5-150 5.5.9 SD CARD APPLI MOVE................................................................5-151 5.5.10 SMC PRINT (SP 5990) ............................................................5-153 5.5.11 ADF APS SENSOR OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP 6901).................5-153
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS........................................6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................6-1 6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT....................................................................6-1 6.1.2 PAPER PATH....................................................................................6-2 6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ................................................................................6-3 6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE................................................................................6-4 6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM.............................................................................6-4 6.3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW...................................................................6-7 6.3.1 EXPOSURE ......................................................................................6-7 6.3.2 IMAGE CREATION ...........................................................................6-7 6.3.3 NO FUSING ......................................................................................6-7 6.4 SCANNING.................................................................................................6-8 6.4.1 OVERVIEW .......................................................................................6-8 6.4.2 LAMP STABILIZER FUSE.................................................................6-8 6.4.3 SCANNER DRIVE .............................................................................6-9
SM v B229
6.4.4 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION IN PLATEN MODE..........................6-10 6.5 IMAGE PROCESSING .............................................................................6-12 6.5.1 SBU (SENSOR BOARD UNIT) .......................................................6-12 6.5.2 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT) .................................................6-13 6.6 CARRIAGE UNIT .....................................................................................6-14 6.6.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................6-14 6.6.2 PRINT HEAD...................................................................................6-15 6.6.3 PRINT HEAD TANK ........................................................................6-17 6.6.4 INK EJECTION DEVICE .................................................................6-18 6.6.5 INK NEAR END ...............................................................................6-19 6.6.6 INK OUT..........................................................................................6-20 6.6.7 PAPER REGISTRATION AND SIZE DETECTION SENSOR .........6-21 6.7 INK SUPPLY UNIT ...................................................................................6-22 6.7.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................6-22 6.7.2 PRINT CARTRIDGES .....................................................................6-23 6.7.3 PRINT CARTRIDGE SET SENSOR................................................6-24 6.7.4 INK SUPPLY PUMP ........................................................................6-25 6.8 MAINTENANCE UNIT ..............................................................................6-26 6.8.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................6-26 6.8.2 MAINTENANCE UNIT .....................................................................6-26 6.8.3 INK COLLECTION TANK ................................................................6-30 6.8.4 INK COLLECTION TANK FULL DETECTION.................................6-31 6.8.5 FLUSHING UNIT .............................................................................6-32 6.9 CARRIAGE DRIVE...................................................................................6-34 6.9.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................6-34 6.9.2 CARRIAGE DRIVE..........................................................................6-34 6.9.3 ENVELOPE SELECTOR.................................................................6-35 6.10 PAPER FEED, TRANSPORT, OUTPUT ............................................6-36 6.10.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................6-36 6.10.2 LEADING EDGE AND PAGE WIDTH DETECTION ..................6-37 6.10.3 TRAILING EDGE DETECTION..................................................6-38 6.10.4 PAPER TRANSPORT DRIVE....................................................6-38 6.10.5 PAPER PATH ............................................................................6-39 6.10.6 TRANSPORT BELT...................................................................6-40 6.10.7 CHARGE LEAK DETECTION....................................................6-41 6.11 PAPER FEED .....................................................................................6-42 6.11.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................6-42 6.11.2 PAPER FEED DRIVE MECHANISM .........................................6-43 6.11.3 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM.....................6-44 6.11.4 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM .......................................................6-45 6.11.5 PAPER END DETECTION ........................................................6-45 6.11.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION ........................................................6-46 6.11.7 SIDE FENCES ...........................................................................6-48 6.11.8 PAPER REGISTRATION...........................................................6-48 6.12 PAPER EXIT.......................................................................................6-50 6.12.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................6-50
B229
vi
SM
6.12.2 6.12.3 6.12.4
PAPER EXIT PATH ...................................................................6-52 PAPER STOP FUNCTION ........................................................6-53 ENERGY SAVER MODES OF BASIC MACHINES ...................6-55
SPECIFICATIONS
7. SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................7-1
7.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS....................................................................7-1 7.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES.....................................................................7-5 7.2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION...........................................................7-5 7.2.2 PAPER FEED AND EXIT ..................................................................7-6 7.3 MACHINE CONFIGURATION ..................................................................7-10 7.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT .........................................................................7-12 7.4.1 ARDF...............................................................................................7-12 7.4.2 ADF .................................................................................................7-12 7.4.3 ONE-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT .....................................................7-13 7.4.4 TWO-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT ....................................................7-14 7.4.5 DUPLEX UNIT.................................................................................7-14
B267 FAX OPTION

SEE SECTION B267 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
B806 DUPLEX UNIT

B813 DOCUMENT FEEDER

B814 DOCUMENT FEEDER

B384 PAPER TRAY UNIT

B385 PAPER TRAY UNIT

SM
vii
B229
Read This First

Important Safety Notices
Prevention of Physical Injury
1. 2. 3. Make sure that the power cord is unplugged before you disassemble or assemble parts of the copier and peripherals. The wall outlet should be near the machine and easily accessible. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components. 4. If a job has started before the copier completes the warm-up or initializing period, keep hands away from the mechanical and electrical components.
Health Safety Conditions

Ink is non-toxic, but if you get it in your eyes by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal

1. 2. 1. 2. Dispose of ink cartridge and ink tank in accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.) Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service representative who has completed the training course on those models. The Controller board on this machine contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard batteries in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations. Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an explosion might occur.
Observance of Electrical Safety Standards
Symbols, Abbreviations, and Trademarks

Symbols and Abbreviations
This manual uses the symbols and abbreviations shown below. Symbol Meaning Refer to section number Clip ring Screw Connector Clamp SEF LEF Short Edge Feed Long Edge Feed
Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and /or other countries. PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated. PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation. PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.
B813 DOCUMENT FEEDER B814 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER
B267 FAX OPTION PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

B384 PAPER TRAY UNIT B385 PAPER TRAY UNIT
B806 DUPLEX UNIT
TAB POSITION 8
TAB POSITION 7
SPECIFICATIONS
TAB POSITION 6
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
TAB POSITION 5
SERVICE TABLES
TAB POSITION 4
TROUBLESHOOTING
TAB POSITION 3
TAB POSITION 2
TAB POSITION 1
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
Beforehand
1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1.1 BEFOREHAND
Before installing options, please do the following: 1. 2. 3. If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list. If there are printer jobs in the machine, print out all jobs in the printer buffer. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line, and the network cable.
SM
1-1
B229
Installation
Installation Requirements
1.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Before installing options, please do the following: 1. 2. 3. If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list. If there are printer jobs in the machine, print out all jobs in the printer buffer. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line, and the network cable.
1.2.1 ENVIRONMENT
For this machine, it may take two hours or more to get normal operation if there is condensation inside the contact glass at the scanner unit. In that case, leave the copier turned on the main power switch for two hours or more. Temperature and Humidity Chart
Temperature Range: Humidity Range:
10C to 32C (50F to 89.6F) 15% to 80% RH
Ambient Illumination: Less than 2,000 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight) Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more
B229
1-2
SM
Ambient Dust:
Less than 0.1 mg/m3 (2.7 x 10-6 oz/yd3)
Avoid areas exposed to sudden temperature changes: 1) Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner. 2) Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater. Do not place the machine where it is exposed to corrosive gases. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea level. Place the copier on a strong and level base. (Inclination on any side should be no more than 5 mm.) Do not place the machine where it is subjected to strong vibrations.
1.2.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back: Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
1.2.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

Place the copier near the power source, providing clearance as shown:
A (front): 440 mm (17.3") B (left): 520 mm (20.5") C (rear): 50 mm (2.0") D (right): 530 mm (20.9")
SM
1-3
B229
Installation
The recommended 440 mm front space is sufficient to allow the paper tray to be pulled out. Additional front space is required to allow operators to stand at the front of the machine.
1.2.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS

1. 2. 3. Make sure that the wall outlet is near the machine and easily accessible. After completing installation, make sure the plug fits firmly into the outlet. Avoid multi-wiring. Be sure to ground the machine.
Input Voltage: North and South America, Taiwan:110 120 V, 60 Hz, 3.6 A Europe, Asia: 220 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 2 A
B229
1-4
SM
Copier Installation
1.3 COPIER INSTALLATION

1.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS
Rated voltage for peripherals Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.
SM
1-5
B229
Installation
Copier Installation
1.3.2 ACCESSORY CHECK

Check that you have the accessories indicated below. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Description CD-ROM - Drivers/ Utilities EU Safety Sheet Emblem Emblem Cover Operation Instructions Paper Tray Decal Decal - Contact Glass Clamp (for ARDF) Decal - Operation Panel Hexagonal Wrench Handle Cover Mylar to cover handle slot Qty 1 1 1 1 1 set 1 1 1 1 1 3 1
The above accessories provided with a main unit differ depending on the destination.
1.3.3 BEFORE INSTALLING A COPIER

When moving or lifting a copier to install, please do the following: 1. Pull out and grasp the four handles at the each side (two handles each) of this copier to lift the copier. 2. Two persons must be required to lift the copier at least. The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one person, and may cause human injury or property damage.
B229
1-6
SM
Copier Installation
Using the Handles
1. 2. 3. 4.
Pull out the four handles [A] from the copier. Grasp the handles with two persons at least to lift the copier. After installation, insert the all handles fully inside the handle slots of the copier. Loosen the screw at the each handle slot first, and then secure the screw with the hexagonal wrench provided in the copier to prevent the handles from coming out from the handle slots of the copier.
Installation Procedure
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
(Color Photo) Remove filament tape and other padding.
SM
1-7
B229
Installation
Copier Installation
(Color Photo) 1. Slide the cartridge stopper [A] in the arrow direction, and then remove it for each color.
(Color Photo) 2. 3. Open the front door [B] and install ink cartridge (4 cartridges) [C]. Close the front door.
4. 5.
Attach the correct emblem [D] to the front cover if the emblem is not attached to the front cover. Install the optional ARDF, ADF, or platen cover.
B229
1-8
SM
Copier Installation
(Color Photo) 6. 7. 8. 9. Plug in the main power cord and turn on the main switch (Rear side) [E]. Activate the User Tools and select the menu "Language." Specify a language. This language is used for the operation panel. Pull the paper tray out. Then turn the paper size dial to select the appropriate size. Adjust the side guides and end guide to match the paper size.
10. Attach the appropriate paper tray decal [F] to each paper tray. Paper tray decal is also used for the optional paper tray. Keep the decal for use with the optional paper tray unit. 11. Insert the all handles fully inside the handle slots of the copier. 12. Loosen the screw at the each handle slot first, and then secure the screw with the hexagonal wrench provided in the copier to prevent the handles from coming out from the handle slots of the copier.
SM
1-9
B229
Installation
Copier Installation
(Color Photo) 13. Keep the hexagonal wrench inside the front cover [G] of the copier.
14. Install the three handle covers [H] and attach the mylar to the handle slot [I].
Ink Loading
Ink loading is performed after power on, and takes roughly 15 minutes. Do not open covers during ink loading Do not open any covers until the "Ready" message appears on the control panel. If you do, the ink loading procedure is interrupted, and the power must be switched off and then back on. If the main power switch is turned back on to complete an interrupted ink loading, additional ink might be used and a further 15 minutes might be required.
B229
1-10
SM
Copier Installation
1.3.4 INITIAL SETTING

The following settings require some knowledge about the print head adjustment. Refer to the "Adjust Print Head Position" in the section "Replace and Adjustment" and "Print Head" in the section "Detailed Section Descriptions" for details. Do the following initial settings after installing the copier. 1. Copy C4 chart in full color mode and B/W mode. 2. Do the "Nozzle Check Pattern". 3. Do the "Head Position Adjust". 4. Copy C4 chart in B/W text mode again. 5. Check the gray scale line on the printout copied in B/W mode. 6. If an image problem occurs, adjust the "Head Gap Adjustment" for the K1 and K2 with SP3-002-017 or -018 (see the "Head Gap Adjustment" for details as following this procedure). 7. Print out the test pattern "15" with SP4-417-001. 8. Check the printout. If white line or black line occurs in main scan direction, adjust the "SubScan:Send Adj" with SP1-922-001 (see the "Sub Scan: Send Adjustment" for details as following this procedure). 9. Do the "Registration" with UP or SP:
1.3.5 CHECKING THE NOZZLE PATTERN

1. Do the "Nozzle Check Pattern" ("User Tools" > "Maintenance"). 2. Check if the nozzle check pattern on a printed paper is satisfactory. 3. Do the "Clean Print-heads" if a printed nozzle check pattern is not satisfactory. For details, refer to the "Replacement and Adjustment" or "Operation Instructions" about details You must load A4/Letter papers in SEF direction.
Adjustment
1. Do the "Head Position Adjust", "Registration" and "Adjust Paper Feed" ("User Tools" > "Adjustment"). For details, refer to the "Replacement and Adjustment" or "Operation Instructions" about details.
SM
1-11
B229
Installation
Copier Installation
You must load A4/Letter papers in SEF direction.
1.3.6 HEAD GAP ADJUSTMENT

In the 600dpi B/W copy mode, an image problem, which is difficult to be adjusted with "Head Position Adjust" in the UP mode, may occur sometimes. This adjustment compensates for "Head Position Adjust" in the UP mode. 1. Copy C4 chart in B/W text mode.
2. Check the gray scale line [A] on the printout.
3. Adjust the gap between K1 and K2 print heads if a texture image appears. This machine has following formula for adjusting the print head alignment. I-A=H "A" (K1 forward head position) "I" (K2 forward head position) "H" (K2 reverse head position) "I - A" means the shift value between K1 print head and K2 print head in forward scanning. "H - K1 reverse head position (standard value for alignment: 0)" means the shift value between K1 print head and K2 print head in reverse scanning. "H - K1 reverse head position (0)" should be equal to "I -A" to prevent a texture image. In case of the image problem in the left side picture:
B229
1-12
SM
Copier Installation
1. Enter the SP mode. 2. Check the value of SP3-002-010 [1200:A], -017 [1200:H] and -018 [1200:I]. 3. Calculates the value "I" using above formula. For example, A = +5, H = +1 I = +6 4. Enter the result from the formula with SP3-002-018. 5. Exit the SP mode, and then copy C4 chart in B/W text printing mode again.
6. Try and see until the gray scale line becomes an ideal image [B]. 7. Exit the SP mode. In case of the image problem in the right side picture: 1. Enter the SP mode. 2. Check the value of SP3-002-010 [1200:A], -017 [1200:H] and -018 [1200:I]. 3. Calculates the value "H" using above formula. For example, A = +5, I = +4 H = -1 4. Enter the result from the formula with SP3-002-017. 5. Exit the SP mode, and then copy C4 chart in B/W text printing mode again. 6. Try and see until the gray scale line becomes an ideal image [B]. 7. Exit the SP mode. You must load A4/Letter papers in SEF direction.
1.3.7 SUB SCAN: SEND ADJUSTMENT

1. Enter the SP mode. 2. Print out the scanner test pattern "15" (Gray Pat 1) with SP4-417-001.
SM
1-13
B229
Installation
Copier Installation
3. If black line or white line in main scan direction occurs on the test pattern, adjust the paper feed timing with SP1-922-001 ("SubScan:Send Adj"). In case of black line problem: 1. Select SP1-922-001, and decrease the value one by one. The value of 1 indicates 1 line.
2. Try and see until the gray scale becomes an ideal image [A]. 3. Exit the SP mode. In case of white line problem: 1. Select SP1-922-001, and increase the value one by one. The value of 1 in the SP setting indicates 1 line. 2. Try and see until the gray scale becomes an ideal image [A]. 3. Exit the SP mode. You must load A4/Letter papers in SEF direction.
B229
1-14
SM
Copier Installation
1.3.8 MOVING THE MACHINE

Make sure that the carriage unit is properly engaged with the maintenance unit before turn off the power (see "Maintenance Unit" in the Replacement and Adjustment), otherwise the print head may be damaged while moving the machine. If too much waste ink is filled in the ink correction tank, remove the tank before moving the machine (see "Ink Collection Tank" in the Replacement and Adjustment). This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor. See TRANSPORTING MACHINE" if you will use some transport equipment. The machine stands make it difficult to move the copier with an optional paper tray or duplex unit installed. You can remove them as necessary. 1. 2. 3. Check that the machine is in standby status. Turn off the main power and unplug the power cable. Remove all trays from the optional paper feed unit or LCT.
4.
Loosen the adjuster [A] to release the machine from the place.
SM
1-15
B229
Installation
Copier Installation
5.
Remove the four brackets and covers [B]. (
x 8).
Do not tilt the machine more than 45 degrees. Reinstall the adjuster and brackets after you move the machine. The machine can fall over when you pull out a paper tray or when you work on the machine if you do not do this.
1.3.9 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE

Make sure that the carriage unit is properly engaged with the maintenance unit before turn off the power (see "Maintenance Unit" in the Replacement and Adjustment), otherwise the print head may be damaged while moving the machine. If too much waste ink is filled in the ink correction tank, remove the tank before moving the machine (see "Ink Collection Tank" in the Replacement and Adjustment). This section shows you how to manually transport the machine by a truck or plane. The machine stands make it difficult to move the copier with an optional paper tray or duplex unit installed. You can remove them as necessary. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Perform ink purge with SP2100-001. Turn off the main power and unplug the power cable. Remove the ink cartridges. Loosen the adjuster to release the machine from the place. (see "Moving Machine") Remove the four brackets and covers (see "Moving Machine"). Make sure there is no paper left in the paper trays. Then fix down the bottom plates with a sheet of paper and tape.
B229
1-16
SM
Copier Installation
7. 8. 9.
Remove the ink correction tank (see "Ink Collection Tank" in the Replacement and Adjustment) Do one of the following: Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors.
10. Shrink-wrap the machine tightly. Make sure you reinstall the ink correction tank. Make sure you check the nozzle pattern (User Tools) and each adjustment (see Initial setting) after you move the machine.
SM
1-17
B229
Installation
Platen Cover Installation
1.4 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION

Check that you have the accessories indicated below. No. 1 Description Stepped Screw Qty 2
1.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Install the platen cover [A] ( x 2).
B229
1-18
SM
ARDF Installation
1.5 ARDF INSTALLATION

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Description Scale Guide DF Exposure Glass Stud Screw Knob Screw Original Size Decal Screwdriver Tool Attention Decal Top Cover Stamp Cartridge Installation Procedure Qty 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1

Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
1.
Remove the strips of tape.
SM
1-19
B229
Installation
ARDF Installation
2. 3.
Remove the left scale [A] (2 screws). Place the DF exposure glass [B] on the glass holder. When installing the DF exposure glass, make sure that the white point [C] is on the lower front side of the glass, as shown.
4. 5.
Peel off the backing [D] of the double-sided tape attached to the rear side of the scale guide [E], then install it (2 screws removed in step 2). Install the two stud screws [F].
6. 7. 8.
Mount the DF on the copier, and then slide the DF to the front as shown. Secure the DF unit with two screws [G]. Connect the cable [H] to the copier.
B229
1-20
SM
ARDF Installation
9.
Attach the appropriate scale decal [I] as shown.
10. Attach the decal [J] to the top cover as shown, choosing the language most suitable for the machine installed.
11. Open the ARDF [K]. 12. Install the stamp cartridge [L] to the ARDF.
SM
1-21
B229
Installation
ARDF Installation
(Color Photo) 13. Attach the clamp [M] on the right side of copier and clamp the I/F cable as shown. The clamp [M] is provided with a main frame (B229). 14. Turn the main power switch on. Then check if the document feeder works properly. 15. Make a full size copy. Then check to make sure the side-to-side and leading edge registrations are correct. If they are not, adjust the side-to-side and leading edge registrations (refer to the service manual).
B229
1-22
SM
ADF Installation
1.6 ADF INSTALLATION

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Description Scale Guide DF Exposure Glass Stud Screw Fixing Screw Original Size Decal Screwdriver Tool Attention Decal Top Cover Stamp Cartridge Installation Procedure Qty 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1

Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
1.
Remove the strips of tape.
SM
1-23
B229
Installation
ADF Installation
2. 3.
Remove the left scale [A] (
x 2).
Place the DF exposure glass [B] on the glass holder. When installing the DF exposure glass, make sure that the white point [C] is on the lower front side of the glass, as shown
4. 5.
Peel off the backing [D] of the double-sided tape attached to the rear side of the scale guide [E], then install it ( Install the two stud screws [F]. x 2 removed in step 2).
6. 7. 8.
Mount the DF on the copier, then slide the DF to the front as shown. Secure the DF unit with two screws [G]. Connect the cable [H] to the copier.
B229
1-24
SM
ADF Installation
9.
Attach the appropriate scale decal [I] as shown.
10. Attach the decal [J] to the top cover as shown, choosing the language most suitable for the machine installed.
11. Open the ADF [K]. 12. Install the stamp cartridge [L] to the ADF.
SM
1-25
B229
Installation
ADF Installation
(Color Photo) 13. Attach the clamp [M] on the right side of copier and clamp the I/F cable as shown. The clamp [M] is provided with a main frame (B229). 14. Turn the main power switch on. Then check if the document feeder works properly. 15. Make a full size copy. Then check to make sure the side-to-side and leading edge registrations are correct. If they are not, adjust the side-to-side and leading edge registrations (refer to the service manual).
B229
1-26
SM
Rev.10/2006
One-Tray Paper Tray Unit
the installation instructions, warning not to exceed 45 in height. Below is a table showing which units can be configured for these machines, cabinets, duplex unit, and paper trays. Cabinet Compatibility with B229 and the FAC31 & FAC32 cabinets:
Config 1 Cabinet Large Cabinet (FAC32) X Config 2 Small Cabinet (FAC31) X Config 3 Small Cabinet (FAC31) X X Config 4 Small Cabinet (FAC31) X X X X X X X Config 5 Small Cabinet (FAC31) X Config 6 Config 7 Small Small Cabinet Cabinet (FAC31) (FAC31) X X
Main Frame Duplex Unit 1x500 Paper Tray 1x500 Paper Tray 2x500 Paper Tray
1.7 ONE-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT

No. 1 2 3 Description Screw M4 x 10 Stepped Screw Bracket Qty 2 2 2

Before installing this option, do the following: If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list. If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printer buffer. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line, and the network cable.
SM
1-27
B229
Installation
IMPORTANT: A warning note has been issued and will include information in
Rev.10/2006
1.
Remove the strips of tape. After removing the tape that secures the peripheral components and cardboard to the paper tray, make sure that there is no tape and/or tape reside remaining on the tray.
2.
Remove the cover [A] (
x 4).
(Color Photo) 3. Remove the bracket [C] ( x 2).
B229
1-28
SM
4.
Set the copier [D] on the paper tray unit [E]. When installing the copier, be careful not to pinch the connecting harness. For model B229 "with the duplex unit" (B806)
Set the duplex unit on the paper tray unit first, and then set the copier on the duplex unit mounted on the paper tray unit. Remove the rear cover of the duplex unit ( Remove the lower cover of the duplex unit ( Re-install the rear cover of the duplex unit ( Secure the duplex unit to the paper tray unit. For details, refer to the DUPLEX UNIT (B806) INSTALLATION x 2). x 1). x 2). x 2).
Line the harness [F] in the duplex unit as shown (
SM
1-29
B229
Installation
PROCEDURE. For the model of B229 "without the duplex unit" (B806):
(Color Photo) Remove the rear cover of the paper tray unit ( Re-install the rear cover of the paper tray unit ( x 3). x 2).
Line the harness [G] of the paper tray, and loop it between the two clamps [H].
5.
Remove the 1st tray [I].
B229
1-30
SM
6. 7.
Install the two stepped screws [J]. Re-install the 1st tray.
8.
Install the two brackets [K] ( x 1 each).
(Color Photo) 9. Connect the harness [L] from the paper tray unit to the Copier. x 2).
10. Re-install the bracket removed in step 3 (
SM
1-31
B229
Installation
11. Re-install the rear cover removed in step2 (
x 4).
12. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the copier. 13. Load paper and make full size copies. If the side and leading edge registrations are not correct, adjust them.
1.7.3 OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY GRIP HANDLE OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT
The following procedure is for the 1-tray or 2-tray optional paper feed unit only.
1.
Remove the paper tray units [A] from the machine.
(Color Photo) 2. Lower the paper tray grip handle [B] into the paper tray slot as shown with the arrow in the above illustration.
B229
1-32
SM
(Color Photo) 3. 4. Attach the grip handle to the paper tray (2 x Put the paper tray back into the machine. ) as shown above.
SM
1-33
B229
Installation
Two-Tray Paper Tray unit Installation
1.8 TWO-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION

No. 1 2 3 4 5 Description Screw M4 x 10 Bracket with long support Bracket Adjuster Cover Qty 10 4 2 1 4

Before installing this option, do the following: 1. If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list. 2. If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printer buffer. 3. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line, and the network cable.
1.
Remove the strips of tape. After removing the tape that secures the peripheral components and cardboard to the paper tray, make sure that there is no tape and/or tape reside remaining on the tray.
B229
1-34
SM
2.
Attach the adjuster [A] onto the base plate, as shown. When a table is installed, this procedure is unnecessary.
3.
Remove the rear cover [B] (
x 4).
(Color Photo) 4. Remove the lower bracket [C] ( x 2).
SM
1-35
B229
Installation
5.
Set the copier [D] on the paper tray unit [E]. When installing the copier, be careful not to pinch the connecting harness. For installing "without the duplex unit" (B806) Pull out the I/F harness from the paper tray unit. If it is difficult to pull out the I/F harness, remove the rear cover of the paper tray unit ( tray unit. For installing with the duplex unit" (B806) x 3), and then pull out the I/F harness from the paper
1.
Set the duplex unit on the paper tray unit first, and then set the copier on the duplex unit mounted on the paper tray unit.
B229
1-36
SM
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Remove the rear cover of the duplex unit (
x 2). x 1). x 2). x 2).
Remove the lower bracket in the duplex unit ( Re-install the rear cover of the duplex unit ( Secure the duplex unit to the paper tray unit.
Line the harness [1] in the duplex unit as shown (
For details, refer to the DUPLEX UNIT (B806) INSTALLATION.
6. 7. 8.
Remove the 1st tray [F]. Install the two screws [G]. Re-install the paper tray 1.
9.
Install the two brackets [H]. (
x 1 each).
(Color Photo)
SM
1-37
B229
Installation
10. Connect the harness [I] from the paper tray unit to the Copier. 11. Re-install the bracket removed in step3 ( x 2). 12. Re-install the rear cover removed in step3 ( x 4).
13. Install the four brackets with long supports [J] and four covers [K] ( These long supports prevent the unit from tipping over.
x 2 each).
14. Rotate the adjuster [L] to fix the machine in place. 15. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the copier. 16. Load paper and make full size copies from each tray. If the side and leading edge registrations are not correct, adjust them. (Refer to the Service Manual.)
B229
1-38
SM
1.8.3 OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY GRIP HANDLE OPTIONAL PAPER TRAY UNIT
This procedure is same as the one for the One-Tray Paper Tray Unit. See "Optional Paper Tray Grip Handle Optional Paper Tray Unit" in the installation procedure for One-Tray Paper Tray Unit.
SM
1-39
B229
Installation
Duplex Unit Installtion
1.9 DUPLEX UNIT INSTALLTION

No. 1 2 3 4 Description Screw M4 x 10 Stepped Screw Bracket Installation Procedure Qty 3 1 2 1

Before installing this option, do the following: 1. If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list. 2. If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printer buffer. 3. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line, and the network cable.
1.
Unpack the duplex unit and remove the tapes.
There are two installation procedures, the duplex unit only/ the duplex unit and optional paper tray unit. Follow the installation procedure that you need.
B229
1-40
SM
For Installing the duplex unit only
1.
Set the copier on the duplex unit. When installing the duplex unit, be careful not to pinch the connecting harness.
2. 3.
Remove the rear cover [A] of the copier ( Remove the standard tray of the copier.
x 4).
SM
1-41
B229
Installation
4. 5.
Secure the duplex unit to the copier with two brackets [B] and two knob screws [C] ( x 2). Re-install the standard tray of the copier.
6. 7.
Remove the lower bracket [D] of the copier (
x 2).
Set and connect the I/F harness [E] of duplex unit with clamps [F] as shown. The above left side drawing shows the state in which the controller box is already removed. Removing the controller box [G] ( cover [H]) makes you easy to access the connectors. x 7: one for the slot
B229
1-42
SM
8.
Re-install the lower bracket [I] to the copier (
(Color Photo) x 2).
When re-installing the lower bracket, slide the bracket to the left and fix it as shown. 9. Skip to the "For Installing the Duplex Unit only/ Installing the Duplex Unit and Paper Tray Unit".
For Installing the Duplex Unit and Paper Tray Unit (B384 or B385)
(Color Photo) 1. Set the duplex unit [A] on the paper tray unit [B] grabbing the stays at the top of the duplex unit as shown.
SM
1-43
B229
Installation
2.
Remove the duplex unit rear cover [C] ( screw).
(Color Photo) x 2, [D]: M3 x 6 screw, [E]: stepped
(Color Photo) 3. Remove the lower bracket [F] of the duplex unit ( x 1).
4.
Set the copier on the duplex unit. When installing the duplex unit, be careful not to pinch the connecting harness.
B229
1-44
SM
5. 6.
Remove the rear cover [G] of the copier ( Remove the standard tray of the copier.
x 4).
7.
Line the I/F harnesses [H] of the optional paper tray unit in the duplex unit as shown ( x 2). For details, refer to the installation procedure for the optional paper tray unit (B384 or B385).
8.
Re-install the duplex unit rear cover to the duplex unit ( screw is a stepped screw.).
x 2, the rear left side
SM
1-45
B229
Installation
(Color Photo) 9. Pull the duplex tray cassette halfway.
10. Remove the two stopper brackets [I] of the duplex unit ( x 1 each). 11. Remove the duplex tray cassette
12. Secure the optional paper tray unit to the duplex unit with two brackets and two knob screws same as step 13's manner ( [K] ( x 2) x 1 each). x 2). 13. Secure the duplex unit to the copier with two brackets [J] and two knob screws 14. Re-install the duplex tray cassette halfway. 15. Re-install the two stopper brackets to the duplex unit ( 16. Close the duplex tray cassette. 17. Reinstall the standard tray of the copier.
B229
1-46
SM
18. Remove the lower bracket [L] of the copier (
x 2).
19. Set and connect the I/F harness [M] of duplex unit with clamps [N] as shown. The above left side drawing shows the state in which the controller box is already removed. Removing the controller box [O] ( easy to access the connectors. 20. Set and connect the I/F harness of the paper tray unit to the copier. For details, refer to the PAPER TRAY UNIT (B384 or B385) INSTALLATION. x 7) makes you
(Color Photo) 21. Re-install the lower bracket [P] to the copier (s x 2). When re-installing the lower bracket, slide the bracket to the left and fix it as shown. 22. Continue to the "For installing the duplex unit only/ installing the duplex unit and paper tray unit".
SM
1-47
B229
Installation
For Installing the Duplex Unit Only/ Installing the Duplex Unit and Paper Tray Unit
1.
Remove the top left front cover [A] ( interface cover [C] ( x 2).
x 1), the left front cover [B] (
x 1) and the
2. 3. 4.
Remove the left cover [D] ( x 2). Remove the two brackets [E] from the left cover ( Remove the handle cover [F]. x 1 each).
B229
1-48
SM
(Color Photo) 5. Re-install the left cover and open it as shown.
(Color Photo) 6. Set and connect the harness of the inverter unit [G] as shown ( x 3).
(Color Photo) 7. Install the inverter unit ( x 2, [H]).
SM
1-49
B229
Installation
8. 9.
Re-install the left front cover ( cover ( x 2). x 4) Re-install the rear cover (
x 1), top left front cover (
x 1) and interface
10. Plug in and turn on the main power switch, and then check if the duplex unit works properly. If the side and leading edge registrations are not correct, adjust them. (Refer to the Service Manual.)
B229
1-50
SM
Heater Kit Installation
1.10 HEATER KIT INSTALLATION

1.10.1 COMPONENT CHECK
No. 1 Description Relay Harness for Main Frame Relay Harness for Optional Paper Tray Unit Tray Heater for Main Frame Tray Heater for Optional Paper Tray Unit Anti-condensation Heater Clamp Screw Qty 1 1 1 13 3
2 3 4 5
SM
1-51
B229
Installation

For Installing the Anti-Condensation Heater and Tray Heater
1.
Remove the rear cover [A] (
x 4) and the interface cover [B] (
x 2).
2. 3.
Pull out the paper tray 1. Install the tray heater [C] in the top of the paper tray 1 opening ( x 1).
B229
1-52
SM
4. 5.
Open the ADF/ARDF or platen cover if it has been installed. Remove the rear [D] scale ( x 3) and left scale [E] with exposure glass ( x 2).
6. 7. 8.
Move the scanner carriage to the right side by rotating the wheel [F] counterclockwise. Install the anti-condensation [G] in the scanner unit ( x 1). Pass the connector [H] of the anti-condensation heater through the cutout.
SM
1-53
B229
Installation
9.
Remove the bracket [I] (
x 1) and shutter bracket [J] (
x 1).
When reinstalling this bracket, make sure that the shutter bracket pushes the switch [K] of the shutter.
10. Remove the Ink collection tank [L] (
x 1).
B229
1-54
SM
11. Remove the controller box [M] (
x 5,
x 1) and PSU [N] (
x 1,
x All).
12. Attach the five small clamps [O], three large clamps [P] and one black clamp [Q] to the each position as shown.
SM
1-55
B229
Installation
13. Line the PSU harness [R] and anti-condensation heater harness [S], and then connect them ( ( x 1). x 5). 14. Line the PSU harness [R], and then connect it to the tray heater harness [T]
15. Connect the PSU harness [U] to the connector (CN220) on the PSU ( 16. Reinstall the PSU [V] ( 17. Reassemble the copier. 18. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. 19. Check the machine operation. x 1).
x 1).
B229
1-56
SM
1.10.3 OPTIONAL TRAY HEATER

Optional Tray Heater Installation For One-tray Paper Tray Unit
1. 2. 3.
Remove the rear cover of the copier (
x 4). x 5, bracket x 2). x 4,
Remove the rear cover of the optional paper tray unit [A] ( bracket x 2).
Remove the rear cover [B] of the duplex unit if it has been installed (
4. 5.
Pull out the paper tray 2. Install the tray heater [C] ( x 1).
SM
1-57
B229
Installation
6. 7. 8.
Attach the three clamps [D] to the optional paper tray unit. Line the tray heater harness [E] as shown ( x 1). x 3). Line the relay harness [F] and connect it to the tray heater harness ( If the duplex unit has been installed, do step 9. If not, skip the step 9.
9.
Line the relay harness [G] as shown (
x 2).
10. Remove the bracket [H] (
x 2).
B229
1-58
SM
11. Line the relay harness [I] and connect it to the PSU harness as shown ( 12. Reassemble the copier. 13. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. 14. Check the machine operation.
x 1).
For Two-tray Paper Tray Unit
1. 2. 3.
Remove the rear cover of the copier (
x 4). x 5, bracket x 2).
Remove the rear cover of the optional paper tray unit [A] (
Remove the rear cover [B] of the duplex unit if it has been installed.
4. 5.
Pull out the paper tray 2 and tray 3. Install the tray heater [C] ( x 1).
SM
1-59
B229
Installation
6. 7. 8.
Attach the two clamps [D] to the optional paper tray unit. Line the tray heater harness [E] as shown ( x 1). Line the relay harness [F] and connect it to the tray heater harness ( If the duplex unit has been installed, do step 9. If not, skip the step 9. x 3).
9.
Line the relay harness [G] as shown ( x 2).
B229
1-60
SM
10. Remove the bracket [H] ( 12. Reassemble the copier.
x 2). x 1).
11. Line the relay harness [I] and connect it to the PSU harness as shown ( 13. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. 14. Check the machine operation.
SM
1-61
B229
Installation
Function Upgrade Option Installation
1.11 FUNCTION UPGRADE OPTION INSTALLATION

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description HDD Unit RAM DIMM Knob Screw Screw M3 x 6 Harness I/F Cable Ferrite Core Nylon Clamp Qty 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 3

Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. 2.
Rear cover [A] (
x 4) x 2)
Interface cover [B] (
B229
1-62
SM
3. 4.
FCU bracket or FCU [C] ( Controller box cover [D] (
x 3) x 13)
(Color Photo) 5. Install the DIMM RAM [E] to the optional RAM slot [F] on the controller board.
SM
1-63
B229
Installation
(Color Photo) 6. 7. Attach the I/F harness [G] and cable [H] ( Reinstall the controller box cover ( x 13). x 2)
(Color Photo) 8. 9. Line the harness [I], and then attach the ferrite core [J] ( Line the I/F harness [K] ( x 1) with the nylon clamp [L]. x 2, ferrite core x 1).
B229
1-64
SM
Rev. 11/2006
(Color Photo) 10. Install the HDD unit [M] as shown ( x 4). x 2).
11. Attach the two harnesses to the HDD unit ( 13. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. the HDD.
12. Reassemble the FCU bracket or FCU, interface cover and rear cover.
14. Run SP5-846-40 to move the address book from the Printer/Scanner SD Card to 15. Run SP5-990-005 (Self-Diagnosis) and verify HDD existence. Note: Please note that the following may occur if, the B229 has already been installed or
the B229 has not been installed yet, but the main power was already turned ON at least once: The machine may create the Address Book and Destination List in the SD card because it did not detect the HDD. To use some features, the Address Book and Destination List must be moved to the HDD. If it is not, the following errors can occur: - ScanRouter: Specified destination is not programmed error occurs, because the Destination List cannot be found. - Web Image Monitor, operation panel: LDAP Server is not displayed. - Only basic and user admin are available. 16. Check the HDD operation.
SM
1-65
B229
Installation
Copy Data Security Unit Installation
1.12 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT INSTALLATION

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description Copy data security board Flat cable (long) Screw Harness (long) Harness (short): Not used in this model. Flat cable (short): Not used in this model. Bracket: Not used in this model. Clamp: Not used in this model. Qty 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1
B229
1-66
SM
Copy Data Security Unit Installation
1.
x 4).
(Color Photo) 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Attach the copy data security unit [B] on the controller box cover ( CN150 on the BCU. Reinstall the rear cover ( x 4). Plug in and turns on the main power switch. Go into the User Tools mode, and select System Settings > Administrator Tools > Copy Data Security Option > On. Exit the User Tools. x 4).
Connect the harness [C] to the CN142 on the BCU and I/F flat cable [D] to the
SM
1-67
B229
Installation
Optional Counter Interface Unit
1.13 OPTIONAL COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT

1.
x 4).
2. 3. 4. 5.
Remove the Scanner stay right cover [B] ( Scanner stay left cover [C] ( x 1)
x 1)
Punch out the small hole [D] using a screwdriver. Remove the cap [E] with nippers.
B229
1-68
SM
6. 7. 8.
Hold the key counter plate nuts [F] on the inside of the key counter bracket [G] and insert the key counter holder [H]. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket ( Install the key counter cover [I] ( x 2). x 2).
(Color Photo) 9. Line the relay harness [J] and connect it to the CN124 on the BCU ( x 2).
The relay harness is a little bit long for this machine. Loop it between two clamps.
SM
1-69
B229
Installation
10. Pass the relay harness through the opening and reinstall the scanner stay right cover ( x 1) and scanner stay left cover ( x 1). 11. Install the stepped screw [L]. 12. Connect the key counter harness [M] to the relay harness. 13. Pass the joined connectors through the opening of the key counter holder assembly [N], and put the connectors inside the assembly. 14. Hook the key counter holder assembly onto the stepped screw [L]. Check that the cable is not caught between the left cover and the key counter holder assembly. 15. Secure the key counter holder assembly with the screw [O]. 16. Reassemble the machine. 17. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. 18. Check the operation.
B229
1-70
SM
Controller Options
1.14 CONTROLLER OPTIONS

1.14.1 OVERVIEW
This machine has I/F card slots and SD card slots for optional I/F connections and applications.
I/F Card Slot Slot [A] is used for one of the optional I/F connections: (IEEE1394, IEEE1284, IEEE802.11 (Wireless LAN) or Bluetooth). Slot [B] is used for the USB 2.0 Host. SD Card Slot Slot [1] is used for standard printer/scanner application only. Slot [2] is used for one of the optional applications such as PostScript3, data overwrite security or PictBridge. Slot [3] is used for the Java VM Option or service use.
SM
1-71
B229
Installation
Controller Options
1.14.2 POSTSCRIPT3 INSTALLATION

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Remove the SD card slot cover (
x 1). x 1).
Install the PostScript3 SD card into the slot 2. Reinstall the SD card slot cover [A] ( Turn on the main power switch. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/ Counter > Printer Features > List/ Test Print), and then check that this device is detected. Attach the "Adobe PostScript3" decal to the front cover of the machine.
1.14.3 PICTBRIDGE INSTALLTION

When you use the PictBride, you must install the USB Host (B825).
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] ( Reinstall the SD card slot cover. Turn on the main power switch. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/ Counter > Printer Features > List/ Test Print), and then check that this device is detected. x 1). Install the PictBridge SD card into the slot 2.
B229
1-72
SM
Controller Options
1.14.4 JAVA VM OPTION INSTALLATION

SD card slot 3 is basically used only for service maintenance. Do not leave an SD card in slot 3 after installing an application.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Remove the slot cover [A] from SD card slot 3 ( into slot 3 until you hear a click. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. Push the "User Tools" key. Push the "Login/ Logout" key.
x 1).
Turn the SD-card [B] label face to the rear of the machine. Then push it slowly
Login with the administrator user name and password. Touch "Extended Feature Settings" on the LCD. Touch "Install" on the LCD. Touch "SD Card slot 3".
10. Touch the "Java TM Platform" line. 11. Touch the "SD card ON". 12. Touch the "Setting". 13. Press one of the hard keys, which you want to use for the Java option unit. 14. Touch the "Execute". 15. Touch the "OK" after confirming that the installation is correctly done. 16. Touch "Exit" twice to go back to the copy screen. 17. Turn off the main power switch. 18. Remove the SD card from slot 3. 19. Attach the slot cover [A] (
SM
x 1).
1-73 B229
Installation
Controller Options
1.14.5 WIRELESS LAN (IEEE 802.11B) INSTALLATION

Component Check
No. 1 2 3 4 5 Description Wireless LAN Adapter Wireless LAN Card LAN Card Cover Caution Sheet Label Qty 1 1 1 1 1
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the interface cover A ( Install the Wireless adaptor ( x 2). x 2).
Install the Wireless LAN card to the wireless adaptor. Attach the antenna cap to the wireless LAN card. Turn on the main power switch. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/ Counter > Printer Features > List/ Test Print), and then check that this device is detected.
1.14.6 IEEE 1284 INSTALLATION

Component Check
No. 1 2 3 Description IEEE1284 Interface Assy UL Sheet Caution Sheet Qty 1 1 1
1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the interface cover B ( Turn on the main power switch. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/ Counter > Printer Features > List/ Test Print), and then check that this device is detected. x 2). x 2). Install the IEEE 1284 board to the interface slot B (
B229
1-74
SM
Controller Options
1.14.7 IEEE 1394 INSTALLATION

Component Check
No. 1 2 3 4 5 Description IEEE1394 Interface Assy UL/FCC Sheet Caution Sheet I/F Cable 4 pin I/F Cable 6 pin Qty 1 1 1 1 1
1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the interface cover A ( x 2). Install the IEEE 1394 board to the interface slot A ( Turn on the main power switch. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/ Counter > Printer Features > List/ Test Print), and then check that this device is detected. x 2).
1.14.8 BLUETOOTH INSTALLATION

Component Check
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description Bluetooth Interface Assy Bluetooth Card Bluetooth Card Adapter Bluetooth Card Cover UL/FCC Sheet Caution Sheet Qty 1 1 1 1 1
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the interface cover A ( x 2). x 2). Install the Wireless adaptor to the interface slot A ( Install the Bluetooth card to the wireless adaptor. Attach the antenna cap to the Bluetooth card. Turn on the main power switch. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/ Counter > Printer Features > List/ Test Print), and then check that this device is detected.
SM
1-75
B229
Installation
Controller Options
1.14.9 USB HOST INSTALLATION

Component Check
No. 1 2 3 4 5 Description USB Host Interface Assy USB Cable Ferrite Core Clamp UL Sheet Qty 1 1 1 1
1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the interface cover B ( Turn on the main power switch. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/ Counter > Printer Features > List/ Test Print), and then check that this device is detected. x 2). x 2). Install the USB host board to the interface slot B (
1.14.10 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT TYPE D (B735)

Before You Begin the Procedure
1. Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values: Supervisor login password Administrator login name Administrator login password If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be changed before you do the installation procedure. 2. Make sure that Admin. Authentication is ON. [System Settings] [Administrator Tools] [Administrator Authentication Management] - [Admin. Authentication] If this setting is OFF, tell the customer this setting must be ON before you do the installation procedure. 3. Make sure that Administrator Tools is enabled (selected). [System Settings] [Administrator Tools] [Administrator Authentication Management] - [Available Settings]
B229
1-76
SM
Controller Options
If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be enabled (selected) before you do the installation procedure.
ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of these accessories. No. 1 2 3 Description SD Card Operating Instructions (CD-ROM) Caution Sheet Qty 1 1 1
Seal Check and Removal
You must check the box seals to make sure that they were not removed after the items were sealed in the box at the factory before you do the installation. 1. Check the box seals [A] on each corner of the box. Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner. The surfaces of the tapes must be blank. If you see VOID on the tapes, do not install the components in the box. 2. 3. If the surfaces of the tapes do not show VOID, remove them from the corners of the box. You can see the VOID marks [B] when you remove each seal. In this condition, they cannot be attached to the box again.
SM
1-77
B229
Installation
Controller Options
The machine must always be turned off and its power cord disconnected before you do this procedure. You must install the data overwrite protection unit in SD Card slot 2. However, the PostScript option for this machine is also installed in SD Card slot 2. You must do the SD Card Appli move procedure first if you have the PostScript option installed and you want to install the Data Overwrite Security unit. Move the Data Overwriting Security application (slot 3) to the SD Card that contains the Printer/ Scanner application (slot 1). (* 5.7).
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Turn off the main power switch if the machine is turned on. Disconnect the network cable if the NIB is installed. Turn on the main power switch. Turn off the operation switch and main power switch. Remove the slot cover [A] of SD card slot 2 ( into slot 2 until you hear a click. Connect the network cable if the NIB option is installed. Turn on the main power switch. Go into the SP mode and push EXECUTE with SP5-878. switch. x 1). Turn the SD-card [B] label face to the rear of the machine. Then push it slowly
10. Exit the SP mode and turn off the operation switch. Then turn off the main power 11. Turn on the machine power.
B229
1-78
SM
Controller Options
12. Do SP5990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report). 13. Make sure the ROM number and firmware version in area [a] of the diagnostic report are the same as those in area [b]. [a]: ROM Number/Firmware Version [b]: Loading Program GW2a_zoffy ROM No. / Firmware Version [b] HDD Format Option: B7355060 / 0.03 HDD Format Option
Diagnostic Report: Data Overwrite Security Unit
Loading Program [a] GW2a_zoffy: B7355060 / 0.03
The ROM number and firmware version number change when the firmware is upgraded. However, the important thing is to make sure the numbers in [a] are the same as the numbers in [b]. If the ROM numbers are not the same, or the version numbers are not the same, this means the unit was not installed correctly. If this happens: Make sure the unit type (Type D). If they do not match: 4. Replace the NV-RAM 5. Replace the Data Overwrite Security Unit (SD card) with the correct type 6. Do the installation procedure in this procedure again, from Step 1. 14. Go into the User Tools mode, and select System Settings> Administrator Tools> Auto Erase Memory Setting> On. 15. Exit the User Tools mode.
SM
1-79
B229
Installation
Controller Options
1.14.11 REMOTE COMMUNICATION GATE INSTALLATION

Component Check
No. 1 2 3 Description Remote Comm. Gate Interface Assy Cover Screw Qty 1 3
(Color Photo) 1. 2. 3. Remove one cover bracket [A] from the application cover. ( Install the modem board into the card slot for the device ( SP5-816-150 (To Select the country) SP5-816-154 (To set out side connection telephone number) SP5-816-161 (To set telephone number) 4. Follow the Installation flow as shown below with SP mode. x 2) x 2).
Confirm the following SP settings before starting installation flow
B229
1-80
SM
Controller Options
SM
1-81
B229
Installation
Key Counter I/F Unit Type A
1.15 KEY COUNTER I/F UNIT TYPE A

1. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 4).
2.
Attach the key counter interface board over the IO board, as shown in the picture below.
B229
1-82
SM
3.
Connect one end of the harness to the key counter interface board.
4.
Connect the other end of the harness to CN117 on the BCU.
SM
1-83
B229
Installation
5.
Route and clamp the harness as shown.
B229
1-84
SM
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
PM Tables
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1 PM TABLES
After preventive maintenance work, reset the PM counter corresponding with each PM part. PM intervals (75k and 150k) indicate the number of prints. Keys: Optics 75k Exposure glass Engine 75k Print heads Paper transport belt Charge roller Paper-dust Mylar Discharge brush Sub scan encoder Paper Feed 75k Paper feed roller (each tray) Friction pad (each tray) Bottom-plate pad (each tray) Paper feed roller (bypass tray) Friction pad (bypass tray) Bottom-plate pad (by-pass tray) Registration roller Relay rollers Paper feed guides Paper-dust Mylar C C C C C C C C C C 150k R R AN C C C C C C C C C C NOTE Clean with water or alcohol. Clean with water or alcohol. Clean with water or alcohol. Clean with water or alcohol. Clean with water or alcohol. Clean with water or alcohol. Clean with water or alcohol. Clean with water or alcohol. Clean with water or alcohol. Clean with water or alcohol. C C R R C C R C C 150k AN C C Dry cloth NOTE C 150k C AN C NOTE Blower brush or Dry cloth AN: As necessary, C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect
Preventive Maintenance
SM
2-1
B229
PM Tables
Paper Exit 75k Exit transport rollers Maintenance 75k Maintenance unit First cap Wiper Ink collection bottle ADF/ARDF 80k Feed belt Separation roller Pick-up roller Stamp White plate DF exposure glass Platen cover Paper Tray Unit 60k Paper feed rollers Bottom-plate pads Paper-feed guides Friction pads Relay clutch (B384 only) Feed clutches (B384 only) Relay roller (B384 only) Duplex Unit 60k All rollers 120k AN C Dry cloth NOTE C C R I I C C Dry cloth 120k R AN C C C C NOTE Dry or damp cloth Dry cloth Clean with water or alcohol. Dry or damp cloth R R R AN C C C R C C C NOTE Clean with water or alcohol. Clean with water or alcohol. Clean with water or alcohol. Replace when necessary. Clean with water or alcohol. Clean with water or alcohol. Clean with water or alcohol. C C R 150k R C C Remove the ink or Dry cloth. Remove the ink or Dry cloth. AN NOTE C 150k AN NOTE
B229
2-2
SM
PM Counter
2.2 PM COUNTER
2.2.1 HOW TO RESET THE PM COUNTERS
After preventive maintenance work, reset the PM counters (SP7-804-002 ~ 009) as follows.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Activate the SP mode (see section 5.1). Select SP 7-804 ("PM Count. Reset"). Select the PM counter of what you have replaced. Press the OK key [A]. The message "EXECUTE" is displayed.
5.
Press the button [B] below the message "EXECUTE." The messages "EXECUTE?" followed by "CANCEL" and "EXECUTE" are displayed.
6. 7.
Wait until the message "Completed" is displayed. Quit the SP mode.
SM
2-3
B229
PM Counter
2.2.2 PM COUNTER RESET LIST

PM counter reset must be required after replacing the PM parts. The following list shows SP numbers that need to be reset. PM Parts GJ engine SP Number SP7959-001 Remark This SP clears all SP numbers related with GJ engine. For details, refer to "SP Mode Tables in Service Program Mode". This SP clears the counter of SP7223-001 to -005 (cleaning total), Maintenance unit SP7804-002 SP7224-001 to -005 (refreshing total) SP7225-001 to -005 (air releasing and ink filling total). SP 7803-002 (total pages) Charge roller Transport belt unit SP7804-003 SP7804-004 This SP clears the counter of SP7803-003 (page total). This SP clears the counter of SP7803-004 (page total). This SP clears the counter of Ink collection tank SP7804-005 SP7221-001 (total amount), SP7803-005 (total amount) and SP7941-001 (total amount). Flushing gate unit SP2505-001 This SP clears the counter of SP7221-002 (page total).
B229
2-4
SM
Cleaning Procedures
2.3 CLEANING PROCEDURES

2.3.1 MAINTENANCE UNIT
(Color Photos)
Suction Cap
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the maintenance unit. ( Replacement and Adjustment) Turn the adjuster [A] of the maintenance unit clockwise to raise the suction cap. Wrap the tip of screwdriver or similar tool [B] with a damp cloth. Use the wrapped tip of the screwdriver to clean these: Inside the cap Around the cap to remove the hardened ink Always wrap the tip of the tool with a damp cloth. This will not let the suction cup get scratched. A scratched suction cap could cause poor print jobs. "Maintenance Unit" in the section of
Air Vent
1.
Use a screwdriver or similar tool to remove hardened ink from inside the air vent [A].
2-5 B229
SM
Cleaning Procedures
2.
Use a dry cloth to remove ink splatter from inside the air vent.
Wiper
1. 2. 3.
Turn the adjuster clockwise to raise the caps [A] and hold it open. ("Suction Cap" in this Section) Turn the adjuster again until the wiper [B] is open. Use a dry cloth to remove ink splatter from the wiper and the area around it.
2.3.2 PRINT HEADS

Nozzle Cover, Nozzle Plate
Before doing this procedure: Provide a delicate material cloth like one used for optical things. Put on gloves to avoid any injury due to a metal edge. Make sure of heads position (see the below picture) and clean the only defective print head. Do not clean other print heads.
(Color Photos)
B229
2-6
SM
Cleaning Procedures
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Remove the maintenance unit. ( "Maintenance Unit" in the section of Replacement and Adjustment) Push the carriage to the home position (completely to the rear). Insert your hand into the opening [A] on the rear side of the copier. Use a damp cloth to clean the nozzle cover [B] of the print heads. Use part of the cloth that is clean to wipe the print head nozzle plate on the face of the print head [C]. Important: Gently wipe the plate once or twice in the same direction (left or right). This will not let the plate get damaged. Never clean the plate with strong right-and-left motion. A damaged plate could cause poor print jobs.
After Cleaning the Maintenance Unit
(Color Photo) Do these before you reinstall the maintenance unit: 1. Turn the adjuster [A] clockwise. position. 2. Lower the suction cap and the wiper blade. Make sure they are secure in the down
SM
2-7
B229
Cleaning Procedures
3. Make sure the triangle marks [B] on the sides of the maintenance unit match. Do this if the tips of the white and black triangle marks are not aligned: Insert the tip of a flat head screwdriver into the adjuster. Then slowly rotate it clockwise until the marks are aligned.
After you reassemble the copier:

1. 2. 3. 4. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine. Clean all the print heads with SP2010-001 or "Clean Print-heads" < "Maintenance" < "User Tools". Print a Nozzle Check Pattern with SP3109-003 or "Nozzle Check Pattern" < "Maintenance" < "User Tools" to confirm that the printer is operates correctly. Check the test pattern. Do the procedure again if you see any bare patches in the pattern. Do this until the pattern is perfect. For more, see section "Troubleshooting".
2.3.3 TRANSPORT BELT
(Color Photo) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the front cover. (see "Front Cover" in the Replacement Adjustment) Open the inner right cover (Front door > Inner left cover > Inner right cover). Use a damp cloth to wipe clean the surface of the transport belt [A. Then clean the belt with a dry cloth. Use the timing belt [B] to rotate the transport belt as you clean. This procedure lets you clean the entire surface of the belt. Make sure the surface of the belt is completely dry. Water on the surface of the transport belt could interfere with the operation of the printer.
B229
2-8
SM
General Cautions
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS
Do not turn off the main switch while any of the electrical components are active. Doing so may result in damage to units as they are pulled out or replaced.
3.1.1 SCANNER UNIT

reduce the static charge on the glass. Use a blower brush or a water-moistened cotton pad to clean the mirrors and lenses. Take care not to bend or crease the exposure lamps ribbon cable. Do not disassemble the lens unit. Doing so will throw the lens and copy image out of focus. Do not turn any of the CCD positioning screws. Doing so will throw the CCD out of position.
Replacement Adjustment
Use alcohol or glass cleaner to clean the exposure and scanning glass. This will
3.1.2 PAPER FEED

Do not touch the surface of the paper feed rollers. To avoid misfeeds, the side and end fences in each paper tray must be positioned correctly so as to align with the actual paper size.
3.1.3 IMPORTANT
If the optional tray heater or optics anti-condensation heater is installed, keep the copier's power cord plugged in even while the main switch is off, so that the heater(s) remain energized.
SM
3-1
B229
Special Tools and Lubricants
3.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
Part Number B6455010 B6456705 B6456810 VSSM9000 C4019503 A2579300 52039501 A0929503 A2929500 SD Card
Description
Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
PCMCIA Card Adapter USB Reader/Writer Digital Multimeter FLUKE87 20X Magnification Scope Grease Barrierta S552R Silicon Grease G-501 C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) Test Chart S5S (10 pcs/set)
B229
3-2
SM
Exterior Covers and Operation Panel
3.3 EXTERIOR COVERS AND OPERATION PANEL

3.3.1 REAR COVER
1.
Rear cover [A] (
x 4)
3.3.2 REAR ENGINE UNIT COVER
1.
Rear engine unit cover [A] (locking screw x 2)
SM
3-3
B229
3.3.3 TOP LEFT FRONT, LEFT FRONT AND INTERFACE COVER
1. 2. 3. 4.
Top left cover [A] ( Left front cover [B] ( Rear cover ( Interface cover [C] (
x 1) x 1) x 2)
"Rear Cover")
3.3.4 RIGHT DOOR
1. 2. 3. 4.
Rear cover (
"Rear Cover") x 3).
Open the right door [A]. Disconnect three harnesses [B] ( Right door belt [C]
B229
3-4
SM
3.3.5 BY-PASS TRAY
[B]
1. 2. 3. 4. Right door ( "Right Door") Open the by-pass tray [A]. By-pass tray [A] ( x 2, pin x 2) Disconnect harness [B].
3.3.6 FRONT COVER
1. 2. 3. 4.
Pull out the paper tray 1. Open the right door [A]. Open the front door [B]. Front cover [C] ( x 4)
SM
3-5
B229
Operation Panel
3.4 OPERATION PANEL
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Press the "PUSH" bottom [A], and then tilt the operation panel. Scanner stay right cover [B] ( Scanner stay left cover [C] ( Left front cover [D] ( Push bottom [A] x 1) x 1) x 1)
6. 7. 8.
Disconnect the I/F harness [E] ( Left and right bushing [F] (
x 1).
x 2 each)
Remove the operation panel [G] pressing the lever [H].
B229
3-6
SM
Scanner Unit
3.5 SCANNER UNIT

3.5.1 EXPOSURE GLASS
1. 2. 3.
Open the ARDF/ADF or platen cover (if it is installed). Rear scale [A] ( x 3) x 2) Left scale [B] with exposure glass [C] (
If the platen cover is installed, the left scale [B] is not attached the exposure glass [C]. Remove them separately. 4. DF exposure glass [D] (if ARDF or ADF is installed.)
Reassembling the exposure glass

When reinstalling, make sure that the mark is at the rear left corner, and that the left edge is aligned to the support on the frame.
3.5.2 LENS BLOCK

Do not touch the paint-locked screws on the lens block. The position of the lens
assembly (black part) is adjusted before shipment.
Do not grasp the PCB or the lens assembly when handling the lens block. The
lens assembly may slide out of position.
SM
3-7
B229
Scanner Unit
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Exposure glass ( Lens cover [A] (
"Exposure Glass") x 9) x 1, x 1)
Original length sensor bracket [B] ( Ground cable [C] ( x 1) Lens block [D] ( x 4, x 2,
x 2) "Printing"
After installing a new lens block, adjust the image quality ( in the Replace and Adjustment).
3.5.3 EXPOSURE LAMP
1. 2. 3. 4.
Remove the ARDF, ADF or platen cover (if it is installed). Exposure glass ( Top right cover [A] ( "Exposure Glass") x 2) Scanner stay right cover
B229
3-8
SM
Scanner Unit
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Top front left cover Interface cover Top left cover [B] ( Rear cover Top rear cover [C] ( x 1) x 2) x 2)
10. Scanner top left frame [D] (
11. Scanner top rear frame [E] (
x 9,
x 2,
x 2)
12. Slide the first scanner [F] to the cutout of the scanner rear frame with moving the timing belt. 13. Disconnect the scanner harness [G] from the lamp stabilizer ( 14. Tension clamp [H] ( x 1) 15. Cable holder [I] (hook x 1) 16. Press the plastic latch [J] and push the rear end of the lamp toward the front. 17. Exposure lamp [J] (with the cable, x 2, x 1) x 4).
SM
3-9
B229
Scanner Unit
Reassembling the Exposure Lamp

When you reassemble the exposure lamp, run the cable not to be slack. Slide the clamp [L] to adjust the cable slack.
3.5.4 ORIGINAL WIDTH/LENGTH SENSOR
1. 2. 3.
Exposure glass (
"Exposure Glass") x 1 each) x 1 each)
Two original width sensors [A] ( Two original length sensors [B] (
3.5.5 SCANNER MOTOR
1. 2. 3.
Rear cover ( "Rear Cover") Scanner motor with bracket [A] ( Scanner motor ( x 2) x 2, x 2, x 1, spring x 1)
B229
3-10
SM
Scanner Unit
When reassembling, install the belt first, and set the spring next. After installing the motor, adjust the image quality ( Printing/Scanning). Copy Adjustments:
3.5.6 LAMP STABILIZER
1. 2.
Rear cover (
"Rear Cover") x 2, locking support x 3)
Lamp stabilizer [A] (
SM
3-11
B229
Engine
3.6 ENGINE
3.6.1 ENGINE UNIT
When you install the new engine unit, remove the remaining ink with SP2100-001 before replacing the old engine unit.
[B] [C] [A]
[D]
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Remove the paper tray 1. Open the right door. Release the belt [A]. Connector cover bracket [B] ( Open the front door [C]. Front cover [D] ( x 4) x 2)
When reassembling the connector cover bracket [B], make sure that the bracket does not pinch any harnesses.
B229
3-12
SM
Engine
7.
Disconnect the six harnesses [E]. For details, refer to Picture 1 on the following page.
8. 9.
Pull the two levers [F] out from the machine (cover x 1). Remove the six screws ( for engine unit. For details, refer to Picture 2 on the following page. x 6): two screws for ink cartridge housing, 4 screws
10. Pull the engine unit [G] slowly on the way. Make sure that any harness is not attached to the machine before pulling the engine unit.
11. Hold the engine unit as shown, and then remove it from the machine.
12. Pull out the engine unit stay [H] before putting it on the flat place. Otherwise, the ink-supply unit [I] may be damaged.
SM
3-13
B229
Engine
(Color Photo)
(Color Photos)
When installing the new engine unit

After installing the new engine unit, do the following procedure. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Install the ink cartridges provided with the new engine unit into the machine. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. The copier automatically starts to execute the releasing air mode. Do SP2-100-001. This takes about 5 minutes. Do the refreshing using either UP or SP2010-002. Print out the nozzle check pattern using either UP or SP3109-003 and check it out. If the printout is not satisfactory, do the cleaning with UP or SP2010-001 Do the "GJ Eng Count, Reset" with SP7959-001.
B229
3-14
SM
Engine
Take the ink cartridges used in this procedure back to your service office. (Most of the ink in these cartridges is consumed by this procedure.) You need to do following procedure before transporting the replaced engine unit: Lock the carriage unit using the adjuster of the maintenance unit. Make sure the two tops of the squares do not face each other. (See "Maintenance Unit" below.) Pack the replaced engine unit into the original carton box, which was used for the new engine unit. This prevents the unit from being damaged.
Replacement Adjustment B229
3.6.2 CONIJ (CONNECT INK JET MODULE)
(Color Photo) 1. 2. 3. Open the right door. Connector cover bracket ( CONIJ [A] ( x 2, all 's) "Engine Unit")

The maintenance unit is engaged to the carriage unit when the machine is in stand-by status. Lowering the maintenance unit [D] releases the engagement with the carriage unit. So, do this step before removing the maintenance unit. Put a sheet of paper on the floor during servicing. Ink may fall on the floor.
SM
3-15
Engine
1. 2.
Rear engine unit cover (
"Rear Engine Unit Cover")
Turn the adjuster [A] clockwise by a screwdriver until the tops of the two triangles [B] face each other. Never turn the adjuster counterclockwise.
3.
Maintenance unit [C] (
x 2,
x 2)
3.6.4 INK COLLECTION TANK
1. 2. 3.
Rear engine unit cover ( Shutter bracket [B] ( x 1)
"Rear Engine Unit Cover") x 1)
Ink collection tank bracket [A] (
When reinstalling this bracket, make sure that the shutter bracket pushes the switch [C] of the shutter.
B229
3-16
SM
Engine
4. 5.
Pull out the handle from the machine. Ink collection tank [D] ( x 1)
3.6.5 SUB SCAN ENCODER AND ENCODER SENSOR

Never touch the rim of the sub scan encoder with bare hands.
1. 2.
Front cover (
"Front Cover") x 3)
Encoder cover [A] (
SM
3-17
B229
Engine
3.
(Color Photo) Remove the screw [B] of the encoder sensor bracket, and then slide down the bracket as shown [C]. Carefully slide down the bracket not to damage the encoder.
4.
Remove the spring [D] and screw [E] of the sub scan encoder motor, and then slide up the bracket as shown [F].
5. 6. 7. 8.
Release the timing belt [G]. Remove the sub scan encoder [H] (slider clip [I] x 1). Remove the encoder sensor bracket [J] ( Encoder sensor ( x 2) x 1).
B229
3-18
SM
Engine
3.6.6 MAIN SCAN DRIVE MOTOR
(Color Photo) 1. 2. Engine unit ( "Engine Unit") x 2, x 1) Main scan drive motor [A] at front right side of the engine (
Do not touch the main scan encoder during this procedure.
3.6.7 SUB SCAN DRIVE MOTOR
(Color Photo) 1. 2. 3. Engine unit ( Encoder cover ( "Engine Unit") "Sub Scan Encoder and Encoder Sensor") x 2, x 1, x 2, spring x 1)
Sub scan drive motor with the bracket [A] (
SM
3-19
B229
Engine
3.6.8 FLUSHING GATE UNIT
1. 2.
Engine unit (
"Engine Unit") x 2)
Flushing gate unit [A] (
3.6.9 TRANSPORT BELT UNIT

During this procedure, do not touch the main scan encoder with your hands.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Engine unit (
"Engine Unit") x 2) x 2)
Engine top cover [A] ( Belt cleaning unit [B] ( Flushing unit [C] ( Encoder cover [D] ( x 2)
x 3)
B229
3-20
SM
Engine
6. 7. 8. 9.
Paper guide plate [E] ( Paper guide bracket [F] ( Sub scan encoder (
x 2) x 3, x 1) "Sub Scan Encoder and Encoder Sensor") "Sub Scan Encoder and Encoder Sensor")
Encoder sensor bracket (
10. Timing belt (
"Sub Scan Encoder and Encoder Sensor")
11. Turn the lock lever [G] clockwise from the view of front side, and then put it inside the frame through cutout. 12. Slide the transport belt unit [H] to the front side, and then remove it as shown ( x 2, x 1, x 1, x 2, bushing x 1).
SM
3-21
B229
Engine
3.6.10 CHARGE ROLLER

During this procedure, do not touch the main scan encoder with your hands.
1. 2. 3.
Transport belt unit ( Charge roller unit [A] ( Charge roller [B]
"Flushing Gate Unit") x 2)
B229
3-22
SM
Paper Feed
3.7 PAPER FEED

3.7.1 PAPER FEED MOTOR
1. 2. 3.
Rear cover (
"Rear Cover") " Ink Collection Tank") x 3, x 2)
Ink collection tank (
Ink collection tank bracket [A] (
4. 5.
Feed motor bracket [B] ( Feed motor ( x 2)
x 3,
x 1)
SM
3-23
B229
Paper Feed
3.7.2 REGISTRATION CLUTCH
1. 2.
Rear cover (
"Rear Cover") x 1, x 1)
Registration clutch [A] (
3.7.3 REGISTRATION ROLLER
1. 2. 3. 4.
(Color Photo) "Right Door"). Open the right door and release the belt ( Front cover ( "Front Cover") "Registration Clutch") Registration roller gear [A] ( x 1) Registration clutch (
B229
3-24
SM
Paper Feed
5. 6.
Remove the screw [B] and slide the registration guide plate [C] to the rear side. Lift up the registration guide plate, and then remove it.
(Color Photo) 7. Remove the bushing [D] at rear side.
(Color Photo) 8. Slide the registration roller [E] to the rear side, and then remove it.
SM
3-25
B229
Paper Feed
3.7.4 PAPER FEED, PAPER TRANSPORT AND DUPLEX CLUTCH
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Rear cover (
"Right Door") x 3, x 6) x 2, x 1) x 2, bushing x 2)
Disconnect three harnesses and release six clamps. ( Clutch cover bracket [A] ( Paper feed clutch [B] ( Duplex clutch [D] ( x 1) Paper transport clutch [C] ( x 1)
3.7.5 PAPER FEED ROLLER AND FRICTION PAD
1. 2.
Remove the paper tray 1. Clip [A]
B229
3-26
SM
Paper Feed
3.
Push the shaft back through the opening, and tilt it up. If the black plastic bushing [B] comes off, be sure to remount it when reinstalling the shaft.
4. 5.
Paper feed roller [C] Friction pad [D] (spring x 1)
3.7.6 PAPER END SENSOR

1. 2. 3. 4.
Engine unit (
"Engine Unit") x 1, x 1)
Remove the paper tray 1. Paper end sensor bracket [A] ( Paper end sensor [B]
SM
3-27
B229
Paper Feed
3.7.7 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SWITCH
1. 2. 3.
By-pass tray ( Tray lever [A] (
"By-pass Tray") x 1, pin x 1)
Turn over the inner tray [B].
4.
By-pass paper size switch [C]
x 1,
x 1)
When reassembling the by-pass paper size switch, the two mark face each other as shown.
B229
3-28
SM
Paper Feed
3.7.8 BY-PASS FEED ROLLER AND PAPER END SENDOR
1. 2. 3. 4.
Open the right door and release the belt ( Paper guide [A] ( x 2) x 3) x 3, x 1, Friction pad unit [B] (
"Right Door")
By-pass feed roller unit [C] (
x 1,
x 4, bushing x 1)
5. 6.
By-pass feed roller [D] By-pass paper end sensor [E]
SM
3-29
B229
Paper Feed
3.7.9 REGISTRATION SENSOR
1. 2. 3. 4.
Open the right door and release the belt ( registration sensor unit holding it up ( Sensor cover [B] Registration sensor [C] ( x 1) x 1).
"Right Door").
Slide the registration guide plate [A] to the rear side, and then remove the
When reassembling, make sure that the spacer [D] is installed to the registration guide plate.
B229
3-30
SM
Paper Feed
3.7.10 ONE-SHEET BY-PASS PAPER END SENSOR
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Open the right door. Open the multi by-pass tray. Open the one-sheet by-pass tray [A]. Sensor cover [B] (hook x 2) One-sheet by-pass paper end sensor [C] ( x 1)
3.7.11 PAPER SIZE SWITCH
1. 2. 3.
Remove the paper tray 1. Paper size switch bracket [A] ( Paper size switch [B] x 1, x 1)
SM
3-31
B229
Paper Exit
3.8 PAPER EXIT

3.8.1 PAPER EXIT TRAY
1. 2. 3.
Open the paper exit tray [A]. Open the front door [B]. Paper exit tray (pin x 2)
3.8.2 PAPER EXIT UNIT
1. 2. 3.
Paper exit tray (
"Paper Exit Tray") "Top Left Front, Left
Top left front cover, left front cover and interface cover ( Front and Interface Cover") Paper exit unit [A] ( x 4, x 3)
B229
3-32
SM
Paper Exit
3.8.3 PAPER EXIT SENSOR
1. 2. 3. 4.
Paper exit unit ( Guide plate [A] (
"Paper Exit Unit") x 4) x 1, x 1)
Paper exit sensor bracket [B] ( Paper exit sensor [C]
3.8.4 JUNCTION GATE SENSOR
1. 2. 3.
Paper exit unit ( x 1)
"Paper Exit Unit") x 1,
Junction gate sensor bracket [A] at the bottom of the paper exit tray ( Junction gate sensor [B]
SM
3-33
B229
Paper Exit
3.8.5 PAPER EXIT MOTOR
1. 2.
Paper exit unit (
"Paper Exit Unit") x 2, x 2, x 1)
Paper exit motor [A] at the bottom of the paper exit tray (
B229
3-34
SM
Electrical Components
3.9 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3.9.1 CONTROLLER BOX
1. 2. 3.
Rear cover ( Interface cover (
"Rear Cover") "Top Left Front, Left Front and Interface Cover") x 1)
Controller box [A] ( x 5,
When reassembling the controller box, maker sure that the connector of the controller box is firmly connected to the IPU board.
3.9.2 CONTROLLER BOARD
1.
Rear cover (
"Rear Cover")
SM
3-35
B229
2. 3. 4.
Interface cover ( FCU cover [A] (
"Top Left Front, Left Front and Interface Cover") x 3) x 13)
Controller box cover [B] (
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
I/F covers [C] (knob screw x 2 each) Slot cover ( "Controller Box") Remove the all slot cards. Remove the clamp [D] Controller board [E] ( x 5)
When replacing the controller board

Remove the two NVRAMs (FRAM) from the old controller board and install them in the same place on the new controller board.
3.9.3 NVRAM AND DIMM RAM
1. 2.
Rear cover ( Interface cover (
"Rear Cover") "Top Left Front, Left Front and Interface Cover")
B229
3-36
SM
3. 4. 5.
Controller box cover ( RAM DIMM [A] NVRAM [B]
"Controller Board")
When you install the new NVRAM, install the two NVRAMs at the same time even one NVRAM is not defective.
3.9.4 IO BOARD
1. 2. 3.
Rear cover ( IO board [B] (
"Rear Cover") , x 2, x 2) x 5)
IO board bracket [A] (All
3.9.5 PSU BOARD

[C] [D]
BLACK WHITE
SM
3-37
B229
1. 2. 3.
Rear cover (
"Rear Cover") x 1) , x 2)
Ground cable [A] ( PSU board [B] (All
When reassembling the PSU board, make sure that black or brown wire is connected to the terminal [C] and white or blue wire is connected to the terminal [D]. The combination of the wire colors differs depending on the model destination.
3.9.6 IPU BOARD
1. 2. 3.
Controller box ( IPU board [B] (
"Controller Board") x 2, x 2, ground cable x 1) x 2, locking support x 1)
IPU board bracket [A] (
B229
3-38
SM
Rev. 02/2007
3.9.7 BCU BOARD
The procedure below contains important information regarding BCU Board replacement.
If you need to replace the BCU board, it is important to perform step 1 before you remove the old BCU board. This will transfer the data in the NV-RAM on the old board to the NV-RAM on the new board. This is necessary because the NV-RAM itself is soldered to the board, and cannot be replaced individually.
IMPORTANT: Keep all dipswitches at their default values. 1. Copy the data from the NV-RAM on the old BCU board to an SD card (SP5-824-001). IMPORTANT: If you cannot copy the data to the SD card, when you get to Step 8 below, use the factory SMC sheet attached to the inside of the front door.
I IMPORTANT: Disconnect the AC power before starting step 2.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Controller box ( Board") IPU board bracket ( Board") BCU board [A] (All flat cable x 1) Install the new BCU board. Reconnect the AC power and power the unit ON. Input the serial number of the new BCU board (SP5-811-001). Copy the data from the SD card to the NV-RAM on the new BCU board (SP5-825-001). IMPORTANT: If you could not copy the data to the SD card in Step 1, do the following: 1. Access Factory Settings Mode. Contact the Hotline to request regional personnel to access this. 2. Set the destination code (SP5-807-001) to your area. 1:NA, 2:EU, 3:Asia, 4:China, 5:Taiwan, 6:Korea 3. Exit Factory Settings Mode. 4. Input the serial number of the new BCU board (SP5-811-001). 5. Input the SP values on the factory SMC sheet attached to the inside of the front door. 6. Replace the waste ink tank (P/N B2292185). NOTE: This is necessary because the counter value of the waste ink tank cannot be input. , x 4, "IPU "Controller
SM
3-39
B229
Image Adjustment
3.10 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

You can do four image adjustment functions as shown below with "Maintenance" in the "User Tools". Adjust Paper Feed Nozzle Blockage Check Adjust Print Head Position Registration (Print Start Position)
3.10.1 PREPARING FOR TEST PRINTING

Make sure A4 or LTR size paper/SEF is loaded in the paper tray 1. Make sure the copier is ready to print.
3.10.2 ADJUST PAPER FEED

Print the Adjust Paper Feed Test Pattern and do this adjustment if you see broken horizontal lines or uneven colors in the printouts: 1. 2. Enter the UP or SP. Do the "Adjust Paper Feed" (User Tools > Maintenance > Adjustment > Adjust Paper Feed) or SP3109-004 to print the test pattern.
3. 4.
Examine the test print. Then enter the number of the pattern that shows the best appearance (the horizontal lines should be perfectly flat). Do the instructions on screen to complete the adjustment.
B229
3-40
SM
Image Adjustment
3.10.3 NOZZLE BLOCKAGE CHECK

One or more of the nozzles is blocked if you see these: Broken lines Uneven patches of white in the printouts. At this time, do this procedure: 1. 2. Enter the UP or SP. Do the "Nozzle Check Pattern" (User Tools > Maintenance > Nozzle Check Pattern) or SP3109-003 to print the test pattern.
[A]: Normal Pattern Lines are crisp and unbroken. [B]: Abnormal Pattern Lines are broken; patches of white spoil the appearance of the pattern. 3. 4. Examine the pattern. Then check which color does not show. This information lets you know which nozzle is blocked. Do the instructions on the screen to select the color you want to correct. Then clean the print heads. Do Clean Print Heads (Normal) up to 3 times to correct the problem. Do Clean Print Heads (Full) once if the problem stays. The Full cleaning uses a lot of ink. Do not do the Full cleaning until you have done the Normal cleaning at least 3 times. For more, please refer to Section 4. Troubleshooting.
SM
3-41
B229
Image Adjustment
3.10.4 ADJUST PRINT HEAD POSITION

The print head is out of position if you see these: Broken vertical lines Smeared or streaked colors At this time, do this procedure: 1. 2. Enter the UP or SP. Do the "Head Position Adjust" (User Tools > Maintenance > Adjustment > Head Position Adjust) with UP or the Head Gap Adjustment 300dpi or 1200dpi with or SP3109-001 or -002 to print the test pattern.
3.
Examine the test print. Then, for each row (Letters A to I) enter the numbers of the column that show the best print alignment.. above. For example +2 in the sample
B229
3-42
SM
Image Adjustment
Keys: K1 = Black print head 1 K2 = Black print head 2 C = Cyan print head M = Magenta print head Y = Yellow print head Forward = Scanning direction from rear to front Reverse = Scanning direction from front to rear This test grid is made as follows. K1 reverse is the standard for alignment. Line A: K1 prints forward, then K1 prints reverse. Line B: C prints reverse, then K1 prints reverse. Line C: C prints forward, then K1 prints reverse. Line D: M prints reverse, then K1 prints reverse. Line E: M prints forward, then K1 prints reverse. Line F: Y prints reverse, then K1 prints reverse. Line G: Y prints forward, then K1 prints reverse. Line H: K2 prints reverse, then K1 prints reverse. Line I: K2 prints forward, then K1 prints reverse. 4. Do the instructions on screen to complete the adjustment.
SM
3-43
Image Adjustment
3.10.5 REGISTRATION
1. 2. Enter the UP or SP. Do the "Registration" (User Tools > Maintenance > Adjustment > Registration) or SP3109-005 to print the test pattern.
3.
Examine the test print. Then enter the numbers of the patterns that show the best appearance for the: Print direction (Main Scan) Paper feed direction. (Sub Scan)
4.
Do the instructions on screen to complete the adjustment.
B229
3-44
SM
Copy Adjustments: Printing/Scanning
3.11 COPY ADJUSTMENTS: PRINTING/SCANNING

You need to perform the adjustment after executing a Memory All Clear, and after replacing or adjusting any of the following parts. First or second scanner Lens Block Scanner Motor Paper Side Fence For detailed explanations about how to access and use the SP modes, see Section "Service Program Mode".
Paper Tray
3.11.1 PRINTING
Make sure the paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you start these adjustments. Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP5-902, No.10) to print the test pattern for the printing adjustments below. Set SP 5-902 to 0 again after completing these printing adjustments.
SM
3-45
B229
Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side

1. 2. Check the leading edge registration for each paper feed station, and adjust each of these registrations using SP1-001. Check the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station, and adjust these registrations using SP1-002. (Adjust the trays in order: the 1st tray first, then the 2nd tray, etc.)
A: Leading Edge Registration, B: Trailing Edge Registration Tray Any paper tray By-pass feed Duplex 1st tray 2nd tray (Optional PFU tray 1) 3rd tray (Optional PFU tray 2) By-pass tray One-sheet by-pass feed Duplex SP mode SP1-001-1 SP1-001-2 SP1-001-3 SP1-002-1 SP1-002-2 SP1-002-3 SP1-002-4 SP1-002-5 SP1-002-6 2 1.5 mm Specification
2 1.5 mm
B229
3-46
SM
Blank Margin
If the leading edge or side-to-side registration cannot be adjusted to within the specification, then adjust the leading-edge blank margin or the left-side blank margin. 1. Check the trailing edge and right side edge blank margins, and adjust them using the following SP modes. A: Trailing Edge Blank Margin, B: Right Edge Blank Margin C: Leading Edge Blank Margin, D: Right Edge Blank Margin
SP mode Trailing edge Right edge Leading edge Left edge SP2-103-2 SP2-103-4 SP2-103-1 SP2-103-3
Specification 2 +2.0/ -1.5 mm 2 2.0 mm 3.3 +2.7/ -1.3 mm 2 2.0 mm
SM
3-47
3.11.2 SCANNING
Before doing the following scanner adjustments, check and adjust the printing leading-edge and side-to-side registrations and the printing blank margins (as described above). Use an A3 test chart to perform the following adjustments.
Registration: Platen Mode

1. 2. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration, and adjust as necessary using the following SP modes.
A: Leading Edge Registration, B: Side-to-Side Registration SP mode Leading edge Side-to-side SP4-010 SP4-011 Specification 0 2.0 mm 0 2.5 mm
Sub-scan Magnification
1. 2. Place the OS-A3 test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations. Check the magnification ratio. If necessary, adjust the magnification using the following SP mode. SP mode Sub-scan magnification SP4-008 Specification 1.0%
B229
3-48
SM
3.11.3 ADF IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

Registration and Blank Margin
A: Leading Edge Registration, B: Side-to-Side Registration Make a temporary test chart as shown above, using A3/11" x 17" paper. 1. 2. Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the feed stations. Check the registrations, and adjust as necessary using the appropriate SP modes, as follows. SP mode Side-to-side registration 1st side Leading edge registration Blank margin for the trailing edge Side-to-side registration 2nd side SP6-006-1 SP6-006-2 SP6-006-3 SP6-006-4
SM
3-49
B229
Sub-scan Magnification
Make a temporary test chart as shown above, using A3/11" x 17" paper. 1. 2. Place the temporary test chart on the ADF and make a copy from one of the feed stations. Check the registration, and if necessary adjust it using SP6-006-005. The specification is 1.0%.
B229
3-50
SM
TROUBLESHOOTING
Service Call
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 SERVICE CALL
4.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
There are 4 levels of service call conditions. Level A Definition Fusing unit SCs displayed on the operation panel. The machine is disabled. The user cannot reset the SC. SCs to disable only the features that use the defective item. Although these SCs are not B shown to the user under normal conditions, they are displayed on the operation panel only when the defective feature is selected. C SCs that are not shown on the operation panel. They are internally logged. The SC is displayed on the operation panel. Turning the operation switch or main power D switch off then on resets the SC. The SC is redisplayed if it occurs after the main power switch is turned on again. If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards, first disconnect then reconnect the connectors before you replace the PCBs. If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load before you replace motors or sensors. When a Level B SC occurs while in an SP mode, the machine cannot display the SC number. If this occurs, check the SC number after leaving the SP mode. The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues a Level D SC code. This is done for Level D SC codes only. When a Level D SC code occurs A screen opens on the operation panel to tell the user that 1) an error occurred, 2) the job Turn the main power switch off and on. Logging only Turn the main power switch off and on.
Troubleshooting B229
Reset Procedure This level is not used for this machine (B229).
SM
4-1
Service Call
that the machine does at that time will be erased, and 3) the machine will reboot automatically after approximately 30 seconds. The user can: 1) stop until the machine reboots automatically after a short time, or 2) touch Reset on the screen to reset the machine immediately, and go back to the copy screen. If the operator does not touch Reset, the next message tells the user that 1) the machine reset automatically and 2) the previous job was lost and must be done again. After the user reads the message, the user touches Confirm on the screen. The next screen shows the number and title of the SC code, and stops until the user turns the machine off and on. If the operator touches Reset to bypass the 30-second interval for the machine to reboot, the machine reboots immediately and the operation panel displays the copy screen. Do not try to use the operation panel during an automatic reboot. If the Remote Service System is used, the SC code is sent immediately to the Service Center Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off.
4.1.2 SC TABLE
Engine SC
SC1xx
No. Definition 101 Symptom Exposure lamp error Shading at AGC Defective exposure lamp Defective lamp stabilizer The shading data peak does not -001 D reach the specified threshold (64/255 digit) when the machine executes the 1. shading at initialization. Defective exposure lamp harness Replace the exposure lamp. 2. Replace the lamp stabilizer. 3. Replace the exposure lamp harness. Possible Cause/Countermeasure
B229
4-2
SM
Service Call
Shading at scanning The shading data peak does not -002 D reach the specified threshold (64/255 digit) when the machine executes the shading at scanning. Scanner home position error 1 Defective scanner motor drive board Defective scanner motor 120 D The scanner home position sensor does not detect the OFF condition during operation. 1. Defective home position sensor Defective harness Replace the scanner motor drive board. 2. Replace the scanner motor. 3. Replace the scanner HP sensor. 4. Replace the harness. Scanner home position error 2 121 D The scanner home position sensor does not detect the ON condition during operation. Black level detection error Defective SBU 141 D The black level cannot be adjusted within the target value during the zero clamp after the AGC. Defective harness 1. Replace the harness. 2. Replace the SBU. 3. Replace the IPU. 4. Replace the BCU. White level detection error Defective SBU 142 D The white level cannot be adjusted within the target value during the zero clamp after the AGC. 1. Defective harness Defective optics components Replace the exposure lamp. 2. Replace the lamp stabilizer. 3. Replace the harness. Same as SC120
Troubleshooting
Same as SC101-001
SM
4-3
B229
Service Call
4. Replace the SBU. 5. Replace the IPU. 6. Replace the BCU. 144 SBU communication error SBU connection error Insufficient power supply for SBU Defective SBU -001 D The SBU connection cannot be detected at power on or recovery from the energy save mode. Defective harness Defective detection port on the BCU 1. Replace the harness. 2. Replace the SBU. 3. Replace the IPU. 4. Replace the BCU. SBU serial communication error The unusual register value from the -002 D SBU is detected more than three times at power on or recovery from the energy save mode. GBSBU reset error -003 D The GBSBU cannot be reset at power on or recovery from the energy save mode Cannot finish the SBU communication. -004 D The communication between BCU and SBU has not completed. IPU error Defective IPU 161 -001 D The error result of self-diagnostic by the Taurus (ASIC on the IPU) is detected. Defective BCU Defective connection between IPU and SBU 1. Check the connection between IPU and SBU. Same as SC144-001 Same as SC144-001 Same as SC144-001
B229
4-4
SM
Service Call
2. Replace the IPU. ASIC (Taurus) memory error 161 -002 The memory check error of ASIC D (Taurus) is detected when a machine turns on or recovers from the energy saver mode. Copy Data Security Unit error The copy data security board is not detected when the copy data security function is set 165 D "ON" with the initial setting. A device check error occurs when the copy data security function is set "ON" with the initial setting. 2. 1. Incorrect installation of the copy data security board Defective copy data security board Reinstall the copy data security board. Replace the copy data security board.
Defective IPU (Taurus memory) Unusual power source 3. Replace the IPU.
SC2xx
No. Definition Symptom Maintenance unit home position error The maintenance unit sensor does not get "OFF" signal after the maintenance unit motor has rotated. 200 D The maintenance unit sensor does not get "ON" signal after the maintenance unit motor has rotated for certain time when it is assumed that the maintenance unit has to return to the home position. Tank full lever error 202 D The position of the tank full lever does not stay at the tank Defective tank full sensor Tank full lever bent or broken Defective maintenance unit home position sensor Defective maintenance unit drive motor 1. Replace the maintenance unit home position sensor. 2. Replace the maintenance unit drive motor. Possible Cause/Countermeasure
SM
4-5
Service Call
No. Definition
Symptom full position after ink initialization or air releasing. The position of the tank full lever is not detected at ink suction. Main scan encoder signal error
Possible Cause/Countermeasure Incorrect ink suction 1. Check the harness of the tank full sensor. 2. Replace the GJ engine. 3. Replace the maintenance unit.
Defective main scan encoder Defective main scan encoder sensor 210 D The input signal from the main scan encoder is not detected during operation of the main scan motor. Defective main scan drive motor 1. Replace the main scan encoder. 2. Replace the main scan encoder senor. 3. Replace the main scan drive motor. Main scan encoder error Defective main scan drive motor Main scan encoder coming off Defective main scan encoder 211 D The carriage unit does not stop at home position (rear side) or reverse position (front side). sensor 1. Replace the main scan drive motor. 2. Reinstall or replace the main scan encoder. 3. Replace the main scan encoder sensor.
B229
4-6
SM
Service Call
SC5xx
No. Definition Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure
Tray 2 (optional paper tray unit) feed error The lift sensor is not activated within 18 seconds twice consecutively after the tray lift 502 C motor starts lifting the bottom plate. When the tray lowers, the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5 sec twice consecutively. 1. Defective or disconnected tray lift motor Paper or other obstacle trapped between tray and motor Pick-up solenoid disconnected or blocked by an obstacle Reverse connection of harness Remove an obstacle.
Troubleshooting
2. Replace the lift sensor.
Tray 3 (optional paper tray unit) feed error The lift sensor is not activated within 18 seconds twice consecutively after the tray lift 503 C motor starts lifting the bottom plate. When the tray lowers, the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5 sec twice consecutively. 1. Defective or disconnected tray lift motor Paper or other obstacle trapped between tray and motor Pick-up solenoid disconnected or blocked by an obstacle Reverse connection of harness Check the harness. 2. Remove an obstacle. 3. Replace the lift sensor.
Paper feed motor lock error (optional paper tray unit) A motor lock signal is not detected 506 C for more than 1.5 s or the lock signal is not detected for more than 1.0 s during rotation. 1. Defective paper feed motor Too much load on the drive mechanism Remove too much load. 2. Replace the paper feed motor.
SM
4-7
B229
Service Call
Sub scan motor error Defective sub scan encoder sensor Timing belt of the sub scan The sub scan motor does not reply 520 D for 100ms when a machine sends the "stop" command to the sub scan motor. 1. encoder is come off. Defective sub scan motor Check the sub scan encoder and timing belt. 2. Replace the sub scan encoder sensor. 3. Replace the sub scan motor. Charge bias leak 570 D High voltage unit sends a signal of charge bias leak. Ink head temperature error Disconnect harness 571 D The temperature sensor at the ink head detects unusual temperature for 8 seconds. 1. Defective temperature sensor at the ink head Check the connector (CN138). sensor at the ink head. Belt temperature error Disconnect harness Defective temperature sensor at 572 D The temperature sensor at the belt unit detects unusual temperature for 8 seconds. 1. the ink head Check the connector (CN139, CONIJ-CN503 and CN507). 2. Replace the temperature sensor at the ink head. 2. Replace the temperature Defective charge roller Defective high voltage unit
B229
4-8
SM
Service Call
Belt temperature and absolute humidity error The temperature sensor at the belt unit detects less than 573 D 15C or more than 85C. The humidity sensor at the belt unit detects less than 0% or more than 100%. 1. Disconnect harness Defective temperature sensor at the ink head Check the connector (CN114). sensor and/or humidity sensor at the ink head. 2. Replace the temperature
Controller SC
SC6xx
No. Definition Symptom Mechanical counter error 610 D The machine detects disconnection of a mechanical counter when SP5987-1 is set to "ON". 1. Disconnected mechanical counter Connect a mechanical counter. Possible Cause/Countermeasure
Communication command error between BCU and ADF Defective connection between ADF and BCU A communication error occurs after 620 D the machine detects the correct communication between BCU and ADF. 1. Defective ADF Defective IPU Check the connection between ADF and BCU. 2. Replace the ADF. 3. Replace the IPU. Memory address command error Loose connection The BCU does not receive a memory 687 D address command from the controller 120 seconds after paper is in the position for registration. 1. Defective controller Defective BCU Check if the controller is firmly connected to the BCU. 2. Replace the controller. 3. Replace the BCU.
SM
4-9
Service Call
No. Definition
Symptom CSS communication error The machine tries to communicate
Possible Cause/Countermeasure
Communication error on the public telephone network (logged only; the machine can still operate)
630
with one of the terminals of a relevant service center. signal returns. MF accounting device error 1 The machine sends a data frame. An error
632
No normal end signal returns. This symptom happens three times. MF accounting device error 2
Defective or broken line between machine and device
633
The machine is communicating with the accounting device. break signal returns. MF accounting device error 3 The
Defective or broken line between machine and device
Defective accounting device 634 D A backup RAM error is reported from the accounting device. MF accounting device error 4 Defective accounting device 635 D A battery voltage error is reported from the accounting device. 636 SD Card Error Expanded authentication module error There is no expanded authentication module in the -001 B machine. The SD card or the file of the broken. 1. Install the correct SD card or the file of the expanded authentication module. controller Defective battery in the accounting device controller Defective battery in the accounting device
expanded authentication module is 2. Install the DESS module.
B229
4-10
SM
Service Call
No. Definition
Symptom There is no DESS module in the machine. Version error
-002
The version of the expanded authentication module is not correct.
1.
Install the correct file of the expanded authentication module.
650
Communication error of the remote service modem (Cumin-M) Authentication error
-001
The authentication for the Cumin-M fails at a dial up connection.
1.
Check and set the correct user name (SP5816-156) and password (SP5816-157).
Troubleshooting
D Dial up fails due -004 to the incorrect modem setting.
Incorrect modem setting
3. Check and set the correct AT command (SP5819-160).
Communication line error The supplied voltage is not -005 D sufficient due to the defective communication line or defective connection. Incorrect network setting -011 D Both the NIC and Cumin-M are activated at the same time. Modem board error The modem board does not work -012 D properly even though the setting of the modem board is installed with a dial up connection. 1. Install the modem board. board setting with SP5816. 3. Replace the modem board. 2. Check and reset the modem 1. Disable the NIC with SP5985-1. 1. Consult with the user's local telephone company.
SM
4-11
B229
Service Call
No. Definition 651
Symptom
Incorrect dial up connection Program parameter error The unexpected error occurs when
-001
the modem (Cumin-M) tries to call the center with a dial up connection. Program execution error Same as SC651-001. Engine startup error Just after the main power is turned on or the machine is recovering
Software bug.
-002
Software bug.
Poor connection between the BCU and controller board Defective BCU Defective controller board
670
from auto off mode, the engine ready signal assertion fails. Just after the main power is turned on, the engine does not respond.
Controller-to-operation panel communication error at startup Controller stalled Controller board installed incorrectly Defective controller board After powering on the machine, 672 D communication between the controller and operation panel does not begin, or the communication is interrupted after a normal startup. 1. Operation panel connector loose or defective Poor connection of DIMM and optional boards on the controller board Check the setting of SP5875-001. If the setting is set to "1 (OFF)", change it to "0 (OFF)".
B229
4-12
SM
Service Call
SBU/IPU communication error 685 D While data is sent between the scanner and BCU board, a communication error has occurred. Defective scanner unit cable Defective SBU board Defective BCU board
SC8xx
No. Definition Symptom Watchdog error While the system program is 818 B running, no other programs can run (due to a bus hold or endless loop). 819 [0696e] Kernel stop B Process error Defective RAM DIMM Defective SD card in slot 1 Defective controller Software error 1. Check and/or replace the System completely down RAM DIMM. 2. Check and/or replace the SD card in slot 1. 3. Replace the controller. 4. See NOTE at the end of the SC table. [0766d] B VM full error Defective RAM DIMM Defective SD card in slot 1 Unexpected system memory size Defective controller Software error 1. Check and/or replace the RAM DIMM. 2. Check and/or replace the 1. Defective controller board Reinstall the system program. 2. Replace the controller board.
SM
4-13
Service Call
No. Definition
Symptom
Possible Cause/Countermeasure SD card in slot 1. 3. Replace the controller. See NOTE at the end of the SC table.
Cache error [4361] B Cache error in the CPU The others Defective memory Error in OS Defective flash memory Defective CPU Replace the controller board. Self-Diagnostic Error: CPU B [0001-0015] [000A-000D]: Detailed error code Defective CPU device During the boot monitor program and self-diagnostic, any exception or cut-in are not supposed to happen. If these happen, it is defined as SC. 820 B [00FF]: Detailed error code Defective CPU Defective local bus 1. Turn the main power Cache access error in the CPU switch off and on. 2. Reinstall the system program. 3. Replace the controller board. Defective boot monitor program or self-diagnostic program 1. Replace the controller board. Reinstall the system firmware. Defective CPU Replace the controller board.
[----]
B229
4-14
SM
Service Call
No. Definition
Symptom
Possible Cause/Countermeasure [0601, 0602, 0605, 0606, 0607, 0609]: Detailed error code
Exceptional command does not operate even though it is executed on purpose.
Defective CPU devices Replace the controller board.
[060A-060E]: Detailed error code B Cut-in command does not operate when it is executed. [0610]: Detailed error code B Timer cut-in does not operate even though it is set. [0612]: Detailed error code Defective ASIC B Cut-in in ASIC occurs. Defective devices in which ASIC detects cut-in. Replace the controller board. [06FF]: Detailed error code B The pipeline clock frequency rate is different from the prescribed value. [0702]: Detailed error code Insufficient CPU cache The result when the program B is executed in the command cache is different from desirable value. Insufficient memory process speed 1. Replace the controller board. 2. Replace the RAM DIMM. Defective CPU devices Mode bit data error, which is used for initializing CPU. Replace the controller board. Defective CPU devices Replace the controller board.
Troubleshooting
Defective CPU devices Defective ASIC devices Replace the controller board.
SM
4-15
B229
Service Call
No. Definition
Symptom
Possible Cause/Countermeasure [0709, 070A]: Detailed error code Even you write the data in the Defective CPU devices Incorrect SPD Boot mode setting error 1. Replace the controller board. 2. Replace the RAM DIMM.
only cache of memory, the data is actually written in another area (not cache) of memory.
[0801, 0804, 0807, 0808, 0809, 80A]: Detailed error code B An error occurs when checking the TLB. B [4002-4005]: Detailed error code The calculation error in the CPU occurs. 821 [0B00] Self-Diagnostic Error: ASIC ASIC error B The write-&-verify check error has occurred in the ASIC. ASIC not detected ASIC (controller board [0B06] B The ASIC of the I/O is not detected. defective) Poor connection between North Bridge and PCI I/F. Replace controller board. SHM register check error [0B10] B Failed to initialize or could not read connection bus. Data in SHM register incorrect. Defective bus connection Defective SHM Replace controller board. Defective controller board Replace the controller. Defective CPU Replace the CPU. Defective CPU devices Replace the controller board.
B229
4-16
SM
Service Call
No. Definition
Symptom
Possible Cause/Countermeasure Timer error between ASIC and CPU The CPU checks if the ASIC timer works properly compared with the CPU timer. If the ASIC timer does not function in the specified range, this SC code is displayed. 1. 2. System firmware problem Defective RAM-DIMM Defective controller Reinstall the controller system firmware. Replace the RAM-DIMM. Replace the controller board.
[0D05]
822
Self-Diagnostic Error: HDD Timeout error/ [3004]: Command error Loose connection When the main switch is Defective HDD Defective controller 1. Check that the HDD is correctly connected to the controller. 2. Replace the HDD. 3. Replace the controller.
[3003]:
turned on or starting the self-diagnostic, the HDD stays busy for the specified time or more.
823
Self-diagnostic Error: NIB MAC address check sum error The result of the MAC
[6101]
address check sum does not match the check sum stored in ROM. PHY IC error
Defective controller Replace the controller.
[6104]
The PHY IC on the controller cannot be correctly recognized. Same as SC823-[6101]
SM
4-17
Service Call
No. Definition
Symptom
Possible Cause/Countermeasure PHY IC loop-back error
[6105]
An error occurred during the loop-back test for the PHY IC Same as SC823-[6101] on the controller. Self-diagnostic Error: NVRAM NVRAM damaged or The controller cannot abnormal Backup battery has discharged NVRAM socket damaged Replace the NVRAM. Self-diagnostic Error: RTC/Optional NVRAM [1501]: Clock error An RTC device is recognized, and the RTC defective NVRAM without RTC installed Backup battery discharged Replace the NVRAM with another NVRAM with an RTC device. difference between the RTC device and the CPU exceeds the defined limit. No RTC device is recognized. [15FF]: RTC not detected
824
recognize the standard NVRAM installed or detects that the NVRAM is defective.
826
B The RTC device is not detected.
NVRAM without RTC installed Backup battery discharged
Replace the NVRAM with another NVRAM with an RTC device.
827
Self-diagnostic Error: RAM
B229
4-18
SM
Service Call
No. Definition
Symptom
Possible Cause/Countermeasure Verification error Loose connection Error is detected during a Defective SDRAM DIMM Defective controller 1. Replace the SDRAM DIMM. 2. Replace the controller. Resident memory error Defective RAM DIMM The SPD values in all RAM DIMM are incorrect or unreadable. Defective SPD ROM on RAM DIMM Defective 12C bus Replace the RAM DIMM.
[0201]
write/verify check for the standard RAM (SDRAM DIMM).
[0202]
828
Self-diagnostic Error: ROM Boost lap code error The boot monitor and OS program stored in the ROM Defective ROM DIMM Defective controller 1. Replace the ROM DIMM. 2. Replace the controller.
[0101]
DIMM is checked. If the check sum of the program is incorrect, this SC code is displayed. ROMFS error All areas of the ROM DIMM are checked. If the check sum of all programs stored in the ROM DIMM is incorrect, this SC code is displayed.
[0104]
Defective ROM DIMM Replace the ROM DIMM.
829
Self-diagnostic Error: Optional RAM
SM
4-19
Service Call
No. Definition
Symptom
Possible Cause/Countermeasure Verification error (Slot 1) Not specified RAM DIMM installed Defective RAM DIMM 1. Replace the RAM DIMM. board. Composition error (Slot 1) Not specified RAM DIMM The result of checking the installed Defective RAM DIMM 1.Replace the RAM DIMM. 2.Replace the controller board. IEEE1394 I/F abnormal 2. Replace the controller
[0401]
The data stored in the RAM in Slot 1 does not match the data when reading.
[0402]
composition data of the RAM in Slot 1 on the controller is incorrect.
851
The IEEE1394 interface cannot be used, due to a driver error. Wireless card startup error The machine starts up. The IEEE802 11b card connection
IEEE1394 interface board defective Defective controller board
853
board is recognized. wireless LAN card or bluetooth card is not recognized.
The
Loose connection between the card and the connection board
B229
4-20
SM
Service Call
No. Definition 854
Symptom B
Possible Cause/Countermeasure Wireless card access error The machine has been reading the data from the card. The machine loses Loose connection between the card and the connection board access to the card; the wireless LAN card or bluetooth card connection board is still recognized. Wireless card error
855
Some illegal data is found in the card. Wireless card connection board error An error is detected in the wireless LAN card or bluetooth card connection board. USB I/F Error
Defective card
Troubleshooting
856
Defective card connection board
Defective controller 857 B USB interface error is detected. 1. Check the USB connections, and make sure that they are securely connected. 2. Replace the controller board. HDD startup error at main power on HDD is connected but a driver 860 B error is detected. The driver does not respond with the status of the HDD within 30 s. No formatted HDD Label name input during formatting is corrupted. Defective HDD 1. Reformat the HDD. 2. Replace the HDD.
SM
4-21
B229
Service Call
No. Definition
Symptom
Possible Cause/Countermeasure HDD reboot error Loose connection Defective cables Defective HDD The HDD does not become Defective controller 1. Check the connection between the HDD and controller. 2. Check and replace the cables. 3. Replace the HDD. 4. Replace the controller. HDD read error Bad sector detected during operation of the HDD Defective HDD Defective controller 1. Reformat the HDD.
861
ready within 30 seconds after the power is supplied to the HDD.
863
The data stored in the HDD cannot be read correctly.
2. Replace the HDD when SC863 occurs more than ten times or it takes more than twenty seconds to get ready condition. 3. Replace the controller board.
HD data CRC error 864 D While reading data from the HDD or storing data in the HDD, data transmission fails. Defective HDD
B229
4-22
SM
Service Call
No. Definition
Symptom
Possible Cause/Countermeasure HD access error
865
An error other than SC863 and SC864 is detected while operating the HDD. SD card authentication error Defective HDD
866
A digital license error of an SD card application is detected. SD card error An application SD card is
SD card data has corrupted. Store correct data in the SD card.
867
removed from the boot slot while an application is activated. SD card access error
An application SD card is ejected.

(-13 to -3: File system error, other number: Device error) SD card not inserted correctly SD card defective Controller board defective 1. 868 D An error report is sent from the SD card reader. 2. For a file system error, format the SD card on PC. For a device error, turn the main switch off and on. 3. Remove and re-install the SD card. 4. Replace the SD card. 5. Replace the controller.
SM
4-23
Service Call
No. Definition
Symptom
Possible Cause/Countermeasure Address book data error The address book in the hard disk is accessed. An error is detected in the address book data; address book data is not read; or data is not written into the address book.. To recover from the error, do any of the following countermeasures: Format the address book by using SP5-846-050 (all data in the address bookincluding the user codes and countersis initialized). HDD received mail data error Defective HDD An error is detected in the Power failure during an access to the HDD 1. 2. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832-007). Replace the HDD. Data corruption Defective hard disk Defective controller software Replace the hard disk (the user codes and counters are recovered when the main switch is turned on if those data are stored in Smart Device Monitor for Admin).
870
872
received mail data partition of the HDD at machine initialization.
B229
4-24
SM
Service Call
No. Definition
Symptom
Possible Cause/Countermeasure HDD sent mail data error Defective HDD Power failure during an access to the HDD 1. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832-008). 2. Replace the HDD. Delete All error 1: HDD An error is detected while the Not installed Data Overwrite Security Unit (SD card) Defective HDD 1. Install the Data Overwrite Security Unit (B735). 2. Replace the HDD.
Troubleshooting
873
An error is detected in the sent mail data partition of the HDD at machine initialization.
874
all data of the HDD or NVRAM are formatted physically by the Data Overwrite Security Unit (B735). Delete All error 2: Data area An error is detected while the all data of the HDD or NVRAM are formatted logically by the Data Overwrite Security Unit (B735).
The logical format for HDD fails. Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again.
875
876
Log Data Error Log Data Error 1 An error was detected in the handling of the log data at -001 D power on or during machine by switching the machine off while it is operating. Damaged log data file in the HDD SP5832-004.
operation. This can be caused Initialize the HDD with
SM
4-25
B229
Service Call
No. Definition
Symptom
Possible Cause/Countermeasure Log Data Error 2 An encryption module not installed
-002
Same as -001
1.
Disable the log encryption setting.
2. Install the encryption module Log Data Error 3 Invalid encryption key log due to defective NVRAM -003 D data Same as -001 1. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004. 2. Disable the log encryption setting. Log Data Error 4 Unusual encryption function -004 D log due to the defective Same as -001 NVRAM data Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004. Log Data Error 5 Installed NVRAM or HDD, which is used in other -005 D machine Same as -001 1. 2. Log Data Error 99 -099 D Same as -001 Other than above causes Ask your supervisor. Reinstall the previous NVRAM or HDD. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004.
B229
4-26
SM
Service Call
No. Definition
Symptom
Possible Cause/Countermeasure HDD Data Overwrite Security SD card error Defective SD card (B735) The all delete cannot be Not installed SD card (B735) 1. Replace the NVRAM and then install the new SD card (B735). 2. Check and reinstall the SD card (B735). File Format Converter (MLB) error MLB was not answered within the specified time. MLB defective
877
executed even though the Data Overwrite Security Unit (B735) is installed and activated.
880
A request to get access to the
SC9xx
Electronic total counter error 900 D The value of the total counter is out of the normal range. Printer error 920 B An application error that stops the machine operation is detected. Printer font error A necessary font is not found in 921 B A necessary font is not found in the SD card when the printer application starts. data. the SD card. The SD card data is corrupted. Check that the SD card stores correct Defective software Unexpected hardware resource (e.g., memory shortage) Defective NVRAM
SM
4-27
Service Call
No. Definition
Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure Net file error Defective hard disk Data corruption Defective software When SC860 to 865 occurs with this SC at the same time: The main cause is in SC860 to 865. Refer to those possible causes. When only SC925 occurs: The management file for net files is corrupted; net files are not normally read. Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software Initialize the net file partition of the HDD (with SP5-832-11) after you ask the customer for permission. This also erases the transmitted and received fax documents. If the above actions do not solve the problem, try to initialize all partitions of the HDD with SP5-832-1 after you ask the customer for permission. Replace the HDD.
925
B229
4-28
SM
Service Call
No. Definition
Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure Software performance error The software attempted to perform an unexpected operation. NOTE: When this error occurs, the file name, address, and data
990
will be stored in NVRAM. This information can be checked by using SP7-403. See the data and the situation in which this SC occurs. Then report the data and control center. Software continuity error The software attempted to perform an unexpected operation. However, unlike SC990, the process can keep on running. Undefined error An error not controlled by the
Software defective Internal parameter incorrect Insufficient working memory
991
Logged only; the machine can continue to operate
992
system occurred (the error does not come under any other SC code).
Defective software program
SM
4-29
B229
Troubleshooting
conditions to your technical
Service Call
No. Definition
Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure Application function selection error Software for that application is defective An option required by the The application selected by a key application (RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed. Too complicated nest of the fax group address As for the fax operation problem, simplify the nest of the fax group address. Application start error Software for that application is defective After switching the machine on, An option required by the application (RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed. Check the setting of SP5875-001. If the setting is set to "1 (OFF)", change it to "0 (OFF)".
997
press on the operation panel does not start or ends abnormally.
998
the application does not start within 60 s. (No applications start or end normally.)
B229
4-30
SM
Self-Diagnostic mode
4.2 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

4.2.1 OVERVIEW
There are three types of self-diagnostics for the controller. Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics just after the power has been turned on. Detailed self-diagnostics: The machine does the detailed self-diagnostics by using a loop-back connector (P/N G0219350) SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on or during operation.
4.2.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

This detailed self-diagnostic test requires a loop-back connector (P/N: G0219350). 1. 2. Turn off the machine (power switch located in the rear of the machine) and attach the loop-back connector to the parallel interface. Hold down "Pound (#) " key, press and hold down "Asterisk (*) " key, and then while pressing both keys at the same time, switch on the machine (power switch located in the rear of the machine). You will see Now Loading on the touch-panel, and prints the diagnostic report after completing the test. Refer to the diagnostics report for the detected errors. The errors detected during self-diagnostics can be checked with SP7-832-001 (Diag. Result). Refer to section 4.1 for details about the error codes.
Troubleshooting
SM
4-31
B229
General Troubleshooting
4.3 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING

4.3.1 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR EXPECTED PROBLEMS IN THE FIELD
No. Problems Possible causes/Countermeasures The engine entrance sensor may have a problem about its movement. 1 Trailing edge margin is not enough. 1. Check the trailing margin with SP2103-2 "Prt Erase Margin Adj TEdge Margin". 2. Check the engine entrance sensor. Make sure that the spring of the engine entrance sensor is correctly set. Memory defective A machine is still formatting the HDD. It takes 2 A machine stops indicating the "Please Wait" message. approximately 5 minutes. 1. Replace the controller board if this problem still occurs after checking above possible causes. 3 A machine automatically reboots. Check what SC happens to a machine and do the proper counter measure. You can confirm SC number with SP7403-1 to -10. SD card error (not installed or defective) Incorrect NIS or USB setting A machine does not get "Online 4 mode" even the copier screen comes up on the operation panel. 1. Check that an SD card is installed correctly. 2. Set the SP5985-001 for NIS setting or -002 for USB setting to the "1". 3. Replace the controller board if this problem still occurs after checking above possible causes. 5 6 SC142 occurs at power on. Background dirty occurs after recovering. Defective IPU 1. Replace the IPU. Defective IPU 1. Replace the IPU.
B229
4-32
SM
No.
Problems Horizontal line or no image area (0.1mm to 1.5mm width) occurs due to the other reason than a nozzle problem.
Possible causes/Countermeasures Defective IPU 1. Replace the IPU. Dirty paper path 1. Clean the paper path (transport roller, idle roller etc.)
Smeared dirt occurs in feed direction. Paper jam occurs at the registration roller. (A leading
edge of paper comes out 0mm to 0.5mm from the registration roller nip.) Paper jam occurs at the paper exit roller. (The leading edge of
Defective paper feed motor 1. Replace the paper feed motor.
10 paper is no damage but there is a line pressed like "Z" on the paper.)
Defective paper exit motor 2. Replace the paper exit motor.
4.3.2 POOR QUALITY IMAGE

Colors Not What You Expect
Cause 1: The correct paper was not used for the print job, or the paper was not loaded correctly. Check the selection for the type of paper in the printer driver (transparency, Solution 1: Cause 2: Solution 2: Cause 3: Solution 3: Cause 4: Solution 4: ink jet, plain paper, etc.). Confirm that the same type of paper is loaded correctly in the printer. The print mode selection was not correct. Make sure that the print mode selection in the printer software application and the printer driver is correct (Paper Type, Print Quality, Level Color, etc.) Job settings in the software application are not correct. Check the settings for the print job in the software application. The settings in the software application have priority over the printer driver settings. One or more print heads are blocked. Do cleaning Cycle 1 and then Cleaning Cycle 2.
SM
4-33
B229
Troubleshooting
Colors Faint
Cause 1: Solution 1: Cause 2: Solution 2: Cause: 3 Solution 3: The correct paper was not used for the print job. Check the selection for the type of paper in the printer driver (transparency, ink jet, plain paper, etc.). Confirm that the same type of paper is loaded in the printer. The print mode selection was not correct. Make sure that the print mode selection in the printer software application and the printer driver is correct (Paper Type, Print Quality, Level Color, etc.) Make sure that the Color/Black and White selection is correct. One or more print heads are blocked. Do cleaning Cycle 1 and then Cleaning Cycle 2.
Color Print Job Prints in Monochrome

Cause 1: Solution 1: Cause 2: Solution 2: Black and White was selected for the print job. On the Setup sheet of the printer driver, make sure Color is selected under Color/Black and White. Correct data not selected for the print job. Confirm that the software application printed the correct data.
White Patches, or Horizontal White Lines

Cause 1: Solution 1: Cause 2: Solution 2: Original image abnormal. In the software application, check the original image for streaking (especially at borders between different colors). Correct the original image. One or more print heads are blocked. Do cleaning Cycle 1 and then Cleaning Cycle 2.
Vertical White Lines

Cause: Solution: Solid or intermittent white lines from the top to the bottom of the sheet caused by a blocked ink nozzle. Do cleaning Cycle 1 once.
Image Chaffed in Horizontal Direction

Cause: Solution: Solid or intermittent white lines from edge to edge of the sheet caused by a blocked ink nozzle. Do cleaning Cycle 1 once.
B229
4-34
SM
Only 1 Line Printed at Leading Edge

Cause 1: Paper with punched holes, or thin or slick paper with too much play was used that allowed slippage during feed. Check the paper used for the print job and make sure that it meets standards Solution 1: for use with this printer. For more see the Operating Instructions or the last section Specifications of the Service Manual. Cause 2: Solution 2: Paper is jammed or slipping on the transport belt due to the accumulation of paper dust, etc. on the belt. Clean accumulated paper dust, etc. from the transport belt. The service technician must clean the transport belt.
Unwanted Dots
Cause: Solution: Flakes of paper dust or dry ink have fallen onto the printed sheet. Do cleaning Cycle 1 once. Operator should call for service if cleaning does
not solve the problem.
Text Dirty
Cause 1: Print job was not set up correctly for special print media. Special procedures are necessary to set up print jobs for special print media Solution 1: such as postcards, envelopes, and transparencies. Review and carefully follow the instructions in the Operating Instructions. Pay special attention to these settings Paper Type, Job Type, and Print Quality. Cause 2: The sheets are not flat or are deformed in some way. Make sure the sheets are perfectly flat (especially envelopes, postcards). Solution 2: Make sure the sheets neither curled nor deformed in any way. If using thick or any type of coated paper, make sure that the paper is approved for use with this printer. Cause 3: Solution 3: One or more print heads are blocked. Do cleaning Cycle 1 and then Cleaning Cycle 2.
Backs of Sheets Stained With Ink

Cause: Solution: Paper has jammed in the printer or the transport belt is dirty. Run a print job with several sheets of paper to use clean up the ink. Use a damp cloth to clean the surface of the transport belt, and then use a clean, dry cloth to clean the surface of the belt.
SM
4-35
Transparency Sheets Scratched

Cause: Solution: More than 1 sheet of transparency was set. Set transparencies one by one for printing one sheet at time. For more, please refer to the Operating Instructions.
Miscellaneous
Cause 1: The paper in use is not the correct paper for the print job. Check the paper loaded for feeding. Make sure that it matches the type of paper specified for the print job Solution 1: (transparency, ink jet, plain paper, etc.). Make sure that the paper is approved for use with this printer. For more, see the Operating Instructions or the Specifications in the last section of the Service Manual. Cause 2: Solution 2: Cause 3: Solution 3: Cause 4: Solution 4: Cause 5: Solution 5: The print mode selection was not correct. Make sure that the print mode selection in the printer software application and the printer driver is correct (Paper Type, Print Quality, Level Color, etc.) Make sure that the Color/Black and White selection is correct. Job settings in the software application are not correct. Check the settings for the print job in the software application. The settings in the software application have priority over the printer driver settings. Correct data not selected for the print job. Confirm that the software application printed the correct data. One or more of the nozzles is blocked. Do cleaning Cycle 1 once.
4.3.3 POOR PRINTER PERFORMANCE (MISCELLANEOUS)

Cannot set paper cassette.
Cause: The cassette is damaged or there is a jammed sheet of paper inside the printer. Remove the paper cassette. Remove the jammed sheet from inside the Solution: printer. Inspect the paper cassette for damage. If the cassette is damaged, replace the paper cassette.
B229
4-36
SM
Cannot remove paper cassette.

Cause: Solution: The paper cassette is blocked. Raise the paper output tray and reset it. Attempt to remove the paper cassette again. Replace the paper cassette.
Printer does not turn on.

Cause: The power cord is not connected to the power source. Follow the instructions on the screen if an error message appears in the Status Monitor, or do the following: Make sure the power cord is securely connected to the printer and to the Solution: power source. Make sure the operator knows how to switch on the printer correctly. For more, refer to the Setup Guide and the Operating Instructions. Switch the printer off. Remove the power cord from the power source. Wait 2
minutes then connect the power cord and switch the printer on.
Printer fails to enter Ready mode.

Cause: Solution: An error has occurred at the printer. Check the operation panel and determine which LEDs are on or flashing (temperature out of range, ink out, cover open, etc.). Refer to the checklist in the previous section.
Printing stops before print job finishes.

Cause: Solution: Cause: Solution: The print heads have overheated. The printer has stopped to allow the print heads to cool. After the print heads have cooled down to the standard operating temperature, the print job will resume. A fatal error has occurred on the computer side. Check the screen for messages. Shut down the computer. Switch off the printer. Check the USB connection at the printer and the computer. Switch the printer on. Restart the computer.
Printer loses power.

Cause: Solution: Power loss at the source. Power to the printer has been interrupted, due to a power failure or some other external cause. Unplug the printer from the power source. Wait 2 minutes. Reconnect the power plug and switch the printer on.
SM
4-37
Cause: Solution:
The printer has blown a fuse. The printer must be returned to the service center for replacement of the F300 board.
Firmware update failed.

Cause: Solution: Incorrect procedure. Update the firmware. (5.3)
4.3.4 UNUSUAL NOISES

Printer emits strange noises at power on.
Cause: Solution: Cause: Solution: Paper scraps remain inside the printer. Open the top cover, rear cover (or Duplex Unit) cover and inspect inside the printer and Duplex Unit for paper scraps left behind after clearing a paper jam. Special print media may make a noise on feeding the last sheet. Load one blank sheet of plain paper at the bottom of a stack of special media (coated paper, etc.) This problem may occur with a new paper cassette.
B229
4-38
SM
4.3.5 MAINTAINING THE PRINTER HEAD CONDITION

Preparing for Test Printing
1. 2. Make sure A4 size or LTR size paper is loaded in the printer. Make sure the printer is ready to print (the [Power] key is on).
Entering the User Tools

3. 4. Press the "User Tools" button to enter the UP mode. Select Maintenance.
Cleaning Cycle 1
1. Select Clean Print-heads (User Tools > Maintenance > Clean Print-heads), and then press the OK button. 2. Select the five print-heads to be cleaned with left or right arrow button. (You can cancel it also pressing the left or right arrow button again.) You can select multiple print-heads in this cleaning. If the print-head is selected for this cleaning, the checked mark shows at left next to the print-head name. 3. Press OK button, and then This function consumes a large quantity of ink. Do you want to continue? message shows on the display. 4. Press Yes button to execute the cleaning. 5. 6. After cleaning, Cleaning complete message shows on the display. Press Exit button and follow the instruction on the display. Wait for cleaning to finish. Never do any other operation at the time of cleaning. Check the results of the nozzle check pattern. Examine which nozzles need cleaning. Do Steps 1 to 6 again. You can do this up to three times. Do Cleaning Cycle 2 after the third printing of the test problem if the pattern is still not correct.
Troubleshooting
Cleaning Cycle 2
Cleaning Cycle 2 uses a lot of ink. Do Cleaning Cycle 1 at least 3 times before you do Cleaning Cycle 2.
SM
4-39
B229
1. Select Flush Print-heads (User Tools > Maintenance > Flush Print-heads), and then press the "OK" button. 2. Select the five print-heads to be cleaned with left or right arrow button. (You can cancel it also pressing the left or right arrow button again.) You can select multiple print-heads in this cleaning. If the print-head is selected for this cleaning, the checked mark shows at left next to the print-head name. 3. Press OK button, and then This function consumes a large quantity of ink. Do you want to continue? message shows on the display. 4. Press Yes button to execute the cleaning. 5. After flushing, Flushing complete message shows on the display. 6. Press "Exit" button and follow the instruction on the display. Wait for cleaning to finish. Never do any other operation at the time of cleaning. Check the results of the nozzle check pattern after completing this function.
If Cleaning Cycle 2 Does Not Solve the Problem...

7. 8. 9. Let the machine stay unused overnight. In the morning, turn on the main power switch of the machine. Print the nozzle check pattern using UP mode.
10. Then check the results of the test pattern. 11. If a problem is remaining, clean the print heads. For details, see the "Print Heads" ("Cleaning Procedures" in the section "Preventive Maintenance"). 12. Print the nozzle check pattern using UP mode again, and then check the results of the test pattern. 13. If a problem is still remaining, wipe the nozzle surface with a damp cloth (For details, refer to the "Trouble Shooting Guide"). Use water; Never use alcohol or dry cloth for wiping the nozzle surface. 14. Print the nozzle check pattern using UP mode again, and then check the results of the test pattern. 15. If a problem is still remaining, replace the engine unit.
B229
4-40
SM
Image Test Mode
4.4 IMAGE TEST MODE

4.4.1 OVERVIEW
The SBU, BCU, and LD board have the function that prints out their test pattern. It is useful to find the defective board when the image data problem is occurred.
4.4.2 IPU TEST

The BCU board has the IPU test pattern. To make sure the image processing is functioning, output the IPU test pattern with SP4-417.
SM
4-41
B229
Troubleshooting
Electrical Component Defects
4.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

4.5.1 SENSORS
Component CN Condition Open Symptom The Paper Jam message will appear whenever First Registration 115-6 (BCU) Shorted a copy is made (paper hasn't reached the sensor). The Paper Jam message appears even if there is no paper at the sensor. The Paper Jam message will appear whenever Relay 116-2 (BCU) Shorted Open By-pass Paper End 127-11 (BCU) Shorted Open a copy is made except for 1st and by-pass tray feeding. The Paper Jam message appears even if there is no paper at the sensor. The Paper End indicator lights when the bypass tray is selected, even if there is paper in the tray. The Paper End indicator does not light when the bypass tray is selected, even if there is no paper in the tray. The Paper Jam message will appear whenever a copy is made from the bypass tray. The Paper Jam message will appear whenever Junction Gate 114-A9 (BCU) Shorted Open a copy is made (paper hasn't reached the sensor). The Paper Jam message appears even if there is no paper at the sensor. The Paper Jam message will appear whenever Exit 114-A4 (BCU) Shorted Open a copy is made (paper hasn't reached the sensor). The Paper Jam message appears even if there is no paper at the sensor.
B229
4-42
SM
Component
CN
Condition Open
Symptom The Paper Jam message will appear whenever a copy is made (paper hasn't reached the sensor). The Paper Jam message appears even if there is no paper at the sensor. The Paper Jam message will appear whenever a copy is made (paper hasn't reached the sensor). The Paper Jam message appears even if there is no paper at the sensor. SC120 is displayed. APS and Auto Reduce/Enlarge do not function correctly. If the Start button is pressed with the platen cover or A(R)DF closed, Cannot detect original size is displayed. The CPU cannot detect the original size properly. APS and Auto Reduce/Enlarge do not function correctly. The CPU cannot detect the original size properly. APS and Auto Reduce/Enlarge do not function correctly. The Paper Jam message will appear whenever a duplex copy is made (paper hasn't reached the sensor). The Paper Jam message appears even if there is no paper at the sensor.
Troubleshooting
Engine Entrance
161-2 (BCU)
Shorted
Engine Exit
114-B7 (BCU)
Open
Shorted Scanner H.P. 102-2 (BCU) Open Shorted Open Platen Cover 102-5 (BCU) Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted
Original Width
103-2,5 (BCU) 103-8,11 (BCU)
Original Length
Duplex Entrance
105-4 (DCB)
Open
Shorted
SM
4-43
B229
Component Duplex Exit
CN 106-4 (DCB)
Condition Open
Symptom The Paper Jam message will appear whenever a duplex copy is made (paper hasn't reached the sensor). The Paper Jam message appears even if there is no paper at the sensor. The Paper Jam message will appear whenever a duplex copy is made (paper hasn't reached the sensor). The Paper Jam message appears even if there is no paper at the sensor.
Shorted
Duplex Inverter
104-2 (DCB)
Open
Shorted Waste Ink Tank Full Sub Scan Encoder Main Scan Encoder Ink Full 123-1 (BCU) 161-7,8 (BCU) 3-3,4 (COM) 508-11 (BCU) 140-6,7 (I/F) 140-1,2 (I/F) Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted
SC520 is displayed.
SC210 or SC211 is displayed.
SC202 is displayed.
Lift sensor 1
SC503 is displayed.
Lift sensor 2
SC504 is displayed.
4.5.2 SWITCHES
Component Paper End CN 113-2 (BCU) 113Paper Size 3,4,6 (BCU) Condition Open Shorted Open Shorted Symptom The CPU cannot detect the paper end, and a paper jam may occur when a copy is made from the standard paper tray. The CPU cannot detect the proper paper size, and misfeeds may occur when a copy is made from the 1st paper tray.
B229
4-44
SM
Component Vertical Transport Door
CN 110-5 (BCU)
Condition Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted
Symptom The Cover Open indicator is lit even if the vertical transport door is closed. The Cover Open indicator is not lit even if the vertical transport door is opened. The CPU misdetects or is not able to detect the size of the paper set in the bypass tray, causing possible misfeeds when feeding from this tray. The machine detects that the one-sheet by-pass tray is open even it is closed. The machine does not detect that the one-sheet by-pass tray is open even it is actually opened. The machine does not open the one-sheet
Troubleshooting
By-pass Paper Size
1271,2,4,5 (BCU) 127-9 (BCU)
One-sheet By-pass Tray
One-sheet By-pass Paper Set
Open 113-8 (BCU) Shorted
by-pass shutter even a sheet of paper is set to the one-sheet by-pass tray. The machine open the one-sheet by-pass shutter even a sheet of paper is not set to the one-sheet by-pass tray. The Cover Open indicator is lit even if doors are closed. The Cover Open indicator is not lit even if doors are open. The Cover Open indicator is lit even if the right door is closed. The Cover Open indicator is not lit even if the right door is open. The Cover Open indicator is lit even if doors are closed. The Cover Open indicator is not lit even if doors are open.
One-sheet By-pass Exit Door
114-A2 (BCU)
Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted
Right Door
115-2 (BCU)
Front Door
111-4 (BCU)
SM
4-45
B229
Component
CN 114-A7 (BCU)
Condition Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open closed.
Symptom The Cover Open indicator is lit even if doors are The Cover Open indicator is not lit even if doors are open. The Cover Open indicator is lit even if doors are closed. The Cover Open indicator is not lit even if doors are open. SC200 is displayed. The machine does not turn on.
Left Door
Left Junction Cover
126-4 (BCU)
Carriage Position
161-5 (BCU)
Main
The machine Shorted does not turn off.
4.5.3 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

Fuse Rating 120 V 3.15A/250V 1A/250V 4A/250V 4A/250V 4A/250V 4A/250V 3.15A/250V 220 240 V 6.3A/250V 1A/250V 4A/250V 4A/250V 4A/250V 4A/250V 3.15A/250V Symptom when turning on the main switch
Power Supply Board FU1 FU2 FU4 FU5 FU6 FU7 FU8 No response.
High Voltage Power Supply F1 Lamp Inverter F1 1.25A/250V 2.5A/72V
B229
4-46
SM
SERVICE TABLES
Service Program Mode
5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Do not let the user access the SP mode. Only service representatives but no other persons are allowed to access the SP mode. The machine quality or its operation is NOT guaranteed after any person other than service representatives accesses the SP mode.
5.1.1 HOW TO ENTER THE SP MODE

The following two modes are available: SP Mode (Service Program Mode): The SP Mode includes the programs that are necessary for standard maintenance work. SSP Mode (Special SP Mode): The SSP Mode includes SP-Mode programs and some special programs. You need some extra knowledge to manipulate these special programs. For details, consult your supervisor.
Starting SP Mode
1. 2. Type the keys as follows: [Clear Modes] > [1] > [0] > [7]. Press the [Clear/Stop] key and hold it down until the SP-mode menu is displayed (about 3 seconds).
Selecting Programs
When a blinking underscore (or several blinking underscores) is displayed, you can type a number from the numeric keypad [D].
SM
5-1
B229
Service Tables
Service Program Mode
When the sign "
/OK" [A] is displayed upper right corner, you can scroll through
the menu by pressing the left-arrow key [B] or the right-arrow key [C]. To select a program, press the "OK" key [F].
Specifying Values
1. After locating a program, press the "OK" key. A blinking underscore (or several blinking underscores) indicates which value you can change. The value in parentheses is the default value of the menu. 2. 3. Type a necessary value from the numeric keypad. To switch between positive (plus) and negative (minus) values, press the [./*] (period/asterisk) key. To validate the value, press the "OK" key. To cancel the value, press the cancel key [E].
Activating Copy Mode

You can activate the copy mode while the SP mode is running. When you do so, the copier outputs images or patterns that help you adjust the SP-mode program. 1. 2. 3. Press the key. The copy mode is activated. key. Specify copy settings and press the "OK" key. To return to the SP mode, press the
You cannot end the SP mode while the copy mode is activated.
Quitting Programs/Ending (S)SP Mode

Press the key or the "Cancel" key to quit the program. You can end the SP mode by pressing one of these keys several times.
B229
5-2
SM
SP Mode Tables
5.2 SP MODE TABLES

The tables in this section list the service programs (SPs). The following codes are used: Asterisk (*): The settings are saved in the NVRAM. Most of them return to the default values when you execute SP 5801 2 The DFU menu is for design or factory use only. You must not change the settings. Brackets ([ ]): The brackets enclose the setting rage, default value, and minimum step (with unit) as follows: [Minimum to Maximum / Default / Step]. SSP: Consult your supervisor before you use this program.
5.2.1 SP1-XXX (FEED)

1001* [LE Regist] Leading Edge Registration Adjusts the printing leading-edge registration from paper trays. [9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] ( Copy Adjustments) Adjusts the printing trailing-edge registration from [9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Adjusts the printing leading-edge registration of 1001 5 OHP 1001 6 All Trays (Fact) 1001 7 By-pass (Fact) 1001 8 Duplex (Fact) 1001 9 End Space (Fact) 1001 10 OHP (Fact) OHP from the by-pass tray. [9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] These SPs store the factory setting of SP1001-1 to 5. Do the SP5884-1 when you change the values of SP1001-1 to 5 to the SP1001-6 to 10 (factory settings).
Service Tables
1001 1 All Trays 1001 2 By-pass 1001 3 Duplex
1001 4 End space
the paper trays.
[S-to-S Registration] Adjusts the printing side-to-side registration from each paper feed station. 1002* Adjustments are effective for all 4 possible feed trays (including optional trays). A "" value shifts the image to the right side of the paper. A "+" value shifts the image to the left side of the paper.
SM
5-3
B229
SP Mode Tables
The SP 1002 1 setting is applied to all trays, not just the 1st tray. Settings for trays 2 to 4 are offsets relative to the SP 1002 1 setting. For duplex copies, the value for the front side is determined by SP 1002-1 to -4, and the value for the rear side is determined by SP 1002-6. 1002 1 1st Tray 1002 2 1st Optional 1002 3 2nd Optional 1002 4 By-pass:100 1002 5 By-pass 1002 6 Duplex 1002 7 OHP 1002 8 1st Tray (Fact) 1002 9 1st Optional (Fact) 1002 10 2nd Optional (Fact) 1002 11 By-pass:100 (Fact) 1002 12 By-pass (Fact) 1002 13 Duplex (Fact) 1002 14 OHP (Fact) Resets each adjusted value (SP1002-1 to 7) to the factory setting. [9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] ( Adjustments) Copy
1003*
[Paper Buckle] Adjusts the amount of buckle that the paper feed motor applies to the paper after the registration sensor is activated. A higher setting applies greater buckling. [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 mm/step] Adjusts the amount of buckle that the paper feed motor applies to the paper after the belt entrance sensor is activated. A higher setting applies greater buckling. [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 mm/step]
1003 1 1st tray 1003 2 Reg Bank 1003 3 Reg By-pass 1003 4 Reg Duplex 1003 5 Belt1 Tray 1003 6 Belt1 Multi: Plain 1003 7 Belt1 Multi: Thk1 1003 8 Belt1 Multi: Thk2 1003 9 Belt1 Duplex
B229
5-4
SM
SP Mode Tables
1003 10 Belt2 Tray 1003 11 Belt2 Multi: Plain 1003 12 Belt2 Multi: Thk1 1003 13 Belt2 Multi: Thk2 1004 14 Belt2 Duplex
Adjusts the amount of buckle that the paper feed motor applies to the paper after the carriage sensor is activated. A higher setting applies greater buckling. [0 to 10 / 4 / 1 mm/step]
1014
[Single By-pass] Single By-pass Setting Adjusts the transport distance of paper fed from by-pass tray.
1014 1 Pre-feed Distance
Do not specify 40 mm with this SP. If so, the machine detects paper jam. [20 to 40 / 30 / 1 mm/step] Adjusts the interval for the single bypass mode to be ready. The machine resets the ready state for
1014 2 Reset Time
single bypass mode after the specified time with this SP has passed. [5 to 20 / 5 / 1 min/step]
Service Tables B229
1015
[Feed Time Adj] Feed Time Adjustment Adjusts the time when a paper stops to be dried. [0 to 80 / 10 / 1 sec/step] [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 sec/step] [0 to 40 / 7/ 1 sec/step] [0 to 20 / 2 / 1 sec/step] [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
1015 1 Pause 1 1015 2 Pause 2 1015 3 Pause 3 1015 4 Pause 4 1015 5 Pause 5
1017*
[Temp Abnormal] Abnormal Temperature Detection DFU The specified value with this SP is the threshold for machine stop. The machine stops when the measured temperature goes up to the specified
1017 1 High Temp Stop H 1017 2 High Temp HM
1017 3 High Temp Rec HL
value and recoveries when the measured temperature goes down to the specified value. This temperature is measured by thermistor at
SM
5-5
SP Mode Tables
the transport belt. [20 to 50 / 48.5 / 0.5C/step] 1017 4 Low Temp Rec LH 1017 5 Low Temp LM The specified value with this SP is the threshold for machine stop. The machine stops when the measured temperature goes down to the specified value and recoveries when the 1017 6 Low Temp Stop L measured temperature goes up to the specified value. This temperature is measured by thermistor at the transport belt. [1 to 20 / 1 / 0.5C/step]
1018*
[Env Temp Abnormal] Environment Temperature Abnormal Detection DFU The specified value with this SP is the threshold for machine stop. The measured temperature goes up to the specified value. This temperature is measured by thermistor at the carriage. [20 to 50 / 43.5 / 0.5C/step]
1018 1 High Temp Stop H
1018 2 High Temp HM
DFU The specified value with this SP is the threshold for machine recovery. The measured temperature goes down to the specified value. This temperature is measured by thermistor at the carriage. [20 to 50 / 41.5 / 0.5C/step]
1018 3 High Temp Rec HL
1018 4 Low Temp Rec LH 1018 5 Low Temp LM
DFU The specified value with this SP is the threshold for machine stop. The machine stops when the measured temperature goes down to the specified value and recoveries when the
1018 6 Low Temp Stop L
measured temperature goes up to the specified value. This temperature is measured by thermistor at the transport belt. [1 to 20 / 1 / 0.5C/step]
B229
5-6
SM
SP Mode Tables
[Feed Clutch Boost] Adjusts the amount of extra push that the feed clutch gives to the paper after the 1903 skew has been corrected at registration. This feature helps the registration roller feed certain types of paper (such as thick paper). Increase the value if thick paper is jamming after feeding from the registration roller. 1903 1 1st Tray 1903 2 By-pass: 100 1903 3 Optional Tray [0 to 100 / 30 / 5 ms/step] [0 to 100 / 10 / 5 ms/step]
[Option Tray Adj] Optional Tray Adjustment Adjusts the bottom plate pressure of the optional paper feed unit. 1908 +value increases pressure between the papers and the feeding roller at the optional feed unit. value decreases pressure between the papers and the feeding roller at the optional feed unit. 1908 1 1st Optional 1908 2 2nd Optional [2 to 2 / 0 / 1%/step]
Value SP3109-4.
[100 to 100 / 22 / 1/step]
1922 1 Adjusts the sub scan line referring to the adjustment sheet printed with This value is the factory setting. This value over 1922 2 Value(Fact) LEFT SCAN writes the value of SP1-922-1 when SP5-884-1 is executed. [-400 to 400 / 0 / 1 pulse/step] 1922 3 This value is reference for the returning way (front to rear: home position) scanning. Therefore, it is not adjusted normally. RIGHT SCAN rear) scanning position. [-400 to 400 / 0 / 1 pulse/step] 1922 4 Adjusts the gap between going way (rear to front) and returning way (front to
1923*
Belt Temp Adj] Belt Temperature Adjustment DFU [0 to 100 / 23 / 1 mm/step] [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
1923 1 Adj Value 1923 2 User Adj Value
SM
5-7
B229
Service Tables
1922*
SubScan: Send Adj Sub Scan: Line Adjustment
SP Mode Tables
Rev. 08/2007
5.2.2 SP2-XXX (DRUM)

2010 [Head Maint] Head Maintenance [0 to 30 / 0 / 1 /step] Executes the printer heads cleaning for each color. Check the nozzle check pattern with the SP3109-3. Set the number in correspond with each color if there is a problem in the sheet of the nozzle check pattern. 0: All colors, 1: Cyan, 2: Black 1, 4: Black 2, 8: Magenta, 16: Yellow If it is necessary to clean more than two colors at same time, set the total number of the colors to be cleaned. e.g. If you want to clean the printer heads of Magenta and Yellow, set 24 (8+16) in this SP. 2010 2 [Refresh] [0 to 30 / 0 / 1 /step] 2010 1 Cleaning
Executes the printer heads refreshing for each color. Do this SP in case that "Cleaning" (SP2010-1) does not solve a problem in the sheet of the nozzle check pattern. 0: All colors, 1: Cyan, 2: Black 1, 4: Black 2, 8: Magenta, 16: Yellow If it is necessary to clean more than two colors at same time, set the total number of the colors to be cleaned. e.g. If you want to clean the printer heads of Magenta and Yellow, set 24 (8+16) in this SP. 2012 1 [Initial Operation Settings for Engine Unit] [0 to 3 / 2 / 1 /step] The machine does the following when the main power is turned on: 0: Nothing at all (not possible to print). 1: Initial ink loading. After finishing, this SP value is changed to "2" automatically. 2: Usual warm-up procedure. 3: Refresh all heads. After finishing, this SP is changed to "2" automatically. During initial ink loading (when this SP is 1), the machine learns the "tank full" position of the tank lever and saves this data. If the machine does not have this data at normal warm-up (when this SP is 2), the machine performs air release and then ink loading. Important: Check the value of this SP mode if the machine performs ink loading or abnormal operations when you replace the engine unit.
B229
5-8
SM
Rev. 08/2007
SP Mode Tables
2100
[Spe Maint] Special Maintenance Ink Purge transporting the machine. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
2100 1 Removes remained ink from the sub tanks for replacing the engine unit or
2101
[Special Cleaning] Executes the head cleaning for each printer head. The machine uses 32.04 ml of ink for this special cleaning. Do not use customer's ink for this mode. After performing this special cleaning, you need to perform normal refreshing once to recover all nozzle condition. (Special cleaning flows ink at a faster speed, and sometimes air may get caught in the nozzle. As a result, the corrected nozzle may temporary write a white line. To recover such condition, you need to perform the normal refreshing once.)
2101 1 K1 2101 2 K2 2101 3 C
2101 4 M
2101 5
[Prt Erase Margin] Printer Erase Margin 2103 Adjusts the erase margin of each edge for each paper type or in each printing mode. 2103 1 Adj LEdge Margin Leading edge for standard paper [2 to 6 / 3.3 / 0.1 mm/step] 2103 2 Adj TEdge Margin Trailing edge for standard paper [0.5 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 mm/step] 2103 3 Adj Left Margin 2103 4 Adj Right Margin 2103 5 Lead Edge OHP 2103 6 Back End OHP 2103 7 Left Mar OHP 2103 8 Right Mar OHP 2103 9 Left Mar By-pass Left edge for standard paper [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Right edge for standard paper [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Leading edge for OHP [2 to 6 / 3.3 / 0.1 mm/step] Trailing edge for OHP [0.5 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 mm/step] Left edge for OHP [0 to 10 / 5 / 0.1 mm/step] Right edge for OHP [0 to 10 / 5 / 0.1 mm/step] Left edge in By-pass mode [0 to 10 / 5 / 0.1 mm/step]
Service Tables
2103 10 Right Mar By-pass Right edge in By-pass mode [0 to 10 / 5 / 0.1 mm/step]
SM
5-9
B229
SP Mode Tables
Rev. 08/2007
2103 11 2103 12
Lead Edge Envelope Back End Envelope
Leading edge for an envelope [2 to 50 / 38 / 0.1 mm/step]
Trailing edge for an envelope [2 to 16 / 8.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
2103 13 Left Mar Envelope 2103 14 Right Mar Envelope
Left edge for an envelope [0 to 10 / 5 / 0.1 mm/step] Right edge for an envelope [2 to 16 / 8.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
[Normal Fil Pos] Normal Filling Ink Position 2200* Displays the standard position of the ink actuator when the air releasing is done. These values are referred for checking the ink quantity. 2200 1 K1 2200 2 K2 2200 3 C 2200 4 M 2200 5 Y [0 to 60000 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
2505
[Wst Ink # Reset] Ink Collection Bottle Counter Reset Clears the ink collection bottle counter (Front or Rear). This clears the counter of SP7-221-2. Do this SP after replacing the front ink collection bottle. The counter of SP7-854-2 counts up after clearing the counter of SP7-221-2. Do SP7-804-005 instead of this SP.
2200 1 Front
2200 2 Rear
2507*
[Wst Ink Near Full] Ink Collection Bottle Near Full Threshold Specifies the threshold of the ink collection bottle near full. [500000 to 2000000 / 1212000 / 1/step]
2507 1 Rear
2508
[Exhalation Interval] Selects the exhalation interval. Multiple printing may cause blocked nozzles. The exhalation prevents a nozzle from being blocked. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: every twenty seconds, 1: every fifteen seconds
2508 1
B229
5-10
SM
SP Mode Tables
5.2.3 SP3-XXX (PROCESS)

3001* [Gamma Setting] 3001 1 K1 3001 2 K2 3001 3 C 3001 4 M 3001 5 Y DFU [1 to 9 / 5 / 1/step]
[Head: Gap Adj] Printer Head: Gap Adjustment 3002* Adjusts the head gap referring to the adjustment sheet printed with SP3109-1 (300 dpi) or 3109-2 (1200 dpi). 3002 1 300: A 3002 2 300: B 3002 3 300: C 3002 4 300: D 3002 5 300: E 3002 6 300: F 3002 7 300: G 3002 8 300: H 3002 9 300: I 3002 10 1200: A 3002 11 1200: B 3002 12 1200: C 3002 13 1200: D 3002 14 1200: E 3002 15 1200: F 3002 16 1200: G 3002 17 1200: H 3002 18 1200: I 3002 21 300: A (Fact) 3002 22 300: B (Fact) 3002 23 300: C (Fact) 3002 24 300: D (Fact) 3002 25 300: E (Fact) These are values of the factory settings. SP3002-001 to -009 are reset to these settings when SP5884-1 is done. [100 to 100 / 0 / 1/step]
Service Tables 5-11 B229
[100 to 100 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
SM
SP Mode Tables
3002 26 300: F (Fact) 3002 27 300: G (Fact) 3002 28 300: H (Fact) 3002 29 300: I (Fact) 3002 30 1200: A (Fact) 3002 31 1200: B (Fact) 3002 32 1200: C (Fact) 3002 33 1200: D (Fact) 3002 34 1200: E (Fact) 3002 35 1200: F (Fact) 3002 36 1200: G (Fact) 3002 37 1200: H (Fact) 3002 38 1200: I (Fact) Adjusts the gap precisely in B/W printing mode. Do this SP only if a result of executing "Standard" 3002 41 1200: Ruled line in the "Head Position Adjust" (User Tools > Maintenance > Adjustment > Head Position Adjustment) is not satisfactory. [10 to 10 / 0 / 1/step] These are values of the factory settings. SP3002-010 to -018 are reset to these settings when SP5884-1 is done.
[Print: Pattern] 3109 Prints the adjustment sheet for each print head adjustment. For details, refer to the "Image Adjustment" in section "Replace and Adjustment". 3109 1 Head: Gap Adj 300 3109 2 Head: Gap Adj 1200 3109 3 Nozzle Check 3109 4 Sub Scan: Send Adj 3109 5 Reg Adj 3109 6 Auto: Gap Adj 300 3109 7 Auto: Gap Adj 1200 3109 10 For Fact This sheet is for the print head gap adjustment in 300 x 300 dpi. This sheet is for the print head gap adjustment in 1200 x 1200 dpi. This sheet is for the nozzle pattern adjustment. This sheet is for the adjustment fro the paper feeding amount. This sheet is for the main and sub scan registration adjustment. DFU DFU DFU
B229
5-12
SM
SP Mode Tables
3112*
[Print Mode Set] Setting 1
Print Mode Setting [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
Bit0: Scanning method adjustment [0: Normal, 1: Always one scanning (rear to front)] It is possible to disable the returning scanning (front to rear: home position) to keep a high quality printing whatever jobs a machine gets. Bit1: One scanning mode for envelop [0: Normal, 1: Always one scanning (rear to front) when the envelop lever is "ON".] It is possible to disable the returning scanning (front to rear: home position) to 3112 1 keep a high quality printing when the envelop lever is set to "ON". Bit2 and 3: Image density adjustment at duplex mode [Bit3: "0" and Bit2: "1", 80%] [Bit3: "1" and Bit2: "0", 74%] [Bit3: "0" and Bit2: "0", Normal (80 to 98%)] It is possible to reduce ink to prevent the other side transparent image of paper when the duplex mode is used. Bit4: reserved Bit6 and 7: Not used 3112 2 Setting 2 3112 3 Setting 3 3112 4 Setting 4 3112 5 Setting 5 3112 6 Setting 6 3112 7 Setting 7 3112 8 Setting 8 3112 9 Setting 9 3112 10 Setting 10 DFU DFU Not used Not used DFU
Service Tables B229
Bit5: DFU
SM
5-13
SP Mode Tables
3130*
[Head Rank (W Ptn)]
3130 1 K1 3130 2 K2 3130 3 C 3130 4 M 3130 5 Y DFU [0 to 7/ 0 / 1/step]
3131*
[Head Rank (Vol)]
3131 1 K1 3131 2 K2 3131 3 C 3131 4 M 3131 5 Y DFU [0 to 7/ 0 / 1/step]
3557*
[Hum Bf Idle] Displays the relative humidity when the machine has previously capped the
3557 2 printer head. [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 %/step]
[Paper Feed ReDrv] Paper Feed Re-drive Setting 3803* Adjusts the paper feed retry time when the no-feed paper jam occurs at each tray. 3803 1 Retry Times [0 to 5 / 0 / 1/step]
5.2.4 SP4-XXX (SCANNER)

4008* 4008 1 [Sub Scan Mag] (Scanner) [0.9 to +0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1%/step] Adjusts the actual sub-scan direction scanning magnification. The higher the setting, the lower the scanner motor speed (Copy Adjustments-Scanning).
B229
5-14
SM
SP Mode Tables
4010
[LE Scan Regist] (Scanner) Adjustments-Scanning).
[2 to +2 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Adjusts the leading edge registration for scanning in platen mode (Copy 4010 1 (): The image moves toward the leading edge. (+): The image moves toward the trailing edge
4011*
[StoS Scan Regist] (Scanner) Adjustments-Scanning).
[2.5 to +2.5 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for scanning in platen mode ( Copy 4011 1 Increasing the value shifts the image to the right. Decreasing the value shifts the image to the left.
[Set Scale Mask] 4012 Adjusts the scanning margin individually for each of the four edges in book scanning or ADF scanning. It is generally best to adjust the scanning margin as little as possible, and use the printing margin for image adjustments. 4012 1 Book: Sub: LEdge 4012 2 Book: Sub: TEdge 4012 3 Book: Main: LEdge 4012 4 Book: Main: TEdge 4012 5 ADF: Sub: LEdge 4012 7 ADF: Main: LEdge 4012 8 ADF: Main: TEdge
Service Tables
[0 to 3 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
[Scanner Free Run] 4013 Performs a scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off. Press ON to start. Press OFF to stop. 4013 1 Lamp: ON 4013 2 Lamp: OFF [0 or 1/ 0 / 1/step] 0: Off, 1: ON
4014
[Scan] Enables the scanner home position detection. Disables the scanner home position detection.
4014 1 HP Detect: Enable 4014 2 HP Detect: Disable
SM
5-15
B229
SP Mode Tables
4020*
[Dust Check] Enables or disables the dust detection on the ADF scanning glass or the white plate. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Selects the dust detection level. [ 0 to 8 / 4 / 1 /step] 0: lowest detection level 8: highest detection level Selects the level of the sub scan line correction when using the ADF.
4020 1 Dust Detect: ON/OFF
4020 2 Dust Detect: Lvl
4020 3 Dust Reject: Lvl
[ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Off, 1: Weakest, 2: Weak, 3: Strong, 4: Strongest
4301 4301 1
[APS Sns Chk] Displays the status of the APS sensors and platen/DF cover sensor ( ADF/APS Sensor Output Display).
4303*
[APS Small Origin]
[0 = No (not detected) / 1 = Yes (A5/HLT LEF)]
Selects whether or not the copier will consider the original to be A5/HLT LEF 4303 1 when the APS sensors cannot detect its size. If Yes is selected, paper sizes that cannot be detected by the APS sensors are regarded as A5/HLT LEF. If No" is selected, Cannot detect original size will be displayed.
4305*
[APS Priority]
[0 = Unknown size / 1 = A5/HLT LEF]
4305 1 Selects the paper size when the machine detects the smaller size than B5.
B229
5-16
SM
SP Mode Tables
4400
[Org Edge Mask]
Set the Mask for Original
This SP sets the area to be masked during platen (book) mode scanning.
4400 1 Book:Sub:LEdge 4400 2 Book:Sub:TEdge 4400 3 Book:Main:LEdge 4400 4 Book:Main:TEedge 4400 5 ADF:Sub:LEdge 4400 7 ADF:Main:LEdge 4400 8 ADF:Main:TEdge [0 to 3.0 / 0 /0.1 mm/step]
4417
[IPU Test Pattern] Test Pattern 0 1 2 3 4 Scanned Image
Set IPU Test Pattern
Use this SP to select the IPU test pattern to print. [0to25/ 0 / 1/step] 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Grid Pattern CMYK Color Patch CMYK Gray Pattern (1) Gray Pattern (2)
Service Tables B229
Gradation Main Scan A Gradation Main Scan B Gradation Main Scan C Gradation Main Scan D Gradation Sub Scan 1 Grid Pattern Slant Grid Pattern Gradation RGBCMYK UCR Pattern Color Patch 16 (1) Color Patch 16 (2) Color Patch 16 64
Gray Pattern (3) Shading Pattern Thin Line Pattern Scanned + Grid Pattern Scanned + Grayscale Scanned + Color Patch Scanned + Slant Grid C Scanned + Slant Grid D H Rank Pt
4417 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
4429 4429 1
ICI Output Level Sets the ICI output level [35 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
SM
5-17
SP Mode Tables
4440
[Saturation Adj] [0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step] 0: High 1: Lowest 2: Lower 3: Default 4: Higher 5: Highest
Adjust Color Saturation
This SP adjusts the saturation level for copying.
4450 4450 1
[Scan Img Pas Swch] Scan Image Path Switch Bk Subt ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON Uses or does not use the black reduction image path. SH Pas ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON
4450 2
Uses or does not use the shading image path.
4460
[Digital AE set] Digital AE Setting FA [0 to 1024 / 364 / 4 digit/step] [512 to 1532 / 972 / 1 digit/step]]
4460 1 Low Limit Set 4460 2 Back Ground Level
[Print Coverage] Print Coverage Correction 4540 This SP corrects printer coverage of 12 hues (RY, YR, YG, etc. x 4 Colors (Option, R, G, B) for a total of 48 parameters. 001 004 RY: Option, R, G, B 005 008 YR: Option, R, G, B 009 012 YG: Option, R, G, B 013 016 GY: Option, R, G, B 017 020 GC: Option, R, G, B 021 024 CG: Option, R, G, B 025 028 CB: Option, R, G, B [128 to +128 / 0 / 1/step]
B229
5-18
SM
SP Mode Tables
029 032 BC: Option, R, G, B 033 036 BM: Option, R, G, B 037 040 MB: Option, R, G, B 041 044 MR: Option, R, G, B 045 048 RM: Option, R, G, B
4550 4551 4552 4553 4554 4565 4570 4571
[SApli: Txt Prt] Scanner Application: Text/Picture Mode [SApli:TxtOCR1] Scanner Application: Text Mode [SApli:TxtOCR2] Scanner Application: Text/Drop Out [SApli: T/P] Scanner Application: Text/Photo [SApli: Photo] Scanner Application: Photo [SApli: Gray Scale] Scanner Application: Gray Scale [SApli: Color T/P] Scanner Application: Text/Photo [SApli: Color P]: Text/Printing Paper MTF Lvl: 0-15 [0 to 15 / 8 / 1/step] -005 Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve image contrast. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect. -006
Service Tables B229
Smooth:0-7
[0 to 15 / 4 / 1/step]
Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for smoother. Brightness:1-255 [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
-007
Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter. Contrast:1-255 [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
-008
Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast. Standoff:1-7 [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
-009
Sets the Erasure level of Irregular Dots. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect. 0: Not activated
4580 4581 4582 4583 4584
[FaxApli: TxPrt] Fax Application: Text/Picture Mode [FaxApli: Txt] Fax Application: Text [FaxApli: T/P] Fax Application: Text/Photo [FaxApli: Photo] Fax Application: Photo [FaxApli: Original1] Fax Application: Original 1
SM
5-19
SP Mode Tables
4585
[FaxApli: Original2] Fax Application: Original 2 MTF Lvl: 0-15 [0 to 15 / 8 / 1/step] -005 Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve image contrast. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect. -006 Smooth:0-7 [0 to 15 / 4 / 1/step]
Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for smoother. Brightness:1-255 [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
-007
Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter. Contrast:1-255 [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
-008
Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast. Standoff:1-7 [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
-009
Sets the erasure level of irregular dots. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect. 0: Not activated [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] Texture:1-2 This SP (suffix "-010") only exists in SP4580, 4582 and 4583. Sets the erasure level of textures. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect. 0: Not activated
-010
4600 4600 1
[Display SBU ID] Displays the board version of the SBU. First production model indicates "0". [0 to7 / 0 / 1/step]
4602
[SBU Mem Access] SBU Memory Access Not Used
4602 1 SBU Mem Access 4602 2 Set Address 4602 3 Set Data
4603
[Do AGC] Auto Gain Control Execution Executes the AGC. DFU
4603 1 HP Detect: Enable 4603 2 HP Detect: Disable
B229
5-20
SM
SP Mode Tables
4604
[Open/Close FGATE] DFU Opens or closes the FGATe signal. This SP automatically returns to the default status (close) after exiting this SP. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: OFF, 1: ON
4604 1
4606 4606 1
[Wht Lvl Adj: R] White Level Adjustment: Red DFU This value is the target value of red for the white level adjustment. [0 to 1024 / 784 / 1 digit/step]
4607 4607 1
[Wht Lvl Adj: G] White Level Adjustment: Green DFU This value is the target value of green for the white level adjustment. [0 to 1024 / 784 / 1 digit/step]
4608 4608 1
[Wht Lvl Adj: B] White Level Adjustment: Blue DFU This value is the target value of blue for the white level adjustment. [0 to 1024 / 784 / 1 digit/step]
4624 4625
[BkLvl Adj: ValueG] Black Level Adjustment: Current Value of Green [BkLvl Adj: ValueB] Black Level Adjustment: Current Value of Blue CrsAdj: Rough Adjustment, FinAdj: Fine Adjustment RE (GE or BE): Red (Green or Blue) Even signal, RO (GO or BO): Red (Green or Blue) Odd signal -001 CrsAdj: RE (GE or BE) Clr Displays the black offset value for the each even circuit board (color printing speed). [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step] Displays the black offset value for the each even circuit board (B/W printing speed). [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]
-002 CrsAdj: RO (GO or BO) Clr or odd color (red, green or blue) signal in the CCD -003 FinAdj: RE (GE or BE) Clr -004 FinAdj: RO (GO or BO) Clr -005 CrsAdj: RE (GE or BE) Bk
-006 CrsAdj: RO (GO or BO) Bk or odd color (red, green or blue) signal in the CCD -007 FinAdj: RE (GE or BE) Bk -008 FinAdj: RO (GO or BO) Bk
SM
5-21
B229
Service Tables
4623
[BkLvl Adj: ValueR] Black Level Adjustment: Current Value of Red
SP Mode Tables
4628 4629 4630
[Gain Adj: ValueR] Gain Adjustment: Current Value of Red [Gain Adj: ValueG] Gain Adjustment: Current Value of Green [Gain Adj: ValueB] Gain Adjustment: Current Value of Blue R: Red, G: Green, B: Blue -001 Value: R(G or B)Even Clr -002 Value: R(G or B)Odd Clr -003 Value: R(G or B)Even Bk -004 Value: R(G or B)Odd Bk Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for each color (red, green or blue) in color printing mode. [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step] Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for each color (red, green or blue) in B/W printing mode. [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4640
[Bk Lvl Adj Loop] Black Level Adjustment Loop Adj1: First adjustment, Adj2: Second adjustment Displays the black level adjustment time for each mode. [0 to 20 / 0 / 1 time/step]
4640 1 Adj1:Clr 4640 2 Adj1:BK 4640 3 Adj2:Clr 4640 4 Adj2:BK
4641
[White Lvl Loop] White Level Adjustment Loop Displays the white level adjustment time for each mode. [0 to 20 / 0 / 1 time/step]
4640 1 Color 4640 2 B/W
4646
[Read Adj Timeout] Read Adjustment Timeout Displays the result of the AGC adjustment. If the AGC adjustment fails, SC141 (Bk Lvl) or SC142 (White Lvl) occurs. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: OK, 1: AGC adjustment failure
4640 1 Bk Offset Adj1 4640 2 Bk Offset Adj2 4640 3 Wht Lvl Adj
B229
5-22
SM
SP Mode Tables
4647
[Read Hard Error] Read Hard Error Displays the result of the SBU connection check. If the SBU connection check fails, SC144-001,
4640 1 At Power On
-002 or -003 occurs. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: OK, 1: SBU connection check failure
4654 4655 4656
[BkLvl Adj: PrevR] Black Level Adjustment: Previous Value of Red [BkLvl Adj: PrevG] Black Level Adjustment: Previous Value of Green [BkLvl Adj: PrevB] Black Level Adjustment: Previous Value of Blue Displays the previous vale of the black level adjustment for each color. CrsAdj: Rough Adjustment, FinAdj: Fine Adjustment RE (GE or BE): Red (Green or Blue) Even signal, RO (GO or BO): Red (Green or Blue) Odd signal -001 CrsAdj: RE (GE or BE) Clr -002 CrsAdj: RO (GO or BO) Clr -003 FinAdj: RE (GE or BE) Clr -004 FinAdj: RO (GO or BO) Clr -005 CrsAdj: RE (GE or BE) Bk -006 CrsAdj: RO (GO or BO) Bk -007 FinAdj: RE (GE or BE) Bk -008 FinAdj: RO (GO or BO) Bk [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]

Service Tables B229
[0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]
4658 4659 4660
[Gain Adj: PrevR] Gain Adjustment: Previous Value of Red [Gain Adj: PrevG] Gain Adjustment: Previous Value of Green [Gain Adj: PrevB] Gain Adjustment: Previous Value of Blue Displays the previous vale of the gainl adjustment for each color. RE (GE or BE): Red (Green or Blue) Even signal, RO (GO or BO): Red (Green or Blue) Odd signal -001 S Prev: RE (GE or BE) Clr -002 S Prev: RO (GO or BO) Clr -003 S Prev: RE (GE or BE) BK -004 S Prev: RO (GO or BO) Bk [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
SM
5-23
SP Mode Tables
4661 4662 4663
[BkLvl2 Adj: PrevR] Black Level2 Adjustment: Previous Value of Red [BkLvl2 Adj: PrevG] Black Level2 Adjustment: Previous Value of Green [BkLvl2 Adj: PrevB] Black Level2 Adjustment: Previous Value of Blue Displays the previous vale of the second black level adjustment for each color. CrsAdj: Rough Adjustment, FinAdj: Fine Adjustment RE (GE or BE): Red (Green or Blue) Even signal, RO (GO or BO): Red (Green or Blue) Odd signal -001 CrsAdj: RE (GE or BE) Clr -002 CrsAdj: RO (GO or BO) Clr -003 FinAdj: RE (GE or BE) Clr -004 FinAdj: RO (GO or BO) Clr -005 CrsAdj: RE (GE or BE) Bk -006 CrsAdj: RO (GO or BO) Bk -007 FinAdj: RE (GE or BE) Bk -008 FinAdj: RO (GO or BO) Bk [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]
[0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]
[BkLvl Adj: FactR] Black Level Adjustment: Factory Setting of Red 4673 Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment. CrsAdj: Rough Adjustment, FinAdj: Fine Adjustment RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal 4673 1 CrsAdj: RE Clr 4673 2 CrsAdj: RO Clr 4673 3 FinAdj: RE Clr 4673 4 FinAdj: RO Clr 4673 5 CrsAdj: RE Bk 4673 6 CrsAdj: RO Bk 4673 7 FinAdj: RE Bk 4673 8 FinAdj: RO Bk [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]
[0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]
B229
5-24
SM
SP Mode Tables
[BkLvl Adj: FactG] Black Level Adjustment: Factory Setting of Green 4674 Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment. CrsAdj: Rough Adjustment, FinAdj: Fine Adjustment GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal 4674 1 CrsAdj: GE Clr 4674 2 CrsAdj: GO Clr 4674 3 FinAdj: GE Clr 4674 4 FinAdj: GO Clr 4674 5 CrsAdj: GE Bk 4674 6 CrsAdj: GO Bk 4674 7 FinAdj: GE Bk 4674 8 FinAdj: GO Bk [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]
[0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]
[BkLvl Adj: FactB] Black Level Adjustment: Factory Setting of Blue 4675 Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment. CrsAdj: Rough Adjustment, FinAdj: Fine Adjustment BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]
Service Tables B229
4675 1 CrsAdj: BE Clr 4675 2 CrsAdj: BO Clr 4675 3 FinAdj: BE Clr 4675 4 FinAdj: BO Clr 4675 5 CrsAdj: BE Bk 4675 6 CrsAdj: BO Bk 4675 7 FinAdj: BE Bk 4675 8 FinAdj: BO Bk
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]
[0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit/step]
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit/step]
[Gain Adj: FactR] Gain Adjustment: Factory Setting of Red 4677 Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment. RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal 4677 1 Factini: RE Clr 4677 2 Factini: RO Clr 4677 3 Factini: RE BK 4677 4 Factini: RO Bk [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
SM
5-25
SP Mode Tables
[Gain Adj: FactG] Gain Adjustment: Factory Setting of Green 4678 Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment. GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal 4678 1 Factini: GE Clr 4678 2 Factini: GO Clr 4678 3 Factini: GE BK 4678 4 Factini: GO Bk [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
[Gain Adj: FactB] Gain Adjustment: Factory Setting of Blue 4679 Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment. BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal 4679 1 Factini: BE Clr 4679 2 Factini: BO Clr 4679 3 Factini: BE BK 4679 4 Factini: BO Bk [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4685
[Gray Balance: R] Gray Balance Adjustment: Red Adjusts the gray balance of red signal for each scanning mode. DFU [512 to 511 / 240 / 1 digit/step]
4685 1 For Book Read 4685 2 For DF Read
4686
[Gray Balance: G] Gray Balance Adjustment: Green Adjusts the gray balance of green signal for each scanning mode. DFU [512 to 511 / 240 / 1 digit/step]
4687
[Gray Balance: B] Gray Balance Adjustment: Blue Adjusts the gray balance of blue signal for each scanning mode. DFU [512 to 511 / 240 / 1 digit/step]
B229
5-26
SM
SP Mode Tables
[DF Density Adj] DF Density Adjustment 4688 Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF. Adjusts the density level if the image density of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is different. 4688 1 [50 to 150 / 109 / 1%/step]
4690 4691 4692
[White Lvl Peak: R] White Level Scanning Peak Value: Red [White Lvl Peak: G] White Level Scanning Peak Value: Green [White Lvl Peak: B] White Level Scanning Peak Value: Blue -001 RE (GE or BE) -002 RO (GO or BO) -003 RE (GE or BE) BK -004 RO (GO or BO) Bk Displays the peak level of the white level scanning. [0 to 1024 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4693 4694 4695
[Black Lvl Scan: R] Black Level Scanning Peak Value: Red [Black Lvl Scan: G] Black Level Scanning Peak Value: Green [Black Lvl Scan: B] Black Level Scanning Peak Value: Blue -002 RO (GO or BO) -003 RE (GE or BE) BK -004 RO (GO or BO) Bk Displays the peak level of the white level scanning. [0 to 1024 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
Service Tables B229
-001 RE (GE or BE)
[DF Shade FreeRun] DF Free Run for Shading 4802 Executes the scanner free run of shading movement with exposure lamp on or off. Press "OFF" to stop this free run. Otherwise, the free run lasts. 4802 1 Lamp ON 4802 2 Lamp OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON
4804 4804 1
[Home Position] Scanner Home Position Adjustment Checks the scanner home position movement.
SM
5-27
SP Mode Tables
4806
[Carriage Escape] Moves the carriage from the scanner home position. Dust may fall through the DF contact glass. Therefore, do this SP when you transport this machine for a long term.
4806 1
[Test Scan IPU] Test Scanner IPU Board 4904 Performs a write and read check of the ASICs on the scanner IPU board and displays the result. Turn off and on after doing this SP. Bit0: ASIC0 image register Bit1: ASIC0 serial register Bit2: ASIC1 register Bit3: ASIC1 register 4904 1 Test 1 Bit4: ASIC1 register Bit5: ASIC3 register Bit6: ASIC2 register Bit7: ASIC4 (MC) register Bit8: ASIC4 (YK) register 0: OK, 1: Error Bit0: ASIC0 image register Bit1: ASIC0 serial register Bit2: ASIC1 register Bit3: ASIC1 register 4904 2 Test 2 Bit4: ASIC1 register Bit5: ASIC3 register Bit6: ASIC2 register Bit7: ASIC4 (MC) register Bit8: ASIC4 (YK) register 0: OK, 1: Error
4905 4905 1
[Dither Select] DFU Changes the parameters for error diffusion. [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
B229
5-28
SM
SP Mode Tables
4907
[SBU Pattern] Selects the test pattern generated by the controller board. [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Default (Scanned image) 1: Grid pattern 2: Gradation main scan 3: Gradation sub scan 4 to 250: Default (Scanned image)
4907 1
4909 4910 4911 4912 4913 4914 4915 4916 4917 4918
[Man Gamma: P ColK] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Photo Mono-Black [Man Gamma: Txt: K] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Text Black [Man Gamma: Txt: C] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Text Cyan [Man Gamma: Txt: M] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Text Magenta [Man Gamma: Txt: Y] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Text Yellow [Man Gamma: T: ColK] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Text Mono-Black [Man Gamma: Pht: K] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Photo Black [Man Gamma: Pht: C] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Photo Cyan [Man Gamma: Pht: M] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Photo Magenta -001 Offset: Highlight -002 Offset: Middle -003 Offset: Shadow -004 Offset: IDmax -005 Option: Highlight -006 Option: Middle -007 Option: Shadow -008 Option: IDmax
Service Tables
[Man Gamma: Pht: Y] Manual Gamma Adjustment: Photo Yellow Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for each color in Photo mode or Text mode. [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step]
Adjusts the option data of the printer gamma for each color in Photo mode or Text mode. [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4991
[IPU Img Path Sel] IPU Image Path Switch Use this SP to determine the image path. Enter the number to be selected using the 10-key pad.
4991 1 RGB Frame Mem 0 1 Scanner input RGB images Scanner I/F RGB images
[0 to 11 / 2 / 1/step]
SM
5-29
B229
SP Mode Tables
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
RGB images done by Shading correction (Shading ON, Black offset ON) Shading data Inner pattern data: Gray scale RGB images done by Line skipping correction RGB images done by Digital AE RGB images done by Vertical line correction RGB image done by Scanner gamma correction RGB image done by Filtering correction
10 RGB images done by Full color ADS 11 RGB image done by Color correction
4993
[Highlight Cor] Highlight Correction Sensibility [0 to 9 / 4 / 1/step]
4993 1 Selects the Highlight correction level. 0: Weakest sensibility, 9: Strongest sensibility Region [0 to 9 / 4 / 1/step] 002 Selects the range level of Highlight correction. 0: Weakest skew correction, 9: Strongest skew correction
5.2.5 SP5-XXX (MODE)

5001 001 [All Indicators On] All LEDs turn on. The LCD turns on or off every 3 seconds. Press the reset key to end this program.
5024*
[mm/inch Selection] Selects whether mm or inches are used in the display. After selecting the number, you must turn the main power switch off and on. Europe/Asia model: [0: mm / 1: inch] American model: [0: mm / 1: inch]
001
B229
5-30
SM
Rev. 11/2006
SP Mode Tables
5045 001
[Counter Model] Selects the counting method if the meter charge mode is enabled with SP5-930-001. You can change the setting only one time. [0 or 1/ 0] 0: Development counter. Shows the total counts for color (Y,M,C) and black (K). 1: Paper counter. Shows the total page counts for: Color Total, Black Total, Color Copies, Black Copies, Color Prints, Black Prints. NOTE: Settings 2 and 3 are also displayed on the LCD, but they cannot be selected. [Refill Toner Displ] Refill Toner Detection Display Enables or disables the toner refill detection display. 001 Toner Refill Detection Display *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 /- ] 0: ON, 1: OFF
5051
5055
[Display IP address] Display or does not display the IP address on 001 Display IP address *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Not display, 1: Display
Service Tables B229
the LCD.
5056
[Coverage Counter] Display or does not display the coverage 001 Coverage Counter *CTL counter on the LCD. [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Not display, 1: Display
5104*
[A3 Double Count] SSP A3 Double Count *CTL [0 = No / 1 = Yes / 2 = No Unclear] Selects whether the machine counts twice for each sheet of A3/11"x 17". If this 001 is set to Yes is selected, the total (mechanical) counter and the current user counter will both increment by two for each A3/11" x 17" sheet.
SM
5-31
SP Mode Tables
5112
[Non-Std. Paper Set] Non-Standard Paper Set Determines whether a non-standard paper size can be input for the universal cassette trays (Tray 2, Tray 3) 001 [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: No 1: Yes. If 1 is selected, the customer will be able to input a non-standard paper size using the UP mode.
5113
[Optional Counter Type] This program specifies the counter type. 0: None 1: Key card (RK 3, 4) 001 Default Optional Counter Type 2: Key card (down) *CTL 3: Prepaid card 4: Coin Rack 5: MF key card 8: Key counter + Vendor 9: Bar-code Printer This program specifies the external counter type. 002 External Optional Counter Type *CTL 0: None 1: External optional counter type 1 2: External optional counter type 2 3: External optional counter type 3
5118
[Disable Copying]
*CTL [0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]
001 This program disables copying.
B229
5-32
SM
SP Mode Tables
5120*
Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal
*CTL
[0=Yes / 1=Standby only / 2=No]
Determines under which conditions the copy job settings are reset when the key counter is removed. With 0, the settings are cleared if the counter is 001 removed at the end of a job or midway through a job. With 1, they are only cleared if the counter is removed at the end of a job. With 2, they are not cleared at all, under either condition. With duplex copies, the job settings are always preserved, regardless of the setting of this SP mode.
5121* 001
Count Up Timing of paper exit.
*CTL
[0 = Feed In / 1 = Exit]
Selects whether the key counter increments at time of paper feed-in or at time
5127
[APS Mode]
*CTL
[0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]
001 This program disables the APS.
5128
[Code Mode With Key/Card] 001 DFU
*CTL
Service Tables
5131
[Size For Dest]
*CTL [0: DOM (Japan)/1: NA /2: EU or ASIA]
The program selects a paper size system from the following alternatives: the AB 001 system (0), the LT system (1), and the AF system (2). (Default depends on DIP SW 101 setting.)
5150
[By-pass Long Paper]
*CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: OFF, 1: ON
Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by-pass tray is used or not. 001 Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by-pass tray is limited to 600 mm, but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm.
5162
[App. Switch Method]
*CTL [ 0: Soft Key Set/1: Hard Key Set]
001 This program specifies the switch that selects an application program.
SM
5-33
B229
SP Mode Tables
[Fax Printing Mode at Optional] 5167 Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device. This SP is used when the receiving fax is accounted by an external accounting device. 001 Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off [ 0 or 1 / 0 / ] *CTL 0: Automatic printing 1: No automatic printing
[CE Login] 5169 If you change the printer bit switches, you must log in to service mode with this SP before you go into the printer SP mode. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 CE Login *CTL 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
5178*
[Copy Data Security Setting] Do this SP after installation of the Copy Data Security Unit. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Copy data security function disabled 001 1: Copy data security function enabled The copy data security option will not operate correctly after installation until this SP is turned on. This SP is not displayed until the machine is powered on with the Copy Data Security Setting board installed.
[Set Time] Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone. Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.) DOM: +540 (Tokyo) 5302 NA :-300 (New York) EU :+ 60 (Paris) CH :+480 (Peking) TW :+480 (Taipei) AS :+480 (Hong Kong)
B229
5-34
SM
SP Mode Tables
002 Set Time
*CTL #
[ -1440 to 1440 / Area / 1 min./step ]
5307
[Summer Time] [ 0 or 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step] Setting 001 0: Disabled 1: Enabled NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0 Enables or disables the summer time mode. Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise, this SP is not activated even if this SP is set to "1". Rule Set (Start) Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode. There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the first digit, so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting. 1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12] 3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5] 003 4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday] 5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23] 7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour For example: 3500010 (EU default) The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March The digits are counted from the left. Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1". Rule Set (End) Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode. There are 8 digits in this SP. 004 1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12] 3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5] 4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday] 5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23] The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00". /step] 8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
Service Tables B229
SM
5-35
SP Mode Tables
The digits are counted from the left. Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
[Access Control] 5401 When installing the SDK application, SAS (VAS) adjusts the following settings. DFU 006 C 016 DS 026 F 036 S 046 P 076 SDK 1 086 SDK 2 096 SDK 3 200 SDK1 Unique ID SDK1 201 Certification Method 210 SDK2 Unique ID SDK2 211 Certification Method 220 SDK3 Unique ID SDK3 221 Certification Method *CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU *CTL DFU *CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU *CTL DFU *CTL [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU *CTL This ID is overwritten by SAS (VAS) when you install or uninstall the SDK application. SSP: These SPs are not disclosed due to the security protection.
5404 001
[User Code Clear] Clears the counts for the user codes assigned by the key operator to restrict the use of the machine. Press [Execute] to clear.
B229
5-36
SM
SP Mode Tables
5501
[PM Alarm Interval]
*CTL [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Alarm off 1 to 9999: Alarm goes off when Value (1 to 9999) x 1000 PM counter [ 0 or 1 / 1 / ]
001 Printout
002 ADF
0: No alarm sounds 1: Alarm sounds after the number of originals passing through the A(R)DF 10,000
5504
[Jam Alarm] included). [ 0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
*CTL
Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not 001
0: Zero (Off), 1: Low (2.5K jams), 2: Medium (3K jams), 3: High (6K jams)
5505*
[Error Alarm] Sets the error alarm level. The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the 001 error alarm counter decreases "1" when any SC is not detected during specified sheets of copies (for example, default 1500 sheets). The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter reaches "5". [0 to 255 / 15 / 100 copies per step] *CTL 0: Off, 1: On, DFU 0: Off, 1: On, DFU 0: Off, 1: On, DFU [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 /step] DFU
Service Tables
5507
[Supply Alarm] 001 Paper Size 002 Staple 003 Toner 128 Interval :Others 132 Interval :A3 133 Interval :A4 134 Interval :A5 141 Interval :B4 142 Interval :B5
SM
5-37
B229
SP Mode Tables
160 Interval :DLT 164 Interval :LG 166 Interval :LT 172 Interval :HLT
5508* 001*
[Auto Call Setting] Jam Remains
*CTL 0: Disable, 1: Enable
Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam. Frequent Jams 0: Disable, 1: Enable
002*
Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams. Door Open 0: Disable, 1: Enable
003*
Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open. Jam Remains: Time [ 03 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute /step]
011* Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an unattended paper jam. This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1. Freq Jam: # of Time [ 02 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step] 012* Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call. This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1. Door Open: Time 013* call. This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1. 021* Jam Remains: Mode 0: Automatic Call 1: Audible Warning at Machine 0: Automatic Call 1: Audible Warning at Machine [ 03 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute/step]
Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a
Determines what happens when a paper jam is left unattended. 022* Freq Jam: Mode
Determines what happens when a paper jam happens continually. Door Open: Mode 023* 0: OFF, 1: ON
Determines what happens if the door remains open (15 min.). Displays a warning if set to ON. Pressing the call button will contact the service center.
B229
5-38
SM
SP Mode Tables
[SC/Alarm Setting] 5515
*CTL
With NRS (New Remote Service) in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call when an SC error occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when an SC error occurs. 001 SC Call 002 Service Parts Near End 003 Service Parts End 004 User Call 006 Communication Test 007 Machine Information 008 Alarm Notice 009 Non Genuine Toner 010 Supply Automatic Order 011 Supply Management Report 012 Jam/Door Open Call [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off,1: On [0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off,1: On [0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
5610 004
[ACC Factory Setting] Recalls the factory settings. Value Setting Overwrites the current values onto the factory settings. Restore Org Recalls the previous settings.
Value
005
006
5801
[Memory Clear] Before executing any of these SP codes, print an SMC Report. 001 All Clear Initializes items SP5801-002 to -014 below. Turn off and on the main power switch after executing this SP. 002 Engine Clears the engine settings. 003 SCS Clears the system settings.
SM
SP Mode Tables
5801 004
[Memory Clear] Before executing any of these SP codes, print an SMC Report. IMH Clears IMH data. DFU MCS Clears MCS data. DFU Copier Clears the copy application settings. Fax Clears the fax application settings. Printer Clears the printer application settings. Scanner Clears the scanner application settings. GWWS/NFA 010 Delete the netfile application management files and thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID. NCS Initializes the system default and interface settings (IP address also), 011 SmartNetMonitor for Admin, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings. The name of Apple talk is not cleared only if this SP is executed. Turns off and on after executing this SP. R-FAX 012 Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers. 014 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings. Clear UCS Setting Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service) settings. MIRS Setting Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service) settings. CCS Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control Service) settings.
005
006
007
008
009
015
016
017
B229
5-40
SM
Rev. 08/2007
SP Mode Tables
5801
[Memory Clear] Before executing any of these SP codes, print an SMC Report. Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) settings. 019 LCS Initializes the LCS (Log Count Service) settings.
5803
INPUT CHECK ( Input Check)
5804
OUTPUT CHECK ( Output Check)
5807
5811*
[Destination Code] Sets the destination code after replacing the BCU PCB 001 0: Japan, 1: NA, 2: EU, 3: Asia, 4: China, 5: Taiwan, 6: Korea, 7: Other
[Machine Serial] Machine Serial Number 001 Set 002 Display ( Serial Number Input) Displays the machine serial number.
5812
[Service TEL] Telephone *CTL Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed 001 on the Counter List, which can be printed with the users Counter menu. This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input). Facsimile 002 printed on the Counter List. This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input). Supply 003 *CTL *CTL
Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number is
Use this to input the telephone number of your supplier for consumables. Enter the number and press "StringIn" key. Press the Clear modes key to delete the telephone number. *CTL
004 Sales
SM
SP Mode Tables
Rev. 08/2007
Sales 004
*CTL
Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency. Enter the number and press #. Press the Clear modes key to delete the telephone number. *CTL Selects the remote service setting. [ 0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
5816
[NRS Function]
001 I/F Setting
0: Remote service off 1: CSS remote service on 2: NRS remote service on Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
002 CE Call
0: Start of the service, 1: End of the service This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to 2. Enables or disables the remote service function.
003 Function Flag
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL when calling the RCG.
007 SSL Disable
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Uses the RCG certification 1: Does no use the RCG certification Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling
008 RCG Connect Timeout
the RCG. [1 to 90 / 10 / 1 second/step] Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the
009 RCG Write Timeout
RCG. [1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second/step] Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the
010 RCG Read Timeout 011 Port 80
RCG. [1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second/step] Enables/disables access via port 80 to the SOAP
B229
5-42
SM
Rev. 08/2007
SP Mode Tables
[0 or 1 / 0 / ] 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Function Flag 021 This SP displays the Cumin installation end flag. 1: Installation completed 2: Installation not completed Install Status This SP displays the Cumin installation status. 022 0: Basil not registered 1: Basil registered 2: Device registered Connect Mode (N/M) 023 This SP displays and selects the Cumin connection method. 0: Internet connection 1: Dial-up connection 061 NotiTime ExpTime DFU Proximity of the expiration of the certification. HTTP Proxy Use 062 This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine communicates with the service center.
Service Tables
HTTP Proxy Host This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between Cumin-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the customer proxy server address. The address is necessary to set up Cumin-N. 063 The address display is limited to 127 characters. Characters beyond the 127th character are ignored. This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report. HTTP Proxy Port Number This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication between Cumin-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set up 064 Cumin-N. This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report. 065 HTTP Proxy Aut Usr
SM
5-43
B229
SP Mode Tables
This SP sets the HTTP proxy authentication user name. The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st character is ignored. This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report. HTTP Proxy Aut Pass This SP sets the HTTP proxy authentication password. 066 The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st character is ignored. This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report. Cer Updt Cond Displays the status of the certification update. 0 1 2 3 4 067 11 12 The certification used by Cumin is set correctly. The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated. The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the successful update. The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the failed update. The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update is being sent to the GW URL. A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection. The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the certification update request. The notification of the request for certification update has completed 13 successfully, and the system is waiting for the certification update request from the rescue GW URL 14 15 The notification of the certification request has been received from the rescue GW controller, and the certification is being stored. The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of the successful completion of this event.
B229
5-44
SM
SP Mode Tables
16
The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the failure of this event. The certification update request has been received from the GW URL, the GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was completed, but an error has been received, and the rescue certification is being recorded The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL is being notified of the failure of the certification update.
17
18
Cer Abnml Cause Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of the certification. 0 1 068 2 3 4 5 6 069 Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress. Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has expired. An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification has expired. Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual certification. Notification of a common certification without ID2. Notification that no certification was issued. Notification that GW URL does not exist.
Service Tables B229
Cert: Updtt ReqID The ID of the request for certification. Firm Updating Displays the status of the firmware update. Firm UpFlg No HDD
083
084 This setting determines if the firmware can be updated, even without the HDD installed. Firm Up Usr Conf This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the previous version of 085 the firmware before the firmware update execution. If the option to confirm the previous version is selected, a notification is sent to the system manager and the firmware update is done with the firmware files from the URL.
SM
5-45
SP Mode Tables
Firmware Size 086 Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the firmware data files during the firmware update execution. 087 CERT: Macro Version Displays the macro version of the NRS certification. CERT: PAC Version Displays the PAC version of the NRS certification. CERT: ID2 Code 089 Displays ID2 for the NRS certification. Spaces are displayed as underscores (_). Asterisks (*) indicate that no NRS certification exists. CERT: Subject 090 Displays the common name of the NRS certification subject. CN = the following 17 bytes. Spaces are displayed as underscores (_). Asterisks (*) indicate that no DESS exists. CERT: Serial Number 091 Displays serial number for the NRS certification. Asterisks (*) indicate that no DESS exists. CERT: Issuer 092 Displays the common name of the issuer of the NRS certification. CN = the following 30 bytes. Asterisks (*) indicate that no DESS exists. CERT: St ExpTime 093 Displays the start time of the period for which the current NRS certification is enabled. CERT: End ExpTime 094 Displays the end time of the period for which the current NRS certification is enabled.
088
B229
5-46
SM
SP Mode Tables
Ins Country Select from the list the name of the country where Cumin-M is installed in the machine. After selecting the country, you must also set the following SP codes for Cumin-M: 150 SP5816-153 SP5816-154 SP5816-161 0: Japan, 1: USA, 2: Canada, 3: UK, 4: Germany, 5: France 6: Italy, 7: Netherlands, 8: Belgium, 9: Luxembourg, 10: Spain Aut Line Detect Press [Execute]. Setting this SP classifies the telephone line where Cumin-M is connected as either dial-up or push type, so Cumin-M can automatically distinguish the 151 number that connects to the outside line. The current progress, success, or failure of this execution can be displayed with SP5816 152. If the execution succeeded, SP5816 153 will display the result for confirmation and SP5816 154 will display the telephone number for the Line Detect Rst Displays a number to show the result of the execution of SP5816 151. Here is a list of what the numbers mean. 0: Success 1: In progress (no result yet). Please wait. 2: Line abnormal 152 3: Cannot detect dial tone automatically 4: Line is disconnected 5: Insufficient electrical power supply 6: Line classification not supported 7: Error because fax transmission in progress ioctl() occurred. 8: Other error occurred 9: Line classification still in progress. Please wait.
Service Tables B229
connection to the outside line.
SM
5-47
SP Mode Tables
Dial/Push Select This SP displays the classification (tone or pulse) of the telephone line to the access point for Cumin-M. The numbered displayed (0 or 1) is the result of the execution of SP5816 151. However, this setting can also be changed manually. [0to1/0/1] 153 0: Tone Dialing Phone 1: Pulse Dialing Phone Inside Japan "2" may also be displayed: 0: Tone Dialing Phone 1: Pulse Dialing Phone 10PPS 2: Pulse Dialing Phone 20PPS Outline Phone # The SP sets the number that switches to PSTN for the outside connection for Cumin-M in a system that employs a PBX (internal line). If the execution of SP5816-151 has succeeded and Cumin-M has connected to the external line, this SP display is completely blank. 154 If Cumin-M has connected to an internal line, then the number of the connection to the external line is displayed. If Cumin-M has connected to an external line, a comma is displayed with the number. The comma is inserted for a 2 sec. pause. The number setting for the external line can be entered manually (including commas). Remove Service: PPP Recognition Timeout SSP: Sets the length of the timeout for the Cumin-M connection to its access 155 point. The timeout is the time from when the modem sends the ATD to when it receives the result code. [1 to 65536 / 60 / 1 /step] Dial Up User Use this SP to set a user name for access to remote dial up. Follow these rules 156 when setting a user name: Name length: Up to 32 characters Spaces and # allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double quotation marks (").
B229
5-48
SM
SP Mode Tables
Dial Up Password Use this SP to set a password for access to remote dial up. Follow these rules 157 when setting a user name: Name length: Up to 32 characters Spaces and # allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double quotation marks ("). Phone Number Use this SP to set the telephone number of the line where Cumin-M is 161 connected. This number is transmitted to and used by the Call Center to return calls. Limit: 24 numbers (numbers only) Ans Timing Adj When the Call Center calls out to a Cumin-M modem, it sends a repeating ID tone (*#1#). This SP sets the line remains open to send these ID tones after the 162 number of the Cumin-M modem is dialed up and connected. [0 to 24/ 1 /1 /step] The actual amount of time is this setting x 2 sec. For example, if you set "2" the line will remain open for 4 sec. Access Point This is the number of the dial-up access point for Cumin-M. If no setting is done 163 for this SP code, then a preset value (determined by the country selected) is used. Default: 0 Allowed: Up to 16 alphanumeric characters Comm Line This SP sets the connection conditions for the customer. This setting dedicates the line to Cumin-M only, or sets the line for sharing between Cumin-M and a fax unit. 164 [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: Line shared by Cumin-M/Fax 1: Line dedicated to Cumin-M only If this setting is changed, the copier must be cycled off and on. SP5816 187 determines whether the off-hook button can be used
Service Tables
SM
5-49
B229
SP Mode Tables
to interrupt a Cumin-M transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction. 173 Modem Serial Number This SP displays the serial number registered for the Cumin-M. Lmt Resend Cncl Normally, it is best to allow unlimited time for certification and ID2 update requests, and for the notification that the certification has been completed. 174 However, Cumin-M generates charges based on transmission time for the customer, so a limit is placed upon the time allowed for these transactions. If these transactions cannot be completed within the allowed time, do this SP to cancel the time restriction. FAX TX Priority This SP determines whether pushing the off-hook button will interrupt a Cumin-M transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction. This SP can be used only if SP5816-164 is set to "0". [0 or 1/ 0 / - ] 187 0: Disable. Setting the fax unit off-hook does not interrupt a fax transaction in progress. If the off-hook button is pushed during a Cumin-M transmission, the button must be pushed again to set the fax unit on-hook after the Cumin-M transmission has completed. 1: Enable. When Cumin-M shares a line with a fax unit, setting the fax unit off-hook will interrupt a Cumin-M transmission in progress and open the line for a fax transaction. 200 Polling Man Exc Executes the polling test. Instl: Condition Displays a number that indicates the status of the NRS service device. 0: Neither the NRS device nor Cumin device are set. 1: The Cumin device is being set. Only Box registration is completed. In this 201 status the Basil unit cannot answer a polling request. 2: The Cumin device is set. In this status the Basil unit cannot answer a polling request. 3: The NRS device is being set. In this status the Cumin device cannot be set. 4: The NRS module has not started.
B229
5-50
SM
SP Mode Tables
202
Instl: ID# Allows entry of the number of the request needed for the Cumin device. Instl: Reference Executes the inquiry request to the NRS GW URL. Instl: Ref Rslt Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with SP5816-203. 0: Succeeded 1: Inquiry number error 2: Registration in progress
203
204 3: Proxy error (proxy enabled) 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled) 5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password) 6: Communication error 7: Certification update error 8: Other error 9: Inquiry executing Instl: Ref Section 205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the GW URL in answer to the inquiry request. Displayed only when the result is registered at the GW URL. 206 Instl: Rgstltn Executes Cumin Registration. Instl: Rgstltn Rst Displays a number that indicates the registration result. 0: Succeeded 2: Registration in progress 3: Proxy error (proxy enabled) 207 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled) 5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password) 6: Communication error 7: Certification update error 8: Other error 9: Registration executing
Service Tables
SM
5-51
B229
SP Mode Tables
Instl Error Code Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either SP5816 204 or SP5816 207 was executed. Cause Illegal Modem Parameter Code -11001 -11002 -11003 -12002 Operation Error, Incorrect Setting -12003 -12004 208 -2385 -2387 -2389 -2390 Error Caused by URL -2391 Meaning Chat parameter error Chat execution error Unexpected error Inquiry, registration attempted without acquiring device status. Attempted registration without execution of an inquiry and no previous registration. Attempted setting with illegal entries for certification and ID2. Attempted dial up overseas without the correct international prefix for the telephone number. Not supported at the Service Center Database out of service Program out of service Two registrations for same device Parameter error Basil not managed Device not managed Box ID for Basil is illegal Device ID for Basil is illegal Incorrect ID2 format Incorrect request number format
Response from GW -2392 -2393 -2394 -2395 -2396 -2397 -2398 209 Instl Clear
Releases a machine from its Cumin setup. Print Com Log Prints the communication log.
250
B229
5-52
SM
SP Mode Tables
5821
[NRS Address] 001 CSS-PI Device Sets the PI device code. After you change this setting, you must turn the machine off and on. Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote 002 RCG IP Address Communication Gate) destination for call processing at the remote service center. [00000000h to FFFFFFFFh/1]
5824
NVRAM Upload 001 ( NVRAM Upload)
5825
NVRAM Download 001 ( NVRAM Download) *CTL Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility. 050 1284 Compatibility (Centro) [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step] Enables or disables ECP Compatibility. [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step] 052 ECP (Centro) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 3. This SP is activated only when SP5-828-50 is set to "1". Enables/disables Job Spooling. 065 Job Spooling [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step] 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at 066 Job Spooling Clear: Start Time power on. 0: ON (Data is cleared) 1: OFF (Automatically printed) Validates or invalidates the job spooling function for 069 Job Spooling (Protocol) each protocol. 0: Validates 1: Invalidates
Service Tables B229
5828
[Network Setting]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
SM
5-53
SP Mode Tables
5828
[Network Setting]
*CTL bit0: LPR bit1: FTP bit2: IPP bit3: SMB bit4: BMLinkS bit5: DIPRINT bit6: (Reserved) bit7: (Reserved) Enables or disables the Telnet protocol.
090 TELNET (0: OFF 1: ON)
[ 0 or 1 / 1 / ] 0: Disable, 1: Enable Enables or disables the Web operation.
091 Web (0: OFF 1: ON)
[ 0 or 1 / 1 / ] 0: Disable, 1: Enable
Operation IPv6 Link Local Address This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN 145 (802.11b) in the format: "Link Local Address" + "Prefix Length" The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each. 147 149 151 153 155 Operation IPv6 Status Address 1 Operation IPv6 Status Address 2 Operation IPv6 Status Address 3 Operation IPv6 Status Address 4 Operation IPv6 Status Address 5 IPv6 Manual Setting Address 156 This SP is the IPv6 manually set address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format: "Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length" These SPs are the IPv6 status addresses (1 to 5) referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format: "Status Address" + "Prefix Length" The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
B229
5-54
SM
SP Mode Tables
5828
[Network Setting] each. IPv6 Gateway Address 158
*CTL
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits
This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b). The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
5832
[HDD] HDD Initialization 001 Format ALL 002 HDD Formatting (IMH) 003 Format Thumbnail 004 Format Job Log 005 Format Font 006 Format User Info 007 Format Rec Mail 008 Format Sed Mail 009 Formatting DFU Data
*CTL
Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP mode only if there is a hard disk error.
011 Format Ridoc I/F
5839
[IEEE1394] 007 Cycle Master
*CTL DFU: Turns the cycle master function on/off. [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step] 0: OFF, 1: ON DFU: Selects either Standard, 'IRM Color Copy', or 'Always Effective'. DFU: Turns the IRM 1394a check on/off. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
008 BCR mode
009 IRM 1394a Check
0: OFF, 1: ON If the IRM is not defined as 1394a standard, its node is used as IRM. DFU
010 Unique ID
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON
SM
5-55
B229
Service Tables
010 Formatting All Log
SP Mode Tables
DFU: Prevents initiators from logging on or makes initiators log off. [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF 011 Logout (Prevents the initiators, having already logged on, to log on if they try to log on.) 1: ON (Makes initiators, having already logged on, to log off if they try to log on.) DFU: Allows/disallows an initiator to exclusively log 012 Login on. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF (Disallows), 1: ON (Allows) DFU: Specifies the maximum initiators able to log 013 Login MAX on. [0 to 63 / 8 / 1 /step]
5840
[IEEE 802.11b] [1 to 11 or 13 / 11 or 13 / 1 /step] Channel MAX *CTL Europe: 1 to 13, default: 13 NA/ Asia: 1 to 11, default: 11 Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the 006 wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The default settings are set for the maximum end of the range for each area. Adjust the upper 4 bits to set the maximum number of channels. DFU Do not change the setting.
B229
5-56
SM
SP Mode Tables
[ 1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step] Channel MIN *CTL Europe: 1 to 13 NA/ Asia: 1 to 11 Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the 007 wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area. Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels. DFU Do not change the setting. [00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary] 00: Key #1 011 WEP Key Select *CTL 01: Key #2 (Reserved) 10: Key #3 (Reserved) 11: Key #4 (Reserved) Selects the WEP key.
5841
[Supply Name] 001 Toner Name: Bk 002 Toner Name: C 003 Toner Name: Y 004 Toner Name: M 007 Org Stamp Specifies supply names. These appear on *CTL the screen when the user presses the Inquiry button in the user tools screen.
Service Tables
5842
[GWWS Analysis] DFU Setting 1 Bit Groups 0 This is a debugging tool. It sets 001 the debugging output mode of each Net File process. Default: Bit SW 1000 0000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 System & other groups (LSB) Capture related Certification related Address book related Machine management related Output related (printing, delivery) Repository related Debug log output
SM
5-57
B229
SP Mode Tables
Setting 2 Bit 002 Default: Bit SW 0000 0000 7 Groups
0-6 Not used Log time stamp setting 0: Date/Hour/Minute/Second 1: Minute/Second/Msecond
5844
USB Transfer Rate 001 Sets the speed for USB data transmission. [Full Speed] [Auto Change] Vendor ID 002 Sets the vendor ID: Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company [0x0000 to 0xFFFF/1] DFU Product ID 003 Sets the product ID. [0x0000 to 0xFFFF/1] DFU Device Release No. Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display. 004 [0000 to 9999/1] DFU Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal number recognized as the BCD.
5845 001
[Delivery Server Setting] FTP Port Num
*CTL
Provides items for delivery server settings. [ 0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step]
Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server. Srv IP (Primary) Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
002 Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the transfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting.
B229
5-58
SM
SP Mode Tables
Delivery Error Display Time 006
[ 0 to 999 / 300 / 1 second /step]
Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayed when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external device. Srv IP (Secondary) Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
008
Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as the secondary delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting of the IP address without reference to the DNS setting. Delivery Server Model [ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
009
Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device. 0: Unknown, 1: SG1 Provided, 2: SG1 Package, 3: SG2 Provided, 4: SG2 Package Delivery Svr Capability [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function 010 exists Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to 0) Delivery Svr Capability (Ext) [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] Changes the capability of the server that is registered as an I/O device.
Service Tables B229
Changes the capability of the server that is registered as an I/O device. 011 Bit7 = 1 Address book usage limitation (Limitation for each authorized user) Bit6 = 1 RDH authorization link Bit5 to 0: Not used 013 Svr Schm (Primary) Specifies the scheme of the primary delivery server. Svr Port Num (Pri) Specifies the port number of the primary delivery server. Srv URL Path (Pri) Specifies the URL path of the primary delivery server.
014
015
SM
5-59
SP Mode Tables
016
Svr Schm (Sec) Specifies the scheme of the secondary delivery server. Svr Port Num (Sec) Specifies the port number of the secondary delivery server. Srv URL Path (Sec) Specifies the URL path of the secondary delivery server. CapSvr Schm Specifies the scheme of the capture server. CapSvr Port Num Specifies the port number of the capture server. CapSrv URL Path Specifies the URL path of the s capture server.
017
018
019
020
021
5846
[UCS Settings]
*CTL Displays ID
Machine ID (For Delivery Server) 001
Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value is only displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI. The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary. Machine ID Clear (For Delivery Server) Clears ID
Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer 002 directory. Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable. After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the machine off and on. Maximum Entries 003 [150 to 999 / 150 / 1 /step]
Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle. If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared, and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed. Delivery Server Retry Timer delivery server address book. Delivery Server Retry Times delivery server address book. [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
006 Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
007 Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the Delivery Server Maximum Entries [200 to 999 / 200 / 1/step]
008
Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user
B229
5-60
SM
SP Mode Tables
5846
[UCS Settings] LDAP Search Timeout
*CTL
information managed by UCS. 010 [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step]
Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server. [AddrBMig (SD> HDD)] Address Book Migration (SD> HDD) This SP moves the address book data from an SD card to the HDD. You must cycle the machine off and on after executing this SP.
040
When you do this SP without a HDD, SC991 occurs. We recommend that you back up all directory information to an SD card with SP5846-051 before you execute this SP. [AddrB Acl Info] Address Book Access Control List Information This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is powered on with the new HDD installed; the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD. However, the new address book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service technician immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users. Clears the local address book information, including the user code. Clears the distribution address book information, except the user code. Clears the LDAP address book information, except the user code. Clears all directory information managed by UCS, including all user codes. Turn off and on the main power switch after executing this SP. Uploads all directory information to the SD card. Downloads all directory information from the SD card.
Service Tables
041
047 Initialize Local Addr Book 048 Initialize Delivery Addr Book 049 Initialize LDAP Addr Book
050 Initialize All Addr Book
051 Backup All Addr Book 052 Restore All Addr Book 053 Clear Backup Info
Deletes the address book data from the SD card in the service slot.
SM
5-61
B229
SP Mode Tables
5846
[UCS Settings]
*CTL
Deletes only the files that were uploaded from this machine. This feature does not work if the card is write-protected. After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, and then turn the power off. Do not remove the SD card until the Power LED stops flashing. Search Option This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local 060 address book. Bit0: Checks both upper/lower case characters Bit1: Japan only Bit2 to 7: Not used Compl Opt1 Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the length of the password. 062 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step] This SP does not normally require adjustment. This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book. Compl Opt2 Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to lower case and defines the length of the password. 063 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step] This SP does not normally require adjustment. This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book. Compl Opt3 064 Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to numbers and defines the length of the password.
B229
5-62
SM
SP Mode Tables
5846
[UCS Settings] [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
*CTL
This SP does not normally require adjustment. This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book. Compl Opt4 Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to symbols and defines the length of the password. 065 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step] This SP does not normally require adjustment. This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book. Specifies the FTP port for getting a distribution 091 FTP Auth Port Setting server address book that is used in the identification mode. [0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step] 094 Encryption Stat Shows the status of the encryption function for the address book data.
Service Tables
[Web Service] 5848
*CTL
SP5848-1 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of 0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router. ac: Access Control ac: Netfile (Lower 4 bits only) 001 0000: No access control 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder. Access and deliveries from Scan Router have no effect on capture. 004 ac: UD (only Lower 4 bits) 005 ac: For Cherry (only Lower 4 bits) Switches access control on and off. 0000: No access control 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder. Bit switch settings.
007 ac: Log Fax (Lower 4 bits) 009 ac: Job Ctrl (Lower 4 bits)
SM
5-63
B229
SP Mode Tables
011
ac: Device Management (Lower 4 bits)
022 ac: Uadmin (Lower 4bits) 210 Log Type: Job1 211 Log Type: Job2 212 Log Type: Access 213 Primary Srv 214 Secondary Srv 215 Start Time Specifies the transmit interval. 216 Interval Time [1 to 1000 / 1 / 1 hour/step] This SP is activated only when SP5848-217 is set to "2 (Transmit periodically)". Selects the transmit timing. 217 Timing [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] 0: No Transmit, 1: Transmit one by one 2: Transmit periodically Displays the log server settings. These can be adjusted with the Web Image Monitor.
5849
[Installation Date] Displays or prints the installation date of the machine. 001 Display The Counter Clear Day has been changed to Installation Date or Inst. Date. Determines whether the installation date is printed on the 002 Print printout for the total counter. [0 or 1/ 1 / 1/step] 0: No Print, 1: Print
5851 001
[Bluetooth] Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key. 0 :Public, 1: Private
B229
5-64
SM
SP Mode Tables
[Remote ROM Update] 5856 Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel cable when updating the remote ROM. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 002 Local Port *CTL 0: Not allowed 1: Allowed
5857
[Debug Log Save] On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
*CTL 0: ON, 1: OFF
001 Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured until this feature is switched on. Target (2: HDD 3: SD) 002 2: HDD, 3: SD Card
Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the conditions set with SP5-858 are satisfied. [ 2 to 3 / 2 / 1 /step] Save to HDD DFU Saves the debug log in memory to the HDD.
005 A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the HDD. Up to 4MB can be copied to the HDD. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to the HDD. 006 Save to SD Card 009 HDD to SD Latest (Latest 4 MB) 010 HDD to SD Any (Latest 4 MB Any Key) 011 Erase HDD Debug 012 Erase SD Debug 013 Dsply-SD Space 014 SD to SD Latest (Latest 4 MB) 015 SD to SD Any (Latest 4 MB Any Key) 016 Make HDD Debug 017 Make SD Debug
Service Tables
SM
5-65
B229
SP Mode Tables
[Debug Log Save: SC] 5858
*CTL
These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the destination selected by SP5857-2. SP5858-3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC error codes. Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes 001 Engine SC Error generated by copier engine errors. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step] 0: OFF, 1: ON Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes 002 Controller SC Error generated by GW controller errors. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step] 0: OFF, 1: ON 003 Any SC Error 004 Jam [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step] Turns on/off the debug save for jam errors. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step] 0: OFF, 1: ON
5859
[Debug Log Save Key] 001 Key 1 002 Key 2 003 Key 3 004 Key 4 005 Key 5 006 Key 6 007 Key 7 008 Key 8 009 Key 9 010 Key 10
*CTL
These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for functions that use common memory on the controller board. [ 9999999 to 9999999 / 0 / ]
B229
5-66
SM
SP Mode Tables
5860
[SMTP/POP3/IMAP4]
*CTL [1 to 168 / 72 / ]
Partial Mail Receive Timeout 020
Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received during this prescribed time. MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance 0: No, 1: Yes SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement [0 to 1 / 0 / ] [0 to 1 / 1 / ]
021 Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.
022
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated account after the SMTP server is validated. 0: No. From item not switched. 1: Yes. From" item switched. SMTP Auth. Direct Setting Bit switch: Bit 0: LOGIN Bit 1: PLAIN [0 or 1 / 0 / ]
Selects the authentication method for SMPT.
025
Bit 2: CRAM MD5 Bit 3: DIGEST MD5 Bit 4 to 7: Not used This SP is activated only when SMTP authorization is enabled by UP mode.
Service Tables
5866 001
[E-mail Report] Not Used Report Validity [ 0 or 1 / 0 / ] 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled *CTL Enables or disables the E-mail alert function. Add Date Field [ 0 or 1 / 0 / ] 0: Not add, 1: Add
005
Adds or does not add the date field to the header of the alert mail.
5869 002
[RAM Disk Setting] Not Used PDL Storage GWINIT [0 to 255 / 4 / 1 /step] Specifies the RAM disk storage size for PDL.
SM
5-67
B229
SP Mode Tables
5870
[Common Key Info Writing] Writes to flash ROM the common proof for 001 Writing *CTL validating the device for NRS specifications. 003 Initialize *CTL Formats the common proof area of the flash ROM. FA
5873
[SD Card Appli Move] This SP copies the application programs from the 001 Move Exec original SD card in the SD card slot 3 to an SD card in the SD card slot 2. This SP copies back the application programs from an SD card in the SD Card Slot 3 to the original SD 002 Undo Exec card in the SD card slot 2. Use this menu when you have mistakenly copied some programs by using "Move Exec" (SP5873-1).
5875
[SC Auto Reboot] Enables or disables the automatic reboot function when an SC error occurs. [0 or 1 / 0 / ] 0: The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error 001 Reboot Mode *CTL code. If the same SC occurs again, the machine does not reboot. 1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error occurs. The reboot is not executed for Type A, B or C SC codes. Selects the reboot method for SC. 002 Reboot Method *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Manual reboot, 1: Automatic reboot
B229
5-68
SM
SP Mode Tables
5878
[Option Setup] Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit. 001 Option Setup Press "EXECUTE" on the operation panel. Then turn the machine off and on.
5881
[Delete Fixed Sent] 001 Delete Fixed Sent Deletes the fixed form sentence.
5884
[Factini] Factory Initial Setting Restores the factory settings to the machine. 001 Value Restore This SP restores the settings of SP1001, 1002, 1922 and 3002.
5886
[Permit ROM Update] DFU This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated. 001 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: On, 1: Off
Service Tables
[Plug & Play] Plug & Play Name Selection Selects the brand name and production name for the Plug and Play function. 5907 These names are registered in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM becomes defective, these names should be re-registered. Use the right-arrow or left-arrow key to scroll through the list of brand names. To select a brand name, press the "#" key. An asterisk (*) indicates which manufacture is currently selected. [ 0 to 5 / 0 / 1 /step ] FA 0: RICOH: MP C1500/615C 1: SAVIN: SGC 1506 001 Plug & Play *BCU 2: Gestetner: MPC1500/GS106 3: NRG: MP C1500SP 4: infotec ISC 615G 5: LANIER: MPC1500sp/LD2015c
SM
5-69
B229
SP Mode Tables
5913
[Switchover Permission Time] Print Application Timer Sets the length of time to elapse before allowing another application to take 002 control of the display when the application currently controlling the display is not operating because a key has not been pressed. [3 to 30 / 3 / 1 second/step]
5974
[Cherry Server] Selects which version of the Scan Router application program, Light or Full (Professional), is installed. 001 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Light version (supplied with this machine) 1: Full version (optional)
[Device Setting] 5985 The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this SP to enable and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB functions built into the controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1". [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Disable, 1: Enable, 2: Function limitation When the "Function limitation" is set, "On board NIC" is limited only for the NRS or LDAP/NT authentication. 001 On Board NIC Other network applications than NRS or LDAP/NT authentication are not available when this SP is set to "2". Even you can change the initial settings of those network applications, settings does not work actually. 002 On Board USB [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Disable, 1: Enable
B229
5-70
SM
SP Mode Tables
5987
[Mech. Counter] Mechanical Counter Device This SP detects that a mechanical counter device is 0: OFF / 1: ON removed. If it is detected, SC610 occurs. This SP is active only for NA model.
5988
[Contract Form] Contract Form Setting SSP 001 Maintenance ID [0 to 255 / 1 / 1 /tep]
5989
[Parts PM] SSP Enables or disables the PM parts alarm. 001 On/Off [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Enable, 1: Disable
[SP Print Mode] 5990
SMC Print
In the SP mode, press Copy Window to move to the copy screen, select the paper size, then press Start. Select A4/LT (Sideways) or larger to ensure that all the information prints. Press SP Window to return to the SP mode, select the desired print, and press "EXECUTE". 001 All (Data List) 002 SP (Mode Data List) 003 User Program Data 004 Logging Data 005 Diagnostic Report 006 Non-Default (Prints only SPs set to values other than defaults.) 007 NIB Summary 021 Copier User Program 022 Scanner SP 023 Scanner User Program
Service Tables B229
SM
5-71
SP Mode Tables
5.2.6 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS)

ADF Adjustment ( 6006* ADF Image Adjustment)
Available menus depend on the machine model and its configuration. StoS/Front Regist mode. Use the Leading Regist + or before entering the value. Trailing Erase + or before entering the value. StoS/Rear Regist mode. Use the 005 Sub-scan Magnif [7 to +9.5 / 0.0 / 0.5 mm/step] key to select + or before entering the value. [9.0 to +9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step] 004 Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the rear side of duplex originals, for ADF [3.0 to +3.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] key to select 003 Adjusts the trailing edge erase margin for ADF mode. Use the [7 to +9.5 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] key to select + or before entering the value. [5.0 to +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] key to select 001 Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the front side of the original, for ADF
002 Adjusts the leading edge registration for ADF mode. Use the
Adjust the sub-scan magnification for the ADF. Original Curl Adj [0 = No / 1 = Yes]
006
Enables or disables the skew adjustment for the reverse sides of originals. When you enable SP6-006-6, adjust the distance of the skew adjustment (SP 6-006-7). Skew Correction [20 to +20 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
007 Specifies the distance of the skew adjustment. SP6006-7 is effective when you enable SP6006-6 (ADF Adjustment [Original Curl Adj]).
6009
ADF Free Run 001 Performs an ADF free run. Press "ON" to start; press "OFF" to stop.
6010
[Stamp Position Adj.] Fax Stamp Position Adjustment Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals. *CTL [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]
6010 1 Stamp Position Adj.
B229
5-72
SM
SP Mode Tables
6901 001
Display ADF/APS Displays the status of the ADF original size sensors ( Output Display). ADF/ APS Sensor
6910*
ADF Shading Time
[0 to 60 / 10 / 1 s/step]
Adjusts the interval used for the shading processing in the ADF mode. Light and 001 heat in the room may affect the scanner response. Reduce this setting if copy quality indicates that the white level is drifting during ADF copy jobs.
5.2.7 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG)

7002 [Total Counter] Displays the total print count (number of printouts) for the selected mode. 001 Color Counter 002 Black Counter 003 GJ Unit Clr 004 GJ Unit Bk *CTL [0 to 99999999 / - / 1 page/step] These counters are cleared with SP7959-1.
7212
[User Cleaning #] Displays the user cleaning job number for the selected print head. 001 K1 002 K2 003 C 004 M 005 Y *CTL These counters are cleared with SP7959-1. [0 to 999999 / - / 1/step]
7213
[User Refresh #] Displays the user refreshing job number for the selected print head. 001 K1 002 K2 003 C 004 M 005 Y *CTL These counters are cleared with SP7959-1. [0 to 999999 / - / 1/step]
SM
5-73
B229
Service Tables
SP Mode Tables
[Air Rls Fill #] Air Release and Ink Filling Counter 7214 Displays the air releasing job number for the selected print head. This SP counts up the number of the air releasing job other than the jobs that are done with SP7215-xxx and 7219-xxx. 001 K1 002 K2 003 C 004 M 005 Y *CTL [0 to 999999 / - / 1/step] These counters are cleared with SP7959-1.
[Aie Detec #] Air Releasing Detection Counter 7215 Displays the air releasing job number for the selected print head. This SP counts up the number of the air releasing job other than the jobs that are done with SP7214-xxx and 7219-xxx. 001 K1 002 K2 003 C 004 M 005 Y *CTL [0 to 30000 / - / 1/step]
[Auto Cleaning #] Displays the automatic cleaning job number for the selected print head. 7216 The automatic cleaning is done as follows: 4. when the counter of SP7222-xxx reaches 4240000nl (during job) or 3816000nl (job end). 5. when the counter of SP7302-xxx reaches 336 pages (job end). 001 K1 002 K2 003 C 004 M 005 Y *CTL [0 to 999999 / - / 1/step] These counters are cleared with SP7959-1.
B229
5-74
SM
SP Mode Tables
[Idle Cleaning #] 7217 Displays the idle cleaning job number for the selected print head. The idle cleaning is done when the machine does not get any job for more than 7 days and less than 3 months. 001 K1 002 K2 003 C 004 M 005 Y *CTL These counters are cleared with SP7959-1. [0 to 20000 / - / 1/step]
[Idle Refresh #] 7218 Displays the idle refresh job number for the selected print head. The idle refresh is done when the machine does not get any job for more than 3 months. 001 K1 002 K2 003 C 004 M 005 Y *CTL These counters are cleared with SP7959-1.
Service Tables
[0 to 100 / - / 1/step]
[Idle Air Rls #] 7219 Displays the idle air releasing job number for the selected print head. The idle air releasing is done when the machine does not get any job for more than 1 month and less than 3 months. 001 K1 002 K2 003 C 004 M 005 Y *CTL [0 to 300 / - / 1/step] These counters are cleared with SP7959-1.
SM
5-75
B229
SP Mode Tables
7221
[Waste Ink Count] Displays the amount of the collected ink in the rear and front ink collection tank. Rear *CTL [0 to 800000000/ - / 1 nl/step]
The ink collection bottle (rear) near full is detected when this counter reaches 001 the value specified with SP2-507-1 or the ink collection tank full sensor detects "ON". The ink collection bottle (rear) full is detected when this counter reaches "20000000nl (20ml)". Front 002 "210000000nl (210ml)". The ink collection bottle (front) full is detected when this counter reaches "210300000nl (210.3ml)". *CTL [0 to 400000000/ - / 1 nl/step]
The ink collection bottle (front) near full is detected when this counter reaches
[Mist Count] Displays the ink mist counter. This counter counts "1" with the formula of 7222 calculating ink mist. These counters are references for the automatic cleaning. These counters are cleared after the automatic cleaning has been done. 001 K1 002 K2 003 C 004 M 005 Y *CTL [0 to 8000000 / - / 1 nl/step]
7223
[Cleaning #] Displays the total cleaning job number for the selected print head. 001 K1 002 K2 003 C 004 M 005 Y *CTL These counters are cleared with SP7804-2 and 7959-1. [0 to 999999 / - / 1/step]
B229
5-76
SM
SP Mode Tables
7224
[Refresh #] Displays the total refresh job number for the selected print head. 001 K1 002 K2 003 C 004 M 005 Y *CTL These counters are cleared with SP7804-2 and 7959-1. [0 to 999999 / - / 1/step]
[AirRlsFill Total] Air Release and Ink Filling Total Counter 7225 Displays the total air releasing job number for the selected print head. This counter counts "1" when either of SP7214-xxx, SP7215-xxx or SP7219-xxx is counted. 001 K1 002 K2 003 C 004 M 005 Y *CTL These counters are cleared with SP7804-2 and 7959-1.
Service Tables B229
[0 to 999999 / - / 1/step]
[Total Page Count] Total Page Counter Displays the total fed paper number for the selected print head. 7302 This counter counts "1" when less than A4LEF size is fed and counts "1.4" when bigger than A4LEF size is fed. These counters are references for the automatic cleaning. 001 K1 002 K2 003 C 004 M 005 Y *CTL These counters are cleared after the auto cleaning is done. [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1 page/step]
7401*
[CounterSC Total]
*CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
001 Displays how many times SC codes are generated.
SM
5-77
SP Mode Tables
[Filler Posn SC #] Tank Full Lever Position Error SC Counter 7402 Displays the number of the SC202 occurrences for the selected print head. SC202 occurs when the machine fails to memorize the position of the tank full lever. 001 K1 002 K2 003 C 004 M 005 Y *CTL [0 to 10000 / - / 1/step]
7403
[SC History] 001 Latest 002 Latest 1 003 Latest 2 004 Latest 3 005 Latest 4 006 Latest 5 007 Latest 6 008 Latest 7 009 Latest 8 010 Latest 9 Logs the SC codes detected. The 10 most recently detected SC Codes *CTL are displayed on the screen. L: Asset line V: Assert location F: Assert file
[Maint Mot SC #] Maintenance Unit Motor HP Sensor Error Counter 7404 001 Displays the number of the SC200 occurrences. SC200 occurs when the machine detects the home position error for the maintenance unit. *CTL [0 to 10000 / - / 1/step]
7502*
[CounterPaper Jam]
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
7502 1 Displays the total number of paper jams.
7503*
[CounterOrgn Jam]
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
7503 1 Displays the total number of original jams,
B229
5-78
SM
SP Mode Tables
7504* 7504 1
[Paper Jam/Loc] At Power On Paper jam occurs at power on. Non Feed Tray1
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
Displays the total number of the paper jams classified by timing and location.
7504 3
Paper does not reach the first registration sensor (from the paper tray1). Non Feed 100 Bypass Paper does not reach the first registration sensor (from the by-pass tray). Non Feed Bypass
7504 4
7504 5 Paper does not reach the second registration sensor (from the one-sheet by-pass tray). Non Feed Tray2 7504 6 Paper does not reach the vertical transport sensor or duplex exit sensor (from the optional paper tray2). Non Feed1 Tray3 7504 7 Paper does not reach the vertical transport sensor (from the optional paper tray3). 7504 8 Non Feed2 Tray3
Service Tables
Paper does not reach the duplex exit sensor (from the optional paper tray3). Off EngEntrance
7504 10 Paper does not reach the engine entrance sensor (from other than bypass tray). Off EngRegist SN 7504 11 Paper does not reach the second registration sensor (from other than bypass tray). 7504 12 Off EngExit Paper does not reach the engine exit sensor. Off IntChange SN Paper does not reach the junction gate sensor. Off Exit SN Paper does not reach the paper exit sensor. Off FedRegist SN 7504 15 Paper does not reach the first registration sensor (from the duplex unit or optional paper tray unit).
7504 13
7504 14
SM
5-79
B229
SP Mode Tables
7504 19
Off DupEnt SN Paper does not reach the duplex entrance sensor.
7504 20 Off DupWait SN Paper does not reach the duplex wait sensor. 7504 21 Off DupRevers SN Paper does not reach the duplex inverter sensor. Off VertOP SN Paper does not reach the relay sensor. Off DupExit SN Paper does not reach the duplex exit sensor. Off FedRegist SN Paper is caught at the first registration sensor. On Bypass SN 7504 55 Paper from the one-sheet by-pass tray is caught at the engine entrance sensor. 7504 56 On Jam Tray2 Paper from the tray2 (optional paper try unit) is caught at the relay sensor. On Jam Tray3 7504 57 Paper from the tray3(optional paper try unit) is caught at the vertical transport sensor at the optional unit. On EngEnt SN 7504 60 Paper from other than one-sheet by-pass tray is caught at the engine entrance sensor. 7504 61 On EngRegist SN Paper is caught at the second registration sensor. On EngExit SN Paper is caught at the engine exit sensor. On IntChange SN Paper is caught at the junction gate sensor. On MFExit SN Paper is caught at the paper exit sensor. On DupEnt SN Paper is caught at the duplex entrance sensor.
7504 22
7504 23
7504 53
7504 62
7504 63
7504 64
7504 69
B229
5-80
SM
SP Mode Tables
7504 70
On DupWait SN Paper is caught at the duplex wait sensor. On DupRevers SN Paper is caught at the duplex inverter sensor. On VertOP SN Paper from the duplex unit is caught at the relay sensor. On DupExit VerSN1 Paper from the duplex unit is caught at the duplex exit sensor. On DupExit VerSN2 Paper from the optional paper tray unit is caught at the duplex exit sensor.
7504 71
7504 72
7504 73
7504 74
[Original Jam/Loc] 7505*
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
Displays the total number of the original jams on the ADF that have occurred at a certain timing or at a certain location. 7505 1 At Power ON Paper jam occurs at power on. Off DF Regist SN
Service Tables B229
7505 3
The original does not reach the first registration sensor. Off DF Exit SN The original does not reach the exit sensor. Off DF Revers SN The original does not reach the inverter sensor. On DF Regist SN The original is caught at the first registration sensor. On DF Exit SN The original is caught at the exit sensor. On DF Revers SN The original is caught at the inverter sensor.
7505 4
7505 5
7505 53
7505 54
7505 55
7506
[Paper Jam/ Size] Jam Counter: Paper Size 7506 5 A4 LEF 7506 6 A5 LEF *CTL Displays the number of jams according to the paper size. [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
7506 14 B5 LEF
SM
5-81
SP Mode Tables
7506 38 LT LEF 7506 44 HLT LEF 7506 132 A3 SEF 7506 133 A4 SEF 7506 134 A5 SEF 7506 141 B4 SEF 7506 142 B5 SEF 7506 160 DLT SEF 7506 164 LG SEF 7506 166 LT SEF 7506 172 HLT SEF 7506 255 Others
7507*
[Disply-P Jam Hist] Display: Paper Jam History Displays the copy jam history (the most recent 10 jams) Sample Display: CODE:007 SIZE:05h TOTAL:0000334 DATE:DEC 1 09:44/06 2005 where: CODE is the SP7504-*** number (see above.) SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex. TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7003) DATE is the date the jams occurred. Code 05 06 0E 26 2C Size A3 (L) A4 (L) A5 (L) B4 (L) B5 (L) Code 84 85 86 8D 8E Size DLT (L) LG (L) LT (L) HLT (L) Others Code A0 A4 A6 AC FF
7507 1 Last 7507 2 Latest 1 7507 3 Latest 2 7507 4 Latest 3 7507 5 Latest 4 7507 6 Latest 5 7507 7 Latest 6 7507 8 Latest 7 7507 9 Latest 8 7507 10 Latest 9 Size A4 (S) A5 (S) B5 (S) LT (S) HLT (S)
[Disply-O Jam Hist] Display: Original Jam History 7508* Displays the original jam history of the transfer unit in groups of 10, starting with the most recent 10 jams. Display contents are as follows:
B229
5-82
SM
SP Mode Tables
CODE is the SP7-505-*** number. SIZE is the paper size code in hex. (See Paper Size Hex Codes below.) TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7-003) DATE is the date the previous jam occurred 1* Latest 2* Latest 1 3* Latest 2 4* Latest 3 5* Latest 4 6* Latest 5 7* Latest 6 8* Latest 7 9* Latest 8 10* Latest 9 Sample Display: CODE: 007 SIZE: 05h TOTAL: 0000334 DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000
[Total Decap Time] 7703 7703 1 Displays the time when the print head has not been covered. This SP is the threshold for the auto cleaning. This counter is cleared after the auto cleaning.
Service Tables B229
*CTL
[0 to 1000000 / - / 1 sec/step]
7704
[Ink Condition] Displays the ink cartridge condition. 7704 1 K1 7704 2 K2 7704 3 C 7704 4 M *CTL [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Ink remains in the both ink cartridge and sub-tank. 1: Ink remains only in the sub-tank. (No ink in the ink cartridge) However, printing is still possible. 2: Ink is not enough to print because the sub-tank is nearly empty. "Ink empty" message appears on the LCD 3: Ink is empty.
7704 5 Y
SM
5-83
SP Mode Tables
[Ink Consumption] 7705 Displays the amount of the ink consumption. This counter is cleared after ink filling up. 7705 1 K1 7705 2 K2 7705 3 C 7705 4 M 7705 5 Y *CTL [0 to 4000000 / 0 / 1 nl/step]
[Ink Cons Near End] Ink Consumption After Ink Near End 7706 Displays the amount of the ink consumption after the ink near end has been detected. 7706 1 K1 7706 2 K2 7706 3 C 7706 4 M 7706 5 Y *CTL [0 to 4000000 / 0 / 1 nl/step] This counter is cleared after ink filling up.
7801
[Memory/ Version/ PN] Displays the part number and version of all ROMs in the machine. -001 Memory/ Version/ PN
7803
[PM Counter] Displays the PM counter for each PM part.
7803 1 Paper 7803 2 Maintenance Unit 7803 3 Charge Roller 7803 4 Transport Belt 7803 5 Waste Ink Tank 7803 6 Roller (Bypass) 7803 7 Roller (Tray1) 7803 8 Roller (Tray2) 7803 9 Roller (Tray3) *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
B229
5-84
SM
SP Mode Tables
7804
[PM Count. Reset] Clears the PM counter for each PM part. *CTL This clears the counter of SP7803-1. This clears the counter of SP7803-2, *CTL SP7223-001 to -005, SP7224-001 to -005 and SP7225-001 to -005. *CTL This clears the counter of SP7803-3. *CTL This clears the counter of SP7803-4. *CTL This clears the counter of SP7-221-001, SP7-803-005 and SP7-941-001
7804 1 Paper 7804 2 Maintenance Unit 7804 3 Charge Roller 7804 4 Transport Belt 7804 5 Waste Ink Tank 7804 6 Roller (Bypass) 7804 7 Roller (Tray1) 7804 8 Roller (Tray2) 7804 9 Roller (Tray3) 7804 10 Head Unit
*CTL This clears the counter of SP7803-6. *CTL This clears the counter of SP7803-7. *CTL This clears the counter of SP7803-8. *CTL This clears the counter of SP7803-9. *CTL DFU
7807
[ResetSC/Jam Counters] normally, the message "Completed" is displayed. SP 7807 1 does not reset the following logs: SP 7507 (Display-Paper Jam History) and SP 7508 (Display-Original Jam History).
Service Tables
Resets the SC, paper, original, and total jam counters. When the program ends 7807 1
7826
[MF Error Counter] Japan Only Displays the number of counts requested of the card/key counter. A request for the count total failed at power on. This 001 Error Total error will occur if the device is installed but disconnected. The request for a staple count failed at power on. 002 Error Staple This error will occur if the device is installed but disconnected.
7827
[MF Error Counter Clear] Press Execute to reset to 0 the values of SP7826. Japan Only
SM
5-85
B229
SP Mode Tables
7832* 7832 1
[Display-Self-Diag] Displays the SC codes and the number of their occurrences. Each number is in the range of 0 to 9999.
7836
[Resident Memory] Displays the contents of the memory on the controller board.
7852
[ADF Scan Glass] Dust Counter [0 to 9999 / - / 1/step] Counts the number of occurrences (0 to 65,535) when dust was detected on the 7852 1 scanning glass of the ADF. Counting is done only if SP4020 1 (ADF Scan Glass Dust Check) is switched on. Memory All Clear (SP5801) resets this counter to zero 7852 2 Clear Counter [0 to 9999 / - / 1/step]
Clears the total counter of the dust diction.
7853
[Cart Replace #] Ink Cartridge Replacement Counter Displays the replacement time of the ink cartridge for each color. 7853 1 K 7853 2 C 7853 3 M 7853 4 Y *CTL [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1/step]
[Wst Tnk Rep #] Ink Collection Tank Replacement Counter 7854 Displays the replacement time of the ink collection tank at front side or rear side. 78541 Rear 78542 Front [0 to 100 / - / 1/step] [0 to 100 / - / 1/step]
B229
5-86
SM
SP Mode Tables
[Assert Info] 7901 Records the location where a problem is detected in the program. The data stored in this SP is used for problem analysis. DFU 7901 1 File Name 7901 2 Number of Lines 7901 3 Location
7931 7932 7933 7934
Ink Info: BK Ink Info: M Ink Info: C Ink Info: Y 1 Model ID 2 Cartridge Ver Displays the model ID that is used in RAPI. Displays the cartridge version. Displays the brand ID. 01H: RICOH 3 Brand ID 02H: Savin 03H: NRG 04H: Gestetner Displays the area ID. -004 Area ID 01H: Japan 02H: NA 03H: EU -005 Production ID -006 Color ID 04H: ASIA 05H: CHINA 06H: LA 05H: Nashuatec 06H: Rex 07H: Danka-Infotec
Service Tables B229
08H: Lanie
Displays the production ID. Displays the color ID. 01H: Bk 02H: C 03H: M 04H: Y
-007 Maintenance ID -008 New -009 Recycle Count -010 Product Date -011 Serial No -012 Ink Remaining
Displays the maintenance ID. Japan Only? Displays the information of the new cartridge. 64H: New unit 00H: Used unit Displays how many times a cartridge is recycled. Displays the production date and model number. Displays the serial number. Displays the amount of the ink remaining.
SM
5-87
SP Mode Tables
7931 7932 7933 7934
Ink Info: BK Ink Info: M Ink Info: C Ink Info: Y -013 EDP Code -014 Ink End -015 Ink Refill -016 Total Count:Start Displays the EDP (type) code. Displays the history of the ink end. Displays the information of the refill. [0 to 9999999 / - / 1/step] Displays the total counter for B/W printing mode when the new cartridge is installed. [0 to 9999999 / - / 1/step] -017 Color Count:Start Displays the total counter for color printing mode when the new cartridge is installed. [0 to 9999999 / - / 1/step] -018 Total Count:End Displays the total counter for B/W printing mode when the new cartridge is installed. [0 to 9999999 / - / 1/step] -019 Color Count:End -020 Install Date -021 Ink End Date -022 ID Chip Ink Cons -023 Ink Cons: Mirror1 -024 Ink Cons: Mirror2 -025 Due Date -026 Initial Fill # -027 Refresh # -028 Cleaning # -029 Air Rls Fill # Displays the total counter for color printing mode when the new cartridge is installed. Displays the installation date. Displays the ink end date. Displays the amount of the ink consumption. This SP is the mirroring SP of SP793x-021. This SP is the mirroring SP of SP793x-021. Displays the guarantee date for product quality. Displays how many times the initial ink filling up is done. Displays how many times the refresh mode is done. Displays how many times the cleaning mode is done. Displays how many times the air release mode is done.
7935 7936 7937
Ink Info Log: BK Ink Info Log: M Ink Info Log: C
B229
5-88
SM
SP Mode Tables
7938
Ink Info Log: Y -001 1: Serial No -002 1: Install Date Displays the serial number of the current ink cartridge. Displays the date when the current ink cartridge is installed. Displays the total counter when the current ink -003 1: Total Count cartridge is installed. [0 to 99999999 / - / 1/step] -004 2: Serial No -005 2: Install Date Displays the serial number of the previous ink cartridge. Displays the date when the previous ink cartridge is installed. Displays the total counter when the previous ink -006 2: Total Count cartridge is installed. [0 to 99999999 / - / 1/step] -007 3: Serial No -008 3: Install Date Displays the serial number of the one before the previous ink cartridge. Displays the date when t the one before the previous ink cartridge is installed. Displays the total counter when the one before the -009 3: Total Count previous ink cartridge is installed. [0 to 99999999 / - / 1/step] -010 4: Serial No -011 4: Install Date Displays the serial number of the one before the third-previous ink cartridge. Displays the date when the one before the third-previous ink cartridge is installed. Displays the total counter when the one before the -012 4: Total Count third-previous ink cartridge is installed. [0 to 99999999 / - / 1/step] -013 5: Serial No -014 5: Install Date Displays the serial number of the one before the fourth-previous ink cartridge. Displays the date when the one before the fourth-previous ink cartridge is installed. Displays the total counter when the one before the -015 5: Total Count fourth-previous ink cartridge is installed. [0 to 99999999 / - / 1/step]
Service Tables B229
SM
5-89
SP Mode Tables
7935 7936 7937 7938 7959
Ink Info Log: BK Ink Info Log: M Ink Info Log: C Ink Info Log: Y [GJ Eng Count. Reset] GelJet Engine Counter Reset Clears the following counters related with GJ engine unit. SP7-002-003 SP7-002-004 SP7-212-001 to 005 SP7-213-001 to 005 001 SP7-214-001 to 005 SP7-215-001 to 005 SP7-216-001 to 005 SP7-217-001 to 005 SP7-218-001 to 005 SP7-219-001 to 005 SP7-221-002 SP7-223-001 to 005 SP7-224-001 to 005 SP7-225-001 to 005 SP7-402-001 to 005 SP7-404-001 SP7-803-002 SP7-803-003 SP7-803-004
5.2.8 SP8-XXX (HISTORY)

Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination with others, can provide useful information. SP Numbers SP8-211toSP8-216 SP8-401toSP8-406 SP8-691toSP8-696 What They Do The number of pages scanned to the document server. The number of pages printed from the document server The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered: How is the document server actually being used? What application is using the document server most frequently? What data in the document server is being reused? Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the mode of operation is referred to as an application). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean.
B229
5-90
SM
SP Mode Tables
Prefixes T: C: F: P: S: Total: (Grand Total). Copy application. Fax application. Print application. Scan application.
What it means Grand total of the items counted for all applications (C, F, P, etc.).. Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each application when the job was not stored on the document server. Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server. The L: counters work differently case by case. Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored on the document server; this can be in document server Local storage (document server) mode (from the document server window), or from another mode, such as from a printer driver or by pressing the Store File button in the Copy mode window. Sometimes, they include occasions when the user uses a file that is already on the document server. Each counter will be discussed case by case. Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web Image Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software Development Kit) will also be counted with this group in the future.
Service Tables
L:
O:
(external network applications, for example)
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand. Key for Abbreviations Abbreviation / > AddBook Apl B/W Bk C What it means By, e.g. T:Jobs/Apl = Total Jobs by Application More (2> 2 or more, 4> 4 or more Address Book Application Black & White Black Cyan
SM
5-91
B229
SP Mode Tables
Abbreviation ColCr ColMode Comb Comp Deliv DesApl Dev Counter Dup, Duplex Emul FC FIN Full Bleed GenCopy Color Create Color Mode Combine Compression Delivery
What it means
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print) used to store the job on the document server, for example. Development Count, no. of pages developed. Duplex, printing on both sides Emulation Full Color Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.) No Margins Generation Copy Mode Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1) Internet Fax Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g. border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc. Black (YMCK) Local Storage. Refers to the document server. Large (paper) Size Magnification One color (monochrome) New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor machines remotely. NRS is used overseas, CSS is used in Japan. Original for scanning Original Jam Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network, and allows files to moved around, combined, and
GPC
IFax ImgEdt K LS LSize Mag MC NRS Org OrgJam Palm 2
B229
5-92
SM
SP Mode Tables
Abbreviation PC PGS PJob Ppr PrtJam PrtPGS R Rez SC Scn Sim, Simplex S-to-Email SMC Svr TonEnd TonSave TXJob YMC YMCK Personal Computer
What it means converted to different formats.
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON. Print Jobs Paper Printer (plotter) Jam Print Pages Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only. This machine is under development and currently not available. Resolution Service Code (Error SC code displayed) Scan Simplex, printing on 1 side. Scan-to-E-mail recorded in the SMC report. Server Toner End Toner Save Send, Transmission Yellow, Magenta, Cyan Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
Service Tables
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters are
All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear. These SPs count the number of times each application is used to do a job. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] The L: counter is the total number of
8 001 8 002 8 003 8 004
T:Total Jobs C:Total Jobs F:Total Jobs P:Total Jobs
*CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL
SM
5-93
B229
SP Mode Tables
8 005 8 006
S:Total Jobs L:Total Jobs
*CTL *CTL
times the other applications are used to send a job to the document server, plus the number of times a file already on the document server is used.
These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages processed. When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job. Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish. Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer engineer using the SP modes are not counted. When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the job is counted at the time when either Delete Data or Specify Output is specified. A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending. When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L: counter does not (the document server is not used). A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the broadcast are not counted separately). A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their destinations. If one transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not be counted until the transmission has been completed. A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter. The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving. When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments, and when a print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also increments. When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and L: counters both increment. When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments. When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the document server, only the L: counter increments. When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments. When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments. When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments. However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax application, the F: counter increments.
B229
5-94
SM
SP Mode Tables
8 011 8 012 8 013 8 014 8 015 8 016 8 017
T:Jobs/LS C:Jobs/LS F:Jobs/LS P:Jobs/LS S:Jobs/LS L:Jobs/LS O:Jobs/LS
*CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL
These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the document server by each application, to reveal how local storage is being used for input. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel.
When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments. When you enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter increments. When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments. When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter increments. When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter increments. When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments. 8 021 8 022 8 023 8 024 8 025 8 026 8 027 T:Pjob/LS C:Pjob/LS F:Pjob/LS P:Pjob/LS S:Pjob/LS L:Pjob/LS O:Pjob/LS the C: counter increments. When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the C: and P: counters both increment. When a job already on the document server is printed with another application, the L: counter increments. When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within document server mode, then the L: counter increments. *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL
document server were stored on the document server originally. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel.
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application,
SM
5-95
B229
Service Tables
These SPs reveal how files printed from the
SP Mode Tables
When images stored on the document server by a network application (including Palm 2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments. When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application (Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments. When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments. 8 031 8 032 8 033 8 034 8 035 8 036 8 037 T:Pjob/DesApl C:Pjob/DesApl F:Pjob/DesApl P:Pjob/DesApl S:Pjob/DesApl L:Pjob/DesApl O:Pjob/DesApl *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL
These SPs reveal what applications were used to output documents from the document server. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] The L: counter counts the number of jobs printed from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel.
When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count for the application that started the print job is incremented. When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web Image Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.
8 041 8 042 8 043 8 044 8 045 8 046
T:TX Jobs/LS C:TX Jobs/LS F:TX Jobs/LS P:TX Jobs/LS S:TX Jobs/LS L:TX Jobs/LS
*CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL
These SPs count the applications that stored files on the document server that were later accessed for transmission over the telephone line or over a network (attached to an e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax). [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] Jobs merged for sending are
8 047
O:TX Jobs/LS
*CTL
counted separately. The L: counter counts the number of jobs scanned from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel.
When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter increments. When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are sent as an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
B229
5-96
SM
SP Mode Tables
8 051 8 052 8 053 8 054 8 055 8 056 8 057
T:TX Jobs/DesApl C:TX Jobs/DesApl F:TX Jobs/DesApl P:TX Jobs/DesApl S:TX Jobs/DesApl L:TX Jobs/DesApl O:TX Jobs/DesApl
*CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL
These SPs count the applications used to send files from the document server over the telephone line or over a network (attached to an e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax). Jobs merged for sending are counted separately. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel.
If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example, then the O: counter increments. T:FIN Jobs 8 061 the application. C:FIN Jobs 8 062 *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by
These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method is specified by the application. F:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Service Tables
These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is 8 063 specified by the application. Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time. P:FIN Jobs 8 064 *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is specified by the application. S:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method 8 065 is specified by the application. Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time. L:FIN Jobs 8 066 *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified from the print window within document server mode.
SM
5-97
B229
SP Mode Tables
O:FIN Jobs 8 067
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by the application. Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is -001 Sort -002 Stack -003 Staple -004 Booklet -005 Z-Fold -006 Punch -007 Other set for Sort and then stored on the document server, the L: counter increments. (See SP8066-1) Number of jobs started out of Sort mode. Number of jobs started in Staple mode. Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in staple mode, the Staple counter also increments. Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode and set for folding (Z-fold). Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8064-6.) Reserved. Not used.
T:Jobs/PGS 8 071
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in the job, regardless of which application was used. C:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 072
These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job. F:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 073
These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job. P:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 074
These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job. S:Jobs/PGS [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 075
These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job.
B229
5-98
SM
SP Mode Tables
L:Jobs/PGS 8 076
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of pages in the job. O:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 077
These SPs count and calculate the number of Other application jobs (Web Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the job. -001 1 Page -002 2 Pages -003 3 Pages -004 4 Pages -005 5 Pages -006 6to10 Pages -007 11to20 Pages -008 21to50 Pages -009 51to100 Pages -010 101to300 Pages -011 301to500 Pages -012 501to700 Pages -013 701to1000 Pages -014 1001to Pages
For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076-0xx) increments. Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish. If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job. If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the time the error occurs. For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by multiplying the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One duplex page counts as 2.) The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the number of pages of the copy job (SP 8072). When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is counted.
Service Tables B229
Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).
SM
5-99
SP Mode Tables
T:FAX TX Jobs
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) 8 111 sent by fax, either directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a telephone line. Color fax sending is not available at this time. F: FAX TX Jobs 8 113 *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent by fax directly on a telephone line. Color fax sending is not available at this time. -001 B/W -002 Color These counters count jobs, not pages. This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application, including documents stored on the document server. If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the job started. If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination where both are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (8 12x) also increments. The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent. T:IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) 8 121 sent, either directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images using I-Fax. Color fax sending is not available at this time. F: IFAX TX Jobs 8 123 *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not stored on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax. Color fax sending is not available at this time.
B229
5-100
SM
SP Mode Tables
-001 B/W 002 Color These counters count jobs, not pages. The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not available at this time. The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent. T:S-to-Email Jobs 8 131 *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was used or not. S:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 135
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and attached to e-mail, without storing the original on the document server. 001 B/W 002 Color -003 ACS These counters count jobs, not pages. If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined to be color or black-and-white then counted. If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted. If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled. If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or Scan-to-PC, or if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is counted separately. For example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and once for Scan-to-PC). T:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Service Tables
8 141
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and sent to a Scan Router server.
SM
5-101
B229
SP Mode Tables
S:Deliv Jobs/Svr 8 145
*CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in scanner mode and sent to a Scan Router server. 001 B/W 002 Color -003 ACS These counters count jobs, not pages. The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the Scan Router server cannot be confirmed. If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is counted as a Color job. If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted. If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled. Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job. T:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0to9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) 8 151 scanned and sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC). At the present time, SP8151 and 8155 perform identical counts. S:Deliv Jobs/PC 8 155 *CTL [0to9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and sent with Scan-to-PC. -001 B/W -002 Color -003 ACS These counters count jobs, not pages. If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted. If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted. If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
B229
5-102
SM
SP Mode Tables
Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job. 8 161 T:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL These SPs count the number of PC Fax transmission jobs. A job is counted from when it is registered for sending, not when it is sent. 8 163 F:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] At the present time, these counters perform identical counts. This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending the data out to the destination from the PC through the copier. 8 191 8 192 8 193 8 195 8 196 T:Total Scan PGS C:Total Scan PGS F:Total Scan PGS S:Total Scan PGS L:Total Scan PGS physical pages. These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to adjust color. Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted. A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned. Scans made in SP mode are not counted. Examples If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored, the S: count is 4. If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6. If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6. If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6. *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL
These SPs count the pages scanned by each application that uses the scanner to scan images. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Service Tables
SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of
SM
5-103
B229
SP Mode Tables
T:LSize Scan PGS
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan and copy jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for 8 201 fax transmission are not counted. These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display. F:LSize Scan PGS 8 203 Fax jobs. S:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of large pages scanned by original type for
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan jobs only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax 8 205 transmission are not counted. These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display.
8 211 8 212 8 213 8 215
T:Scan PGS/LS C:Scan PGS/LS F:Scan PGS/LS S:Scan PGS/LS
*CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL
These SPs count the number of pages scanned into the document server . [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen
8 216
L:Scan PGS/LS
*CTL
Reading user stamp data is not counted. If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted. If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S: count is 4. If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not change. If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6. If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
B229
5-104
SM
SP Mode Tables
ADF Org Feeds 8 221 back side scanning.
*CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and Number of front sides fed for scanning: With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either 001 Front simplex or duplex scanning. With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front side scanning. (The front side is determined by which side the user loads face up.) Number of rear sides fed for scanning: With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back 002 Back count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning. With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Back count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear-side scanning. When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1. counting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output. Scan PGS/Mode *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Service Tables
If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double
8 231
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to determine the work load on the ADF. 001 Large Volume 002 SADF 003 Mixed Size 004 Custom Size 005 Platen Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loaded in the ADF at one time. Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the ADF. Selectable. Select Mixed Sizes on the operation panel. Selectable. Originals of non-standard size. Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the original directly on the platen.
SM
5-105
B229
SP Mode Tables
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode. The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application so if the originals page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted. If the user selects Mixed Sizes for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size count is enabled. In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3. T:Scan PGS/Org 8 241 *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all jobs, regardless of which application was used. C:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 242
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy jobs. F:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 243
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs. S:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 245
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan jobs. L:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 246
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen 8 241 8 242 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No 8 243 Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No 8 245 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes 8 246 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No 8 247 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No
001: Text 002: Text/Photo 003: Photo 004: GenCopy, Pale 005: Map 006: Normal/Detail 007: Fine/Super Fine 008: Binary 009: Grayscale
B229
5-106
SM
SP Mode Tables
010: Color 011: Other
Yes Yes
No Yes
No Yes
Yes Yes
No Yes
No No
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode. 8 251 8 252 8 254 8 256 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL These SPs show how many times Image Edit features have been selected at the operation panel for each application. Some examples of these editing features are: Erase> Border Erase> Center Image Repeat Centering Positive/Negative 8 257 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] The count totals the number of times the edit features have been exactly which features have been used is not given. The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. 8 261 8 262 8 266 T:Scn PGS/ColCr C:Scn PGS/ ColCr L:Scn PGS/ColCr 001 Color Conversion 002 Color Erase 003 Background 004 Other *CTL *CTL *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Service Tables
used. A detailed breakdown of
These SPs show how many times color creation features have been selected at the operation panel.
SM
5-107
B229
SP Mode Tables
8 281
T:Scan PGS/TWAIN
*CTL
These SPs count the number of pages scanned using a TWAIN driver. These counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is used for delivery functions. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] At the present time, these counters perform identical counts.
8 285
S:Scan PGS/TWAIN
*CTL
8 291 8 293 8 295
T:Scan PGS/Stamp F:Scan PGS/Stamp S:Scan PGS/Stamp
*CTL These SPs count the number of pages *CTL stamped with the stamp in the ADF unit. *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode
8 296
L:Scan PGS/Stamp
*CTL screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen
T:Scan PGS/Size 8 301
*CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page size [SP 8-441]. C:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 302
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page size [SP 8-442]. F:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 303
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-443]. S:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 305
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
B229
5-108
SM
SP Mode Tables
output page size [SP 8-445]. L:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored 8 306 from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-446]. -001 A3 002 A4 003 A5 004 B4 005 B5 006 DLT 007 LG 008 LT 009 HLT 010 Full Bleed -254 Other (Standard)
Service Tables B229
-255 Other (Custom)
T:Scan PGS/Rez 8 311
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings. Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages 8 315 scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings. At the present time, SP8-311 and 8-315 perform identical counts. 001 1200dpi to 002 600dpito1199dpi 003 400dpito599dpi 004 200dpito399dpi 005 to199dpi
SM
5-109
SP Mode Tables
Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted. The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count is done for the Fax application. 8 381 8 382 8 383 8 384 8 385 8 386 T:Total PrtPGS C:Total PrtPGS F:Total PrtPGS P:Total PrtPGS S:Total PrtPGS L:Total PrtPGS *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed by the customer. The counter for the application used for storing the pages increments. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel. Pages stored 8 387 O:Total PrtPGS *CTL with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen go to the C: counter. When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page is counted as 2. When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are counted for the application that stored them. These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the following pages are not counted as printed pages: Blank pages in a duplex printing job. Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets. Reports printed to confirm counts. All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.) Test prints for machine image adjustment. Error notification reports. Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam. LSize PrtPGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger. 8 391 In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
B229
5-110
SM
SP Mode Tables
8 401 8 402 8 403 8 404 8 405 8 406
T:PrtPGS/LS C:PrtPGS/LS F:PrtPGS/LS P:PrtPGS/LS S:PrtPGS/LS L:PrtPGS/LS
*CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed from the document server. The counter for the application used to print the pages is incremented. The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L: count. Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F: count. This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back counted as 1 page) used for duplex 8 411 Prints/Duplex *CTL printing. Last pages printed only on one side are not counted. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8 421 *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Service Tables B229
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications. C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 422
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the copier application. F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 423
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the fax application. P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 424
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the printer application. S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 425
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
SM
5-111
SP Mode Tables
L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 8 426
*CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window at the operation panel. O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 427
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by Other applications 001 Simplex> Duplex 002 Duplex> Duplex 003 Book> Duplex 004 Simplex Combine 005 Duplex Combine 006 2> 007 4> 008 6> 009 8> 010 9> 011 16> 012 Booklet 013 Magazine These counts (SP8-421 to SP8-427) are especially useful for customers who need to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption. Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page. Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes: Booklet Magazine Original Pages 1 2 3 4 5 6 Count 1 2 2 2 4 4 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up) 4 pages on 1 side (4-Up) 6 pages on 1 side (6-Up) 8 pages on 1 side (8-Up) 9 pages on 1 side (9-Up) 16 pages on 1 side (16-Up)
Original Pages 1 2 3 4 5 6
Count 1 2 2 2 3 4
B229
5-112
SM
SP Mode Tables
7 8
4 4
7 8
4 4
T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt 8 431
*CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below, regardless of which application was used. C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 432
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the copy application. P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 434
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the print application. L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 436
These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below. O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 437
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2. The number of pages printed in series (one side) or printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination. The number of pages printed where stamps were 003 User Stamp applied, including page numbering and date stamping.
Service Tables
below with Other applications. 001 Cover/Slip Sheet 002 Series/Book
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size 8 441 applications. C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size 8 442 copy application. 8 443 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax
SM
5-113
B229
SP Mode Tables
application. P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size 8 444 printer application. S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size 8 445 scanner application. L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size 8 446 *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel. O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 447
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other applications. 001 A3 002 A4 003 A5 004 B4 005 B5 006 DLT 007 LG 008 LT 009 HLT 010 Full Bleed 254 Other (Standard) 255 Other (Custom) These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF. PrtPGS/Ppr Tray *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 451
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station. 001 Bypass 002 Tray 1 003 By pass 004 Tray 2 005 Tray 3 Bypass Tray Copier Copier Paper Tray Unit (Option) Paper Tray Unit (Option)
B229
5-114
SM
SP Mode Tables
006 Tray 4 007 Tray 5 008 Tray 6 009 Tray 7 010 Tray 8
Paper Tray Unit (Option) Paper Tray Unit (Option) Currently not used. Currently not used. Currently not used.
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type applications.
*CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter 8 461 is based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing. Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted. During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a page printed on one side counts as 1. C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type 8 462 application. F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type 8 463 application. P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type 8 464 application. L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type 8 466 *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Service Tables B229
*CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel. 001 Normal 002 Recycled 003 Special 004 Thick 005 Normal (Back) 006 Thick (Back) 007 OHP 008 Other
SM
5-115
SP Mode Tables
B229
5-116
SM
SP Mode Tables
8 471
PrtPGS/Mag
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed. 001 to49% 002 50%to99% 003 100% 004 101%to200% 005 201% to Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing magnification adjustment as well. Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are also counted. Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document server are not counted. Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge copying are counted. The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned a rate of 100%.
Service Tables B229
8 481 8 484
T:PrtPGS/TonSave P:PrtPGS/TonSave feature switched on.
*CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save
These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print application.
8 491 8 492 8 493 8 496
T:PrtPGS/Col Mode C:PrtPGS/Col Mode F:PrtPGS/Col Mode L:PrtPGS/Col Mode
*CTL These SPs count the number of pages *CTL printed in the Color Mode by each *CTL application. *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
SM
5-117
SP Mode Tables
8 497
O:PrtPGS/Col Mode 001 B/W 002 Single Color 003 Two Color 004 Full Color
*CTL
8 501 8 504 8 507
T:PrtPGS/Col Mode P:PrtPGS/Col Mode O:PrtPGS/Col Mode 001 B/W 002 Single Color 003 Full Color 004 Single Color -005 Two Color
*CTL These SPs count the number of pages *CTL printed in the Color Mode or B/W Mode by *CTL the print application. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
T:PrtPGS/Emul 8 511 printed. P:PrtPGS/Emul 8 514 printed. 001 RPCS 002 RPDL 003 PS3 004 R98 005 R16 006 GL/GL2 007 R55 008 RTIFF 009 PDF 010 PCL5e/5c 011 PCL XL
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
B229
5-118
SM
SP Mode Tables
012 IPDL-C 013 BM-Links 014 Other SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application. Print jobs output to the document server are not counted. T:PrtPGS/FIN 8 521 applications. C:PrtPGS/FIN 8 522 the Copy application. F:PrtPGS/FIN by the Fax application. Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available. P:PrtPGS/FIN 8 524 the Print application. S:PrtPGS/FIN 8 525 the Scanner application. L:PrtPGS/FIN 8 526 *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Service Tables
*CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed 8 523
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel. 001 Sort 002 Stack 003 Staple 004 Booklet 005 Z-Fold 006 Punch 007 Other
SM
5-119
B229
SP Mode Tables
If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled pages are still counted. The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries are counted. This SP counts the amount of staples used by the 8 531 Staples *CTL machine. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] T:Counter 8 581 *CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine. 001 Total 002 Total: Full Color 003 B&W/Single Color 004 Development: CMY 005 Development: K 006 Copy: Color 007 Copy: B/W 008 Print: Color 009 Print: B/W 010 Total: Color -011 Total: B/W 012 Full Color: A3 013 Full Color: B4 014 Full Color Print 015 Mono Color Print 016 Full Color GPC
B229
5-120
SM
SP Mode Tables
8 582
C:Counter color output. 001 B/W 002 Single Color 003 Two Color 004 Full Color
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by
8 583
F:Counter color output.
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by 8583-001 B/W
8 583 2 Single Color
8 584
P:Counter color output.
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by 8 584 1 B/W 8 584 2 Mono Color 8 584 3 Full Color 8 584 4 Single Color 8 584 5 Two Color
8 586
L:Counter output. 8 582 1 B/W 8 582 2 Single Color 8 582 3 Two Color 8 582 4 Full Color
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by color
SM
5-121
B229
Service Tables
SP Mode Tables
8 591
O:Counter 8 591 1 A3/DLT 8 591 2 Duplex
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:) applications only.
8 601
Cvg Counter 8 601 1 Cvg: BW % 8 601 2 Cvg: FC % 8 601 11 Cvg: BW Pages 8 601 12 Cvg: FC Pages
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Displays the total coverage of each mode.
Displays the number of the printouts in each mode.
T:FAX TX PGS 8 631 telephone number. F:FAX TX PGS 8 633 telephone number. 001 B/W 002 Color
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted separately as B/W or Color. At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8631 and SP8633 are the same. The counts include error pages. If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is done for each destination. Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not. Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination. T:IFAX TX PGS 8 641 images using I-Fax. 8 643 F:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax
B229
5-122
SM
SP Mode Tables
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax images using I-Fax. 001 B/W 002 Color If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted separately as B/W or Color. At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8641 and SP8643 are the same. The counts include error pages. If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is done for each destination. Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX is not. Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination. T:S-to-Email PGS 8 651 *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for both the Scan and document server applications. S:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Service Tables
8 655
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for the Scan application only. 001 B/W 002 Color The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted. If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the count is 10 (the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together). If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50 (the document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP server). Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to a large number of destinations, the count may be divided and counted separately. For example, if a 10-page document is sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).
SM
5-123
B229
SP Mode Tables
T:Deliv PGS/Svr 8 661
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server by both Scan and LS applications. S:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 665
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server by the Scan application. 001 B/W 002 Color The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the Scan Router server. If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the counts are not done. The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan Router server. T:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 671
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications. S:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 675
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-to-PC with the Scan application. 001 B/W 002 Color Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count. If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored are counted for the application that stored them. When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is done for the number of pages sent to each destination.
B229
5-124
SM
SP Mode Tables
TX PGS/Port 8 701
*CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
8 701 1 PSTN-1 8 701 2 PSTN-2 8 701 3 PSTN-3 8 701 4 ISDN (G3,G4) 8 701 5 Network
8 711 8 715
T:Scan PGS/Comp S:Scan PGS/Comp
*CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages sent by each compression mode. -001 JPEG/JPEG2000 -002 TIFF M/S (Multi/Single)
003 PDF
Service Tables B229
-004 Other
RX PGS/Port 8 741 receive them. 8 741 1 PSTN-1 8 741 2 PSTN-2 8 741 3 PSTN-3 8 741 4 ISDN (G3,G4) 8 741 5 Network
*CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to
Ink Botol Info. 8 781
*BCU
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of already replaced ink cartridges. Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in SP8-781-001 through 004 are the same.
SM
5-125
SP Mode Tables
8 781 1 BK 8 781 2 Y 8 781 3 M 8 781 4 C
The number of black-ink cartridges The number of yellow-ink cartridges The number of magenta-ink cartridges The number of cyan-ink cartridges
This SP displays the percent of space 8 791 LS Memory Remain *CTL available on the document server for storing documents. [0 to 100 / 0 / 1] Ink Remain *CTL
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
These SPs display the percent of ink remaining for each color. This SP allows the user to check the toner supply at any time. 8 801 This precise method of measuring remaining ink supply (1% steps) is better than other machines in the market that can only measure in increments of 10 (10% steps). 8 801 1 K 8 801 2 Y 8 801 3 M 8 801 4 C
Cvr Cnt:0-10% 8 851
*BCU
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is from 0% to 10%. 8 851 11 0-2%:Bk 8 851 12 0-2%:Y 8 851 13 0-2%:M 8 851 14 0-2%:C 8 851 21 3-4%: Bk 8 851 22 3-4%: Y 8 851 23 3-4%: M 8 851 24 3-4%: C 8 851 31 5-7%: Bk 8 851 32 5-7%: Y
B229
5-126
SM
SP Mode Tables
8 851 33 5-7%: M 8 851 34 5-7%: C 8 851 41 8-10%: Bk 8 851 42 8-10%: Y 8 851 43 8-10%: M 8 851 44 8-10%: C
Cvr Cnt: 11-20% 8 861
*BCU
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is from 11% to 20%. 8 851 1 BK 8 851 2 Y 8 851 3 M 8 851 4 C
Cvr Cnt: 21-30% 8 871
*BCU
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is from 21% to 30%.
Service Tables
8 871 1 BK 8 871 2 Y 8 871 3 M 8 871 4 C
Cvr Cnt: 31%8 881
*BCU
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is 31% or higher. 8 881 1 BK 8 881 2 Y 8 881 3 M 8 881 4 C
SM
5-127
B229
SP Mode Tables
8 891
Page/Ink Bottle
*BCU
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of sheets output by the scan application. 8 891 1 BK 8 891 2 Y 8 891 3 M 8 891 4 C
Page/Ink Prev1 8 901
*BCU
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of sheets output by the scan application with the previously replaced units. 8 901 1 BK 8 901 2 Y 8 901 3 M 8 901 4 C
Page/Ink Prev2 8 911
*BCU
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of sheets output by the scan application with the one before previously replaced units. 8 911 1 BK 8 911 2 Y 8 911 3 M 8 911 4 C
8 921
Cvr Cnt/Total 8 921 1 Coverage(%): BK 8 921 2 Coverage(%): Y 8 921 3 Coverage(%): M 8 921 4 Coverage(%): C 8 921 11 Covwerage/P: Bk 8 921 12 Covwerage/P: Y 8 921 13 Covwerage/P: M 8 921 14 Covwerage/P: C
*BCU
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs display the total coverage percentage of sheets output by the machine.
These SPs display the total coverage pages output by the machine.
B229
5-128
SM
SP Mode Tables
8 921 21 Ink Cons(ml): BK 8 921 22 Ink Cons(ml): Y 8 921 23 Ink Cons(ml): M 8 921 24 Ink Cons(ml): C These SPs display the total ink consumption used by the machine.
Machine Status 8 941
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards. Engine operation time. Does not include time while 8 941 1 Operation Time controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not operating). Engine not operating. Includes time while controller 8 941 2 Standby Time saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes. 8 941 3 Energy Save Time Includes time while the machine is performing background printing. Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on. 8 941 4 Low Power Time Includes time while machine is performing background printing. Includes time while machine is performing 8 941 5 Off Mode Time 8 941 6 SC 8 941 7 PrtJam 8 941 8 OrgJam 8 941 9 Spl PM Unit End background printing. Does not include time machine remains powered off with the power switches. Total down time due to SC errors. Total down time due to paper jams during printing. Total down time due to original jams during scanning. Total down time due to ink end.
Service Tables B229
SM
5-129
SP Mode Tables
AddBook Register 8 951 registration. 8 951 1 User Code 8 951 2 Mail Address 8 951 3 Fax Destination 8 951 4 Group 8 951 5 Transfer Request 8 951 6 F-Code 8 951 7 Copy Program
*CTL
These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data User code registrations. Mail address registrations. Fax destination registrations. Group destination registrations. Fax relay destination registrations for relay TX. F-Code box registrations. Copy application registrations with the Program (job settings) feature. Fax application registrations with 8 951 8 Fax Program the Program (job settings) feature. Printer application registrations 8 951 9 Printer Program with the Program (job settings) feature. Scanner application registrations 8 951 10 Scanner Program with the Program (job settings) feature. [0 to 255 / 0 / 255] [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 999
AdominCounter
*CTL
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
Displays the user setting counter for administrator. 8 999 1 Total 8 999 2 Copy: FC 8 999 3 Copy: BW 8 999 6 Printer: FC 8 999 7 Printer: BW 8 999 8 Printer: OneC 8 999 9 Printer: TwoC 8 999 10 FaxP: BW 8 999 11 FaxP: OneC
B229
5-130
SM
SP Mode Tables
8 999 12 A3/DLT 8 999 13 Duplex 8 999 14 Cvr: FC % 8 999 15 Cvr: BW % 8 999 16 Cvr: FC Pages 8 999 17 Cvr: BW Pages 8 999 101 SendTtl: FC 8 999 102 SendTtl: BW 8 999 103 FaxSend 8 999 104 FaxSend: FC 8 999 105 FaxSend: BW
SM
5-131
B229
Service Tables
Printer Service Mode
5.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE

1001 [Bit Switch] *CTL Adjusts bit switch settings. DFU Bit 0 to 2: Not used. Do not change settings. Bit 3: Changing print language (PCL <-> PS) 1001 2 Bit Switch 2 *CTL 0: Enabled 1: Disabled (No change) Bit 4 to 7: Not used. Do not change settings. Bit Switch 3 0: Disabled 1: Enabled (Even if there is no Euro Glyph in ROM, it is possible to load the Euro Glyph data.) Bit 1: Not used. Do not change setting. Bit 2:PCL5e/5c (HP4000/HP8000) The left space command is set to 0, the machine is changed to 1 1001 3 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Bit 3: PCL5e/GL2: pen # of PW 0: Normal 1: Patch Bit 4: Tray selecting 0: Select tray is determined auto tray selecting 1: Like HP/SV Bit 5 to 7: Not used. Do not change settings. 1001 4 Bit Switch 4 *CTL Adjusts bit switch settings. DFU Bit 0 to 2: Not used. Do not change settings. Bit 3: Enabled the %% command of the PostScript detection condition for the auto 1001 5 Bit Switch 5 *CTL print language selection function. 0: Enabled 1: Disabled Bit 4 to 7: Not used. Do not change settings. *CTL Adjusts bit switch settings.
1001 1 Bit Switch 1
Bit 0: PostScript3 Euro glyph
B229
5-132
SM
1001 6 Bit Switch 6 1001 7 Bit Switch 7 1001 8 Bit Switch 8
*CTL *CTL *CTL Adjusts bit switch settings. DFU
1003
[Clear Setting] Initializes settings in the System menu of the user mode. DFU
1003 1 Init. System 1003 3 Delete Program
1004
[Print Summary] Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).
1004 1 Service Summary
1005
[Disp. Version]
1005 1 Displays the version of the controller firmware.
1101
[ToneCtlSet] 1101 2 Tone (Prev.) 1101 3 Tone (Current) *CTL *CTL either a) the factory setting, b) the previous setting, or c) the current setting.
Service Tables
1101 1 Tone (Factory)
*CTL
Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be
[ToneCtlSet] 1102
*CTL
Sets the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment. The asterisk (*) shows which mode is set. Refer to the tone control selection list following these SP tables
1103 1103 001 1103 002
[PrnColorSheet] ToneCtlSheet ColorChart Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma adjustment.
SM
5-133
B229
1104 1104 001 1104 021 1104 041 1104 061 1104 002 1104 022 1104 042 1104 062 1104 003 1104 023 1104 043 1104 063 1104 004 1104 024 1104 044 1104 064 1104 005 1104 025 1104 045 1104 065 1104 006 1104 026 1104 046 1104 066 1104 007 1104 027 1104 047 1104 067
[ToneCtlValue] Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the Mode Selection menu. Set Black 1 Set Cyan 1 Set Magenta 1 Set Yellow 1 Set Black 2 Set Cyan 2 Set Magenta 2 Set Yellow 2 Set Black 3 Set Cyan 3 Set Magenta 3 Set Yellow 3 Set Black 4 Set Cyan 4 Set Magenta 4 Set Yellow 4 Set Black 5 Set Cyan 5 Set Magenta 5 Set Yellow 5 Set Black 6 Set Cyan 6 Set Magenta 6 Set Yellow 6 Set Black 7 Set Cyan 7 Set Magenta 7 Set Yellow 7 *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL [0 to 255 / 112 / 1/step] [0 to 255 / 96 / 1/step] [0 to 255 / 80 / 1/step] [0 to 255 / 64 / 1/step] [0 to 255 / 48 / 1/step] [0 to 255 / 32 / 1/step] [0 to 255 / 16 / 1/step]
B229
5-134
SM
1104 008 1104 028 1104 048 1104 068 1104 009 1104 029 1104 049 1104 069 1104 010 1104 030 1104 050 1104 070 1104 011 1104 031 1104 051 1104 071 1104 012 1104 032 1104 052 1104 072 1104 013 1104 033 1104 053 1104 073 1104 014 1104 034 1104 054 1104 074 1104 015 1104 035 1104 055 1104 075
Set Black 8 Set Cyan 8 Set Magenta 8 Set Yellow 8 Set Black 9 Set Cyan 9 Set Magenta 9 Set Yellow 9 Set Black 10 Set Cyan 10 Set Magenta 10 Set Yellow 10 Set Black 11 Set Cyan 11 Set Magenta 11 Set Yellow 11 Set Black 12 Set Cyan 12 Set Magenta 12 Set Yellow 12 Set Black 13 Set Cyan 13 Set Magenta 13 Set Yellow 13 Set Black 14 Set Cyan 14 Set Magenta 14 Set Yellow 14 Set Black 15 Set Cyan 15 Set Magenta 15 Set Yellow 15
*CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL [0 to 255 / 192 / 1/step]
Service Tables B229
[0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
[0 to 255 / 144 / 1/step]
[0 to 255 / 160 / 1/step]
[0 to 255 / 176 / 1/step]
*CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL
[0 to 255 / 208 / 1/step]
[0 to 255 / 224 / 1/step]
[0 to 255 / 240 / 1/step]
SM
5-135
[ToneCtlSave] Saves the print gamma (adjusted with the Gamma Adj.) as the new Current 1105 Setting. Before the machine stores the new current setting, it moves the data stored as the current setting to the previous setting memory-storage location.
1106 1106 001 1106 002
[Toner Limit] Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development. TonerLimitPhot TonerLimitText *CTL *CTL [100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step] [100 to 400 / 200 / 1 %/step]
[FactoryTestPrt] 1107 Prints the test page to check the color balance before transportation (600 x 600 2 bit). DFU
1108 1108 001 1108 002 1108 003 1108 004 1108 005 1108 006 1108 007 1108 008
[Ext. Toner Save] Mode 1: Text Mode 2: Text Mode 1: Image Mode 2: Image Mode 1: Line Mode 2: Line Mode 1: paint Mode 2: Paint SP1102-001 Paper Type Resolution 300 dpi Photo Text Photo 600 dpi Text Photo Text Mode DFU
Tone Control Setting: Input Number 0 1 2 3 4 5
Plain Paper
B229
5-136
SM
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Envelop for Ink jet (Japan Only) 600 dpi Envelop 600 dpi Envelop 600 dpi OHP 600 dpi Glossy Paper 600 dpi High Grade Plain Paper 600 dpi
Photo Text Photo Text Photo Text Photo Text Photo Text Photo Text Photo Text Photo Text Photo
Service Tables B229
Text Photo Text Photo Text Photo Text Photo Text Photo Text
SM
5-137
Scanner SP Mode
5.4 SCANNER SP MODE

SP1-xxx (System and Others)
1004 1004 1 [Compression Type] Selects the compression type for binary picture processing. Compression Type *CTL [ 1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step ] 1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR
[Erase margin] 1005 1005 1 Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image. If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin. Range from 0 to 5 mm *CTL [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]
1009 1009 1
[Remote scan disable]
*CTL
[ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: enable, 1: disable
Enable or disable the TWAIN network scan.
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality)

[Compression ratio of gray-scale] 2021 Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the three settings that can be selected at the operation panel. 2021 1 2021 2 2021 3 2021 4 2021 5 Level 3 (Standard compression) Level 2 (Higher compression) Level 4 (Lower compression) *CTL Level 1 (Highest compression) Level 5 (Lowest compression) [ 5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ] [ 5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step ] [ 5 to 95 / 30 / 1 /step ] [ 5 to 95 / 60 / 1 /step ] [ 5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]
B229
5-138
SM
Using SP Modes
5.5 USING SP MODES

5.5.1 ADJUSTING REGISTRATION AND MAGNIFICATION
To adjust the registration and magnification, you need to use several service programs. The chart shows an example of the procedure to adjust the machine in the basic configuration.
5.5.2 DISPLAY APS DATA (SP 4301 1)

- Sensor Positions The APS (auto paper select) sensors are arranged as shown in the diagram. - Reading the Data Example 1 (7)00001100(0) [0C] Example 2 Paper Size: 00000011 [03]
Example 1 indicates that the paper size and its orientation is "81/2 x 13 SEF," and that the document feeder (or platen cover) is open. Example 2 indicates that the paper size and its orientation is "A4 LEF," and that the document feeder (or platen cover) is closed. The "Paper Size" data starts with eight digits. The first digit indicates the output of L2; the second digit, L1; the third digit, W2; and the fourth digit, W1. The other four digits (from the fifth through the eighth) are always "0000." In Example 1, the APS sensors L2 and L1 Detect paper (W2 and W1 do not). In Example 2, APS sensors W2 and W1 detect paper (L2 and L1 do not). The paper size and its orientation is based on the outputs of these four APS sensors. The "DF Open" data shows "1" or "0," indicating if the document feeder (or platen cover) is open or closed respectively. The data is based on the output of the platen cover sensor [A].
Service Tables
5.5.3 MEMORY CLEAR

The machine stores the engine data in the NVRAM on the BCU, and stores the other data in the NVRAM on the controller. To distinguish between the engine data and the other data, see SP5801-1 through 19. This service program (SP 5801) handles the controller data. Any data that is not handled by SP 5801 is the engine data. The data in the BCU NVRAM (engine data) is cleared by SP5998-1 while the data in the controller NVRAM (controller data) is cleared by SP 5801-xxx (for exceptions, see "xxx").
SM
5-139
B229
Using SP Modes
Machine
Data Engine data BCU
NVRAM
Cleared by SP 5998-002
Remarks Any data other than controller data SCS, IMH, MCS, Copier application, Fax application,
MFP Controller data Controller SP 5801-001, 003 to 009
Printer application, Scanner application, Web service/network application, NCS, R-Fax, DCS, UCS
- Exceptions SP 5998-1 clears most of the settings and counters stored in the NVRAM on the BCU (the values return to their default values). However, the following settings are not cleared: SP 5807 (Area Selection) SP 5811-1 (Serial Num Input [Code Set]) SP 5811-3 (Serial Num Input [ID2 Code Display]) SP 5812-1 (Service TEL [Telephone]) SP 5812-2 (Service TEL [Facsimile]) SP 5907 (Plug & Play) SP 7 (Data Log) SP 8 (History) SP 5998-1 (MFP machine) after you have replaced the BCU NVRAM or when the BCU NVRAM data is corrupted. When the program ends normally, the message "Completed" is displayed. When you have replaced the controller NVRAM or when the controller NVRAM data is corrupted, use SP 5801-1. The message is the same as the basic machine. 1. 2. Upload the NVRAM data to a flash memory card ( Upload/Download). Print out all SMC data lists ( SMC Print). NVRAM Data
Be sure to print out all the lists. You have to manually change the SP settings if the NVRAM data upload ends abnormally.
B229
5-140
SM
Using SP Modes
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Select SP 5801-2. Press the OK key. Select "Execute." The messages "Execute?" followed by "Cancel" and "Execute" are displayed. Select "Execute." When the program has ended normally, the message "Completed" is displayed. If the program has ended abnormally, an error message is displayed. Press the cancel key. Turn the main switch off and on. NVRAM Data Upload/Download).
10. Download the NVRAM data from a flash memory card (
5.5.4 INPUT CHECK (SP 5803)

- Conducting an Input Check 1. 2. 3. 4. Select SP 5803. Select the number (see the table below) corresponding to the component. Select "Execute." The copy mode is activated. The sign "01H" or "00H" is displayed (see the table below).
Service Tables B229
- Input Check Table Num. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 Safety SW Front Cover SW (Front door) Right Cover SW (Right door) Left Cover SW (Left upper door) Left LowCover SW (Left lower door) Straight Cover SW (Multi-duplex exit door) Manual Cover SW (Duplex entrance door) Exit Cover SW (Exit tray cover left and right) Mech Counter (Mechanical counter) Regist Sensor (First registration sensor) Belt In Sensor (Engine entrance sensor) Sensor/Switch 01H Open Open Open Open Open Open Open Open Detected Paper detected Paper detected 00H Close Close Close Close Close Close Close Close Not detected Not detected Not detected
SM
5-141
Using SP Modes
Num. 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 Sensor)
Sensor/Switch Image Reg Sensor (Second Registration Branch Sensor (Junction gate sensor) Exit Sensor Mun PE S (Paper end Sensor: By-pass) OP Sensor (Relay sensor) Upper PE S (Paper end sensor: Tray 1) Upper P Size S (Paper size switch: Tray1) System Temp (Temperature sensor) System Humidity (Humidity sensor) By-pass PE S (Multi-bypass paper detection sensor) By-pass P Size S (Multi-bypass paper size sensor) Duplex Installed (Duplex unit selection switch ) Duplex Entrance S (Duplex entrance sensor) Duplex Internal S (Duplex wait sensor) Duplex Inverter S (Duplex inverter sensor) Duplex Exit S (Duplex exit sensor) Duplex R-Cover SW (Duplex right door Switch) Duplex L-Cover SW (Duplex left door Switch) BK Installed (Optional paper tray unit detection switch) BK-Upper PE S (Paper end sensor: Tray 2) BK-Upper P Size S (Paper size switch: Tray 2) BK-Upper Lift S
01H Paper detected Paper detected Paper detected Paper detected Paper detected Paper detected *1
00H Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected
Display at 5 to 45C Display at 0 to 100 % Paper detected *1 Duplex unit detected Paper detected Paper detected Paper detected Paper detected Open Open OPT detected Paper detected *1 Paper detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Close Close Not detected Not detected Not detected
B229
5-142
SM
Using SP Modes
Num.
Sensor/Switch (Paper upper limit sensor: Tray 2)
01H
00H
034 035 038 039
BK-Up P Height S (Paper height sensor: Tray 2) BK Cover SW (Right door switch: Optional paper tray unit) BK type BK-Low PE S (Paper end sensor: Tray 3) BK-Low P Size S (Paper size switch: Tray 2) BK-Low Lift S (Paper upper limit sensor: Tray 3) BK-Low P Height S (Paper height sensor: Tray 3) Air Detected S (Air sensor pin at printer head) Filler S (Tank full sensor) Cartrg Det:Y (Ink cartridge detection sensor for yellow) Cartrg Det:M (Ink cartridge detection sensor for magenta) Cartrg Det:C (Ink cartridge detection sensor for cyan) Cartrg Det:K (Ink cartridge detection sensor for black) New Cartridge: Y New Cartridge: M New Cartridge: C New Cartridge: K Ink Remainder: Y Ink Remainder: M
Paper detected Open
Not detected Close
00: Not installed, 01: One tray unit 02: Two tray unit Paper detected Not detected
00: Not installed, 02: A4 LEF, 03: A4 SEF, 05: B4 SEF, 07: B5 LEF, 08: B5 SEF, 0C: A5 SEF, 0F: A3 SEF
040
041 042 046 047 048
Detected Detected
Not detected Not detected
Detected Detected
Not detected Not detected
049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057
Detected Detected Detected New New New New
Not detected Not detected Not detected Not new Not new Not new Not new
0 to 100% 0 to 100%
SM
5-143
B229
Service Tables
Using SP Modes
Num. 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 100 101 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208
Sensor/Switch Ink Remainder: C Ink Remainder: K Refill Cartrg: Y Refill Cartrg: M Refill Cartrg: C Refill Cartrg: K Maintenance-M HP S (Maintenance unit HP sensor) Waste Ink Full S (Ink collection bottle full sensor) Mist-Fan Lock Carig Enc-Counter (Main scan encoder sensor) Carriage Lift S Head Temperature Belt Enc-Counter (Sub scan encoder sensor) Belt Temperature PP-Leak Detect (High voltage unit current leak detection) Print Exit Sens (Paper exit sensor) Key-Card Sensor Key-Cnt Sensor (Key counter detection sensor) Scanner HP Sensor Platen Opn Sens (Platen cover sensor) DF Installed (DF detection sensor) DF-Position S DF-Cover Open S DF-Original Set S DF-Registration S DF-Exit S DF-Trailing S
01H 0 to 100% 0 to 100% Refill cartridge Refill cartridge Refill cartridge Refill cartridge HP
00H
Not refill Not refill Not refill Not refill Not HP
Detected
Not detected
Carriage lift
Not lift
Displayed at 0 to 55C
Displayed at 0 to 55C Detected Detected Detected Detected HP Close Installed Close Close Detected Detected Detected Detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected Not HP Open Not installed Open Open Not detected Not detected Not detected Not detected
B229
5-144
SM
Using SP Modes
Num. 209
Sensor/Switch DF-Reverse S *1 Paper Size
01H Detected
00H Not detected
Copier Europe North America
00
02
03
04 A4 SEF LT SEF
05 Foolscap Foolscap
06 A4 LEF A4 LEF
07 Not set Not set
DLT SEF LT LEF LG SEF A3 SEF LT LEF A5 LEF
Paper Feed Unit Europe North America
00 Not set Not set
02 A4 LEF A4 LEF
03 A4 SEF A4 SEF
05 DLT SEF DLT SEF
07 LT LEF LT LEF
0C LG SEF LG SEF
0F A3 SEF A3 SEF
By-Pass Tray Europe North America
03 A4 SEF LT SEF
07
09 A3 DLT
0B F/GL
0C
0D
0E A5 SEF
Service Tables
HLT SEF
- *2 Paper Amount 10 11 00 00 Near end About 25% About 75% About 100%
- *3 Available Paper Feed Unit 00 20 30 None 2-tray paper feed unit 1-tray paper feed unit
SM
5-145
B229
Using SP Modes
5.5.5 OUTPUT CHECK (SP 5804)

Conducting an Output Check
To prevent mechanical or electrical damage, do not keep an electrical component on for a long time. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select SP 5804. Select the number (see the table below) corresponding to the component. Select "ON." To stop the operation, select "OFF."
Output Check Table

Number 005, 006, 040, and 041 may not respond when the fusing temperature is high. Num. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 Feed M-Fwd 220 Feed M-Fwd 100 Upper Feed CL (Paper feed clutch: Tray 1) Registration CL Guide SOL Exit M-Fwd 225 Exit M-Fwd 105 Branch SOL By-Pass CL Duplex M-Fwd 225 Reverse M-Fwd 225 Reverse M-Fwd 146 Duplex CL Duplex Branch SOL BK-Up M-Fwd BK-Up Relay CL BK-Up Lift M-Up BK-Up Lift M-Dw BK-Low M-Fwd BK-Low Relay CL BK-Low Lift M-Up Component
B229
5-146
SM
Using SP Modes
Num. 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 100 101 102 202 203 204 205 206
Component BK-Low Lift M-Dw Supply M-Fwd K2 Supply M-Fwd K Supply M-Fwd C Supply M-Fwd M Supply M-Fwd Y Air Open SOL Maintenance M-Fwd Mist-Fan Carriage M-Fwd Belt M-Fwd 220 Belt M-Fwd 100 PP High:4mm PP High:8mm PP High:12mm PP High:16mm PP High:20mm
PP Low:4mm PP Low:8mm PP Low:12mm PP Low:16mm PP Low:20mm Decap Capping Carig FreeRun (Carriage unit free run) Belt FreeRun (Belt unit free run) BeltCarig FreeRun (Belt unit and Carriage unit free run) Scanner Lamp DF-Feed M DF-Duplex M DF-Feed CL DF-Pickup SOL
SM
Using SP Modes
Num. 207 208 DF-Stamp SOL DF-Gate SOL
Component
5.5.6 SERIAL NUMBER INPUT (SP 5811)

- Specifying Characters SP 5811 1 specifies the serial number. You use the numeric keypad and the operation panel. You use the numeric keypad to type numbers. In addition, you use the operation panel to type other characters. When you press the "ABC" key, the letter changes as follows: A B C. To input the same letter two times, for example "AA," you press the "ABC" key, the "Space" key, and the "ABC" key. To switch between uppercase letters and lowercase letters, press the "Shift" key. - Serial Number and NVRAM Serial numbers are stored in the NVRAM before shipment and are not cleared. You must specify a serial number after you replace the NVRAM or BCU.
5.5.7 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD (SP 5824/5825)

Make sure that you turn off the main switch before inserting or removing an SD card. Installing or removing an SD card while the main switch is on may damage the BCU or SD card. - Overview You can copy the data from the NVRAM to an SD card (NVRAM Upload), or from an SD card to the NVRAM (NVRAM download). SP 5824-1 (NVRAM Upload) SP 5825-1 (NVRAM Download)
From the BCU to an SD card From an SD card to the BCU
You should execute NVRAM Upload before replacing the NVRAM or before executing SP 5801-2 ( Memory Clear). You can copy back the data from the SD card to the NVRAM as necessary.
B229
5-148
SM
Using SP Modes
- NVRAM Upload (SP 5824-1) Print out the SMC reports (SP Mode Data and Logging Data) with SP5990-001 before you do the NVRAM upload. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn off the main power switch. Remove the slot cover [B] ( x 1). Face a label of an SD card [A] ("A" is printed on it) to the rear side, and insert it into the SD card slot 3 (service slot). Start the SP mode and select SP 5824-1. The machine erases the settings on the SD card (if any), then writes the machines settings to the SD card. This takes about 20 seconds. If uploading fails, an error message appears. If an error message appears, retry the upload procedure. 7. 8. Turn off the main power switch. Remove the SD card.
Service Tables B229
Turn on the main power switch.
- NVRAM Download (SP 5825-1) SP 5825-1 copies the data from the SD card to the NVRAM. The following data is NOT copied (the data in the NVRAM remains unchanged). SP8581-xxx (Total counter) 1. 2. 3. Turn off the main power switch. Remove the slot cover [B] ( x 1). Face a label of an SD card [A] ("A" is printed on it) to the rear side, and insert it into the SD card slot 1, and insert it into the SD card slot 3 (service slot).
SM
5-149
Using SP Modes
4. 5. 6.
Turn on the main power switch. Start the SP mode and select SP 5825-1. The machine erases the current settings, then writes the new settings onto the NVRAM on the BCU board. This takes about 1 second. If downloading fails, an error message appears. If an error message appears, retry the download procedure.
7. 8.
Turn off the main power switch. Remove the SD card.
5.5.8 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE

This section shows how to update the firmware of the machine. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn the main power switch off. Remove the slot cover ( x 1). Face a label of an SD card [A] ("A" is printed on it) to the rear side, and insert it into the SD card slot 3 (service slot). Turn on the main power switch. Select a firmware that you want to update. You can update multiple firmwares at the same time. However, it is not possible to update controller firmware (System/Copy, Network, Support, Fax and Web Support) at the same time. Update a controller firmware one by one. 6. 7. 8. 9. Press "Execute" [C]. Do not touch any key while the message "Load Status..." is displayed. This message indicates that the program is running. Check that the message "End Sum..." is displayed. This message indicates that the program has ended normally. Turn off the main power switch (on the rear cover). 10. Remove the SD card. 11. Install the slot cover. 12. Turn on the main power switch. 13. Check the operation.
B229
5-150
SM
Using SP Modes
5.5.9 SD CARD APPLI MOVE

Overview
The service program SD Card Appli Move (SP5-873) lets you copy application programs from one SD card to another SD card. Slot 1 and Slot 2 are used to store application programs. Slot 3 is for maintenance work only. You cannot run application programs from Slot 3. However, you can move application programs from Slot 3 to Slot 2. Do the following procedure if you want to move an application procedure from Slot 3: 1. 2. Choose an SD card with enough space. Enter SP5873 SD Card Appli Move. Then move the application from the SD Card in Slot 3 to Slot 2. Do steps 1-2 again if you want to move another application program. 3. Exit the SP mode. The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program from an SD card to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card Do not use the SD card if it has been used before for other purposes. Normal operation is not guaranteed when such an SD card is used. Keep the SD card in a safe place after you copy the application program from one card to another card. This is done for the following reasons: 6. The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application program. 7. You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future. You cannot copy PostScript data to another SD card. You have to copy other data to the SD card that stores the PostScript data.
Service Tables B229
Be very careful when you do the SD Card Appli Move procedure:
after you copy the application program from one card to another card.
Move Exec
The menu Move Exec (SP5-873-001) lets you copy application programs from the original SD card to another SD card. Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge.
SM
5-151
Using SP Modes
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Turn the main switch off. Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 2. The application program is copied into this SD card. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) in SD Card Slot 3. The application program is copied from this SD card. Turn the main switch on. Start the SP mode. Select SP5-873-001 Move Exec. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel. Turn the main switch off. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3.
10. Turn the main switch on. 11. Check that the application programs run normally.
Undo Exec
Undo Exec (SP5-873-002) lets you copy back application programs from an SD card to the original SD card. You can use this program when, for example, you have mistakenly copied some programs by using Move Exec (SP5-873-001). Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Turn the main switch off. Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2. The application program is copied back into this card. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to SD Card Slot 3. The application program is copied back from this SD card. Turn the main switch on. Start the SP mode. Select SP5-873-002 Undo Exec. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel. Turn the main switch off. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2
10. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3 and insert it in SD Card Slot 2. This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are used by the machine.
B229
5-152
SM
Using SP Modes
1. 2.
Turn the main switch on. Check that the application programs run normally.
5.5.10 SMC PRINT (SP 5990)

SP 5990 outputs machine status lists. 1. 2. Select SP 5990. Select a menu: 001 All (Data List), 002 SP (Mode Data List), 003 User Program, 004 Logging Data, 005 Diagnostic Report, 006 Non-Default, 007 NIB Summary, 021 Copier User Program, 022 Scanner SP, 023 Scanner User Program, The output given by the menu "Big Font" is suitable for faxing. 3. 4. Press the "Execute" key. MFP machine: The machine status list is output. To return to the SP mode, press the key.
5.5.11 ADF APS SENSOR OUTPUT DISPLAY (SP 6901)

- Sensor Positions W1 W2 - Reading Data W1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 W2 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 L1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 L2 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Paper Size NA 11" x 17" 81/2" x 14" 81/2" x 11" 11" x 8 /2" 81/2" X 51/2"
1
1 0
0 0
0 1
1 1
EU/AA A3 B4 81/2" x 13" A4 SEF A4 LEF B5 LEF A5 LEF
SM
5-153
B229
Service Tables
Large to Small
DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
Overview
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
(Color) 1. Scanner H.P. Sensor 2. 3rd Mirror 3. 2nd Mirror 4. Exposure Glass 5. Original Width Sensors 6. Exposure Lamp 7. 1st Mirror 8. Original Length Sensors 9. Lens Block 10. CCD 11. SBU 12. Scanner Motor 13. Engine Unit 14. Engine Entrance Sensor 15. One-sheet By-pass Tray 16. By-pass Tray 17. Registration Roller 18. First Registration Sensor 20. Paper Size Switch 21. Vertical Transport Roller 22. Paper Feed Roller 23. Sub-scan Encoder 24. Charge Roller 25. Sub-scan sensor 26. Engine Exit Sensor 27. Ink Cartridge Black 28. Ink Cartridge Cyan 29. Ink Cartridge Magenta 30. Ink Cartridge Yellow 32. Junction Gate 33. Paper Exit Roller 34. Paper Exit Sensor
Detailed Descriptions B229
19. By-pass Paper Feed Roller 31. Junction Gate Sensor
SM
6-1
Overview
6.1.2 PAPER PATH
(Color)
1. Original Tray 2. Original Exit Tray 3. One-sheet By-pass Tray 4. By-pass Tray 5. Duplex Feed 6. Tray 2: Optional One-tray Paper Tray Unit/Two-tray Paper Tray Unit
7. Tray 3: : Optional Two-tray Paper Tray Unit 8. Duplex Inverter 9. To the Duplex Unit 10. Straight Exit Tray 11. Standard Tray
This model can use the optional duplex unit and paper tray unit.
B229
6-2
SM
Overview
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
1. Scanner Motor 2. Exit Motor 3. Sub Scan Motor 4. Feed Motor 5. Feed Clutch
6. Relay Clutch 7. By-pass Clutch 8. Registration Clutch 9. Main Scan Motor
SM
6-3
B229
Detailed Descriptions
Board Structure
6.2 BOARD STRUCTURE

6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM
B229
6-4
SM
Board Structure
1. BCU (Base Engine Control Unit)

The main board controls the following functions: Engine sequence Timing control for peripherals Image processing, video control Drive control for the sensors, motors, and clutches of the copier and scanner High voltage supply board control Serial interfaces with peripherals
2. Controller
The controller board controls the following functions. Machine-to-host interface Operation panel interface Network interface Interfacing and control of the optional IEEE1284, Bluetooth, IEEE1394, IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN), HDD, and DRAM DIMM
3. CONIJ (Connect Ink Jet Module)

The CONIJ is connecting board between COM and BCU board and COM and IOB board.
4. COM
The COM board controls the print heads.
5. SBU (Sensor Board Unit)

The SBU deals with the analog signals from the CCD and converts them into digital signals.
6. IPU (Image Processing Unit)

The Image Processing Unit is a large-scale integrated circuit. This unit processes digital signals.
7. IOB (In Out Board)

The IOB controls the motors, clutches , solenoids and high voltage power supply of the engine unit.
8. PSU (Power Supply Unit)

The PSU supplies DC to the machine.
9. FCU (Fax Control Unit): Optional

The FCU controls the fax programs and communicates with the controller to share copier resources.
SM
6-5
B229
Board Structure
10. HDD (Hard Disk Drives)

This board stores all the temporary files for job processing and all permanent files for the document server.
B229
6-6
SM
Copy Process Overview
6.3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW
6.3.1 EXPOSURE
A xenon lamp exposes the original. Light reflected from the original passes to the CCD, where it is converted into an analog data signal. This data is converted to a digital signal, processed and stored in the memory. At the time of printing, the data is retrieved and sent to the COM board, which controls the carriage unit.
6.3.2 IMAGE CREATION

The ink jet engine processes an image to the paper with the carriage unit. The carriage unit has 5 print heads (K1, K2, C, M, Y). It scans the paper from rear (home position) to front to print an image to the paper. The carriage scans in two mode, one-way scanning and two-way scanning. Two-way scanning saves time because the carriage can print an image at returning way (front to rear). The printing speed differs depending on the mode, resolution, paper type and so on.
This machine uses the ink jet engine. As a result, it is not necessary to fuse the ink on the paper. However, the machine may need time to exit the paper depending on the high ink coverage on the paper or installation environment. This waiting time prevents the paper from becoming curl.
SM
6-7
B229
6.3.3 NO FUSING
Scanning
6.4 SCANNING
6.4.1 OVERVIEW
1. Scanner H.P. Sensor 2. Exposure Glass 3. Exposure Lamp 4. 1st Scanner 5. Lens Block
6. CCD 7. Scanner Motor 8. Original Length Sensor 9. Original Width Sensors
The original is illuminated by the exposure lamp (a xenon lamp). The image is reflected onto a CCD (charge coupled device) on the lens block via the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd mirrors, and through the lens on the lens block. The 1st scanner consists of the exposure lamp, a reflector, and the 1st mirror. A lamp stabilizer energizes the exposure lamp. The light reflected by the reflector is of almost equal intensity, to reduce shadows on pasted originals. An optics anti-condensation heater is available as an option. It can be installed on the left side of the scanner. It turns on whenever the power cord is plugged in.
6.4.2 LAMP STABILIZER FUSE

Rating Fuse 1.25A Manufacturer BEL FUSE INC Type No. MRT
B229
6-8
SM
Scanning
6.4.3 SCANNER DRIVE
A stepper motor drives the 1st and 2nd scanners [A, B]. The 1st scanner and 2nd scanner are driven by the scanner drive motor [C], drive gear through the timing belt [D], scanner drive pulley [E], scanner drive shaft [F], and two scanner wires [G].
Book Mode
The BCU controls and operates the scanner drive motor. In full size mode, the 1st scanner speed is 100 mm/s in B/W mode and 66.6 mm/s in color mode during scanning. The 2nd In reduction or enlargement mode, the scanning speed depends on the magnification ratio. The returning speed is always the same, whether in full size or magnification mode. The image length change in the sub scan direction is done by changing the scanner drive motor speed, and in the main scan direction it is done by image processing on the BCU board. Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the scanner drive motor speed using SP4-008.
scanner speed is half that of the 1st scanner.
ADF Mode
The scanners are always kept at their home position (the scanner H.P. sensor [H] detects the 1st scanner) to scan the original. The ADF motor feeds the original through the ADF. In reduction/enlargement mode, the image length change in the sub-scan direction is done by changing the ADF motor speed. Magnification in the main scan direction is done in the BCU board, like for book mode.
SM
6-9
B229
Scanning
Magnification in the sub-scan direction can be adjusted by changing the ADF motor speed using SP6-006-005.
6.4.4 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION IN PLATEN MODE
In the optics cavity for original size detection, there are four reflective sensors. The original width sensors [A] detect the original width, and the original length sensors [B] detect the original length. These are the APS (Auto Paper Select) sensors. Each APS sensor is a reflective photo sensor. While the main switch is on, these sensors are active and the original size data is always sent to the CPU. However, the CPU checks the data only when the platen cover sensor [C] is activated. This is when the platen is positioned about 15 cm above the exposure glass, for example while it is being closed. The CPU can recognize the original size from the combination of on/off signals from the APS sensors. If the copy is made with the platen fully open, the CPU decides the original size from the sensor outputs when the Start key is pressed.
B229
6-10
SM
Scanning
[A]: NA, [B]: EU/ASIA Original Size A4/A3 version LT/DLT version A3 B4 8.5" x 13" A4-SEF A4-LEF B5-LEF A5-LEF 11" x 17" 8.5" x 14" 8.5" x 11" 11" x 8.5" 8.5" x 5.5" Length Sensors L2 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 L1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 Width Sensors W2 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 W1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 SP4-301 display 00001111 00001110 00001100 00000100 00000011 00000010 00000000
0: High (no paper), 1: Low (paper present) The above table shows the outputs of the sensors for each original size. This original size detection method eliminates the necessity for a pre-scan and increases the machine's productivity. For other combinations, Cannot Detect Original Size will be indicated on the operation panel display (if SP4-303 is kept at the default setting). However, if the by-pass feeder is used, note that the machine assumes that the copy paper is short-edge first. For example, if A4 paper is placed long-edge first on the by-pass tray, the machine assumes it is A3 paper and scans the full A3 area for the first copy of each page of the original, disregarding the original size sensors. However, for each page, the data signal to the laser diode is stopped to match the copy paper length detected by the registration sensor. This means that copy time for the first page may be slower (because of the longer time required for scanning), but it will be normal for the rest of the job. Original size detection using the ADF is described in the manual for the ADF.
SM
6-11
B229
Image Processing
6.5 IMAGE PROCESSING

6.5.1 SBU (SENSOR BOARD UNIT)
SBU
The VPU (Video Processor Unit) does the following functions: Black level correction White level correction Gradation calibration ADS control (Background Density) Creating the SBU test pattern
Operation Summary
The signals from the 3-line CCD, one line for each color (R, G, B) and 2 analog signals per line (ODD, EVEN), are sampled by the ASIC and converted to digital signals in the 10-bit A/D converter. This is the first phase of processing the data scanned from the original.
Storing Operation Settings

The controller stores the SBU settings. These values must be restored after the lens block is replaced: SP4008 001 SP4010 001 SP4011 001 Sub Scan Mag Sub Scan Reg Main Scan Reg Sub Scan Magnification Adjustment Sub Scan Registration Adjustment Main Scan Registration Adjustment
Also, before lens block replacement, enter the SP mode and note the settings of SP4800-001 to 003 (ARDF density adjustments for R, G, B). After lens block replacement, do some copy samples with the ARDF, then check the copies. If the copies have background, change SP4800-001 to 003 to their previous settings, or adjust until the background is acceptable. These SP codes are also used to adjust the ARDF scanning density, if the scanning densities of the ARDF and the platen mode are not the same.
SBU Test Mode

There are two SP codes to create a test pattern which can be used as a diagnostic tool to troubleshoot problems in the SBU: SP4907-001 SBU Pattern - Test Pattern SP4907-002 SBU Pattern - Select Fixed Pattern
B229
6-12
SM
Image Processing
To print the pattern:
Select the pattern to print. Touch "Copy Window" then press the Start key twice.
6.5.2 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT)

The IPU does the following: Controls the scanner Processes the image signals from the SBU and sends them over the PCI bus to the controller memory Receives the image processing signals sent over the PCI bus from the controller memory, processes them, then outputs them to the BATTI. Controls the relay of power and signals Image processing, ADS correction, and line width correction are done on the BCU board for all the digital data sent from the SBU. Finally, the processed data is sent to the printer as digital signals (2 bits/pixel).
SM
6-13
B229
Carriage Unit
6.6 CARRIAGE UNIT

6.6.1 OVERVIEW
(Color Photo) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Carriage Unit Print Head Tank Air Release Valve Print Head Second Registration Sensor
B229
6-14
SM
Carriage Unit
6.6.2 PRINT HEAD
[A]: 32.3 mm (1.27") The wider print head increases the width of the band printed with one pass. This lets the machine print faster.
Print Head Specifications

Item Number of Print Heads Number of Nozzles Array Voltage Element 5 (Y, M, C, K1, K2) 384 x 4 colors 192 nozzles x 2 lines/head
Remark
Cross-Hatch (150 dpi x 2 lines) Piezoelectric
Two Black Print Heads

This machine has two black print heads on the carriage unit. As a result, it can copy/print at a faster speed in B/W mode than a one-print head machine and can make a 600dpi print in one print pass.
SM
6-15
Carriage Unit
Line A of K1 Line A of K2 Line B of K1 Line B of K2 The following drawing shows the pixel pattern in 600dpi B/W solid printing mode.
If the gap between 1-3 and 2-4 is different, an image problem may occur. (front to rear).
The carriage
prints an image in the forward direction [A] (rear to front) and in the reverse direction [B] Also if the gap between 1-3 and 1*-3*, 2-4 and 2*-4* is different, an image gap between forward and reverse may occur. This can be adjusted with SP3-002. For details, refer to the "Initial Setting" in the section "Installation Procedure".
B229
6-16
SM
Carriage Unit
6.6.3 PRINT HEAD TANK
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Ink Supply Port Ink Reservoir Air Release Valve Tank Full Lever Plastic Bellows
This copier employs a dual-tank system. Each print cartridge (YMCK) is connected to a print head tank with a plastic tube. The first "tank" of the dual-tank system is the cartridge that supplies the ink through a tube to the print head tank unit, and the second "tank" is the ink reservoir inside the print head tank unit. Both the high volume Print cartridges and the carriage components are extremely lightweight. A print head tank has four main parts as shown above: Ink supply port: Ink enters here from the ink cartridge mounted under the operation panel. Ink reservoir: the ink tank. Tank Full Lever: When the ink tank is mounted in the copier, this lever pushes the bellows down to increase pressure in the ink reservoir. Air release valve: Vents periodically to keep the ink inside the ink tank unit under the prescribed pressure. This is where ink collects before it is fed to the print head below. Plastic Bellows: A spring forces out the flexible, thin plastic film on the left side of
SM
6-17
Carriage Unit
On the B229 there are four independent units. Each print head tank [A] has an independent print head [B] with a nozzle array [C]. Each print head tank holds 6ml of ink.
6.6.4 INK EJECTION DEVICE
Each print head uses a piezo-electric element (PZT) [A]. ink reservoirs out of the ink nozzles and onto the paper.
This will force the ink from the
This is done with pressure. At the prescribed time, an electric charge is given to the PZT. This makes the PZT expand. The expansion of the PZT [B] puts pressure on the ink [C] below. This makes the ink move in both directions. The ink on the right is forced out the ejection port [D]. This device is unique. You cannot see this device on other copier on the market that use small heaters to form bubbles to eject ink from the ports.
B229
6-18
SM
Carriage Unit
6.6.5 INK NEAR END
[A]
Each print head has a tank full lever [A]. This lever presses against a spring loaded bellows in the center of the print head tank. The rear side of each tank is constructed of flexible plastic: As ink enters the tank, the pressure of the ink pushes against the side of the tank and moves the lever away from the side of the print head tank. As ink is consumed during printing, the vacuum created by the ink leaving the tank pulls the lever toward the side of the print head tank. The tank full sensor [B], mounted above the left frame, checks the front and rear positioning of the tank full lever every time the carriage passes below. When the tank full sensor detects the lever against the side of the tank, the copier sends a prescribed amount of ink to the tank from the Print cartridge. The sensor signals the ink near-end if the tank full lever does not return to the full position (away from the side of the tank) within the prescribed time after the copier requests another fill from the Print cartridge. After the near-end alert, the copier will continue to print (B/W mode: approximately 300 to 500 sheets, Color mode: approximately 50 sheets) with the ink that remains in the partially filled tank until the copier issues the ink end alert. ( "Ink Out" in this section)
SM
6-19
B229
Carriage Unit
6.6.6 INK OUT
(Color Photo) Two sensor pins [A] monitor air in the print head tank. These pins detect changes in the voltage differential on the surface of the ink inside the print head tank. When these terminals detect air in the tank: The air release solenoid [B] energizes and opens the air release valve [C] so air can escape from the ink reservoir. This allows more ink to enter the tank. This is a continuous operation. The sensor pin readings signal the ink-out condition when: The ink near-end alert has been issued. The amount of air detected in the tank indicates that no ink remains in the tank. Also, as a backup measure, the firmware counts up for the amount of ink consumed after every near end occurrence. When this count reaches the value prescribed for the toner cartridge, this will also signal an ink-out condition.
B229
6-20
SM
Carriage Unit
6.6.7 PAPER REGISTRATION AND SIZE DETECTION SENSOR
1. 2. 3.
Second Registration Sensor Transport Belt Paper (Leading Edge)
The second registration sensor is attached to the front side of the carriage. The carriage moves from rear to front during printing. The second registration sensor performs two important functions for printing control: Detects the leading edge and trailing edge of every sheet Detects the width of the paper when the carriage and sensor pass in main scan direction over the side edges of the paper as it feeds. This is not automatic paper size detection. The paper size must be set with the paper size switch on the paper tray. The copier will signal an alert if the detected size does not match the size selected with the paper size switch on the paper tray. For more, see "Leading Edge and Page Width Detection" and "Trailing Edge Detection".
SM
6-21
B229
Ink Supply Unit
6.7 INK SUPPLY UNIT

6.7.1 OVERVIEW
(Color Photo) 1. 2. 3. Ink cartridges x 4 (with Viscous Ink: Y, M, C, K) Supply Pump Unit Supply Tube
B229
6-22
SM
Ink Supply Unit
6.7.2 PRINT CARTRIDGES
There is a separate Print cartridge for each color (Y, M, C, K). Each Print cartridge is vacuum packed [A]. Color Black Cyan Magenta Yellow Amount 194.44cc (210 g) 90.00cc (94.5 g) 59.90cc (62.9 g) 53.81cc (56.5 g) Life 9K 3K 3K 3K
All the colors (Y, M, C, K) of Viscous ink are pigment inks. Require only standard PPC to get quality printouts (special print media are not Do not let smears occur because they dry more quickly (there is less chance of smearing wet ink). Do not let fades occur in bright light. This makes their colors highly durable.
required).
SM
6-23
Ink Supply Unit
6.7.3 PRINT CARTRIDGE SET SENSOR
(Color Photo) Four micro switches detect the Print cartridges. These are connected in series above the cartridge set detection plate [A]. Each tank has a micro switch. The machine cannot specifically detect if a Print cartridge is not set correctly. The open switch signals these: A cartridge is not in the machine A cartridge is not installed correctly To solve this problem, you must open the front door of the copier. At this time you can check these: A cartridge is not in the machine A cartridge is not installed correctly
B229
6-24
SM
Ink Supply Unit
6.7.4 INK SUPPLY PUMP
(Color Photos) The ink supply pump is divided into three compartments: [A]: K compartment (for Black 1 and 2 Print cartridges) [B]: C compartment (for Cyan Print cartridge) [C]: M/Y compartment (for Magenta, Yellow Print cartridges) Each compartment contains: 1 ink supply motor [D] 1 or 2 pumps [E] (one pump for each Print cartridge) 1 or 2 cams [F] (one cam for each Print cartridge) 1 One-way clutch (not shown) When a print head tank needs ink: The copier switches on the ink supply motor. The motor and its worm gear get rotated forward or backward (depending on which type of ink is required). (Only one pump can operate at a time.) A one-way clutch engages and drives the shaft to operate the cam that repeatedly strikes a pump arm to siphon ink from the cartridge. The ink supply motor operates long enough to pump the prescribed amount of ink to the tank. Then it switches off.
SM
6-25
B229
Maintenance Unit
6.8 MAINTENANCE UNIT

6.8.1 OVERVIEW
(Color Photos) 1. 2. Flushing Gate Maintenance Unit
(Color Photo) The maintenance unit does these two important functions: Keeps the surface of the print heads moist at the time they are not in use. Cleans the print heads with suction at the time you do cleaning with the copier driver. (The print heads are also cleaned automatically at prescribed intervals).
B229
6-26
SM
Maintenance Unit
The caps [A] cover the print heads above. This occurs when the carriage stays at the home position on the right side of the copier. The first cap [B] is the only cap that can siphon excess ink from a print head. The ink gets siphoned from the head with a simple, pressure tube-pump mechanism. You must do these to the maintenance unit in order to position the print head to do the siphon procedure: Lower the maintenance unit Move the carriage to the left. This sets the print head for cleaning (for more, see next page). The maintenance motor [C] rotates forward. Then it lowers two cams to let them press against the bottom to lower the unit. Then it reverses at the prescribed time. When the motor reverses, it disengages a one-way clutch attached to the main shaft. Then it drives the second shaft to rotate the cam of the tube-pump mechanism. At the prescribed time, the motor runs forward again until a feeler on the main shaft gets to the gap of the maintenance HP sensor [D]. Then it switches the motor off. Another cam attached to the main shaft raises and lowers the wiper [E]. The wiper cleans the surface of the print head above as the carriage moves left and then right.
Maintenance Unit Cleaning Cycle

The operator can start the cleaning operation from the copier driver or the operation panel. You can set the print head for cleaning (or clean them all) if you start the clean job with UP mode or SP mode. All the print heads get cleaned if the job starts from the operation panel.
Cleaning starts with the carrier and print heads [A] capped and resting on top of the maintenance unit [B].
SM
6-27
B229
Maintenance Unit
When the cleaning cycle starts, the maintenance unit [C] is lowered by the rotation of the main shaft. Then the cams rotate away from the bottom of the unit. At the same time, the carriage [D] moves to the front side.
The carriage moves the first print head (in this example, "K1" the black print head) above the first vent [E] of the maintenance unit. Only the first vent can siphon ink. Another cam on the main shaft presses the maintenance unit up so the print head (K) covers the first vent. At this time the maintenance motor reverses. The one-way clutch disengages the main shaft and engages the second shaft. This operates the tube-pump. The suction from the pump below sucks ink [F] from the surface of the print head.
B229
6-28
SM
Maintenance Unit
The maintenance [G] unit lowers. Another cam raises the wiper [H]. At the same time the carriage moves the print heads to the front side far enough so the vacuumed print head can make contact with the wiper. The wiper cleans the ink [I] from the print head.
Then the carriage [J] moves rear to the home position. Then the maintenance unit caps the print heads [K]. A cam on the main shaft below vibrates the small scraper [L]. This removes the ink bolus from the wall of the trap. Then it goes to the ink collection tank. This cycle repeats for each print head when you start a clean job from the operation panel. If cleaning is done from the copier driver, the operator has the option of selecting one print head, more than one, or all print heads for cleaning. For more, see Troubleshooting. This cleaning cycle is also done automatically for all print heads if the copier stays idle for the time intervals shown in the table below.
SM
6-29
B229
Maintenance Unit
Idle Time > 10 Hours < 3 Days > 3 Days < 7 Days > 7 Days < 1 Month > 1 Month < 3 Months > 3 Months The B229 has 5 print heads.
Total Time Required for Cleaning 24 s 24 to 160 s 160 s 360 s 360 s
6.8.3 INK COLLECTION TANK
The wiper [A] sweeps the residual ink of the each printer head. As a result, the ink collection tank [B] collects the used ink from the maintenance unit above and the flushing gate. The used ink gets collected at the ink collection port [C]. The capacity of the ink collection tank is 1232 ml. The copier should be able to use the ink collection tank for about 150K pages of normal use. The tank has an ink collection tank full sensor [D]. The sensor detects when the ink collection tank gets full (hardware detection). In addition to that sensor, the copier calculates the total amount of flushed ink and judges when ink collection tank gets to the near-full or full condition (software detection).
B229
6-30
SM
Maintenance Unit
6.8.4 INK COLLECTION TANK FULL DETECTION
(Color Photo) There are two different methods to detect ink collection tank full condition; i) Detected by the ink collection tank full sensor [A] (hardware detection). ii) Detected by accumulating amount of flushed ink (software detection). The ink collection tank full sensor [A] is a smart reflective photo sensor. The photo sensor measures the changes in the density of the ink materials in the tank. This lets you know when the tank is full. A tank is near-full prompt shows the copier needs maintenance when this sensor detects the near-full condition. The default setting of near-full is set as 1212 ml. You can use the copier to print these amounts of print jobs at the time the maintenance alert shows: 300 to 500 prints (B/W mode)/ 50 prints (Color mode) These are only rough estimates. Fewer pages get printed if many normal and full print head cleanings are done after the maintenance alert. A tank is full prompt shows when this sensor detects the ink full condition. You cannot use the copier when the sensor detects ink full. At this time you must replace the ink collection tank. After replace the ink collection tank, you must reset the counter at SP7804-005.
SM
6-31
B229
Maintenance Unit
6.8.5 FLUSHING UNIT
(Color Photo) The machine flushes all the nozzles with some amount of ink to keep the nozzles clear and in good working condition. when the one of some conditions is met. The flushing gate [A] and the flushing collection unit (below the gate) are located at the right side of the engine unit.
Before Printing Job

The machine flushes all the nozzles (384 nozzles/head) with following amount of ink whenever the machine gets the printing job. Temperature Less than 5C 5C to 10C 10C to 15C 15C to 20C 20C to 25C 25C to 30C 30C to 35C 35C or more Ink Drops M/Y/K 0.036 ( l) 0.036 ( l) 0.03 / 0.014* ( l) 0.0018 ( l) 0.0018 (( l) 0.0018 ( l) 0.0018 ( l) 0.0018 ( l) Ink Drops - C 0.036 l 0.036 l 0.03 / 0.014* ( l) 0.014 ( l) 0.014 ( l) 0.014 ( l) 0.014 ( l) 0.014 ( l)
*For only 300 dpi B&W printing, the flushed amount of ink are different from other printing mode.
B229
6-32
SM
Maintenance Unit
During Printing
The machine flushes all the nozzles (384 nozzles/head) with following amount of ink and at following interval during the printing job. Ink Drops K 0.0022 ( l) 0.0022 ( l) 0.0036 ( l) 0.0029 ( l) 0.0022 ( l) 0.0022 ( l) 0.0022 ( l) 0.0022 ( l) C/M/Y 0.0022 ( l) 0.0022 ( l) 0.0029 ( l) 0.0018 ( l) 0.0007 ( l) 0.0007 ( l) 0.0007 ( l) 0.0007 ( l)
Temperature Less than 5C 5C to 10C 10C to 15C 15C to 20C 20C to 25C 25C to 30C 30C to 35C 35C or more
Interval Every 5 seconds Every 5 seconds Every 5 seconds Every 20 seconds Every 20 seconds Every 20 seconds Every 20 seconds Every 20 seconds
After No Operation
The machine flushes all the nozzles with 0.036 l of ink when the machine has been left without any operation for over 10 hours and less than 7 days.
For Maintenance Operation

The machine flushes all the nozzles with 0.06 l of ink after wiping the print heads when the machine gets the "Initial Ink Filling", "Air Releasing and Ink Filling", "Head Cleaning" and "Refreshing". The sum of the flushing collection unit should never fill to capacity for the service life of the copier. You do not have to clean or replace the sump.
SM
6-33
Carriage Drive
6.9 CARRIAGE DRIVE

6.9.1 OVERVIEW
(Color Photo) 1. 2. 3. 4. Main Scan Motor Timing Belt Guide Rod Main Scan Encoder (Translucent Film)
6.9.2 CARRIAGE DRIVE
A main scan motor [A] drives the carriage unit via a timing belt [B] connected to the carriage.
B229
6-34
SM
Carriage Drive
The main scan encoder strip [C], mounted in left side of the timing belt is threaded through the main scan encoder sensor mounted on the carriage. This sensor detects the position of the carriage at the time the carriage moves from rear to front during printing. The home position of the carriage unit is on the rear side of the copier.
6.9.3 ENVELOPE SELECTOR
(Color Photo) Move the envelope selector [A] to adjust: The gap between the print heads The surface of the paper on the transport belt. Pushing the lever downward moves the print heads slightly away from the surfaces of thick paper and envelopes. This stops chaffing on the printing surface and smearing the ink. A cam operates when the envelope selector is set for printing on thick paper or envelopes. This moves the guide rod to create a gap about 1.8 mm wider than the gap for normal printing. This lever should be down and set for printing on normal paper.
SM
6-35
B229
Paper Feed, Transport, Output
6.10 PAPER FEED, TRANSPORT, OUTPUT

6.10.1 OVERVIEW
(Color Photos) * The lower picture shows the state after the transport belt unit has been removed. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Transport Belt Unit Sub-scan Encoder Sub-scan Encoder Sensor Sub-scan Motor High Voltage Power Supply Charge Roller
B229
6-36
SM
6.10.2 LEADING EDGE AND PAGE WIDTH DETECTION
There is no paper size sensor in the standard paper tray. The paper size must be selected with the paper size switch of the paper tray. The second registration sensor [A], mounted on the carriage unit, moves from rear to front with the carriage during printing. The second registration sensor detects the leading edge [B] and width [C] of the sheet for feed timing.
SM
6-37
B229
6.10.3 TRAILING EDGE DETECTION
The engine entrance sensor [A], which is mounted at the left frame of the engine unit, detects the trailing edge of the sheet for feed timing.
6.10.4 PAPER TRANSPORT DRIVE
B229
6-38
SM
The sub scan motor [A] drives the timing belt [B] that rotates the paper transport belt [C]. The edge of the rotary encoder [D], attached to the shaft of the transport roller, passes through the gap of the encoder sensor [E] as the encoder wheel rotates. The sub scan sensor reads the coded markings on the rim of the encoder and sends this information to the CPU. The CPU uses these readings to control the on/off timing of the transport belt: When servicing the machine, work carefully to prevent scratching, breaking, or bending the rotary encoder.
6.10.5 PAPER PATH

Here is a summary of the operation that sends paper through the copier: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. The feed clutch energizes and engages the feed roller and the rotation of the vertical motor drives the feed roller. Paper feed roller feeds 1 sheet from the top of the stack in the paper tray. A friction pad at the lip of the paper tray does not let the paper get double-fed. The charge roller charges the transport belt. The charge on the transport belt lets the paper stay on the transport belt. The sheet feeds onto the transport belt. Then the feeler of the engine entrance sensor rises and switches the engine entrance sensor on. At the same time the second registration sensor goes on, the carriage moves to the 40 mm rear from the center position. This lets the second registration sensor detect the leading edge of the paper. 6. 7. The second registration sensor detects the right edge of the sheet when the carriage and second registration sensor move toward the HP sensor on the right. The detection of the right edge by the second registration sensor is used to determine the width of the paper in the paper path. The second registration sensor reads the right edge of the sheet only once. This occurs at the time the first page gets fed for the print job. The second registration sensor does not detect the right edge for any sheet after the first sheet. 8. 9. An area equal to the width of each print head gets printed when the carriage goes across the sheet from right to left. This occurs when the last line gets printed. The transport roller rotates only long enough to feed the length of paper that stays. Then the paper exits the copier. 10. The print job count goes up by 1 after the paper exits.
SM
6-39
B229
6.10.6 TRANSPORT BELT
(Color Photo) This copier uses the BT (Belt Transfer) system to transport paper through the paper path. A high voltage power supply [A] charges the charge roller below the transport belt [B]. The charge roller applies a bias charge to the transport belt. This static charge makes the paper adhere to the transport belt so the paper does not shift during transport and printing. A temperature/humidity sensor, mounted near the GJ engine unit, monitors the temperature and humidity near the charge roller. The temperature/humidity values read from the sensor are used to adjust the width of the bias (bias pitch) applied to the transport belt. This operation, called belt charge control, operates within the following ranges of temperature and humidity: Temperature: Humidity: 0C to 35C (32F to 95F) 0% to 100% Adjusted in 2.5C (4.5F) steps Adjusted in 10% steps
The machine uses the feedback of the temperature/humidity sensor to reduce the width of the charge applied to the transport belt below the print heads. This reduces the size of the electrical field to the smallest size that can still provide the optimum charge to keep the paper on the belt at the leading edge, center, and trailing edge of the paper without interfering with the operation of the print nozzles. Belt charge control is done for every paper feed station (Tray 1, Tray 2, and bypass) and for every paper type (normal paper, envelopes, thick paper, and OHP). The sharp curvature of the paper path separates the paper from the transport belt at the time paper gets fed out the paper exit.
B229
6-40
SM
6.10.7 CHARGE LEAK DETECTION
(Color Photo) (* This picture shows the state after the transport belt unit has been removed.) The copier checks for and detects charge leaks at these times: Immediately after the copier is turned on. When it gets a leak detection signal from the high voltage power pack at the time of copier operation. These happen when a charge leak gets detected: The voltage supply from the power pack [A] gets interrupted immediately The copier stops the current print job in progress. The carriage goes back to its home position. The print heads gets capped. The copier cannot operate. Do these to let the copier go back to normal operation: You must remove the cause of the leak. Turning the copier off and on.
SM
6-41
Paper Feed
6.11 PAPER FEED

6.11.1 OVERVIEW
There are a standard paper tray (250 sheets), by-pass tray (100 sheets) and one-sheet by-pass tray (one sheet only). The standard paper tray and by-pass tray use a friction pad system. However, for the one-sheet by-pass tray, a sheet of paper is fed directly by the transport belt. To prevent paper from getting caught inside the machine when the tray is pulled out, the paper feed roller and shaft do not separate from the tray when the tray is pulled out. The first registration sensor and engine entrance sensor are used for paper jam. The relay sensor is used for paper jam detection when paper is fed up from the optional paper feed unit. The components of the paper feed station are as follows. 1. One-sheet By-pass Tray Set Sensor 2. Registration Roller 3. First Registration Sensor 4. By-pass Paper Feed Roller 5. By-pass Friction Pad 6. Relay Sensor 7. Relay Roller 8. Friction Pad 9. Paper End Sensor 10. Paper Feed Roller 11. Transport Belt 12. Engine Entrance Sensor
B229
6-42
SM
Paper Feed
6.11.2 PAPER FEED DRIVE MECHANISM

Standard Tray
The feed motor [A] drives the pick-up and feed mechanism of both the first and second paper trays. The paper feed clutches [B] transfer drive from this motor to the paper feed rollers [C]. When the paper feed clutch turns on, the feed roller starts to feed the paper. The paper feed clutch stays on until shortly after the first registration sensor has been activated.
By-pass Tray
When the by-pass tray set sensor [A] detects paper, the machine goes into ready condition. The feed motor [B] drives the feed roller [D] via the by-pass clutch [C]. The by-pass tray set sensor also detects the paper end when the filler [E] interrupts the sensor.
SM
6-43
B229
Paper Feed
One-sheet By-pass Tray
When the one-sheet by-pass tray [A] is opened, the machine shows "Make sure the machine has stopped. Then open the 1 sheet by-pass Output tray". The machine can detect a sheet of paper on the one-sheet by-pass tray via the set detection filler [B]. If the one-sheet by-pass output tray is opened with a sheet of paper set on the tray, the one-sheet by-pass shutter solenoid [C] is activated and the one-sheet by-pass shutter [D] is opened. As a result, a sheet of paper can be inserted into the machine. a sheet of paper is directly caught by transport belt of the engine unit after the sheet of paper has reached to the engine unit.
6.11.3 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM
The paper feed roller [A] drives the top sheet of paper from the paper tray or by-pass tray to the copier. The friction pad [B] allows only one sheet to feed at a time. The friction pad applies pressure to the feed roller with a spring [C]. The friction pad pressure cannot be adjusted.
B229
6-44
SM
Paper Feed
6.11.4 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM
When the paper tray [A] is closed, projection [B] on the copier frame pushes the slider [C] (on the bottom part of the paper tray) off the bottom plate hook [D]. After the release slider comes off, the compressed springs lift the bottom plate.
6.11.5 PAPER END DETECTION
If there is any paper in the paper tray, the paper stack lifts the feeler; the paper end sensor [A] is deactivated. When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout [B] in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated. When the paper tray is drawn out with no paper in the tray, the shape of the paper end feeler causes it to lift up.
SM
6-45
B229
Paper Feed
6.11.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION
Paper Tray
Size A3, 11" x 17" A4 LEF A4 SEF,81/2" x 11" A5 LEF, 81/2" x 14" 81/2" x 13" 11" x 81/2" * (Asterisk) SW1 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF SW2 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF SW3 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON
ON: Not pushed, OFF: Pushed There are three paper size micro switches [A] on the front right plate of the paper tray unit. The switches are actuated by a paper size actuator [B] behind the paper size indicator plate, which is on the front right of the tray. Each paper size has its own actuator, with a unique combination of notches. To determine which size has been installed, the CPU reads which micro switches the actuator has switched off. The CPU disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected. If the paper size actuator is broken, or if there is no tray installed, the Add Paper indicator will light. When the paper size actuator is at the * mark, the paper tray can be set up to accommodate one of a wider range of paper sizes by using User Tools. If the paper size for this position is changed without changing the User Tool setting, a paper jam will result.
B229
6-46
SM
Paper Feed
By-pass Tray
The by-pass feed paper size switch [A] monitors the paper width. The side fence is connected to the terminal plate gear. When the side fences move to match the paper width, the circular terminal plate rotates over the wiring patterns on the rectangular part of the paper size switch. The patterns for each paper width in the paper size switch are unique. North America CN No. (BICU) CN127-1 CN127-2 CN127-3 (GND) CN127-4 CN127-5 Europe/Asia CN No. (BICU) CN127-1 CN127-2 CN127-3 (GND) CN127-4 CN127-5 A3 ON/OFF OFF OFF OFF ON A4 SEF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 8" x 13" OFF OFF OFF ON OFF A5 SEF OFF ON/OFF OFF OFF OFF 11" x 17" ON/OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 81/2" x 14" OFF OFF OFF ON ON 51/2" x 81/2" OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
SM
6-47
Paper Feed
6.11.7 SIDE FENCES
If the tray is full of paper and it is pushed in strongly, the fences may deform or bend. This may cause the paper to skew or the side-to-side registration to be incorrect. To correct this, each side fence has a stopper [A] attached to it. Each side fence can be secured with a screw, for customers who do not want to change the paper size.
6.11.8 PAPER REGISTRATION
The drive from the feed motor [A] is transmitted to the registration roller through the registration clutch gear [B]. The first registration sensor [C] is used for correcting paper skew and for detecting paper misfeeds. The cleaning Mylar [D] contacts the registration roller. It removes paper dust from the registration roller so that this dust will not transfer into the development unit through the drum-cleaning unit.
B229
6-48
SM
Paper Feed
The amount of paper buckle at the registration roller to correct skew can be adjusted with SP1-003. If jams frequently occur after registration, SP1-903 can be used to activate the relay clutch so that the relay roller assists the registration roller in feeding the paper along. When feeding from the by-pass tray, the by-pass feed clutch is activated, turning the by-pass feed roller. This feature may be needed when feeding thick paper, and cannot be used for the first paper feed tray.
SM
6-49
B229
Paper Exit
6.12 PAPER EXIT

6.12.1 OVERVIEW
(Color) 1. Exit Transport Roller1 to 3 2. Engine Exit Sensor 3. Junction Gate Sensor 4. Junction Gate 5. Exit Transport Roller 4 6. Paper Exit Sensor 7. Paper Exit Roller
B229
6-50
SM
Paper Exit
Sensors and Switch
[A]: Paper Exit Sensor [B]: One-sheet By-pass Output Tray Switch [C]: Engine Exit Sensor [D]: Junction Gate Sensor The paper exit sensor [A] detects the paper jam. The engine exit sensor [C] activates the exit motor and the junction gate solenoid if the duplex mode is selected. It also detects the paper jam. jam. The One-sheet By-pass Output Tray Switch [B] detects if the output tray is open or not. If this tray is not open, the one-sheet by-pass shutter cannot open.
The junction gate sensor [D] activates the duplex transport motor and detects the paper
SM
6-51
B229
Paper Exit
6.12.2 PAPER EXIT PATH
Standard Output Tray The paper exit motor starts to drive the exit transport rollers [B] and paper exit roller [C] after the engine exit sensor [A] has detected a sheet of paper. The paper is fed through the exit transport rollers and paper exit roller. Then the paper exit motor stops rotating after the paper exit sensor [D] has detected no paper.
External Output Tray The junction gate [A] for the one-sheet by-pass tray opens after a customer has decided paper type. A sheet of paper is fed through exit transport rollers and to the external output tray [B]. The junction gate sensor [C] still detects a sheet of paper until the paper fed to the external output tray is removed. While this sensor detects a sheet of paper, the shutter of the one-sheet by-pass tray is closed. So, a next job using the one-sheet by-pass printing cannot be allowed.
B229
6-52
SM
Paper Exit
Duplex The junction gate [A] for the duplex unit opens when a sheet of paper is transported for 150 mm after the engine exit sensor has detected no paper. The paper is fed through the exit transport rollers and to the duplex transport rollers. The duplex transport motor starts to drive the duplex transport rollers when a sheet of paper is transported for 150 mm after the junction gate sensor [B] has detected the paper. The junction gate [A] is closed when a sheet of paper is transported for 50 mm after the junction gate sensor [B] has detected no paper.
6.12.3 PAPER STOP FUNCTION
(Color) The exiting paper stops temporarily [A] to get enough time to be dried when much ink is used for a sheet of paper. The average consumed ink amount (ml/cm2) for each page is calculated at completing the printing. And also the copier calculates the average consumed ink amount in the 50 mm area from the trailing edge of paper. This is countermeasure in case that much amount of ink is used only in the trailing edge area. The copier uses the higher value among both as the coefficient for the paper stop function. The paper stop time is defined depending on the combination of the coefficient and table. For details, refer to the end of this column. The next sheet of paper stays at the registration roller [B].
SM
6-53
B229
Paper Exit
Table for the Paper Stop Time
(Color) The table has three areas [A], [B], [C]. The paper stop time is "10 seconds" when the average consumed ink is more than 70 % and the environment is in [A]. The paper stop time is "10 seconds" when the average consumed ink is more than 50 % and the environment is in [A]. The paper stop time is "7 seconds" when the average consumed ink is more than 20 % and the environment is in [A]. The paper stop time is "7 seconds" when the average consumed ink is more than 50 % and the environment is in [B]. The paper stop time is "2 seconds" when the average consumed ink is more than 20 % and the environment is in [B]. The paper stop time is "2 seconds" when the average consumed ink is more than 50 % and the environment is in [B]. The paper stop time is "0 second" when the average consumed ink is more than 20 % and the environment is in [C].
B229
6-54
SM
Paper Exit
6.12.4 ENERGY SAVER MODES OF BASIC MACHINES

This section illustrates the energy saver modes of the basic machine (the machine without the optional controller).
Overview
The machine has two energy-saver modes: the Low Power Mode and the Night/Off Mode. The table lists the status of several components. Operation panel Operating Mode* Sleep Mode On Off Engine On Off** Exhaust fan On
Off
*The "Operating Mode refers to all the modes (and status) other than the Sleep Mode. Actual power consumption (during the Operating Mode) depends on job status and environmental conditions. **The SRAM is alive and backs up the engine controller.
Timers
The engine controller references the Auto Off Timer to start the Sleep Mode. The user can set these timers (Use Tools > System Settings > Timer Settings). The Auto Off Timer starts at the same time (t0) when the machine ends all jobs or when the user ends all manual operations.
SM
6-55
B229
Paper Exit
Recovery
Any of the following operations brings the machine back to the Operating Mode: The power switch is pressed. Originals are set on the document feeder. The platen cover (or document feeder) is opened.
B229
6-56
SM
SPECIFICATIONS
Rev. 11/2006
General Specifications
7. SPECIFICATIONS
7.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration: Copy Process: Originals: Original Size: Copy Paper Size: Desktop On-Demand Ink Printing Technology Sheet/Book/Object Maximum A3/11" x 17" Maximum: A3/11" x 17" Minimum: A5 LEF/81/2" x 51/2" (Paper tray) A6 SEF/51/2" x 81/2" (Bypass) Custom sizes in the bypass tray: Width: 90 305 mm (3.55" 12.2") Length: 148 600 mm (5.83" 23.62") Print and Fax Modes 148 457.2 mm (5.83" 18.0) Copy Mode Physically, the by-pass tray can handle the following size (but this size is not recognized by the application software): Width: 305 mm Length: 1,260 mm Paper Tray: 60 105 g/m2, 16 28 lb. Copy Paper Weight: By-pass Tray: 60 162 g/m2, 16 43 lb. One-sheet By-pass Tray: 60 220g/ 16lb 55lb Duplex: 60 105 g/m2, 16 28 lb. Reproduction Ratios: 4 enlargement and 5 reduction A4/A3 Version 400% Enlargement 200% 141% 122% Full Size 100% 93% 82% Reduction 71% 50% 25% LT/DLT Version 400% 129% 121% 100% 93% 78% 65% 50% 25%
Specifications B229
155%
SM
7-1
25% Zoom: Power Source: 25% to 400%, in 1% steps
25%
North America/ Taiwan: 110V 120 V, 60 Hz, 12 A Europe, Asia, China: 220 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 7 A
Power Consumption: North America/ Taiwan Europe/ Asia/ China Maximum Operating Stand-by Sleep mode Maximum Operating Stand-by Sleep mode Main Unit only Main Unit only Less than 110 W About 70 W About 38 W 3.1 W or less Less than 110 W About 70 W About 40 W 3.7 W or less Complete System* Complete System* Less than 250 W About 135 W About 46 W 7.0 W or less Less than 250 W About 135 W About 48 W 7.7 W or less
*Complete System: The complete system consists of the Main unit, A(R)DF, Fax Unit, USB Host, IEE1284, Function Upgrade Option, Copy Data Security Unit, Duplex unit and Paper Tray unit. Noise Emission (Sound Power Level) Standby (Mainframe/Full system): Operating (Mainframe only): Operating (Full System): taken from the normal position of the operator. 550 x 728 x 485 mm (22" x 29.1" x 19.4") Dimensions (W x D x H): Measurement Conditions: With bypass feed table closed Without the A(R)DF Weight: 50 kg or less (110 lb.) (Excluding A(R)DF, platen cover, toner, and developer) 3 6 cpm (FC mode, A4/LT LEF) Not above 40 dB(A) Not above 62 dB(A) Not above 66 dB(A)
The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779. Measurements were
Copying Speed in Multi-copy Mode 5 24 cpm (B/W mode, A4/LT LEF) (copies/minute):
B229
7-2
SM
Warm-up Time:
From Power-on; Less than 20 seconds (at 20C [68F]) From Stand-by; Less than 5.5 seconds (at 20C [68F]) Not more than 9.7 seconds (B/W mode) Not more than 24 seconds (Color mode) Measurement Conditions From the ready state, with the polygonal mirror motor
First Copy Time:
operating. A4/LT copying Not APS mode 100%size Paper feed from the upper tray
Copy Number Input: Manual Image Density: Automatic Reset: Automatic Shut-off:
Numeric keypad, 1 to 99 (increment, decrement) 5 steps Default is 60 seconds. Can be set from 60 to 999 seconds with user tools. Default is 1 minute. Can be set from 1 to 240 minutes with user tools. Paper Tray: 250 sheets Optional Paper Tray Unit: 500 sheets x 1, or 500 sheets x 2
Copy Paper Capacity:
By-pass Tray: 100 sheets (sheets up to 432 mm [17"]), 40 postcards, 10 envelopes One-sheet By-pass Tray: 1 sheet Copy weight: 80 g/m2 (20 lb.)
Ink Replenishment:
Cartridge replacement (xxx g/cartridge) Platen cover Auto document feeder Paper tray unit (1 tray)
Specifications B229
Auto-reverse document feeder Paper tray unit (2 trays) Tray heater Optics anti-condensation heater Fax unit Handset IEEE 1394
Optional Equipment:
SM
7-3
IEEE 1284 Wireless LAN Bluetooth PostScript 3 USB Host PictBridge Data Overwrite Security Unit Copy Data Security Unit JVM SD Card NRS Cumin-M BK: 9 k copies (A4 LEF, 6%) Ink Yield: Copy-Tray Capacity Memory: Color: 3 k copies (A4 LEF, 5%) *: 1 to 2 copying, normal text mode 250 sheets 384 MB (On-board-128 MB + RAM DIMM- 256 MB)
B229
7-4
SM
Supported Paper Sizes
7.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES

7.2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
North America, Europe, Asia, Taiwan
Paper A3 SEF B4 SEF A4 SEF A4 LEF B5 SEF B5 LEF A5 SEF A5 LEF B6 SEF B6 LEF 8K SEF 16K SEF 16K LEF DLT SEF SEF LG SEF LT SEF LT LEF HLT SEF HLT LEF F/GL (F4) SEF Foolscap SEF Folio SEF USB4 SEF Eng Quarto SEF Eng Quarto LEF Size (W x L) 297 x 420 mm 257 x 364 mm 210 x 297 mm 297 x 210 mm 182 x 257 mm 257 x 182 mm 148 x 210 mm 210 x 148 mm 128 x 182 mm 182 x 128 mm 267 x 390 mm 195 x 267 mm 267 x 195 mm 11.0" x 17.0" 11.0" x 15.0" 8.5" x 14.0" 8.5" x 11.0" 11.0" x 8.5" 5.5" x 8.5" 8.5" x 5.5" 8.0" x 13.0" 8.5" x 13.0" 8.25" x 13.0" 10.0" x 14.0" 8.0" x 10.0" 10.0" x 8.0" North America Platen O O A4/LT A4/LT O O O O O O O O O X O X X X O S F F F O O O ADF O O A4/LT A4/LT O O O O O O O O O X O X X X X X O O O O O O Europe/Asia/Taiwan Platen X X X X O X O Sa O O O O O O O O A4/LT A4/LT O O F F F O O O ADF X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O A4/LT A4/LT O
Specifications B229
O F F F O O O
SM
7-5
Symbols: X: Detected O: Not detected F: Detected as F (8.5" x 13.0") S: Detected as specified A4/LT: Detected as A4 or LT as specified When the settings of SP4-305-001 is "1: A4/LT," the settings of SP4-303 is invalidated (A5 LEF is not detected).
7.2.2 PAPER FEED AND EXIT

Main Frame, Duplex, Optional Paper Tray
Paper A3 SEF A3 LEF B4 SEF B4 LEF A4 SEF A4 LEF B5 SEF B5 LEF A5 SEF A5 LEF B6 SEF B6 LEF A6 SEF A6 LEF DLT SEF DLT LEF LG SEF LG LEF Gov. LG SEF Gov. LG LEF Size (W x L) 297 x 420 mm 420 x 297 mm 257 x 364 mm 364 x 257 mm 210 x 297 mm 297 x 210 mm 182 x 257 mm 257 x 182 mm 148 x 210 mm 210 x 148 mm 128 x 182 mm 182 x 128 mm 105 x 148 mm 148 x 105 mm 11" x 17" 17" x 11" 8 /2" x 14" 14" x 81/2" 81/4" x 14" 14" x 8 /4"
1 1
Main Frame Tray NA M O M O M X M M O M O O O O X O X O M O EU/ASIA X O M O X X M M O X O O O O M O M O M O
Duplex X O X O X X X X X X O O O O X O X O X O
Optional Paper Tray X O M O X X M M M O O O O O X O X O M O
B229
7-6
SM
Rev. 11/2006
Paper LT SEF LT LEF HLT SEF HLT LEF Executive SEF Executive LEF F SEF F LEF Foolscap SEF Foolscap LEF Folio SEF Folio LEF 8K SEF 8K LEF 16K SEF 16K LEF C5 Env SEF C6 Env SEF DL Env SEF Com 10 SEF Monarch SEF Custom
Size (W x L) 81/2" x 11" 11" x 81/2" 51/2" x 81/2"" 8 /2" x 5 /2" 7 /2" x 10 /2" 101/2" x 71/4" 8" x 13" 13" x 8" 8 /2" x 13" 13" x 81/2" 81/4" x 13" 13" x 8 /4" 267 x 390 mm 390 x 267 mm 195 x 267 mm 267 x 195 mm 162 x 229 mm 114 x 162 mm 110 x 220 mm 4 /8" x 9 /2" 3 /8" x 7 /2"
7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Main Frame Tray NA X X O M M O M O X O M O M O M M O O O O O M EU/ASIA M X O M M O M O X O M O M O M M O O O O O M
Duplex X X O O X O X O X O X O X O X X O O O O O M
Optional Paper Tray X X M O O O M O M O M O M O M M O O O O O M
Custom W: 182 to 297 mm, L: 148 to 432 mm for Main Frame W: 148 to 297 mm, L: 182 to 432 mm for Optional Paper Tray W: 90 to 305 mm, L: 148 to 600 mm for By-pass/ One-sheet By-pass Tray (Print and Fax) W: 90 to 305 mm, L: 148 to 457.2 mm for By-pass/ One-sheet By-pass Tray (Copy)
SM
7-7
B229
Specifications
Symbols: X: Detected (Main frame tray)/Processed (Duplex) O: Not detected (Main frame tray)/Not processed (Duplex) M: Selected manually K: Specified from the key pad
By-pass Tray, One-sheet By-pass Tray

Paper A3 SEF A3 LEF B4 SEF B4 LEF A4 SEF A4 LEF B5 SEF B5 LEF A5 SEF A5 LEF B6 SEF B6 LEF A6 SEF A6 LEF DLT SEF DLT LEF LG SEF LG LEF Gov. LG SEF Gov. LG LEF LT SEF LT LEF HLT SEF HLT LEF Executive SEF Executive LEF F SEF F LEF Foolscap SEF Foolscap LEF Folio SEF Size (W x L) 297 x 420 mm 420 x 297 mm 257 x 364 mm 364 x 257 mm 210 x 297 mm 297 x 210 mm 182 x 257 mm 257 x 182 mm 148 x 210 mm 210 x 148 mm 128 x 182 mm 182 x 128 mm 105 x 148 mm 148 x 105 mm 11" x 17" 17" x 11" 8 /2" x 14" 14" x 8 /2" 81/4" x 14" 14" x 81/4" 8 /2" x 11" 11" x 8 /2" 51/2" x 81/2" 81/2" x 51/2" 7 /2" x 10 /2" 10 /2" x 7 /4" 8" x 13" 13" x 8" 8 /2" x 13" 13" x 8 /2" 81/4" x 13"
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
By-pass NA M O M O M M M M M M M O K O X O M O M O X M X O M M M O M O M EU/ASIA X O M O X M M M X M M O K O M O M O M O M M M O M M X O M O M
One-sheet By-pass Tray NA M O M O M M M M M M M O K O M O M O M O M M M O M M M O M O M EU/ASIA M O M O M M M M M M M O K O M O M O M O M M M O M M M O M O M
B229
7-8
SM
Rev. 11/2006
Paper Folio LEF 8K SEF 8K LEF 16K SEF 16K LEF C5 Env SEF C6 Env SEF DL Env SEF Com 10 SEF Monarch SEF Custom Symbols:
Size (W x L) 13" x 8 /4" 267 x 390 mm 390 x 267 mm 195 x 267 mm 267 x 195 mm 162 x 229 mm 114 x 162 mm 110 x 220 mm 4 /8" x 9 /2" 37/8" x 71/2"
1 1 1
By-pass NA O M O M M M M M M M K EU/ASIA O M O M M M M M M M K
One-sheet By-pass Tray NA O M O M M M M M M M K EU/ASIA O M O M M M M M M M K
X: Detected (Opt. paper tray and By-pass)/Processed (One-bin tray) O: Not detected (Opt. paper tray and By-pass)/Not processed (One-bin tray) M: Selected manually K: Specified from the key pad Custom W: 182 to 297 mm, L: 148 to 432 mm for Main Frame W: 148 to 297 mm, L: 182 to 432 mm for Optional Paper Tray W: 90 to 305 mm, L: 148 to 600 mm for By-pass/ One-sheet By-pass Tray (Print and Fax) W: 90 to 305 mm, L: 148 to 457.2 mm for By-pass/ One-sheet By-pass Tray (Copy)
Specifications SM 7-9 B229
Machine Configuration
7.3 MACHINE CONFIGURATION
Unit/Component Copier (1-tray non-duplex model) Platen cover (optional) ADF (optional) ARDF (optional) Copier Paper tray unit1 tray (optional) Paper tray unit2 trays (optional) Duplex Unit Tray heater (optional) Optics anti-condensation heater (optional) Fax Fax controller (optional) Handset (optional)
Machine Code B229 B406 B813 B814 B385 B384 B806 B267 B433
Diagram [B] [E] [A] [A] [F] [D] [C]
B229
7-10
SM
Machine Configuration
Unit/Component PostScript 3 (optional) Printer/ scanner Function Upgrade Option Data Overwrite Security Unit Copy Data Security Unit JVM SD Card IEEE 1394 IEEE 1284 Network Wireless LAN Bluetooth USB Host Remote Communication Gate
Machine Code B850 B271 B735 B770 G874 B581 B679 G813 B826 B825 B818
Diagram 5 5 8 6 1 2 3 4 7 Specifications
SM
7-11
B229
Optional Equipment
7.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

7.4.1 ARDF
Standard sizes Single-sided mode: A3 to A5, 11" x 17" to 51/2" x 81/2" Double-sided mode: A3 to A5, 11" x 17" to 51/2" x 81/2" Original Size: Non-standard sizes (Single-sided mode only) Max. width 297 mm Min. width 105 mm Max. length 1260 mm Min. length 128 mm Original Weight: Table Capacity: Original Standard Position: Separation: Original Transport: Original Feed Order: Reproduction Range: Power Source: Power Consumption: Dimensions (W x D x H): Weight: Single-sided mode: 40 128 g/m2, 10 34 lb. Double-sided mode: 64 105 g/m2, 17 28 lb. 50 sheets (80 g/m2, 70 kg) Center FRR Roller transport From the top original 50 to 200% (Sub scan direction only) 24 and 5 VDC from the copier 50 W 550 x 470 x 130 mm 10 kg
7.4.2 ADF
Standard sizes (Single-sided mode only): A3 to A5, 11" x 17" to 51/2" x 81/2" Non-standard sizes (Single-sided mode only): Original Size: Max. width 297 mm Min. width 105 mm Max. length 1,260 mm Min. length 128 mm Original Weight: Table Capacity: 52 105 g/m2 (14 28 lb.) 30 sheets (80 g/m2, 22 lb.)
B229
7-12
SM
Optional Equipment
Original Standard Position: Separation: Original Transport: Original Feed Order: Reproduction Range: Power Source: Power Consumption: Dimensions (W x D x H): Weight:
Center FRR Roller transport From the top original 50 200% 24 and 5 VDC (from the main frame) 25 W 550 mm x 470 mm x 90 mm Not above 7 kg
7.4.3 ONE-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT

Paper Size Paper Weight: Tray Capacity: Paper Feed System: Paper Height Detection: A5 to A3 51/2" x 81/2" SEF to 11" x 17" 60 105 g/m2, 16 28 lb. 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. ) x 1 tray Feed roller and friction pad 4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Near end) 24 VDC and 5VDC (from the copier/printer): 120 VAC: 120 V version, from the copier/printer when the Power Source: optional tray heater is installed 220 240 VAC: 230 V version, from the copier/printer when the optional tray heater is installed Max: 20 W (copying/printing), 23 W (optional tray heater on) Power Consumption: Weight: Size (W x D x H): Average: 13 W (Copying/printing), 15 W (Optional Tray Heater On)
Specifications B229
12 kg (26.4 lb.) 550 mm x 520 mm x 134 mm
SM
7-13
Optional Equipment
7.4.4 TWO-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT

Paper Size Paper Weight: Tray Capacity: Paper Feed System: Paper Height Detection: A5 to A3 51/2" x 81/2" SEF to 11" x 17" 60 105 g/m2, 16 28 lb. 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.) x 2 trays Feed roller and friction pad 4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Near end) 24 VDC, 5 VDC (from the copier/printer) 120 VAC: 120 V version, from the copier/printer when the Power Source: optional tray heater is installed 220 240 VAC: 230 V version, from the copier/printer when the optional tray heater is installed Max: 30 W (Copying/printing), 23 W (Optional Tray Heater Power Consumption: On) Average: 17 W (Copying/printing), 15 W (Optional Tray Heater On) Weight: Size (W x D x H): 25 kg (55 lb.) 550 mm x 520 mm x 271 mm
7.4.5 DUPLEX UNIT

Copy Paper Size: Copy Paper Weight: Power Consumption: Weight: Size (W x D x H): Maximum: A3/11" x 17" Minimum: A5/51/2" x 81/2" 64 105 g/m2 (20 28 lb.) 30 W 11 kg (24.2 lb.) 550 mm x 620 mm x 112 mm
B229
7-14
SM
B267 FAX OPTION
FAX OPTION B267

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION .............................................................................. 1
1.1 FAX UNIT(B267) ........................................................................................... 1 1.1.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ......................................................................... 1 1.1.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................ 2 1.2.3 INITIAL SETTING ................................................................................ 2 1.2 FAX UNIT OPTIONS ..................................................................................... 8 1.2.1 HANDSET (B443)................................................................................. 8
2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 9

2.1 FCU ............................................................................................................... 9
3. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................. 10
3.1 FAX UNIT(B267) ......................................................................................... 10 3.2 I-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING ..................................................................... 30 3.3 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................... 30 3.3.1 IP-FAX TRANSMISSION.................................................................... 30 3..3.2 IP_FAX RECEPTION ......................................................................... 36
4. SERVICE TABLES ....................................................................... 40

4.1 BEFOREHAND............................................................................................ 40 4.2 SERVICE TABLES ...................................................................................... 41 4.2.1 SP1-XXX (BIT SWITCHES ) .............................................................. 41 4.2.2 I SP2-XXX (RAM DATA ) ................................................................... 42 4.2.3 SP3-XXX (TEL LINE SETTINGS) ...................................................... 43 4.2.4 SP4-XXX (ROM VERSIONS) ............................................................ 45 4.2.5 SP5-XXX (INITIALIZING) .................................................................. 46 4.2.6 SP6-XXX (REPORTS) ....................................................................... 46 4.2.7 SP7-XXX (TEST MODES) ................................................................. 49 4.2.8 SP9-XXX (DESIGN SWITCH MODE) ............................................... 51 4.3 BIT SWITCHES ........................................................................................... 52 4.3.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES ........................................................................ 52 4.3.2 I-FAX SWITCHES ............................................................................ 64 4.3.3 PRINTER SWITCHES ....................................................................... 71 4.3.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES ........................................................ 77 4.3.5 G3 SWITCHES .................................................................................. 84 4.3.6 IP FAX SWITCHES .......................................................................... 93
SM
B267
4.4 NCU PARAMETERS ................................................................................. 101 4.5 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS ........................................ 117 4.5.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ..................................................... 117 4.5.1 PARAMETERS ................................................................................ 117 4.6 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES................................................................... 125
5. DETAIED DESCRIPTIONS.......................................................... 135

5.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 135 5.2 BOARDS ................................................................................................... 136 5.2.1 FCU ................................................................................................. 136 5.2.2 MBU ................................................................................................ 137 5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH .................................................................................. 138 5.3.1 TRANSMISSION ............................................................................. 138 5.3.2 RECEPTION ................................................................................... 140 5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES ....................................................... 141 5.4.1 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION ............................................. 141 5.5 IP-FAX ...................................................................................................... 150 5.5.1 WHAT IS IP-FAX? ........................................................................... 150
6. SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................... 151

6.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS................................................................... 151 6.2 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................ 153 6.3 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................ 155 6.4 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION ................................................................... 156
B267
ii
SM
1. INSTALLATION
B267 Fax Option
1.1 FAX UNIT (B267)

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Fax Unit Fax Operation Panel Ferrite Core Module Cable (NA only) Tel Cap (NA only) Handset Bracket (NA only) Serial Number Decal G3 Decal FCC Decal (NA only) Description Q'ty 1 1 EU: 1, NA: 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
SM
B267

Before installing the fax option: 1. 2. Print out all data in the printer buffer (if the printer option is installed). Turn the main switch off and disconnect the power cord and the network cable.
1. 2.
Unplug the DF cable [A] (if installed). Remove the rear cover [B] ( x 4).
3.
Remove the interface cover [C] (
x 2).
B267
SM
4.
Switch the jumper switch [D] on the MBU [E] to ON position. The jumper switch works as the battery switch.
5. 6.
Remove the slot cover [F] ( Install the Fax unit [G] (
x 3).
x 3).
Before installing the Fax unit, push the MBU and confirm that the MBU is properly connected to the FCU. 7. Install the Tel cap [H] in the TEL jack if the optional handset or external telephone is not installed.
SM
B267
B267 Fax Option
8.
Attach the ferrite core [I] to the telephone cable [J]. The length [K] must be about 10 cm (4"). Attach the ferrite core to the handset cable also if the handset is installed to the copier. In case of attaching to the handset cable, the length [K] must be about 4 cm (1.6").
9.
Reassemble the interface cover (
x 2) and rear cover (
x 4).
10. Connect the telephone cable [L] to the "LINE" jack as shown. Connect the handset cable [M] to the "TEL" jack as shown if the handset is installed.
B267
SM
11. Remove the dummy cover [N] from the operation panel.
12. Install the fax operation panel [O] on the operation panel as shown.
Slide the fax panel to the right pressing down the right edge of the fax operation panel. Make sure that the connection between the fax operation panel and the operation panel of the copier is firmly stable.
SM
B267
B267 Fax Option
13. Attach the super G3 decal [P] to the front door as shown.
14. Attach the FCC decal to the right side [Q] of the rear cover if you do this procedure on the NA model. Go to the next step if you do not have the NA model. 15. Attach the serial number label to right side [Q] of the rear cover. 16. Plug in the machine and turn on the main switch. The copier must be connected to a properly-grounded socket outlet. 17. Make sure that the clock (date and time) is set. 18. Enter the SP mode and program the serial number into the fax unit with SP 3102. The serial number can be found on the serial number label (attached to the machine in step 15). 19. When you press the Fax key for the first time after installation, the error "SRAM problem occurred / SRAM was formatted" will show on the LCD for initializing the program of the fax unit. Turn the main power switch off/on to clear the error display. If another error occurs after initialization, this can be a functional problem.
B267
SM
1.1.3 INITIAL SETTING

Set the country code with "BIT SW" in the "Fax SP". Set the service station number with "Machine Set" in the "Fax SP".
B267 Fax Option SM 7 B267
1.2 FAX UNIT OPTIONS

1.2.1 HANDSET (B433)
The optional handset is available for the U.S. version only.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Make two holes [A] in the scanner left cover. Attach the bracket [B] enclosed with the fax unit ( bracket [B] ( x 2), and then replace the label [C]. x 2) as shown. Remove the label [C] from the handset cradle [D]. Attach the cradle [D] to the Install the handset [E] on the cradle [D]. Attach the ferrite core to the cable. (see step 8 in the fax unit installation procedure) Connect the cable [F] to the TEL jack at the rear of the machine.
B267
SM

B267 Fax Option
2.1 FCU
1. 2. When you replace the FCU board, remove the MBU board from the old FCU board and install it on the new FCU board. Set the correct date and time with the User Tools: User Tools> System Settings> Timer Setting> Set Date/Time Do not turn off the battery switch (SW1). Do SP6101 to print the system parameters, and check the settings.
SM
B267
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
3.1 ERROR CODES
If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to fix the problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the error code display and on the service report.
Code
Meaning
Suggested Cause/Action Check the line connection. The machine at the other end may be
DIS/NSF not detected 0-00 within 40 s of Start being pressed
incompatible. Replace the NCU or FCU. Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope. If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad line. The other party is out of paper or has a
0-01
DCN received unexpectedly
jammed printer. The other party pressed Stop during communication.
0-03
Incompatible modem at the other end
The other terminal is incompatible. Check the line connection. Try changing the tx level and/or cable equalizer settings. Replace the FCU.
0-04
CFR or FTT not received after modem training
The other terminal may be faulty; try sending to another machine. If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may be a bad line. Cross reference: Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
B267
10
SM
Code
Meaning
Suggested Cause/Action Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN) Dedicated Tx parameters in Service Program Mode Check the line connection. Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable
B267 FaxOption B267
Modem training fails even 0-05 G3 shifts down to 2400 bps.
equalizer. Replace the FCU. Check for line problems. Cross reference: See error code 0-04. Check the line connection. Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer settings. Replace the NCU or FCU. The other end may be defective or incompatible; try sending to another machine. Check for line problems. Cross reference: See error code 0-04. Check the line connection. Replace the NCU or FCU. The other end may have jammed or run out of
0-06
The other terminal did not reply to DCS
No post-message 0-07 response from the other end after a page was sent
paper. The other end user may have disconnected the call. Check for a bad line. The other end may be defective; try sending to another machine.
The other end sent RTN or 0-08 PIN after receiving a page, because there were too many errors
Check the line connection. Replace the NCU or FCU. The other end may have jammed, or run out of paper or memory space.
SM
11
Code
Meaning
Suggested Cause/Action Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer settings. The other end may have a defective modem/NCU/FCU; try sending to another machine. Check for line problems and noise. Cross reference: Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN) Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN) Dedicated Tx parameters in Service Program Mode Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try sending to another machine. Noisy line: resend. Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer settings. Replace the NCU or FCU. Cross reference: See error code 0-08. The other terminal is not capable of accepting the
Non-standard post 0-14 message response code received
The other terminal is not 0-15 capable of specific functions.
following functions, or the other terminals memory is full. Confidential rx Transfer function SEP/SUB/PWD/SID Check the line connection.
CFR or FTT not detected 0-16 after modem training in confidential or transfer mode
Replace the NCU or FCU. Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer settings. The other end may have disconnected, or it may be defective; try calling another machine. If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a
B267
12
SM
Code
Meaning
Suggested Cause/Action line problem. Cross reference: See error code 0-08. Check the line connection. Replace the NCU or FCU. Check for line problems.
B267 FaxOption B267
Facsimile data not 0-20 received within 6 s of retraining
Try calling another fax machine. Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first line and/or rx cable equalizer setting. Cross reference: Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6 Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN) Check the connections between the FCU, NCU, & line. Check for line noise or other line problems. Replace the NCU or FCU. The remote machine may be defective or may have disconnected. Cross reference: Maximum interval between EOLs and between ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4 Check the line connection. Replace the NCU or FCU.
EOL signal (end-of-line) 0-21 from the other end not received within 5 s of the previous EOL signal
The signal from the other end was interrupted for 0-22 more than the acceptable modem carrier drop time (default: 200 ms)
Defective remote terminal. Check for line noise or other line problems. Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier drop time. Cross reference: Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch 0A, bits 0 and 1
0-23
Too many errors during reception
Check the line connection. Replace the NCU or FCU.
SM
13
Code
Meaning
Suggested Cause/Action Defective remote terminal. Check for line noise or other line problems. Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level. Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/or rx error criteria. Cross reference: Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN) Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits 0 and 1 Check the line connection.
The other terminal did not 0-30 reply to NSS(A) in AI short protocol mode
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer settings. The other terminal may not be compatible. Cross reference: Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4
The other terminal sent a 0-32 DCS, which contained functions that the receiving machine cannot handle. The data reception (not 0-33 ECM) is not completed within 10 minutes. 0-52 Polarity changed during communication FCU does not detect the SG3. The stored message data 0-56 exceeds the capacity of the mailbox in the SG3. 0-70 The communication mode
Check the protocol dump list. Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer. Check the line connection. The other terminal may have a defective modem/NCU/FCU. Check the line connection. Retry communication. FCU firmware or board defective. SG3 firmware or board defective.
0-55
SG3 firmware or board defective.
The other terminal did not have a compatible
B267
14
SM
Code
Meaning specified in CM/JM was not available (V.8 calling and called terminal)
Suggested Cause/Action communication mode (e.g., the other terminal was a V.34 data modem and not a fax modem.) A polling tx file was not ready at the other terminal when polling rx was initiated from the calling terminal.
B267 FaxOption
The calling terminal fell 0-74 back to T.30 mode, because it could not detect ANSam after sending CI. The called terminal fell back to T.30 mode, 0-75 because it could not detect a CM in response to ANSam (ANSam timeout). The calling terminal fell back to T.30 mode, 0-76 because it could not detect a JM in response to CM (CM timeout). The called terminal fell back to T.30 mode, 0-77 because it could not detect a CJ in response to JM (JM timeout). The called terminal 0-79 detected CI while waiting for a V.21 signal. 0-80 The line was disconnected
The calling terminal could not detect ANSam due to noise, etc. ANSam was too short to detect. Check the line connection and condition. Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
The terminal could not detect ANSam. Check the line connection and condition. Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
The called terminal could not detect a CM due to noise, etc. Check the line connection and condition. Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax. The calling terminal could not detect a JM due to noise, etc. A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot pass JM to the other end. Check the line connection and condition. Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax. Check for line noise or other line problems. If this error occurs, the called terminal falls back to T.30 mode. The guard timer expired while starting these
SM
15
B267
Code
Meaning due to a timeout in V.34 phase 2 line probing. The line was disconnected
Suggested Cause/Action
phases. Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or low signal level can cause these errors. If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal: Try making a call at a later time. Try using V.17 or a slower modem using dedicated tx parameters. Try increasing the tx level. Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting. If these errors happen at the receiving terminal: Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting. Try increasing the tx level. Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the same error is frequent when receiving from multiple senders.
0-81
due to a timeout in V.34 phase 3 equalizer training. The line was disconnected
0-82
due to a timeout in the V.34 phase 4 control channel start-up. The line was disconnected
0-83
due to a timeout in the V.34 control channel restart sequence. The line was disconnected
0-84
due to abnormal signaling in V.34 phase 4 control channel start-up. The line was disconnected
The signal did not stop within 10 s. Turn off the machine, then turn it back on. If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
0-85
due to abnormal signaling in V.34 control channel restart. The line was disconnected because the other terminal requested a data rate using MPh that was not available in the currently selected symbol rate.
The signal did not stop within 10 s. Turn off the machine, then turn it back on. If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
The other terminal was incompatible. Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
0-86
0-87
The control channel started after an unsuccessful
The receiving terminal restarted the control channel because data reception in the primary
B267
16
SM
Code
Meaning primary channel.
Suggested Cause/Action channel was not successful. This does not result in an error communication.
B267 FaxOption B267
The line was disconnected because PPR was 0-88 transmitted/received 9 (default) times within the same ECM frame. 2-11 2-12 Only one V.21 connection flag was received Modem clock irregularity Replace the FCU. Replace the FCU. Turn off the machine, then turn it back on. 2-13 Modem initialization error Update the modem ROM. Replace the FCU. 2-23 2-24 2-25 JBIG compression or reconstruction error JBIG ASIC error JBIG data reconstruction error (BIH error) JBIG data reconstruction error (Float marker error) JBIG data reconstruction error (End marker error) JBIG data reconstruction error (Timeout) JBIG trailing edge maker error The machine resets itself FCU defective Check the destination device. If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace Turn off the machine, then turn it back on. Turn off the machine, then turn it back on. Try using a lower data rate at the start. Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
2-26
JBIG data error Check the senders JBIG function. Update the MBU ROM.
2-27
2-28
2-29 2-50
SM
17
Code
Meaning for a fatal FCU system error The machine resets itself
Suggested Cause/Action the FCU.
2-51
because of a fatal communication error Snd msg() in the manual
If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the FCU.
2-53
task is an error because the mailbox for the operation task is full.
The user did the same operation many times, and this gave too much load to the machine.
Check the line connector. 4-01 Line current was cut Check for line problems. Replace the FCU or the NCU. Communication failed because of an ID Code mismatch (Closed 4-10 Network) or Tel. No./CSI mismatch (Protection against Wrong Connections) 5-10 DCR timer expired Storage impossible 5-20 because of a lack of memory 5-21 Memory overflow Print data error when 5-23 printing a substitute rx or confidential rx message 5-25 SAF file access error Test the SAF memory. Ask the other end to resend the message. Replace an SD card or HDD. Replace the FCU. Temporary memory shortage. Test the SAF memory. Replace the FCU. Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIs programmed correctly, then resend. The machine at the other end may be defective.
B267
18
SM
Code
Meaning G3 ECM - T1 time out
Suggested Cause/Action
6-00
during reception of facsimile data Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer. Replace the FCU.
B267 FaxOption B267
6-01
G3 ECM - no V.21 signal was received G3 ECM - EOR was received
6-02
Check the line connection. 6-04 G3 ECM - RTC not detected Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal. Replace the FCU. Check the line connection. G3 ECM - facsimile data 6-05 frame not received within 18 s of CFR, but there was no line fail Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal. Replace the FCU. Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer Cross reference: Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN) 6-06 G3 ECM - coding/decoding error G3 ECM - PIP/PIN 6-08 received in reply to PPS.NULL Defective FCU. The other terminal may be defective. The other end pressed Stop during communication. The other terminal may be defective. Check for a noisy line. 6-09 G3 ECM - ERR received Adjust the tx levels of the communicating machines. See code 6-05. G3 ECM - error frames still 6-10 received at the other end after all communication Check for line noise. Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or the dedicated tx parameter for that address).
SM
19
Code
Meaning attempts at 2400 bps
Suggested Cause/Action Check the line connection. Defective remote terminal.
V.21 flag detected during 6-21 high speed modem communication The machine resets the 6-22 sequence because of an abnormal handshake in the V.34 control channel 6-99 V.21 signal not stopped within 6 s SIP user name registration error
The other terminal may be defective or incompatible. Check for line noise. If the same error occurs frequently, replace the FCU. Defective remote terminal. Replace the FCU. Double registration of the SIP user name. Capacity for user-name registration in the SIP server is not sufficient. Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server. Defective SIP server. Error occurred during sending to the SMTP
13-17
13-18
SIP server access error
14-00
SMTP Send Error
server. Occurs for any error other than 14-01 to 16. For example, the mail address of the system administrator is not registered. Failed to connect to the SMTP server (timeout) because the server could not be found. The PC is not ready to transfer files.
14-01
SMTP Connection Failed
SMTP server not functioning correctly. The DNS IP address is not registered. Network not operating correctly. Destination folder selection not correct.
14-02
No Service by SMTP Service (421)
SMTP server operating incorrectly, or the destination for direct SMTP sending is not correct.
B267
20
SM
Code
Meaning
Suggested Cause/Action Contact the system administrator and check that the SMTP server has the correct settings and operates correctly. Contact the system administrator for direct SMTP sending and check the sending destination. Failed to access the SMTP server because the access is denied. SMTP server operating incorrectly. Contact the system administrator to determine if there is a problem with the SMTP server and to check that the SMTP server settings are correct. Folder send destination is incorrect. Contact the system administrator to determine that the SMTP server settings and path to the server are correct. Device settings incorrect. Confirm that the user name and password settings are correct. Direct SMTP destination incorrect. Contact the system administrator to determine if there is a problem at the destination at that the settings at the destination are correct.
B267 FaxOption B267
14-03
Access to SMTP Server Denied (450)
14-04
Access to SMTP Server Denied (550)
SMTP server operating incorrectly Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly Failed to access the SMTP server because the HDD on the server is full. Insufficient free space on the HDD of the SMTP server. Contact the system administrator and check the amount of space remaining on the SMTP server HDD. Insufficient free space on the HDD where the
14-05
SMTP Server HDD Full (452)
SM
21
Code
Meaning
Suggested Cause/Action destination folder is located. Contact the system administrator and check the amount of space remaining on the HDD where the target folder is located. Insufficient free space on the HDD at the target destination for SMTP direct sending. Contact the system administrator and check the amount of space remaining on the target HDD. The designated user does not exist.
14-06
User Not Found on SMTP Server (551)
The designated user does not exist on the SMTP server. The designated address is not for use with direct SMTP sending. Failed to access the SMTP server because the transmission failed. PC not operating correctly. SMTP server operating incorrectly Network not operating correctly. Destination folder setting incorrect. Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly. Failed to access the SMTP server because the transmission failed.
14-07
Data Send to SMTP Server Failed (4XX)
14-08
Data Send to SMTP Server Failed (5XX)
SMTP server operating incorrectly Destination folder setting incorrect. Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly. Software application error.
14-09
Authorization Failed for Sending to SMTP Server Addresses Exceeded
POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP authorization failed. Incorrect setting for file transfer Number of broadcast addresses exceeded the
14-10
B267
22
SM
Code
Meaning
Suggested Cause/Action limit for the SMTP server.

B267 FaxOption
The send buffer is full so the transmission 14-11 Buffer Full could not be completed. Buffer is full due to using Scan-to-Email while the buffer is being used send mail at the same time. 14-12 Data Size Too Large Transmission was cancelled because the detected size of the file was too large. Processing is interrupted because the user pressed Stop. Update the software because of the defective software. The transmitting a mail is interrupted via DCS 14-15 Mail Data Error due to the incorrect data. Update the software because of the defective software. When a mail is divided for the mail transmission and the division number of a mail 14-16 Maximum Division Number Error are more than the specified number, the mail transmission is interrupted. Update the software because of the defective software. 14-17 Incorrect Ticket Update the software because of the defective software. The access to MCS file is denied due to the no 14-18 Access to MCS File Error permission of access. Update the software because of the defective software. 14-30 MCS File Creation Failed Failed to create the MCS file because: The number of files created with other
14-13
Send Cancelled
14-14
Security Locked File Error
SM
23
B267
Code
Meaning
Suggested Cause/Action applications on the Document Server has exceeded the limit. HDD is full or not operating correctly. Software error. UFS file could not be created: Not enough space in UFS area to handle both
14-31
UFS File Creation Failed
Scan-to-Email and IFAX transmission. HDD full or not operating correctly. Software error.
14-32
Cancelled the Mail Due to Error Detected by NFAX No Mail Address For the Machine
Error detected with NFAX and send was cancelled due to a software error. Neither the mail address of the machine nor the mail address of the network administrator is registered. Operational error in normal mail sending or
14-33
Address designated in the 14-34 domain for SMTP sending does not exist
direct SMTP sending. Check the address selected in the address book for SMTP sending. Check the domain selection. Due to an FCU mail job task error, the send was cancelled:
14-50
Mail Job Task Error
Address book was being edited during creation of the notification mail. Software error. Not even one return notification can be downloaded:
14-51
UCS Destination Download Error
The address book was being edited. The number for the specified destination does not exist (it was deleted or edited after the job was created).
B267
24
SM
Code 14-60
Meaning Send Cancel Failed Notification Mail Send Failed for All Destinations Transmission Error due to
Suggested Cause/Action The cancel operation by the user failed to cancel the send operation. All addresses for return notification mail failed. When the 0 line page exists in received pages with G3 communication, the transmission is interrupted. At startup, the system detected that the IP address of the POP3/IMAP4 server has not been registered in the machine. The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has not been registered. The mail address has not been registered. Error other than 15-11 to 15-18. The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server could not be found: The IP address for DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server is not stored in the machine. The DNS IP address is not registered. Network not operating correctly. POP3/IMAP4 send authorization failed: Incorrect IFAX user name or password.
B267 FaxOption
14-61
14-62
the existence of zero line page POP3/IMAP4 Server Not Registered POP3/IMAP4 Mail Account Information Not Registered Mail Address Not Registered DCS Mail Receive Error
15-01
15-02
15-03 15-10
15-11
Connection Error
15-12
Authorization Error
Access was attempted by another device, such as the PC. POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect. Occurs only during manual reception.
15-13
Receive Buffer Full
Transmission cannot be received due to insufficient buffer space. The buffer is being
SM
25
B267
Code
Meaning
Suggested Cause/Action used for mail send or Scan-to-Email.
15-14
Mail Header Format Error
The mail header is not standard format. For example, the Date line description is incorrect. The e-mail is not in standard format. There is
15-15
Mail Divide Error
no boundary between parts of the e-mail, including the header.
15-16
Mail Size Receive Error
The mail cannot be received because it is too large. May occur during manual receiving only because the network is not operating correctly. Only one portion of the mail was received. The format of the final destination for the transfer request was incorrect. The transmission cannot be delivered to the final
15-17 15-18
Receive Timeout Incomplete Mail Received Final Destination for
15-31
Transfer Request Reception Format Error
15-39
Send/Delivery Destination Error
destination: Destination file format is incorrect. Could not create the destination for the file transmission. Reception rejected because the transaction
15-41
SMTP Receive Error
exceeded the limit for the Auth. E-mail RX setting.
15-42
Off Ramp Gateway Error
The delivery destination address was specified with Off Ramp Gateway OFF. Format error in the address of the Off Ramp Gateway. The number of addresses for the Off Ramp Gateway exceeded the limit of 30.
15-43
Address Format Error
15-44
Addresses Over
B267
26
SM
Code 15-61
Meaning Attachment File Format Error
Suggested Cause/Action The attached file is not TIFF format. Could not receive transmission due to: Resolution error Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi without extended memory.
B267 FaxOption B267
15-62
TIFF File Compatibility Error
Resolution is not supported. Page size error The page size was larger than A3. Compression error File was compressed with other than MH, MR, or MMR. The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not be received because the TIFF header is incorrect: The TIFF file attachment is a type not supported. The TIFF file attachment is corrupted. Software error. The file received as an attachment caused the TIFF decompression error:
15-63
TIFF Parameter Error
15-64
TIFF Decompression Error
The TIFF format of the attachment is corrupted. Software error.
15-71
Not Binary Image Data
The file could not be received because the attachment was not binary image data. Could not find the Disposition line in the
15-73
MDN Status Error
header of the Return Receipt, or there is a problem with the firmware. Could not find the Original Message ID line in
15-74
MDN Message ID Error
the header of the Return Receipt, or there is a problem with the firmware.
SM
27
Code
Meaning
Suggested Cause/Action Could not receive the transmission because the destination buffer is full and the destination
15-80
Mail Job Task Read Error
could not be created (this error may occur when receiving a transfer request or a request for notification of reception). Could not repeat receive the transmission
15-81
Repeated Destination Registration Error
because the destination buffer is full and the destination could not be created (this error may occur when receiving a transfer request or a request for notification of reception). Could not receive the file for transfer to the final destination: The format of the final destination or the transfer destination is incorrect. Destinations are full so the final and transfer destinations could not be created.
15-91
Send Registration Error
15-92
Memory Overflow
Transmission could not be received because memory overflowed during the transaction. Transaction could not complete due to a malfunction of SAF memory. The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for
15-93
Memory Access Error
15-94
Incorrect ID Code
transfer request, because the ID code in the incoming e-mail did not match the ID code registered in the machine. The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for
15-95
Transfer Station Function
transfer because the transfer function was unavailable.
22-00
Original length exceeded the maximum scan length
Divide the original into more than one page. Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower the scan resolution if possible.
B267
28
SM
Code
Meaning
Suggested Cause/Action Add optional page memory.

B267 FaxOption
Wait for the files in the queue to be sent. Delete unnecessary files from memory. 22-01 Memory overflow while receiving Transfer the substitute reception files to an another fax machine, if the machines printer is busy or out of order. Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk. Tx or rx job stalled due to 22-02 line disconnection at the other end The machine cannot store received data in the SAF No G3 parameter confirmation answer Data read timeout during construction The machine software 25-00 resets itself after a fatal transmission error occurred F0-xx V.34 modem error Replace the FCU. Update the SG3 modem ROM. F6-xx SG3 modem error Replace the SG3 board. Check for line noise or other line problems. Try communicating another V.8/V.34 fax. Update the ROM Replace the FCU. The job started normally but did not finish normally; data may or may not have been received fully. Restart the machine. Update the ROM Replace the FCU. Defective FCU board or firmware. Restart the machine. Replace the FCU.
22-04
22-05
23-00
SM
29
B267
3.2 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING

Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of the network is causing the problem.
Communication Route
Item
Action
[Remarks]
1. Connection with General LAN the LAN
Check that the LAN cable is connected to the machine. Check that the LEDs on the hub are lit. Check that other devices connected to the LAN can communicate through the LAN. Check the network settings on the PC.
2. LAN activity
1. Network settings on the PC
[Is the IP address registered in the TCP/IP properties in the network setup correct? Check the IP address with the administrator of the network.]
2. Check that PC Between IFAX and PC can connect with the machine
Use the ping command on the PC to contact the machine. [At the MS-DOS prompt, type ping then the IP address of the machine, then press Enter.] Check the LAN parameters Check if there is an IP address conflict
3. LAN settings in the machine
with other PCs. [Use the Network function in the User Tools. If there is an IP address conflict, inform the administrator.] Check the LAN parameters
Between machine and e-mail server
LAN settings in the machine
Check if there is an IP address conflict with other PCs. [Use the Network function in the User Tools. If there is an IP address conflict, inform the
B267
30
SM
Communication Route
Item
Action administrator.]
[Remarks]
Make sure that the machine can log into the e-mail server. 1. E-mail account on the server Check that the account and password stored in the server are the same as in the machine. [Ask the administrator to check.] Between machine and e-mail server Make sure that the client devices which have an account in the server can send/receive e-mail. 2. E-mail server [Ask the administrator to check. Send a test e-mail with the machines own number as the destination. The machine receives the returned e-mail if the communication is performed successfully.] Make sure that the PC can log into the e-mail server. 1. E-mail account on the Server Check that the account and password stored in the server are the same as in the machine. [Ask the administrator to check.] Between e-mail server and internet Make sure that the client devices which have an account in the server can send/receive e-mail. 2. E-mail server [Ask the administrator to check. Send a test e-mail with the machines own number as the destination. The machine receives the returned e-mail if the communication is performed successfully.] 3. Destination Make sure that the e-mail address is
SM
31
B267
B267 FaxOption
Communication Route
Item e-mail address
Action actually used.
[Remarks]
Check that the e-mail address contains no incorrect characters such as spaces. Use the ping command to contact the Between e-mail server and internet router. Router settings Check that other devices connected to the router can sent data over the router. [Ask the administrator of the server to check.] Error message by Between e-mail e-mail from the destination. server and internet network of the Check whether e-mail can be sent to another address on the same network, using the application e-mail software. Check the error e-mail message. [Inform the administrator of the LAN.]
B267
32
SM
3.3 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING

3.3.1 IP-FAX TRANSMISSION
Cannot send by IP Address/Host Name
Check Point 1 2 LAN cable connected? Specified IP address/host name correct? Action Check the LAN cable connection. Check the IP address/host name. Cannot breach the firewall. Send by 3 Firewall/NAT is installed? using another method (Fax, Internet Fax) 4 5 6 Transmission sent manually? IP address of local machine registered? Remote terminal port number setting other than 1720? Specified port number correct? DNS server registered when host name specified? Remote fax a T.38 terminal? Manual sending not supported. Register the IP address. Send by specifying the port number. Confirm the port number of the remote fax. Contact the network administrator. Check whether the remote fax is a T38 terminal. Check that the remote fax is switched on. Request the network administrator to increase the bandwidth. 11 Network bandwidth too narrow? Raise the delay level. IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3 IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the
B267 FaxOption B267
10 Remote fax switched off or busy?
SM
33
DCS speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to 1. 12 Remote fax cancelled transmission? Check whether the remote fax cancelled the transmission.
Cannot send via VoIP Gateway

Check Point 1 2 3 4 5 6 LAN cable connected? VoIP Gateway T.38 standard? VoIP Gateway installed correctly? VoIP Gateway power switched on? Is the IP address/host name of the specified Gateway correct? Number of the specified fax correct? Action Check the LAN cable connection. Contact the network administrator. Contact the network administrator. Contact the network administrator. Check the IP address/host name. Check the remote fax number. Cannot breach the firewall. Send by 7 Firewall/NAT is installed? using another method (Fax, Internet Fax) 8 9 10 Transmission sent manually? IP address of local fax registered? DNS registered when host name specified? Manual sending not supported. Register the IP address. Contact the network administrator. Check that the remote fax is a G3 fax. Check that G3 fax is connected. Check that G3 fax is switched on. Request the network administrator to increase the bandwidth.
11 Remote fax a G3 fax? 12 G3 fax is connected to VoIP gateway? 13 Remote G3 fax turned on? 14 Network bandwidth too narrow?
B267
34
SM
Raise the network delay level. IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3 IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the DCS speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to 1.
B267 FaxOption
Cannot send by Alias Fax number.

Check Point 1 2 LAN cable connected? Number of specified Alias fax correct? Action Check the LAN cable connection. Confirm the Alias of the remote fax. Error Code: 13-14 Cannot breach the firewall. Send by 3 Firewall/NAT installed? using another method (Fax, Internet Fax) 4 5 6 7 Transmission sent manually? Gatekeeper installed correctly? Gatekeeper power switched on? IP address/host name of Gatekeeper correct? DNS server registered when Gatekeeper host name specified? Enable H.323 SW is set to on? Manual sending not supported. Contact the network administrator. Contact the network administrator. Check the IP address/host name.
Contact the network administrator. Check the settings. See User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0 Register the IP address of the local fax. Register the Alias number of the local fax. Contact the network administrator.
10 IP address of local fax registered? 11 Alias number of local fax registered? 12 Remote fax registered in Gatekeeper?
SM
35
B267
13 Remote fax a T.38 terminal? 14 Remote fax switched off or busy?
Check whether the remote fax is a T38 terminal. Contact the network administrator. Request the system administrator to increase the bandwidth. Raise the delay level.
15 Network bandwidth too narrow?
IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3 Lower the modem transmission baud rate. IPFAX SW 05
16 Remote fax cancelled transmission?
Check whether the remote fax cancelled the transmission.
3.3.2 IP-FAX RECEPTION

Cannot receive by IP Address/Host name.
Check Point 1 2 3 4 LAN cable connected? Firewall/NAT is installed? IP address of local fax registered? Action Check the LAN cable connection. Cannot breach the firewall. Send by using another method (Fax, Internet Fax) Register the IP address.
Port number specified at remote sender Request the sender to specify the port fax (if required)? Specified port number correct (if required)? number. Request the sender to check the port number. Contact the network administrator.
DNS server registered when host name specified on sender side? The sender machine displays this error code if the sender fax is a Ricoh
B267
36
SM
model. Request the system administrator to increase the bandwidth. 7 Network bandwidth too narrow? Lower the start modem reception baud rate on the receiving side. IPFAX SW06 8 Remote fax cancelled transmission? Check whether the remote fax cancelled the transmission.
B267 FaxOption B267
Cannot receive by VoIP Gateway.

Check Point 1 LAN cable connected? Action Check the LAN cable connection. Cannot breach the firewall. Request the 2 Firewall/NAT is installed? remote fax to send by using another method (Fax, Internet Fax) 3 4 5 VoIP Gateway installed correctly? VoIP Gateway power switched on? Contact the network administrator. Contact the network administrator.
IP address/host name of specified VoIP Request the remote fax to check the IP Gateway correct on senders side? DNS server registered when host name specified on sender side? Network bandwidth too narrow? G3 fax connected? G3 fax power switched on? address/host name. Contact the network administrator. Request the network administrator to increase the bandwidth. Check that G3 fax is connected. Check that G3 fax is switched on.
7 8 9
SM
37
Cannot receive by Alias Fax number.

Check Point 1 LAN cable connected? Action Check the LAN cable connection. Cannot the breach firewall. Request the 2 Firewall/NAT is installed? remote fax to send by using another method (Fax, Internet Fax) Contact the network administrator. 3 Gatekeeper installed correctly? The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model. Contact the network administrator. 4 Power to Gatekeeper switched on? The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model. Request the sender to check the IP address/host name. 5 IP address/host name of Gatekeeper correct on the senders side? The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model. Contact the network administrator. DNS server registered when 6 Gatekeeper host name specified on senders side? The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model. Request the sender to check the settings. User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0 7 Enable H.323 SW is set to on? Only if the remote sender fax is a Ricoh fax.
B267
38
SM
8 9
Local fax IP address registered? Local fax Alias number registered?
Register the IP address. Register the Alias number.

B267 FaxOption
Request the system administrator to increase the bandwidth. 10 Network bandwidth too narrow? Lower the start modem reception baud rate on the receiving side. IPFAX SW06 11 Remote fax cancelled transmission? Check whether the remote fax cancelled the transmission. Contact the network administrator. 12 Local fax registered in Gatekeeper? The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model.
SM
39
B267
4. SERVICE TABLES
4.1 BEFOREHAND
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off. The main power LED ( ) lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open,
while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or writing data.
B267
40
SM
4.2 SERVICE TABLES

4.2.1 SP1-XXX (BIT SWITCHES)
Bit Switches
1 Mode No. System Switch 101 001 032 00 1F Change the bit switches for system settings for the fax option ( Ifax Switch 102 001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for internet fax settings for the fax option ( Printer Switch 103 001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for printer settings for the fax option ( "Bit Switches") Bit Switches) Bit Switches) Function
B267 Fax Option B267
Communication Switch 104 001 032 00 1F Change the bit switches for communication settings for the fax option "Bit Switches" G3-1 Switch 105 001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of the standard G3 board "Bit Switches" G3-2 Switch 106 001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of the optional G3 board "Bit Switches"
SM
41
G3-3 Switch 107 001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of the optional G3 board "Bit Switches" G4 Internal Switch 001 032 00 1F Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
108
109
G4 Parameter Switch 001 016 IP fax Switch 00 0F Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
111 001 016 00 0F
Change the bit switches for optional IP fax parameters "Bit Switches"
4.2.2 SP2-XXX (RAM DATA)

2 Mode No. RAM Read/Write 101 001 Memory Dump 001 G3-1 Memory Dump G3-2 Memory Dump G3-3 Memory Dump G4 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the fax board. "Service RAM Addresses" Print out RAM data for the optional SG3 board. Print out RAM data for the optional SG3 board. Print out RAM data for the SiG4 board. Change RAM data for the fax board directly. "Service RAM Addresses" Function
102
002
003 004
B267
42
SM
G3-1 NCU Parameters 103 001 023 CC, 01 22 NCU parameter settings for the standard G3 board. "NCU Parameters"
B267 Fax Option
G3-2 NCU Parameters 104 001 023 CC, 01 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3 board. "NCU Parameters"
G3-3 NCU Parameters 105 001 023 CC, 01 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3 board. "NCU Parameters"
4.2.3 SP3-XXX (TEL LINE SETTINGS)

3 Mode No. Service Station 101 001 002 Fax Number Select Line Enter the fax number of the service station. Select the line type. Function
102
Serial Number 000 PSTN-1 Port Settings Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line. If 001 Select Line the machine is installed on a PABX line, select PABX, PABX(GND) or PABX(FLASH). Enter the fax units serial number.
103 002
PSTN Access Number Memory Lock Disabled
Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-1 line. If the customer does not want to receive transmissions using Memory Lock on this line, turn this SP on.
003
SM
43
B267
PSTN-2 Port Settings Select the line setting for the G3-2 line. If the 001 Select Line machine is installed on a PABX line, select PABX, PABX(GND) or PABX(FLASH). 002 PSTN Access Number Memory Lock Disabled Transmission Disabled Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-2 line. If the customer does not want to receive transmissions using Memory Lock on this line, change this SP to on. If you turn this SP on, the machine does not send any fax messages on the G3-2 line.
104
003
004
PSTN-3 Port Settings Select the line setting for the G3-3 line. If the 001 Select Line machine is installed on a PABX line, select PABX, PABX(GND) or PABX(FLASH). 002 PSTN Access Number Memory Lock Disabled Transmission Disabled Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-3 line. If the customer does not want to receive transmissions using Memory Lock on this line, change this SP to on. If you turn this SP on, the machine does not send any fax messages on the G3-3 line.
105
003
004
ISDN Port Settings 001 106 002 Select Line PSTN Access Number Memory Lock Disabled Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
003
B267
44
SM
106
004
Transmission Disabled
IPFAX Port Settings 001 002 003 107 004 005 006 007 FAX SW 001 032 00 1F H323 Port SIP Port RAS Port Gatekeeper port T.38 Port SIP Server Port IPFAX Protocol Priority Select "H323" or "SIP".
B267 Fax Option
201
4.2.4 SP4-XXX (ROM VERSIONS)

4 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 Mode No. 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 FCU ROM Version Error Codes G3-1 ROM Version G3-2 ROM Version G3-3 ROM Version G4 ROM Version Charge ROM Version Function Displays the FCU ROM version. Displays the latest 64 fax error codes. Displays the G3-1 modem version. Displays the G3-2 modem version. Displays the G3-3 modem version. Not used (Do not change the bit switches) Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
SM
45
B267
4.2.5 SP5-XXX (INITIALIZING)

5 Mode No. Initialize SRAM 101 000 Erase All Files 000 Reset Bit Switches 000 Factory setting 104 000 Resets the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the SRAM and files in the SAF memory. Resets the bit switches and user parameters. Erases all files stored in the SAF memory. Initializes the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the SRAM, files in the SAF memory, and clock. Function
102
103
105
Initialize All Bit Switches 000 Initializes all the current bit switch settings.
Initialize Security Bit Switches 106 000 Initializes only the security bit switches. If you select automatic output/display for the user parameter switches, the security settings are initialized.
4.2.6 SP6-XXX (REPORTS)

6 Mode No. System Parameter List 101 000 Touch the ON button to print the system parameter list. Function
B267
46
SM
Service Monitor Report 102 000 Touch the ON button to print the service monitor report.
G3 Protocol Dump List 001 G3 All Communications G3-1 (All Communications) G3-1 (1 Communication) G3-2 (All Communications) G3-2 (1 Communication) G3-3 (All Communications) G3-3 (1 Communication) Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for all G3 lines. Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the G3-1 line. Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication for the G3-1 line. Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the G3-2 line. Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication for the G3-2 line. Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the G3-3 line. Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication for the G3-3 line.
002
003 103 004
005
006
007
G4 Protocol Dump List 001 002 104 003 004 005 006 Dch + Bch 1 Dch Bch 1 Link Layer Dch Link Layer Dch +Bch 2 Bch 2 Link Layer
Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
SM
47
All Files print out Prints out all the user files in the SAF memory, including confidential messages. 105 000 Do not use this function, unless the customer is having trouble printing confidential messages or recovering files stored using the memory lock feature. Journal Print out 001 All Journals The machine prints all the communication records on the report. The machine prints all communication records after the specified date.
106
002 107
Specified Date
Log List Print out 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 All log files Printer SC/TRAP Stored Decompression Scanner JOB/SAF Reconstruction JBIG Fax Driver G3CCU Fax Job CCU These log print out functions are for designer use only.
B267
48
SM
013
Scanner Condition
IP Protocol Dump List 001 All Communications

Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the IP fax line. Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication for the IP fax line.
108
002
1 Communication
4.2.7 SP7-XXX (TEST MODES)

These are the test modes for PTT approval. 7 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 Function G3-1 Modem Tests G3-1 DTMF Tests Ringer Test G3-1 V34 (S2400baud) G3-1 V34 (S2800baud) G3-1 V34 (S3000baud) G3-1 V34 (S3200baud) G3-1 V34 (S3429baud) Recorded Message Test G3-2 Modem Tests G3-2 DTMF Tests G3-2 V34 (S2400baud) G3-2 V34 (S2800baud) G3-2 V34 (S3000baud) G3-2 V34 (S3200baud)
SM
49
116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137
G3-2 V34 (S3429baud) G3-3 Modem Tests G3-3 DTMF Tests G3-3 V34 (S2400baud) G3-3 V34 (S2800baud) G3-3 V34 (S3000baud) G3-3 V34 (S3200baud) G3-3 V34 (S3429baud) IG3-1 Modem Tests - Not used IG3-1 DTMF Tests - Not used IG3-1 V34 (S2400baud) - Not used IG3-1 V34 (S2800baud) - Not used IG3-1 V34 (S3000baud) - Not used IG3-1 V34 (S3200baud) - Not used IG3-1 V34 (S3429baud) - Not used IG3-2 Modem Tests - Not used IG3-2 DTMF Tests - Not used IG3-2 V34 (S2400baud) - Not used IG3-2 V34 (S2800baud) - Not used IG3-2 V34 (S3000baud) - Not used IG3-2 V34 (S3200baud) - Not used IG3-2 V34 (S3429baud) - Not used
B267
50
SM
4.2.8 SP9-XXX (DESIGN SWITCH MODE)
9 702
Mode No. Design Switch DFU
Function
B267 Fax Option 51 B267
SM
4.3 BIT SWITCHES

Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as Not used, as this may cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as Japan. Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System Parameter List printed by the machine.
4.3.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES

System Switch 00 [SP No. 1-101-001] No FUNCTION Dedicated transmission 0 parameter programming 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 1 Not used Technical data printout on the 2 Journal 0: Disabled 1: Enabled COMMENTS Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated transmission parameters. Reset this bit to 0 after programming dedicated transmission parameters. Do not change 1: Instead of the personal name, the following data are listed on the Journal for each G3 communication.
e.g. 0000 (1) // 32 (2) V34 (3) // 288 (4) // 264 (5) // L0100 (6) 03 (7) 04 (8) (1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors. (2): Symbol rate (V.34 only) (3): Final modem type used (4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps) (5): Final data rate (6): Rx revel (refer to the note after this table for how to read the rx level) (7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception. (8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
B267
52
SM
EQM and rx level are fixed at FFFF in tx mode. The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at 00 for transmission records
and ECM reception records. Rx level calculation Example: 0000 // 32 V34 // 288/264 // L 01 00 03 04 The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after L indicates the rx level. The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by -16 to get the rx level. In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256. So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB 3 Not used Line error mark print 0: OFF, 1: ON (print) G3/G4 communication 5 parameter display 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Do not change this setting. When "1" is selected, a line error mark is printed on the printout if a line error occurs during reception. This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the key parameters (see below). This is normally disabled because it cancels the CSI display for the user. Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing. This is only used for communication Protocol dump list output after 6 each communication 0: Off 1: On troubleshooting. It shows the content of the transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always reset this bit to 0 after finishing testing. If system switch 09 bit 6 is at 1, the list is only printed if there was an error during the communication. 7 Not used Do not change the setting.
System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
SM
53
System Switch 02 [SP No. 1-101-003] No FUNCTION COMMENTS Do not change these settings. With this setting on, the machine resets itself automatically if a transmission stalls and fails to complete the job. Do not change these settings. Do not change this setting. (0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out. (0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked out, but the user can temporarily switch RDS on to allow RDS operations to take place. RDS will automatically be locked out again after a certain time, which is stored in System Switch 03. Note that if an RDS operation takes place, RDS will not switch off until this time limit has expired. (1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access the machine.
0-1 Not used Force after transmission stall 2 0: Off 1: On 3-4 Not used 5 Not used Memory read/write by RDS Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0 Always disabled Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1 6-7 User selectable Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0 User selectable Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1 Always enabled
System Switch 03 [SP No. 1-101-004] No FUNCTION Length of time that RDS is 0-7 temporarily switched on when bits 6 and 7 of System Switch COMMENTS 00 - 99 hours (BCD). This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System Switch 02 are set to User selectable.
02 are set to User selectable The default setting is 24 hours.
System Switch 04 [SP No. 1-101-005] No FUNCTION COMMENTS Do not change these settings.
0-2 Not used
B267
54
SM
1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is Printing dedicated tx parameters on Quick/Speed 3 Dial Lists 0: Disabled 1: Enabled printed with the dedicated tx parameters (10 bytes each). dedicated tx parameters; 34 bytes of data are printed (the other 24 bytes have no use for service technicians). 4-7 Not used Do not change these settings.
B267 Fax Option
The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed
System Switch 05 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.) System Switch 06 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.) System Switch 07 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.) System Switch 08 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 09 [SP No. 1-101-010] No 0 FUNCTION Not used COMMENTS Do not change these settings. 0: Communications that reached phase C Inclusion of communications 1 data was exchanged. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled (message tx/rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed on 1: Communications that reached phase A (call setup) of T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal. This will include telephone calls. Automatic error report printout 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Printing of the error code on 3 the error report 0: No 1: Yes 1: Error codes are printed on the error reports. 0: Error reports will not be printed. 1: Error reports will be printed automatically after failed communications. on the Journal when no image the Journal.
SM
55
B267
Not used
Do not change this setting. 1: A power failure report will be automatically
Power failure report 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
printed after the power is switched on if a fax message disappeared from the memory when the power was turned off last.
Conditions for printing the protocol dump list 6 0: Print for all communications 1: Print only when there is a communication error Priority given to various types of remote terminal ID when printing reports 7 Number 1: Dial label > Tel. number > RTI > CSI
This switch becomes effective only when system switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1. 1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocol dump list only for communications with errors.
This bit determines which set of priorities the machine uses when listing remote terminal names Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for the Quick/Speed Dial number.
0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel. on reports.
System Switch 0A [SP No. 1-101-011] No FUNCTION COMMENTS Do not change these settings. 0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the Dialing on the ten-key pad 4 when the external telephone is off-hook 0: Disabled 1: Enabled external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting when the external telephone is not by the machine, or if a wireless telephone is connected as an external telephone. 1: The user can dial on the machines ten-key pad when the handset is off-hook. 5 On hook dial 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 0: On hook dial is disabled. Do not change the factory settings
0-3 Not used
6-7 Not used
B267
56
SM
System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.) System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.) System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0E [SP No. 1-101-015] No FUNCTION COMMENTS Do not change the settings. This machine does not have the capture function. 0: Manual tx and rx are possible while the external Action when the external handset goes off-hook 3 0: Manual tx and rx operation 1: Memory tx and rx operation (the display remains the same) handset is off-hook. However, memory tx is not possible. 1: The display stays in standby mode even when the external handset is used, so that other people can use the machine for memory tx operation. Note that manual tx and rx are not possible with this setting. 4-7 Not used Do not change these settings.
0-1 Not used 2 Not used
System Switch 0F [SP No. 1-101-016] No 0-7 FUNCTION Country/area code for functional settings (Hex) 00: France 01: Germany 02: UK 03: Italy 11: USA 12: Asia 13: Japan 14: Hong Kong COMMENTS This country/area code determines the factory settings of bit switches and RAM addresses. However, it has no effect on the NCU parameter settings and communication parameter RAM addresses. Cross reference: NCU country code: SP No. 2-103-001 for G3-1
SM
57
04: Austria 05: Belgium 06: Denmark 07: Finland 08: Ireland 09: Norway 0A: Sweden 0B: Switz. 0C: Portugal 0D: Holland 0E: Spain 0F: Israel 10: ---
15: South Africa 16: Australia 17: New Zealand 18: Singapore 19: Malaysia 1A: China 1B: Taiwan 1C: Korea 20: Turkey 21: Greece 22: Hungary 23: Czech 24: Poland
System Switch 10 [SP No. 1-101-017] No FUNCTION Threshold memory level for parallel memory transmission COMMENTS Threshold = N x 128 KB + 256 KB N can be between 00 - FF(H) Default setting: 02(H) = 512 KB
0-7
System Switch 11 [SP No. 1-101-018] No FUNCTION TTI printing position 0 0: Superimposed on the page data 1: Printed before the data COMMENTS Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints information that the customer considers to be important (G3 transmissions).
B267
58
SM
leading edge 1 Not used Japan Only

2-7 Not used
Do not change the factory settings.
System Switch 12 [SP No. 1-101-019] No FUNCTION COMMENTS TTI: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm Input even numbers only. This setting determines the print start position for 0-7 TTI printing position in the main scan direction the TTI from the left edge of the paper. If the TTI is moved too far to the right, it may overwrite the file number which is on the top right of the page. On an A4 page, if the TTI is moved over by more than 50 mm, it may overwrite the page number.
System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change these settings) System Switch 14 - Not used (do not change these settings)
System Switch 15 [SP No. 1-101-022] No 0 FUNCTION Not used Going into the Energy Saver 1 mode automatically 0: Enabled 1: Disabled 2-3 Not used 4-5 Interval for preventing the COMMENTS Do not change the settings. 1: The machine will restart from the Energy Saver mode quickly, because the +5V power supply is active even in the Energy Saver mode. Do not change these settings. If there is a file waiting for transmission, the
machine from entering Energy machine does not go to Energy Saver mode
SM
59
Saver mode if there is a pending transmission file. Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 1 min Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 30 min1 Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0 1 hour Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 1 24 hours 6-7 Not used
during the selected period. After transmitting the file, if there is no file waiting for transmission, the machine goes to the Energy Saver mode.
Do not change
System Switch 16 [SP No. 1-101-023] No FUNCTION Parallel Broadcasting 0 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1-7 Not used COMMENTS 1: The machine sends messages simultaneously using all available ports during broadcasting. Do not change these settings.
System Switch 17 - Not used (do not change these settings) System Switch 18 - Not used (do not change these settings)
System Switch 19 [SP No. 1-101-026] No FUNCTION COMMENTS Do not change the settings. 1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a form or letterhead which has a colored or printed background, change this bit to 1. Original 1 and Original 2 can be selected in addition to the Text,
0-6 Not used Special Original mode 7 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
B267
60
SM
Text/Photo and Photo modes.
No.
FUNCTION
COMMENTS Do not change the settings.
0-7 Not used
System Switch 1B [SP No. 1-101-028] In this switch setting, there is a limitation. Do not select the same image quality in two modes. e.g) these setting combination is not allowed: [Bit1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = Text] [Bit3: 0, Bit 2:0 = Text/ Photo] [Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = Text] No. FUNCTION Image Quality in Text mode 0-1 Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = Text Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Text/ Picture COMMENTS This setting determines the desirable scanning image quality when the text mode is selected with the operation panel.
Image Quality in Photo mode This setting determines the desirable scanning 2-3 Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = Text/ Photo image quality when the photo mode is selected with Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = Text Image Quality in Special Original mode Bit 6 0 0 0 0 Bit 5 0 0 1 1 Bit 4 0 1 0 1 the operation panel. This setting determines the desirable scanning image quality when the special original mode is selected with the operation panel. Mode Text Text/ Picture Text/ Photo Photo
4-6
SM
61
B267
B267 Fax Option
System Switch 1A [SP No. 1-101-027]
1 1 7 Not used
0 0
0 1
Special 1 Special 2 Do not change these settings.
System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change these settings)
System Switch 1D [SP No. 1-101-030] No FUNCTION RTI/CSI/CPS code display 0 0: Enable 1: Disable 1 Not used Destination telephone 2 number display limitation 0: OFF, 1: ON Operation selection without PIN code registered 3 0: Transmission interrupted 1: No interrupted transmission 4-7 Not used Do not change these settings. 0: When "0" is selected without PIN code registration, transmission is interrupted and an alert message shows on the LCD. COMMENTS 0: RTI, CSI, CPS codes are displayed on the top line of the LCD panel during communication. 1: Codes are switched off (no display) Do not change this setting. When "1" is selected, the destination telephone number display is limited and redial is disabled.
System Switch 1E [SP No. 1-101-031] No FUNCTION Communication after the 0 Journal data storage area has become full 0: Impossible COMMENTS 0: When this switch is on and the journal history becomes full, the next report prints. If the journal history is not deleted, the next transmission cannot be received. This prevents overwriting
B267
62
SM
1: Possible
communication records before the machine can print them. 1: If the buffer memory of the communication are still possible. But the machine will overwrite the oldest communication records. Note: This setting is effective only when Automatic Journal printout is enabled but the machine cannot print the report (e.g., no paper). 0: If the SAF memory becomes full during
B267 Fax Option
records for the Journal is full, fax communications
Action when the SAF memory has become full during 1 scanning 0: The current page is erased. 1: The entire file is erased.
scanning, the successfully scanned pages are transmitted. 1: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning, the file is erased and no pages are transmitted. This bit switch is ignored for parallel memory transmission.
RTI/CSI display priority 0: RTI 1: CSI File No. printing
This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is displayed on the LCD while the machine is communicating in G3 non-standard mode.
0: Enabled 1: Disabled
1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.
If authorized reception is enabled but the user has Action when authorized reception is enabled but authorized RTIs/CSIs are not 4 yet programmed 0: All fax reception is disabled 1: Faxes can be received if the sender has an RTI or CSI stored no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs, the machine will not be able to receive any fax messages. If the customer wishes to receive messages from any sender that includes an RTI or CSI, and to block messages from senders that do not include an RTI or CSI, change this bit to 1, then enable Authorized Reception. Otherwise, keep this bit at 0 (default setting).
SM
63
B267
5-7 Not used
Do not change the settings
System Switch 1F [SP No. 1-101-032] No 0 FUNCTION Not used Report printout after an original jam during SAF 1 storage or if the SAF memory fills up 0: Enabled 1: Disabled 2 Not used Received fax print start timing 3 (G3 reception) 0: After receiving each page 1: After receiving all pages 4-6 Not used COMMENTS Do not change the settings. 0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory overflows during scanning, a report will be printed. Change this bit to 1 if the customer does not want to have a report in these cases. Memory tx Memory storage report Parallel memory tx Transmission result report Do not change the settings. 0: The machine prints each page immediately after the machine receives it. 1: The machine prints the complete message after the machine receives all the pages in the memory. Do not change the factory settings. 0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other Action when a fax SC has 7 occurred 0: Automatic reset 1: Fax unit stops than SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit automatically resets itself. 1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, the fax unit stops. Cross reference: Fax SC codes - See Troubleshooting
4.3.2 I-FAX SWITCHES

I-fax Switch 00 [SP No. 1-102-001] FUNCTION Original Width of TX COMMENTS This setting sets the maximum size of the original
No
B267
64
SM
Attachment File
that the destination can receive. (Bits 3~7 are reserved for future use or not used.)
0 1 2
A4 B4 A3
0: Off (not selected), 1: On (selected) If more than one of these three bits is set to 1, the larger size has priority. For example, if both Bit 2 and Bit 1 are set to 1 then the maximum size is A3 (Bit 2). When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the receiving machine at the destination, so the sending machine cannot make a selection for the receiving capabilities (original width setting) of the receiving machine. The original width selected with this switch is used as the RX machines original width setting, and the original is reduced to this size before sending. The default is A4. If the width selected with this switch is higher than the receiving machine can accept, the machine detects this and this causes an error.
B267 Fax Option
3-6 Reserved
Not used
I-fax Switch 01 [SP No. 1-102-002] FUNCTION No Original Line Resolution of TX Attachment File 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 200x100 Standard 200x200 Detail 200x400 Fine 300 x 300 Reserve 400 x 400 Super Fine 600 x 600 Reserve Reserve 0: Not selected 1: Selected If more than one of these three bits is set to 1, the higher resolution has priority. For example, if both Bit 0 and Bit 2 are set to 1 then the resolution is set for "Bit 2 200 x 400. COMMENTS These settings set the maximum resolution of the original that the destination can receive.
SM
65
B267
mm/inch This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission. 0: Off (No conversion), 1: On (Conversion) When on (set to 1), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail. There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters. Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver to determine the setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; the mm/inch selection is determined by the sender fax. 7 When this switch is Off (0): Images scanned in inches are sent in inches. Images scanned in mm are sent in mm. Images received in inches are transmitted in inches. Images received in mm are transmitted in mm. When this switch is On (1): Images scanned in inches are sent in inches. Images scanned in mm are converted to inches. Images received in inches are transmitted in inches. Images received in mm are converted to inches.
I-fax Switch 02 [SP No. 1-102-003] No FUNCTION RX Text Mail Header Processing This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mails when they are received. 0 0: Prints only text mail. 1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail. When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the From address and Subject address are printed as header information. When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), this setting is ignored and no header is printed. Output from Attached Document at E-mail TX Error This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e-mail COMMENTS
B267
66
SM
attachment are printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs. This allows the customer to see which documents have not reached their intended destinations if sent to the wrong e-mail addresses, for example. 1: Prints all pages. Text String for Return Receipt This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms the transmission was received normally at the destination. 00: Dispatched Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with dispatched in the 2nd part: Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched The dispatched string is included in the Subject string. 2-3 01: Displayed Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with displayed in the 2nd part: Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed The displayed string is included in the Subject string. 10: Reserved 11: Reserved A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to 00 (for dispatched) received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error. If any setting other than displayed (01) causes a problem, change the setting to 01 to enable normal sending of the Return Receipt. Media accept feature This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail to 4 confirm a reception. 0: Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail 1: Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail. Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answer mail, which contains the media accept feature field. 5-6 Not Used
0: Prints 1st page only.
SM
Image Resolution of RX Text Mail This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail. 7 0: 200 x 200 1: 400 x 400 The 1 setting requires installation of the Function Upgrade Card in order to have enough SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x 400 resolution.
I-fax Switch 03 - Not used (do not change the settings) [ SP No. 1-102-004]
I-fax Switch 04 [SP No. 1-102-005] No FUNCTION Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the RTI/CSI of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents. 0 0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the RTI or CSI is used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line. 1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line. When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in the Subject line that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to determine automatically the destination folder for each e-mail. Subject corresponding to mail post database 0: Standard subject 1: Mail post database subject The standard subject is replaced by the mail post database subject in the following three cases: 1 1) When the service technician sets the service (software) switch. 2) When memory sending, delivery specified by F code or SMTP reception is done. 3) With relay broadcasting (1st stage without the Schmidt 4 function). This switch does not apply for condition 3) when the RX system is set up for memory sending, delivery by F-code, sending with SMTP RX and when COMMENTS
B267
68
SM
operators are using FOL (to prevent problems when receiving transmissions). 2-7 Not Used
I-fax Switch 05 [SP No. 1-102-006] No FUNCTION Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receive transmissions broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal. 0 For example: "1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9" in the Journal indicates a broadcast to 9 destinations. 0: Not recorded 1: Recorded I-Fax Automatic Re-dial 1 Setting 0: OFF 1: ON 2-7 Not Used Determines whether the I-fax automatically redials when an error occurs. COMMENTS
I-fax Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-007] I-fax Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-008]
I-fax Switch 08 [SP No. 1-102-009] No FUNCTION Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception 0-7 This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF stores fax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location, and also holds incoming messages if they cannot be printed.) When the amount of SAF COMMENTS
SM
69
memory available falls below this setting, mail can no longer be received; received mail is then stored on the mail server. 00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX) The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the amount of memory.
I-fax Switch 09 [SP No. 1-102-010] No FUNCTION COMMENTS Do not change the settings This setting determines the number of retries 4-7 Restrict TX Retries when connection and transmission fails due to errors. 01-F (1-15 Hex)
0-3 Not used
I-fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-011] I-fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-012] I-fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-013] I-fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-014] I-fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-015]
I-fax Switch 0F [SP No. 1-102-016] No FUNCTION Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered or output immediately. 0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery. 1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations. COMMENTS
B267
70
SM
1-7 Not used
4.3.3 PRINTER SWITCHES

Printer Switch 00 [SP No. 1-103-001] No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0: If a 2 page RX transmission is split, [*] is printed in the bottom right corner of the 1st page and only a [2] is printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd page. 1: If a 2 page RX transmission is split into two Select page separation marks 0 0: Off 1: On pages, for example, [*] [2] is printed in the bottom right corner of the 1st page and only a [2] is printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd page. This helps the user to identify pages that have been split because the size of the paper is smaller than the size of the document received. (When A5 is used to print an A4 size document, for example.) Repetition of data when the received page is longer than 1 the printer paper 0: Off 1: On 1: Default. 10 mm of the trailing edge of the previous page are repeated at the top of the next page. 0: The next page continues from where the previous page stopped without any repeated text. This switch is only effective when user parameter Prints the date and time on 2 received fax messages 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 02 - bit 2 (printing the received date and time on received fax messages) is enabled. 1: The machine prints the received and printed date and time at the bottom of each received page. 3-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
SM
71
Printer Switch 01 [SP No. 1-103-002] No FUNCTION COMMENTS Do not change the settings.
0-2 Not used Maximum print width used in the setup protocol 3-4 Bit 4: 0, Bit 3: 0 = Not used Bit 4: 0, Bit 3: 1 = A3 Bit 4: 1, Bit 3: 0 = B4 Bit 4: 1, Bit 3: 1 = A4 5-6 Not used
These bits are only effective when bit 7 of printer switch 01 is 1.
Do not change the settings. 0: The machine informs the transmitting machine of the print width depending on the paper size
Received message width restriction in the protocol 7 signal to the sender 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
available from the paper feed stations. Refer to the table on the next page for how the machine chooses the paper width used in the setup protocol (NSF/DIS). 1: The machine informs the transmitting machine of the fixed paper width which is specified by bits 3 and 4 above.
Printer Switch 02 [SP No. 1-103-003] No FUNCTION 1st paper feed station usage 0 for fax printing 0: Enabled 1: Disabled 2nd paper feed station usage 1 for fax printing 0: Enabled 1: Disabled COMMENTS 0: The paper feed station can be used to print fax messages and reports. 1: The specified paper feed station will not be used for printing fax messages and reports. Do not disable usage for a paper feed station which has been specified by User Parameter Switch 0F (15), or which is used for the
B267
72
SM
3rd paper feed station usage 2 for fax printing 0: Enabled 1: Disabled 4th paper feed station usage 3 for fax printing 0: Enabled 1: Disabled 4-7 Not used
Specified Cassette Selection feature.
Do not change the settings.
Printer Switch 03 [SP No. 1-103-004] No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0: Incoming pages are printed without length Length reduction of received 0 data 0: Disabled 1: Enabled reduction. (Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03, bits 4 to 7) 1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing. (Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches 04, bits 0 to 4) 1-3 Not used Do not change the settings Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled with switch 03-0 above). Page separation setting when sub scan compression is 4-7 forbidden 00-0F (0-15 mm: Hex) Default: 6 mm For example, if this setting is set to "10", and A4 is the selected paper size: If the received document is 10 mm or less longer than A4, then the 10 mm are cut and only 1 page prints. If the received document is 10 mm longer than A4, then the document is split into 2 pages.
Printer Switch 04 [SP No. 1-103-005]
SM
73
B267
B267 Fax Option
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS
Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0 above. <Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + (N x 5mm) N is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4. Bit 4 0-4 0 0 0 1 Bit 3 0 0 0 1 Bit 2 0 0 1 1 Bit 1 0 0 0 1 Bit 0 0 1 0 1 Setting 0 mm 5 mm 20 mm 155 mm
For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper <Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + 0.75 x (N x 5mm) Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has taken place. 5 6 Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = 4 mm Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = 10 mm Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = 15 mm Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = Not used 7 Not used. Do not change the setting.
Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 06 [SP No. 1-103-007] No FUNCTION Printing while a paper cassette 0 is pulled out, when the Just Size Printing feature is enabled. Cross reference: Just size printing on/off User switch 05, bit 5 COMMENTS
B267
74
SM
0: Printing will not start 1: Printing will start if another cassette has a suitable size of size selection priority tables. 1-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.
paper, based on the paper
Printer Switch 07 [SP No. 1-103-008] No FUNCTION COMMENTS Do not change the settings.
0-3 Not used. List of destinations in the Communication Failure Report for broadcasting 4 0: All destinations 1: Only destinations where communication failure occurred 5-7 Not used.
1: Only destinations where communication failure occurred are printed on the Communication Failure Report.
Printer Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings) Printer Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings) Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0B [SP No. 1-103-012] 0-2 Erase margin at the trailing edge for the fax printout Bit 2 0 Bit 1 0 Bit 0 0 Setting 0 mm Adjusts the erase margin at the trailing edge for the fax printout.
SM
75
0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 mm 2 mm 3 mm 4 mm Do not change the settings.
3-7 Not used.
Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings) Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0E [SP No. 1-103-015] No FUNCTION Paper size selection priority 0 0: Width 1: Length Paper size selected for 1 printing A4 width fax data 0: 8.5" x 11" size 1: A4 size COMMENTS 0: A paper size that has the same width as the received data is selected first. 1: A paper size which has enough length to print all the received lines without reduction is selected first. This switch determines which paper size is selected for printing A4 width fax data, when the machine has both A4 and 8.5" x 11" size paper. 1: If all paper sizes in the machine require page Page separation 2 0: Enabled 1: Disabled separation to print a received fax message, the machine does not print the message (Substitute Reception is used). After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, the machine automatically prints the fax message. Printing the sample image on Same size means the sample image is printed at 3-4 reports Bit 4: 0, Bit 3: 0 = The upper half only 100%, even if page separation occurs. User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set to 0 to enable this switch.
B267
76
SM
Bit 4: 0, Bit 3: 1 = 50% reduction in sub-scan only Bit 4: 1, Bit 3: 0 = Same size Bit 4: 1, Bit 3: 1 = Not used 5-6 Not used
Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more on this feature.
Equalizing the reduction ratio 0: When page separation has taken place, all the among separated pages 7 (Page Separation) 0: Enabled 1: Disabled pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio. 1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected paper size when page separation has taken place. Other pages are printed without reduction.
Printer Switch 0F [SP No. 1-103-016] No FUNCTION Smoothing feature Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 0 = Disabled 0-1 Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 1 = Disabled Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 0 = Enabled Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 1 = Not used 2-7 Not used Do not change the settings. (0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine receives halftone images from other manufacturers fax machines frequently. COMMENTS
4.3.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES
Communication Switch 00 [SP No. 1-104-001] No FUNCTION Compression modes available in receive mode 0-1 Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 0 = MH only Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 1 = MH/MR Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 0 = MH/MR/MMR Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 1 = MH/MR/ These bits determine the compression capabilities to be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol. COMMENTS
SM
77
B267
B267 Fax Option
MMR/JBIG Compression modes available in transmit mode Bit 3: 0 Bit 2: 0 = MH only 2-3 Bit 3: 0 Bit 2: 1 = MH/MR Bit 3: 1 Bit 2: 1 = MH/MR/ MMR/JBIG 4 Not used JBIG compression method: Reception 5 0: Only basic supported 1: Basic and optional both supported JBIG compression method: 6 Transmission 0: Basic mode priority 1: Optional mode priority 7 Not used Do not change the settings. Change the setting when communication problems occur using JBIG compression. Change the setting when communication problems occur using JBIG compression. Do not change the settings. These bits determine the compression capabilities to be used in the transmission and to be declared
Bit 3: 1 Bit 2: 0 = MH/MR/MMR in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.
Communication Switch 01 [SP No. 1-104-002] No FUNCTION COMMENTS If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all 0 ECM 0: Off 1: On communications. In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression are switched off automatically. 1-5 Not used Maximum printable page 6-7 length available Bit 7: 0 Bit 6: 0 = No limit Do not change the setting. The setting determined by these bits is informed to the transmitting terminal in the pre-message protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
B267
78
SM
Bit 7: 0 Bit 6: 1 = B4 (364 mm) Bit 7: 1 Bit 6: 0 = A4 (297 mm) Bit 7: 1 Bit 6: 1 = Not used
B267 Fax Option
Communication Switch 02 [SP No. 1-104-003] No FUNCTION COMMENTS If there are more consecutive error lines in the received page than the threshold, the machine will send a negative response. The Low and High threshold values depend on the sub-scan 0 G3 Burst error threshold 0: Low 1: High resolution, and are as follows. 100 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 1 6(L) 12(L) 18(L) 24(L) 12(H) 24(H) 36(H) 48(H)
Acceptable total error line ratio If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the 0: 5% 1: 10% Treatment of pages received with errors during G3 reception 0: Deleted from memory without printing 1: Printed Hang-up decision when a negative code (RTN or PIN) is 0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is received. 1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it receives RTN or PIN. This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if ECM is being used. Do not change the settings. acceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end.
0: Pages received with errors are not printed.
received during G3 immediate transmission 0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up
4-7 Not used
SM
79
B267
Communication Switch 03 [SP No. 1-104-004] No FUNCTION Maximum number of page 0-7 retransmissions in a G3 memory transmission COMMENTS 00 - FF (Hex) times. This setting is not used if ECM is switched on. Default setting - 03(H)
Communication Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 09 [SP No. 1-104-010] No FUNCTION COMMENTS Adjusts the interval of the I-fax dialing. The interval of I-fax dialing is calculated by 0-7 I-Fax dial interval setting following formula. [Interval time = specified value with this switch x 0.2 msec]
Communication Switch 0A [SP No. 1-104-011] No FUNCTION COMMENTS
Point of resumption of memory 0: The transmission begins from the page where 0 transmission upon redialing 0: From the error page 1: From page 1 1-7 Not used transmission failed the previous time. 1: Transmission begins from the first page, using normal memory transmission. Do not change the settings.
B267
80
SM
Communication Switch 0B Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 0C Not used (do not change the settings)
B267 Fax Option
Communication Switch 0D [SP No. 1-104-014] No FUNCTION COMMENTS 00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes (e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes) One page is about 24 kbytes. The available memory 0-7 detection (and therefore reception into memory) is disabled The machine refers to this setting before each fax below this threshold, the machine cannot receive any fax messages. If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect ringing signals and go into receive mode even if there is no memory available. This will result in communication failure. threshold, below which ringing reception. If the amount of remaining memory is
Communication Switch 0E [SP No. 1-104-015] No FUNCTION COMMENTS 06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s 0-7 Minimum interval between automatic dialing attempts (e.g., 06(H) = 12 s) This value is the minimum time that the machine waits before it dials the next destination.
Communication Switch 0F Not used (do not change the settings.)
Communication Switch 10 [SP No. 1-104-017] No FUNCTION COMMENTS
SM
81
B267
Memory transmission: 0-7 Maximum number of dialing attempts to the same destination 01 FE (Hex) times
Communication Switch 11 Not used (do not change the settings.)
Communication Switch 12 [SP No. 1-104-019] No FUNCTION Memory transmission: Interval 0-7 between dialing attempts to the same destination 01 FF (Hex) minutes COMMENTS
Communication Switch 13 Not used (do not change the settings.)
Communication Switch 14 [SP No. 1-104-021] No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inch format are transmitted without conversion. In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF memory in mm format are transmitted without Inch-to-mm conversion during 0 transmission 0: Disabled 1: Enabled conversion. Note: When storing the scanned data into SAF memory, the fax unit always converts the data into mm format. 1: The machine converts the scanned data or stored data in the SAF memory to the format which was specified in the set-up protocol (DIS/NSF) before transmission. 1-5 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
B267
82
SM
Available unit of resolution in which fax messages are received 6-7 Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0 = mm Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1 = inch Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0 = mm and inch (default) Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1 = Not used For the best performance, do not change the factory settings. The setting determined by these bits is informed to the transmitting terminal in the pre-message protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
B267 Fax Option
Communication Switch 15 Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 16 Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 17 Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 18 - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 19 - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1B [SP No. 1-104-028] No FUNCTION COMMENTS If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol Extension access code (0 to 7) procedure, set this bit to 1 to disable V.8. to turn V.8 protocol On/Off 0-7 0: On 1: Off Example: If 0 is the PSTN access code, set bit 0 to 1. When the machine detects 0 as the first dialed number, it automatically disables V.8 protocol. (Alternatively, if 3 is the PSTN access code, set bit 3 to 1.)
Communication Switch 1C [SP No. 1-104-029] No FUNCTION COMMENTS Refer to communication switch 1B.
0-1 Extension access code (8 and
SM
83
B267
9) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off 0: On 1: Off
Example: If 8 is the PSTN access code, set bit 0 to 1. When the machine detects 8 as the first dialed number, it automatically disables V.8 protocol. (If 9 is the PSTN access code, use bit 1.)
2-7 Not used
Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)
4.3.5 G3 SWITCHES
G3 Switch 00 [SP No. 1-105-001] No FUNCTION Monitor speaker during communication (tx and rx) 0 1 Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = Disabled B Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = All the time Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = Not used Monitor speaker during 2 memory transmission 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 3-7 Not used COMMENTS (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through the communication. (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in (1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on all through the communication. Make sure that you reset these bits after testing. 1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory transmission. Do not change the settings.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Up to Phase the T.30 protocol.
G3 Switch 01 [SP No. 1-105-002] No FUNCTION COMMENTS
B267
84
SM
0-1 Not used 2-3 Not used
Do not change the settings. Do not change the settings.

B267 Fax Option
1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will 4 DIS frame length 0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are communication problems with PC-based faxes which cannot receive the extended DIS frames). 5 Not used Forbid CED/AMsam output 6 0: Off 1: On (Forbid output) 7 Not used Do not change the setting. Do not change this setting (Default: 0: Off), unless communication problem is caused by a CED or ANSam transmission. Do not change the setting.
G3 Switch 02 [SP No. 1-105-003] No FUNCTION COMMENTS Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can G3 protocol mode used 0 0: Standard and non-standard 1: Standard only only communicate with machines that send T.30-standard frames only. 1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in non-standard mode communication) 1-6 Not used 7 Short preamble 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Do not change the settings. Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile Manual for details about Short Preamble.
G3 Switch 03 [SP No. 1-105-004] No FUNCTION DIS detection number 0 (Echo countermeasure) 0: 1 COMMENTS 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same DIS frame twice. 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for
SM
85
B267
1: 2
the second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
Not Used
Do not change the settings. 0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.
V.8 protocol 2 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
Note: Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps or lower.
ECM frame size 3 0: 256 bytes 1: 64 bytes 0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS) mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0, CTC transmission conditions 0: After one PPR signal 4 received 1: After four PPR signals received (ITU-T standard) NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted 1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate after receiving four PPRs. PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals. This bit is not effective in V.34 communications. Modem rate used for the next 5 page after receiving a negative code (RTN or PIN) 0: No change 1: Fallback 6 7 Not Used Select detection of reverse polarity in ringing 1: The machines tx modem rate will fall back before sending the next page if a negative code is received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used. Do not change the settings This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in ringing on the phone line (applied to PSTN-G3 9.6, and 7.2 kbps. Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.
B267
86
SM
0: Off 1: On
ringing). Do not change this setting 0: No detection 1: Detection Outside Japan Inside Japan only
B267 Fax Option
G3 Switch 04 [SP No. 1-105-005] No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits 0-3 Training error detection threshold If the number of error bits in the received TCF is below this threshold, the machine informs the sender that training has succeeded. 4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
G3 Switch 05 [SP No. 1-105-006] No 0-3 FUNCTION Initial Tx modem rate Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 bps 2.4k 4.8k 7.2k 9.6k 12.0k 14.4k 16.8k 19.2k 21.6k 24.0k COMMENTS These bits set the initial starting modem rate for transmission. Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you need to change this for specific receivers. If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8 protocol should be disabled manually. Cross reference: V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
SM
87
B267
1 1 1 1
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
26.4k 28.8k 31.2k 33.6k
Other settings - Not used Initial modem type for 9.6 k or 7.2 kbps. 4-5 Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = V.29 Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 = V.17 Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0 = V.34 Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 1 = Not used 6-7 Not used Do not change the settings. These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2 kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
G3 Switch 06 [SP No. 1-105-007] No 0-3 FUNCTION Initial Tx modem rate Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Bps 2.4k 4.8k 7.2k 9.6k 12.0k 14.4k 16.8k 19.2k COMMENTS These bits set the initial starting modem rate for reception. Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems during reception. If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8 protocol should be disabled manually. Cross reference: V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
B267
88
SM
1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 1 1 1
0 1 1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0 1 0
21.6k 24.0k
B267 Fax Option
26.4k 28.8k 31.2k 33.6k
Other settings - Not used Modem types available for reception Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 0 0 0 4-7 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 Setting V.27ter V.27ter,V.29 V.27ter, V.29, V.33 V.27ter, V.29, V.17/V.33 V.27ter, 0 1 0 1 V.29, V.17/V33, V.34 Other settings - Not used The setting of these bits is used to inform the transmitting terminal of the available modem type for the machine in receive mode. If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be disabled manually. Cross reference: V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
G3 Switch 07 [SP No. 1-105-008] No 0-1 FUNCTION PSTN cable equalizer (tx mode: Internal) COMMENTS Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of the length of wire between
SM
89
B267
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = None Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Low Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = Medium Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = High
the modem and the telephone exchange. Use the dedicated transmission parameters for specific receivers. Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the following symptoms occurs. Communication error Modem rate fallback occurs frequently. This setting is not effective in V.34 communications. Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange. Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the following symptoms occurs. Communication error with error codes such as 0-20, 0-23, etc. Modem rate fallback occurs frequently. This setting is not effective in V.34 communications.
PSTN cable equalizer (rx mode: Internal) 2-3 Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = None Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = Low Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 0 = Medium Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 1 = High
PSTN cable equalizer 4 (V.8/V.17 rx mode: External) 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 5 Not used Do not change the settings. 0: This uses the fixed table in the ROM for dial tone Parameter selection for dial 6 tone detection 0: Normal parameter 1: Specific parameter detection. 1: This uses the specific parameter adjusted with SRAM (69ECBEH - 69ECDEH). Select this if the dial tone cannot be detected when the "Normal parameter: 0" is selected. 7 Not used Do not change the settings. Keep this bit at 1.
B267
90
SM
G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings) G3 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
B267 Fax Option
G3 Switch 0A [SP No. 1-105-011] No FUNCTION Maximum allowable carrier drop during image data reception 0-1 Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 200 Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 400 Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 800 Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = Not used Select cancellation of high-speed RX if carrier 2 signal lost while receiving 0: Off 1: On 3 Not used Maximum allowable frame 4 interval during image data reception. 0: 5 s 1: 13 s 5 Not used Do not change the settings This bit set the maximum interval between EOL (end-of-line) signals and the maximum interval between ECM frames from the other end. Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is frequent. Do not change the settings. When the sending terminal is controlled by a Reconstruction time for the 6 first line in receive mode 0: 6 s 1: 12 s computer, there may be a delay in receiving page data after the local machine accepts set-up data and sends CFR. This is outside the T.30 recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to This switch setting determines if high-speed receiving ends if the carrier signal is lost when receiving during non-ECM mode These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop time. Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is frequent. COMMENTS
SM
91
B267
send data. Refer to error code 0-20. ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should come within 5 s of CFR. 7 Not used Do not change the settings.
G3 Switch 0B Not used (do not change the settings). G3 Switch 0C Not used (do not change the settings). G3 Switch 0D Not used (do not change the settings).
G3 Switch 0E [SP No 1-105-015] Set CNG send time interval Some machines on the receiving side may not be able to automatically switch the 3-second CNG interval. 0-7 High order bit 3000-2250ms: 3000-50xNms 3000 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) N FF (2250 ms) 00-0E(3000-3700ms: 3000+50xNms 3000 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) N 0F (3700 ms)
Low order bit
G3 Switch 0F [SP No. 1-105-016] No FUNCTION Alarm when an error occurred 0 in Phase C or later 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Alarm when the handset is 1 off-hook at the end of communication 0: Disabled If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the handset is off-hook at the end of fax communication, change this bit to 1. If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each error communication, change this bit to 1. COMMENTS
B267
92
SM
1: Enabled 2-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

B267 Fax Option
4.3.6 IP FAX SWITCHES

IP Fax Switch 00 [SP No. 1-111-001] No. 0 1 Not used IP Fax Transport 0: TCP, 1: UDP IP Fax single port selection 0: OFF, 1: ON (enable) IP Fax double ports (single data 3 port) selection 0: OFF, 1: ON (enable) 4 IP Fax Gatekeeper 0: OFF, 1: ON (enable) IP Fax T30 bit signal reverse 0: LSB first, 1: MSB first Enables/disables the communication via the gatekeeper for IP-Fax. Reverses the T30 bit signal. When "0" is selected, the max bit rate does 6 IP Fax max bit rate setting 0: Not affected, 1: Affected not affect the value of the DIS/DCS. When "1" is selected, the max bit rate affects the value of the DIS/DCS. When "0" is selected, fax data is received IP Fax received telephone number 7 confirmation 0: No confirmation, 1: Confirmation without checking the telephone number. When "1" is selected, fax data is received only when confirming that the telephone number from the sender matches the registered telephone number in this machine. If this confirmation fails, the line is Selects whether IP-Fax uses a double port. FUNCTION COMMENTS Do not change this setting. Selects TCP or UDP protocol for IP-Fax
Selects single data port.
SM
93
B267
disconnected.
IP-Fax Switch 01 No. FUNCTION Select IP FAX Delay Level Bit3 0 0-3 0 0 0 Bit2 0 0 0 0 Bit1 0 0 1 1 Bit0 0 1 0 1 Setting Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 COMMENTS Raise the level by selecting a higher setting if too many transmission errors are occurring on the network. If TCP/UDP is enabled on the network, raise this setting on the T.30 machine. Increasing the delay time allows the recovery of more lost packets. If only UDP is enabled, increase the number of redundant packets. Level 1~2: 3 Redundant packets Level 3: 4 Redundant packets Selects the preamble wait time. [00 to 0f] There are 16 values in this 4-bit binary 4-7 IP Fax preamble wait time setting switch combination. Waiting time: set value level x 100 ms Max: 0f (1500 ms) Min: 00 (No wait time) The default is "0000" (00H).
IP Fax Switch 02 [SP No. 1-111-003] No. FUNCTION COMMENTS When "0" is selected, the bit signal reverse IP Fax bit signal reverse setting 0 0: Maker code setting 1: Internal bit switch setting method is decided by the maker code. When "1" is selected, the bit signal reverse method is decided by the internal bit switch. When communicating between IP Fax devices, LSB first is selected.)
B267
94
SM
IP Fax transmission speed setting 1 0: Modem speed 1: No limitation SIP transport setting 2 0: TCP 1: UDP CCM connection 3 0: No CCM connection 1: CCM connection
Selects the transmit speed for IP Fax communication. This bit switch sets the transport that has priority for receiving IP Fax data. This function is activated only when the sender has both TCP and UDP. When "1" is selected, only the connection call message with H.323 or no tunneled H.245 is transmitted via CCM. 0: This answers the INVITE message from
Message reception selection from 4 non-registered SIP server 0: Answer 1: Not answer
the SIP server not registered for the machine. 1: This does not receive the INVITE message from the SIP server not registered for the machine and send a refusal message. 0: This does not limit the type of the image
ECM communication setting 5 0: No limit for image compression 1: Limit for image compression
compression with ECM communication. 1: When the other end machine is Ciscco, this permits the image compression other than JBIG or MMR with ECM communication.
6-7
Not used
Do not change these settings.
IP Fax Switch 03 [SP No. 1-111-004] No. FUNCTION Effective field limitation for G3 0 standard function information 0: OFF, 1: 4byte (DIS) 1 Switching between G3 standard and G3 non standard COMMENTS Limits the effective field for standard G3 function information. Enables/disables switching between G3 standard and G3 non-standard.
SM
95
0: Enable switching 1: G3 standard only 2 Not used. ECM frame size selection at 3 transmitting 0: 256byte, 1: 64byte DIS detection times for echo 4 prevention 0: 1 time, 1: 2 times CTC transmission selection 5 0: PPRx1 1: PPRx4 Shift down setting at receiving 6 negative code 0: OFF, 1: ON 7 Not used Sets the number of times for DIS to detect echoes. When "0" is selected, the transmission condition is decided by error frame numbers. When "1" is selected, the transmission condition is based on the ITU-T method. Selects whether to shift down when negative codes are received. Do not change this setting. Selects the ECM frame size for sending. Do not change this setting.
IP Fax Switch 04 [SP No. 1-111-005] No. 0 1 2 3 4-7 Not used Do not change these settings. Sets the TCF error threshold level. TCF error threshold [00 to 0f] The default is "1111" (0fH). FUNCTION COMMENTS
IP Fax Switch 05 [SP No. 1-111-006]
B267
96
SM
No.
FUNCTION Modem bit rate setting for transmission
COMMENTS
Sets the modem bit rate for transmission. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps). Bit 4 0 0 0 0 0 0-3 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 3 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Bit 2 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 Bit 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 2400 bps 4800 bps 7200 bps 9600 bps 12.0 Kbps 14.4 Kbps 16.8 Kbps 19.2 Kbps 21.6 Kbps 24.0 Kbps 26.4 Kbps 28.8 Kbps 31.2 Kbps 33.6 Kbps
Modem setting for transmission Sets the modem for transmission. The default is "00" (V29). 4-5 Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = V29 Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 = V17 Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0 = V34* Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 1 = Not used *V34 is not supported for IP-Fax communication.
SM
97
6-7
Not used
IP Fax Switch 06 [SP No. 1-111-007] No. FUNCTION Modem bit rate setting for reception Sets the modem bit rate for reception. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps). Bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0-3 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 2 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 Bit 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 2400 bps 4800 bps 7200 bps 9600 bps 12.0 Kbps 14.4 Kbps 16.8 Kbps 19.2 Kbps 21.6 Kbps 24.0 Kbps 26.4 Kbps 28.8 Kbps 31.2 Kbps 33.6 Kbps COMMENTS
4-7
Modem setting for reception Sets the modem type for reception. The default is "0100" (V27ter, V29, V17).
B267
98
SM
Bit 7 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 6 0 0 0 1 1
Bit 5 0 1 1 0 0
Bit 4 1 0 1 0 1 V27ter
V27ter, V29 V27ter, V29, V33 (invalid) V27ter, V29, V17 V27ter, V29, V17, V34*
*V34 is not supported for IP-Fax communication.
IP Fax Switch 07 [SP No. 1-111-008] No. 0 FUNCTION TSI information 0: Not added, 1: Added DCN transmission setting at T1 1 timeout 0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted 2 Not used Hang up setting at DIS reception 3 disabled 0: No hang up 1: Hang up after transmitting DCN 4 Number of times for training 0: 1 time, 1: 2 times Space CSI transmission setting at 5 no CSI registration 0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted Selects the number of times training is done at the same bit rate. When "0" is selected, frame data is enabled. When "1" is selected, the transmitted data is all spaces. Sets whether the machine disconnects after DIS reception. COMMENTS Adds or does not add TSI information to NSS(S). Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1 timeout. Do not change this setting.
SM
99
6-7
Not used
IP Fax Switch 08 [SP No. 1-111-009] No. FUNCTION T1 timer adjustment Adjusts the T1 timer. The default is "00" (35 seconds). 0-1 Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 35 sec Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 40 sec Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 50 sec Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = 60 sec T4 timer adjustment Adjust the T4 timer. The default is "00" (3 seconds). 2-3 Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = 3 sec Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = 3.5 sec Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 0 = 4 sec Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 1 = 5 sec T0 timer adjustment Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = 75 sec 4-5 Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 = 120 sec Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0 = 180 sec Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 1 = 240 sec 6-7 Not used Adjusts the fail safe timer. This timer sets the interval between "setup" data transmission and T.38 phase decision. If your destination return is late on the network or G3 fax return is late, adjust the longer interval timer. The default is "00" (75 seconds). Do not change these settings. COMMENTS
B267
100
SM
4.4 NCU PARAMETERS

The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units that the each country are also given. Most of these must be changed by RAM read/write (SP2-102), but some can be changed using NCU Parameter programming (SP2-103, 104 and 105); if SP2-103, 104 and 105 can be used, this will be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in hex code unless (BCD) is included in the Unit column. The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU. Change the fourth digit from 5 to 6 (e.g. 680500 to 680600) for the settings for the first optional G3 interface unit and from 5 to 7 (e.g. 680700) for the settings for the second optional G3 interface unit.
B267 Fax Option
machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The factory settings for
Address 680500
Function Country/Area code for NCU parameters Use the Hex value to program the country/area code directly into this address, or use the decimal value to program it using SP2-103-001 Country /Area France Germany UK Italy Austria Belgium Denmark Finland Ireland Decimal 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Hex 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Country /Area USA Asia Hong Kong South Africa Australia New Zealand Singapore Malaysia China Decimal 17 18 20 21 22 26 24 25 26 Hex 11 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A
SM
101
B267
Address Norway Sweden Switzerland Portugal Holland Spain Israel 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F
Function Taiwan Korea Turkey Greece Hungary Czech Poland 27 28 32 33 34 35 36 1B 1C 20 21 22 23 24
Address 680501 680502 680503
Function Line current detection time Line current wait time Line current drop detect time PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit (high byte) PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit (low byte) PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit (high byte) PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit (low byte) PSTN dial tone detection time PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW) PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH)
Unit
Remarks Line current detection is disabled.
20 ms
Line current is not detected if 680501 contains FF.
680504
If both addresses Hz (BCD) contain FF(H), tone detection is disabled.
680505
680506
680507 680508 680509 68050A
20 ms
If 680508 contains FF(H), the machine pauses for the pause time (address 68050D /
B267
102
SM
Address 68050B
Function PSTN dial tone continuous tone time PSTN dial tone permissible drop time PSTN wait interval (LOW) PSTN wait interval (HIGH)
Unit
Remarks 68050E). Italy: See Note 2.

B267 Fax Option
68050C 68050D 68050E 68050F
PSTN ring-back tone detection time 20 ms PSTN ring-back tone off detection time PSTN detection time for silent
Detection is disabled if this contains FF. -
680510
20 ms
680511
period after ring-back tone detected 20 ms (LOW) PSTN detection time for silent
680512
period after ring-back tone detected 20 ms (HIGH)
680513
PSTN busy tone frequency upper limit (high byte) PSTN busy tone frequency upper limit (low byte) PSTN busy tone frequency lower limit (high byte) PSTN busy tone frequency lower limit (low byte) PABX dial tone frequency upper limit (high byte) PABX dial tone frequency upper Hz (BCD) Hz (BCD) Hz (BCD)
If both addresses contain FF(H), tone detection is disabled.
680514
680515
680516
680517 680518
SM
103
B267
Address
Function limit (low byte)
Unit
Remarks
680519
PABX dial tone frequency lower limit (high byte) PABX dial tone frequency lower limit (low byte) PABX dial tone detection time PABX dial tone reset time (LOW) PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH) PABX dial tone continuous tone time PABX dial tone permissible drop time PABX wait interval (LOW) PABX wait interval (HIGH) PABX ringback tone detection time PABX ringback tone off detection time PABX detection time for silent 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms Hz (BCD)
68051A 68051B 68051C 68051D 68051E
If 68051B contains FF, the machine pauses for the pause time (680520 / 680521).
68051F 680520 680521 680522 680523
680524
period after ringback tone detected (LOW) PABX detection time for silent
20 ms
680525
period after ringback tone detected (HIGH)
20 ms
680526 680527
PABX busy tone frequency upper limit (high byte) PABX busy tone frequency upper Hz (BCD)
B267
104
SM
Address
Function limit (low byte)
Unit
Remarks
680528
limit (high byte) PABX busy tone frequency lower limit (low byte) Busy tone ON time: range 1 Busy tone OFF time: range 1 Busy tone ON time: range 2 Busy tone OFF time: range 2 Busy tone ON time: range 3 Busy tone OFF time: range 3 Busy tone ON time: range 4 Busy tone OFF time: range 4 Busy tone continuous tone detection time
680529 68052A 68052B 68052C 68052D 68052E 68052F 680530 680531 680532
20 ms
20 ms
Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFF-ON-OFF must be detected twice). Tolerance () 680533 Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 75% Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0. Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 50% Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0. Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 25% Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 12.5% Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection 680534 680535 International dial tone frequency upper limit (high byte) International dial tone frequency Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain FF(H), tone detection is disabled.
SM
105
B267
B267 Fax Option
PABX busy tone frequency lower
Address
Function upper limit (low byte)
Unit
Remarks
680536
International dial tone frequency lower limit (high byte) International dial tone frequency lower limit (low byte) International dial tone detection time International dial tone reset time (LOW) International dial tone reset time (HIGH) International dial tone continuous tone time International dial tone permissible drop time International dial wait interval (LOW) International dial wait interval (HIGH) Country dial tone upper frequency limit (HIGH) Country dial tone upper frequency limit (LOW) Country dial tone lower frequency limit (HIGH) Country dial tone lower frequency limit (LOW) Hz (BCD) 20 ms Hz (BCD)
680537
680538
680539
If 680538 contains FF, the machine pauses for the pause time (68053D / 68053E). Belgium: See Note 2.
68053A
68053B
68053C
68053D
68053E
68053F
680540
680541
680542
B267
106
SM
Address 680543 680544 680545 680546
Function Country dial tone detection time Country dial tone reset time (LOW) Country dial tone reset time (HIGH) Country dial tone continuous tone time Country dial tone permissible drop time Country dial wait interval (LOW) Country dial wait interval (HIGH) Time between opening or closing -
Unit
Remarks If 680543 contains FF, the pause time (680548 / 680549). B267 Fax Option
20 ms
the machine pauses for
680547 680548 680549
20 ms
See Notes 3, 6 and 8. SP2-103-012 (parameter 11). See Note 3.
68054A
the DO relay and opening the OHDI 1 ms relay
68054B
Break time for pulse dialing
1 ms
SP2-103-013 (parameter 12). See Note 3.
68054C
Make time for pulse dialing
1 ms
SP2-103-014 (parameter 13). See Notes 3, 6 and 8.
Time between final OHDI relay 68054D closure and DO relay opening or closing 1 ms
SP2-103-015 (parameter 14). This parameter is only valid in Europe.
68054E
Minimum pause between dialed digits (pulse dial mode) Time waited when a pause is entered at the operation panel 20 ms
See Note 3 and 8. SP2-103-016 (parameter 15). SP2-103-017 (parameter 16). See
68054F
SM
107
B267
Address
Function
Unit Note 3.
Remarks
680550
DTMF tone on time 1 ms
SP2-103-018 (parameter 17). SP2-103-019 (parameter 18). -N x 0.5 3.5 dBm SP2-103-020 (parameter 19). See Note 5. SP2-103-021 (parameter 20).
680551
DTMF tone off time
680552
Tone attenuation level of DTMF signals while dialing
Tone attenuation value difference 680553 between high frequency tone and low frequency tone in DTMF signals -dBm x 0.5
The setting must be less than 5dBm, and should not exceed the setting at 680552h above. See Note 5.
680554
PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation level -N x 0.5 after dialling ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation level after dialling Not used Time between 68054Dh (NCU 3.5 dBm
SP2-103-022 (parameter 21). See Note 5. See Note 5 Do not change the settings. This parameter takes
680555
-dBm x 0.5
680556
680557
parameter 14) and 68054Eh (NCU parameter 15)
1 ms
effect when the country code is set to France.
680558
Not used
Do not change the setting. The Gs relay is closed for this interval.
680559
Grounding time (ground start mode) 20 ms
B267
108
SM
Address 68055A
Function Break time (flash start mode) International dial access code (High) International dial access code (Low)
Unit 1 ms
Remarks The OHDI relay is open for this interval. For a code of 100:
68055B 68055C
BCD
68055B - F1 68055C - 00 This time is waited for each pause input after the PSTN access code. If this address contains
68055D
PSTN access pause time
20 ms
FF[H], the pause time stored in address 68054F is used. Do not set a number more than 7 in the UK.
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = -25.0 dBm Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = -35.0 dBm 68055E Progress tone detection level, and cadence detection enable flags Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = -30.0 dBm Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = -40.0 dBm Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = -49.0 dBm Bits 2, 0 - See Note 2. 68055F To 680564 680565 680566 680567 to 680571 680572 Acceptable ringing signal 1000/ N Not used Long distance call prefix (HIGH) Long distance call prefix (LOW) BCD BCD Not used Do not change the settings. For a code of 0: 680565 FF 680566 - FF Do not change the settings.
SP2-103-003
SM
109
Address
Function frequency: range 1, upper limit
Unit
Remarks (parameter 02). SP2-103-004 (parameter 03).
680573
Acceptable ringing signal frequency: range 1, lower limit Acceptable ringing signal frequency: range 2, upper limit Acceptable ringing signal frequency: range 2, lower limit (Hz).
680574
SP2-103-005 (parameter 04). SP2-103-006 (parameter 05). SP2-103-007
680575
680576
Number of rings until a call is detected
(parameter 06). The setting must not be zero.
680577
Minimum required length of the first ring Minimum required length of the second and subsequent rings Ringing signal detection reset time (LOW) Ringing signal detection reset time (HIGH)
See Note 4. 20 ms SP2-103-008 (parameter 07). 20 ms SP2-103-009 (parameter 08). SP2-103-010 20 ms (parameter 09). SP2-103-011 (parameter 10). Do not change the settings.
680578
680579
68057A 68057B to 680580
Not used
Interval between dialing the last digit and switching the Oh relay 680581 over to the external telephone when 20 ms dialing from the operation panel in handset mode. Factory setting: 500 ms
B267
110
SM
Address
Function
Unit
Remarks
Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 0 = 200 ms Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 1 = 800 ms Other Not used 680582 Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = 200 ms Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = 800 ms Other Not used Bits 4 to 7 - Not used 680583 To 6805A0 6805A1 Acceptable CED detection frequency upper limit (high byte) Acceptable CED detection frequency upper limit (low byte) Acceptable CED detection frequency lower limit (high byte) Acceptable CED detection frequency lower limit (low byte) CED detection time Acceptable CNG detection frequency upper limit (high byte) Acceptable CNG detection frequency upper limit (low byte) Acceptable CNG detection frequency lower limit (high byte) Acceptable CNG detection BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain FF(H), tone detection is disabled. BCD (Hz) 20 ms 20 ms Factory setting: 200 ms BCD (Hz) BCD (Hz) Not used Do not change the settings. B267 Fax Option B267
6805A2
6805A3
6805A4
6805A5
6805A6
6805A7
6805A8 6805A9
SM
111
Address
Function frequency lower limit (low byte)
Unit
Remarks
6805AA 6805AB 6805AC
Not used CNG on time CNG off time Number of CNG cycles required for detection
20 ms 20 ms
Do not change the setting. Factory setting: 500 ms Factory setting: 3000 ms The data is coded in the
6805AD
same way as address 680533.
6805AE
Not used Acceptable AI short protocol tone
6805AF
(800Hz) detection frequency upper limit (high byte) Acceptable AI short protocol tone Hz (BCD)
6805B0
(800Hz) detection frequency upper limit (low byte) Acceptable AI short protocol tone
6805B1
(800Hz) detection frequency lower limit (high byte) Acceptable AI short protocol tone Hz(BCD)
6805B2
(800Hz) detection frequency lower limit (low byte)
6805B3
Detection time for 800 Hz AI short protocol tone PSTN: Tx level from the modem PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmission level
20 ms
Factory setting: 360 ms SP2-103-002 (parameter 01).
6805B4
-N 3 dBm
6805B5
- N 6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B5 3.5 (dB) See Note 7.
B267
112
SM
Address 6805B6 6805B7 6805B8
Function PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmission level PABX: Tx level from the modem PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission level PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission level Modem turn-on level (incoming signal detection level)
Unit
Remarks
- N6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B6 3 (dB) See Note 7. - dBm B267 Fax Option B267
- N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB)
6805B9
- N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB) -37-0.5N (dBm)
6805BD 6805BE to 6805C6
Not used
Bits 0 to 3 Not used 6805C7 Bit 4 = V.34 protocol dump Bits 5 to 7 Not used. 6805C8 to 6805D9 6805DA T.30 T1 timer 1s 1: Maximum wait time for post message (EOP/EOM/MPS) can 6805E0 bit 3 Maximum wait time for post message 0: 12 s 1: 30 s be changed to 30 s. Change this bit to 1 if communication errors occur frequently during V.17 reception. 6805E3 Do not change these Voltage setting to detect off-hook for voltage/DP detection for an
SM 113
0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default)
Not used
0: Auto 1: Fixed V
settings
Address
Function externally connected line.
Unit
Remarks
Here is a summary of the fixed voltage settings (1: Fixed) for an externally connected line. Bit 7 0 0 0 1 1 Bit 6 0 0 0 0 1 Bit 5 0 0 1 0 1 Bit 4 0 1 0 0 1 Not used 2.75 V 5.5 V 22 V 41.25 V 0 1 0 Bit 3 1 6805E5 0 1 0 1 RT=0 (Low) RT=1 (High) RZ=0 (High) RZ=1 (Composite) Auto Fixed Use RDTP Use RDTN If any setting is changed, select a setting that is higher than the default setting. 01
Bit 1 sets the level of 6805E4 the call signal, Bit 3 sets the call signal impedance
Bit 1
Bit 0 sets the ring detection method, Bit 1 sets the ring detection method when fixed.
Bit 0
Bit 1
Here is a summary of the voltages for the detection of off-hook for DP detection. Bit 7 0 0 Bit 6 0 0 Bit 5 0 0 Bit 4 0 1 Not used 2.75 V
B267
114
SM
Address 0 1 1
Function 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
Unit 5.5 V
Remarks
41.25 V
NOTES 1. 2. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address. Italy and Belgium only RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning. Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium) Bit 1 - Not used Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy) If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are changed. 680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address 680533. 68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms) 68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms) 3. 4. 5. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10 pps. If 20 pps is used, the machine automatically compensates. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time specified by this parameter. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10. The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are: High frequency tone: 0.5 x N680552/6805543.5 dBm 0.5 x N680555 dBm Low frequency tone: 0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) 3.5 dBm 0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm N680552, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H) 6. 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds closing and Di opening
SM
115
B267
B267 Fax Option
22 V
68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds opening and Di closing 7. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI short protocol) refer to the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higher than 1500Hz refer to the setting at 6805B6h. 8. 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the sum of the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and 68054E.
B267
116
SM
4.5 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

There are two sets of transmission parameters: Fax and E-mail allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience problems, store that terminals fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and adjust the parameters allocated to that number. The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will be described.
B267 Fax Option
Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable parameters
4.5.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Set the bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1. Enter Address Book Management mode ([User Tools]> System Settings> Key Operator> Address Book Management). Select the address book that you want to program. For the fax parameter, select "Fax Dest.", for the E-mail parameter, select "E-mail", then press Start. Make sure that the LED of the Start button lights green. The settings for the switch 00 are now displayed. Press the bit number that you wish to change. To scroll through the parameter switches, either: Select the next switch: press Next or Select the previous switch: Prev. until the correct switch is displayed. Then go back to step 6. After the setting is changed, press OK. After finishing, reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0.
4.5.2 PARAMETERS
Fax Parameters
The initial settings of the following fax parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are disabled.
Switch 00 FUNCTION AND COMMENTS ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode) If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting, adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1 second.
SM
117
B267
Range: 0 to 120 s (00h to 78h) FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used. Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.
Switch 01 No Tx level Bit4 0 0 0 0 0 Bit3 0 0 0 0 0 Bit2 0 0 0 0 1 Bit1 0 0 1 1 0 Bit0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 If communication with a particular remote terminal often contains errors, the signal level may be inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level for communications with that terminal until the results are better. If the setting is Disabled, the NCU parameter 01 setting is used. Do not use settings other 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15 Disabled Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of the length of wire between the Cable equalizer Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = None 5-7 Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = Low Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = Medium Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = High Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = Disabled modem and the telephone exchange when calling the number stored in this Quick/Speed Dial. Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the following symptoms occurs. Communication error with error codes such as 0-20, 0-23, etc. Modem rate fallback occurs than listed on the left. FUNCTION COMMENTS
0-4
B267
118
SM
frequently. Do not use settings other If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is used.
than listed on the left.
Switch 02 No FUNCTION COMMENTS If training with a particular remote terminal bps Not used 2400 4800 7200 9600 12000 14400 16800 19200 21600 24000 26400 28800 31200 Do not use settings other than listed on the left. If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is used. 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 always takes too long, the initial modem rate may be too high. Reduce the initial Tx modem rate using these bits. For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch 04 bit 4 must be changed to 0.
0-3 Initial Tx modem rate Bit3 0 0 0 0 0 Bit2 0 0 0 0 1 Bit1 0 0 1 1 0 Bit0 0 1 0 1 0
SM
119
1 1
1 1
1 1
0 1
33600 Disabled
Other settings: Not used 4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
Switch 03 No FUNCTION Inch-mm conversion before tx Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = Inch-mm conversion 0-1 available Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Inch only Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = Not used Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = Disabled DIS/NSF detection method Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = First DIS or NSF 2-3 Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = Second DIS or NSF Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 0 = Not used Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 1 = Disabled COMMENTS The machine uses inch-based resolutions for scanning. If inch only is selected, the printed copy may be slightly distorted at the other end if that machine uses mm-based resolutions. If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is used.
(0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are interfering with the set-up protocol at the start of transmission. The machine will then wait for the second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS. If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is used. If transmissions to a specific destination always
V.8 protocol 4 0: Off 1: Disabled
end at a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower), disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol. 0: V.34 communication will not be possible. If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is used.
Compression modes available This bit determines the capabilities that are 5 in transmit mode 0: MH only 1: Disabled informed to the other terminal during transmission. If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is used.
B267
120
SM
For example, if ECM is switched on but is not ECM during transmission Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0 = Off 6-7 Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1 = On Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0 = Not used Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1 = Disabled wanted when sending to a particular terminal, use the (0, 0) setting. V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression are automatically disabled if ECM is disabled. If the setting is Disabled, the bit switch setting is used.
B267 Fax Option
Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings) Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings) Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings) Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings) Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings) Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
E-mail Parameters
The initial settings of the following e-mail parameters are all "0" (all parameters disabled). Switch 00 No FUNCTION MH Compression mode 0 for e-mail attachments 0: Off 1: On MR Compression mode 1 for e-mail attachments 0: Off 1: On 2 MMR Compression mode Switches MMR compression on and off for files Switches MR compression on and off for files attached to e-mails for sending. Switches MH compression on and off for files attached to e-mails for sending. COMMENTS
SM
121
B267
for e-mail attachments 0: Off 1: On 3-6 Not used Designates the bits to reference for 7 compression method of e-mail attachments 0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6) 1: No registration.
attached to e-mails for sending.
The "0" selection (default) references the settings for Bits 00, 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the selections of Bits 00, 01, 02.
Switch 01 No FUNCTION Original width of e-mail 0 attachment: A4 0: Off 1: On Original width of e-mail 1 attachment: B4 0: Off 1: On Original width of e-mail 2 attachment: A3 0: Off 1: On 3-6 Not used Designates the bits to reference for original size The "0" selection (default) references the settings for 7 of e-mail attachments 0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6) 1: No registration. Bits 00, 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the selections of Bits 00, 01, 02. Do not change these settings. Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as A3. Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as B4. Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as A4. COMMENTS
B267
122
SM
Switch 02 No FUNCTION Line resolution of e-mail 0 attachment: 200 x 100 0: Off 1: On Line resolution of e-mail 1 attachment: 200 x 200 0: Off 1: On Line resolution of e-mail 2 attachment: 200 x 400 0: Off 1: On 3 Not used Line resolution of e-mail 4 attachment: 400 x 400 0: Off 1: On 5-6 Not used Designates the bits to reference for original size The "0" selection (default) references the settings for 7 of e-mail attachments 0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6) 1: No registration. Bits 00, 01, 02, 04 above. The "1" selection ignores the selections of Bits 00, 01, 02, 04. Do not change these settings. Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as 400 x 400. Do not change these settings. Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as 200 x 400. Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as 200 x 200. Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as 200 x100. COMMENTS
B267 Fax Option
Switch 03 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Switch 04
SM
123
B267
No
FUNCTION
COMMENTS If the other ends have the addresses, which have
Full mode address selection 0 0: Full mode address 1: No full mode (simple mode)
the full mode function flag ("0"), this machine determines them as full mode standard machines. This machine attaches the "demand of reception confirmation" to a message when transmitting. This machine updates the reception capability to the address book when receiving.
1-7
Not used
Switch 05 No FUNCTION Directr transmission 0 selection to SMTP server 0: ON 1: OFF 1-7 Not used Do not change these settings. Allows or does not allow the direct transmission to SMTP server. COMMENTS
Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings) Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings) Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings) Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
B267
124
SM
4.6 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

Do not change the settings which are marked as Not used or Read only. 680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only) 680001(H) - Revision number (BCD) 680002(H) - Year (BCD) 680003(H) - Month (BCD) 680004(H) - Day (BCD) 680006 to 680015(H) - Machines serial number (16 digits - ASCII) 680018(H) - Total program checksum (low) 680019(H) - Total program checksum (high) 680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches 680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches 680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches 680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches 680090 to 68009F(H) - G3-2 bit switches: Not used 6800A0 to 6800AF(H) - G3-3 bit switches: Not used 6800D0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00) : Not used 6800D1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01) : Not used 6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02) Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit 2: Reception time printing (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit 4: Checkered mark printing (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit 5: Not used Bit 6: Not used Bit 7: Not used 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
SM
125
6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report printout) Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 1: Not used Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 6: Not used Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On 6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic report printout) Bit 0: Not used Bit 1: Automatic communication failure report and transfer result report output 0: Off, 1: On Bits 2 to 3: Not used Bit 4: Indicates the parties 0: Not indicated, 1: Indicated Bit 5: Include senders name on reports 0: Off, 1: On Bit 6: Not used Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 6800D5(H) - User parameter switch 05 (SWUSR_05) Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled Bits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages (Paper end, toner end, jam, and during night mode) Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0 = The machine receives all the fax messages. Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1 = The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI. Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0 = The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code. Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 1 = The machine does not receive anything. Bit 3: Not used Bit 4: Not used Bit 5: Just size printing 0: Off, 1: On Bit 6: Not used Bit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On 6800D6(H) - User parameter switch 06 (SWUSR_06): Not used 6800D7(H) - User parameter switch 07 (SWUSR_07) Bit 0 Ringing 0: Off, 1: On Bit1: Automatic answering message 0: Off, 1: On 0: Off, 1: On
B267
126
SM
Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: On Bits 3 and 4: Not used Bit 5: Remote control 0: Off, 1: On 6800D8(H) - User parameter switch 08 (SWUSR_08) Bits 0 and 1: Not used. Bit 2: Authorized reception 0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are accepted. 1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature are accepted. Bits 3 to 7: Not used. 6800D9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09): Not used 6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A) Bits 0 to 2: Not used Bit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: On Bits 4 and 5: Not used Bit 6: Use both e-mail notification and printed reports to confirm the transmission results 0: Off, 1: On Bit 7: Not used 6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B) Bits 0 and 1: Not used Bit 2: White original detection 0: Off, 1: On (alarm and alert message on the LCD) Bit 3: Receive rejection for 1300 Hz transmission 0: Off (receive), 1: On (not receive) Bit 5: Not used Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station 0: Off, 1: On Bit 7: Not used 6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used 6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D): Not used 6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E) Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: Off Bit 1: Maximum document length detection 0: Double letter, 1: Longer than double-letter (well log) up to 1,200 mm Bit 2: Not used
Bits 6 and 7: Not used
SM
127
Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer/Scanner) is pressed 0: Not cleared, 1: Cleared Bits 4 to 6: Not used Bit 7: Not used 6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F) (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 1st paper feed station Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 2nd paper feed station Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = 3rd paper feed station Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 4th paper feed station Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = LCT Other settings Not used Bits 3 and 4: Not used Bit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: Off Bits 6 and 7: Not used 6800E0(H) User parameter switch 16 (SWUSR_10) (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) Bits 0 and 1: Not used Bit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size paper is not available. 0: A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority Bits 3 to 7: Not used 6800E1(H) User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11) Bit 0: Not used Bit 1: Not used Bit 2: Inclusion of the Add button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials is selected for broadcasting 0:Not needed, 1: Needed Bits 3 to 6: Not used Bit 7: Press Start key without an original when using the on hook dial or the external telephone, 0: displays Cannot detect original size. 1: Receives fax messages. 6800E2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12) Bit 0: TTI date 0: Off, 1: On Bit 1: TTI sender Bit 2: TTI file number Bit 3: TTI page number 0: Off, 1: On 0: Off, 1: On 0: Off, 1: On
B267
128
SM
Bits 4 to 6: Not used Bit 7: Japan only 6800E3(H) - User parameter switch 19 (SWUSR_13) Bit 1: Journal format 0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions 1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, and G3-3 communications Bit 2: Not used Bit 3: 90 image rotation during B5 portrait Tx (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and sub-scan directions. (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E bits 3 and 4), 1: 50% reduction Bit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Off, 1: On Bits 6 and 7: Not used 6800E4(H) - User parameter switch 20 (SWUSR_14) Bit 0: Automatic printing of the LAN fax result report 0: Off, 1: On Bit 1: Not used. Bits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC fax (LAN fax) driver Bit 5 0 0 Bit 4 0 0 Bit 3 0 0 Bit 2 0 1 Setting 0 min. 1 min.
Bit 0: Not used
1 1
1 1
1 1
0 1
14 min. 15 min.
Bits 6 and 7: Not used. 6800E5(H) - User parameter switch 21 (SWUSR_15) Bit 0: Print results of sending reception notice request message 0: Disabled (print only when error occurs), 1: Enabled Bit 1: Respond to e-mail reception acknowledgment request 0: Disabled, 1:
SM
129
Enabled Bit 2: Not used Bit 3: File format for forwarded folders 0: TIFF, 1:PDF Bit 4: Transmit Journal by E-mail 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit 5: Not used Bit 6: Network error display 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed Bit 7: Transmit error mail notification 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled 6800E6(H) - User parameter switch 22 (SWUSR_16) (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) Bit 0: Dial tone detection (PSTN 1) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bits 1 to 7: Not used 6800E7(H) User parameter switch 23 (SWUSR_17): Not used 6800E8(H) - User parameter switch 24 (SWUSR_18): Not used 6800E9(H) - User parameter switch 25 (SWUSR_19) Bit 0: Not used Bit 1: Reception mode switch timer 0: Off, 1: On (switching Fax or Fax/Tel) Bit 2: Mode priority switch 0: Fax first, 1: Tel first Bit 3: Dial in function (Japan Only) Bit 4: RDS operation 0: Not acceptable, 1: Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch 03 This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user (see system switch 02). Bits 5 to 7: Not used 6800EA(H) and 6800EB(H) - User parameter switches 26 and 27 (SWUSR_1A and 1B): Not used 6800EC(H) - User parameter switch 28(SWUSR_1C) Xxxxx 6800ED(H) - User parameter switch 29(SWUSR_1D) xxxxxx 6800EE(H) and 6800EF(H) - User parameter switches 30 and 31 (SWUSR_1E and 1F): Not used 6800F0(H) - User parameter switch 32 (SWUSR_20) Bit 0: Quotation priority for a destination when there is no destination of the specified type 0: Paper output priority = Priority order: 1. IP-fax destination, 2. Fax Number, 3.
B267
130
SM
E-mail address, 4. Folder 1: Electric putout order = Priority order: 1. E-mail address, 2. Folder, 3. IP-fax destination, 4. Fax number 6800F1(H) - User parameter switch 33 (SWUSR_21): Not used 6800F2(H) - User parameter switch 34 (SWUSR_22) Bit 0: Gatekeeper server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit 1: SIP server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bits 2 to 7: Not used 680100 to 68010F(H) - G4 Parameter Switches Not used 680110 to 68012F(H) - G4 Internal Switches Not used 680130 to 68016F(H) - Service Switches 680170 to 68017F(H) - IFAX Switches 680180 to 68018F(H) - IP-FAX Switches 680190 to 6801AF(H) - Service stations fax number (SP3-101) 6801B0 to 6801B9(H) - Own fax PABX extension number 6801BA to 6801C3(H) - Own fax number (PSTN) Not used 6801C4 to 6801D7(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) Not used 6801D8 to 6801E3(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3) Not used 6801E4 to 6801EF(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3) Not used 6801F0 to 6801FB(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4) Not used 6801FC to 680207(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4) Not used 680208 to 68021B(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the following note. 68021C to 68022F(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - Not used 680230 to 680246(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - Not used 680247 to 680286(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note. 680287 to 6802C6(H) - TTI 2 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - Not used 6802C7 to 680306(H) - TTI 3 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - Not used 680307 to 68031A(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) 68031B to 68032E(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII) - Not used 68032F to 680342(H) - PSTN-3 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII) - Not used 680343(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex) 680344(H) - Number of PSTN-2 CSI characters (Hex) - Not used 680345(H) Number of PSTN-3 CSI characters (Hex) - Not used If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 64 for TTI), add a
Bits 1 to 7: Not used
SM
131
stop code (00[H]) after the last character. 680380 to 680387(H) - Last power off time (Read only) 680380(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM) 680381(H) - Year (BCD) 680382(H) - Month (BCD) 680383(H) - Day (BCD) 680384(H) Hour 680385(H) Minute 680386(H) Second 680387(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, /// , 06: Sunday 680394(H) - Optional equipment (Read only Do not change the settings) Bit 0: Page Memory Bit 1: SAF Memory Bits 2 to 7; Not used 680395(H) - Optional equipment (Read only Do not change the settings) Bits 0 to 3: Not used Bit 4: G3-2 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Bit 5: G3-3 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Bit 6 and 7: Not used 680406 to 68040A Option G3 board (G3-2) ROM information (Read only) 680406(H) - Suffix (BCD) 680407(H) - Version (BCD) 680408(H) - Year (BCD) 680409(H) - Month (BCD) 68040A(H) - Day (BCD) 68040B to 68040F Option G3 board (G3-3) ROM information (Read only) 68040B(H) - Suffix (BCD) 68040C(H) - Version (BCD) 68040D(H) - Year (BCD) 68040E(H) - Month (BCD) 68040F(H) - Day (BCD) 680410(H) - G3-1 Modem ROM version (Read only) 680412(H) - G3-2 Modem ROM version (Read only) 680414(H) - G3-3 Modem ROM version (Read only) 680420(H) - Number of multiple sets print (Read only) 0: Not installed, 1: Installed 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
B267
132
SM
Rev. 04/2007
680476(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD) 680477(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD) 680492(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H) 680494(H) - On-hook monitor volume 680495(H) - Dialing monitor volume 680496(H) - Buzzer volume 680497(H) - Beeper volume 00 - 07(H) 00 - 07(H)
680493(H) - Reception monitor volume
00 - 07(H)
00 - 07(H) 00 - 07(H)
6804A8(H) - Machine code (Check ram 4) 688E8E to 68918D(H) - SIP server address (Read only) 688E8E(H) - Proxy server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII) 688F0E(H) - Proxy server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII) 688F8E(H) - Redirect server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII) 68900E(H) - Redirect server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII) 68908E(H) - Registrar server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII) 68910E(H) - Registrar server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII) 68918E(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII) 68920E(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII) 68928E(H) - Arias Number (Max. 128 characters - ASCII) 68930E(H) - SIP user name (Max. 128 characters - ASCII) 68938E(H) - SIP digest authentication password (Max. 128 characters - ASCII) 68940E(H) - Gateway address information (Max. 7100 characters - ASCII) 68AFCA(H) - Stand-by port number for H.232 connection 68AFCCH) - Stand-by port number for SIP connection 68AFCE(H) - RAS port number 68AFD0(H) - Gatekeeper port number 68AFD2(H) - Port number of data waiting for T.38 68AFD4(H) - Port number of SIP server 68AFD6(H) - Priority for SIP and H.323 68AFD7(H) - SIP function 68AFD8(H) - H.323 function 0: H.323, 1: SIP 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
68AFD9(H) - SIP digest authentication function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
69ECBE(H) - 69ECDE(H) - IMPORTANT: Do not change the values of these RAM

addresses. They are not for use in the field.
68AFDA(H) - IP-Fax backup data 00 - 600 (H)
SM
133
Rev. 04/2007
6BEBFE(H) IMPORTANT: Do not change the values of these RAM addresses. They are 6BEBFF(H) IMPORTANT: Do not change the values of these RAM addresses. They are 6BEC00(H) IMPORTANT: Do not change the values of these RAM addresses. They are 6BEC01(H) IMPORTANT: Do not change the values of these RAM addresses. They are 6BEC02(H) IMPORTANT: Do not change the values of these RAM addresses. They are 6BEC03 to 6BEC04 IMPORTANT: Do not change the values of these RAM addresses. 6BEC05(H) IMPORTANT: Do not change the values of these RAM addresses. They are 6BEC06(H) IMPORTANT: Do not change the values of these RAM addresses. They are
not for use in the field. not for use in the field. They are not for use in the field. not for use in the field. not for use in the field. not for use in the field. not for use in the field. not for use in the field.
B267
134
SM

5.1 OVERVIEW
The basic fax unit consists of two PCBs: an FCU and an MBU. The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation with the controller board. The MBU contains the ROM and SRAM. Also, the FCU has an NCU circuit.
SM
5.2 BOARDS
5.2.1 FCU
The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interface to the base copiers engine, and all the fax options.
FACE3 (Fax Application Control Engine)

CPU Data compression and reconstruction (DCR) DMA control Clock generation DRAM backup control
Modem (FAME)
V.34, V33, V17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21, and V.8
DRAM
The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows. SAF memory Working memory Page memory : 4MB : 8MB : 4MB
The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery.
B267
136
SM
Memory Back-up
A Rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory (DRAM) for 1 hour.
5.2.2 MBU
On this board, the flash ROM contains the FCU firmware, and the SRAM contains the system data and user parameters. Even if the FCU is changed, the system data and user parameters are kept on the MBU board.
B267 Fax Option
ROM
3MB flash ROMs for system software storage 2MB (16bit x 1MB) + 1MB (16bit x 512K)
SRAM
The 128 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a lithium battery.
Memory Back-up
A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in the SRAM, in case the base copier's main switch is turned off.
Switches
Item SW1 Description Switches the SRAM backup battery on/off.
SM
137
B267
5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH

5.3.1 TRANSMISSION
B267
138
SM
Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission

The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution in inch format. The SBCU processes the data and transfers it to the FCU. When scanning a fax original, the SBCU uses the MTF, independent dot erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax units scanner bit switches, not the copier's SP modes. Then, the FCU converts the data to mm format, and compresses the data in MMR or raw format to store it in the SAF memory. If image rotation will be done, the image is rotated in page memory before compression. At the time of transmission, the FCU decompresses the stored data, then re-compresses and/or reduces the data if necessary for transmission. The NCU transmits the data to the line.
B267 Fax Option
Immediate Transmission
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the resolution agreed with the receiving terminal. The SBCU video processes the data and transfers it to the FCU. When scanning a fax original, the SBCU uses the MTF, independent dot erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax units scanner bit switches, not the copier's SP modes. Then the FCU stores the data in page memory, and compresses the data for transmission. The NCU transmits the data to the line.
JBIG Transmission
Memory transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes from the DCR to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line. Immediate transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes from the page memory to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line.
Adjustments
Priority for the line used for G3 transmission (PSTN 1): System switch 16 bit 1
SM
139
B267
5.3.2 RECEPTION
First, the FCU stores the incoming data from either an analog line to the SAF memory. (The data goes to the FACE3 at the same time, and is checked for error lines/frames.) The FCU then decompresses the data and transfers it to page memory. If image rotation will be done, the image is rotated in the page memory. The data is transferred to the SBCU.
JBIG Reception
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-1 (the standard analog line), the data is sent to the QM-CODER for decompression. Then the data is stored in the page memory, and transferred to the SBCU.
B267
140
SM
5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

5.4.1 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION
Mail Transmission
This machine supports T.37 full mode. (ITU-, RFC232). The difference between T.37 simple mode and full mode is as follows. Function T.37 Simple Mode T.37 Full Mode 200 x100 Resolution 200 x 100 200 x 200 200 x 200 200 x 400 400 x 400 (if available) RX Paper Width RX Data Compression Method A4 MH A4, B4, A3 MH (default), MR, MMR, Image data transmission, exchange of capability Signals Image data transmission only information between the two terminals, and acknowledgement of receipt of fax messages
B267 Fax Option
Data Formats
The scanned data is converted into a TIFF-F formatted file. The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows: Field From Reply To To Bcc Subject Content Mail address of the sender Destination requested for reply Mail address of the destination Backup mail address From CSI or RTI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
SM
141
B267
Content Type Content Transfer Encoding Message Body
Multipart/mixed Attached files: image/tiff Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable MIME-converted TIFF-F (MIME standards specify how files are attached to e-mail messages)
Direct SMTP Transmission

Internet Fax documents can be sent directly to their destinations without going through the SMTP server. (Internet Faxes normally transmit via the SMTP server.) For example: e-mail address: SMTP server address: gts@ricoh.co.jp gts.abcd.com
In this case this feature destination e-mail address (gts@ricoh.co.jp) is read as the SMTP server address "gts.abcd.com" and the transmissions bypass the SMTP server.
Selectable Options
These options are available for selection: With the default settings, the scan resolution can be either standard or detail. Inch-mm conversion before TX depends on IFAX SW01 Bit 7. Detail resolution will be used if Super Fine resolution is selected, unless Fine resolution is enabled with IFAX SW01. The requirements for originals (document size, scan width, and memory capacity) are the same as for G3 fax memory TX. The default compression is TIFF-F format. IFAX SW00: Acceptable paper widths for sending IFAX SW09: Maximum number of attempts to the same destination
Secure Internet Transmission

SMTP Authentication: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> SMTP Authentication POP Before SMTP: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP Before SMTP
Mail Reception
This machine supports three types of e-mail reception: POP3 (Post Office Protocol Ver. 3.) IMAP4 (Internet Messaging Access Protocol)
B267
142
SM
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) For details: Core Technology Manual Facsimile Processes Faxing from a PC Internet/LAN Fax Boards Mail Reception
B267 Fax Option
POP3/IMAP4 Mail Reception Procedure

The machine automatically picks up e-mail from the server at an interval which is adjustable in the range 2 to 1440 min. in 1-minute steps: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> E-mail Reception Interval
SMTP Reception
The IFAX must be registered as an SMTP server in the MX record of the DNS server, and the address of the received mail must specify the IFAX. Enable SMTP reception: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol Even if the MX record on the DNS server includes the IFAX, mail cannot be received with SMTP until SMTP reception is enabled: However, if SMTP reception is selected and the machine is not registered in the MX record of the DNS server, then either IMAP4 or POP3 is used, depending on the setting: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
Mail Delivery Conditions: Transferring Mail Received With SMTP

1. 2. The machine must be set up for SMTP mail delivery: User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery Settings If the user wishes to limit this feature so that the machine will only deliver mail from designated senders, the machines Auth. E-mail RX feature must be set (User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery Settings). 3. If the SMTP RX File Delivery Setting is set to 0 to prohibit SMTP receiving, and if there is mail designated for delivery, then the machine responds with an error. (User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery Settings) 4. If the quick dial, speed dial, or group dial entry is incorrect, the mail transmission is lost, and the IFAX issues an error to the SMTP server and outputs an error report.
Auth. E-mail RX
In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX, the addresses of senders must be limited using the Access Limit Entry. Only one entry can be registered. 1. Access Limit Entry For example, to limit access to @IFAX.ricoh.co.jp: gts@IFAX.ricoh.co.jp Matches and is delivered.
SM
143
B267
gts@IFAX.abcde.co.jp IFAX@ricoh.co.jp
Does not match and is not delivered. Does not match and is not delivered.
2.
Conditions The length of the Access Limit Entry is limited to 127 characters. If the Access Limit Entry address and the mail address of the incoming mail do not match, the incoming mail is discarded and not delivered, and the SMTP server responds with an error. However, in this case an error report is not output. If the Access Limit Entry address is not registered, and if the incoming mail specifies a delivery destination, then the mail is delivered unconditionally.
Handling Mail Reception Errors

Abnormal files When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and commands the server to erase the message. Then the machine prints an error report and sends information about the error by e-mail to the sender address (specified in the From or Reply-to field of the message). If there is an incomplete received message in the machine memory, it will be erased. The machine prints an error message when it fails to send the receive error notification after a certain number of attempts. The following types of files are judged to be abnormal if one or more of the following are detected: 1. Unsupported MIME headers. Supported types of MIME header Header Content-Type Charset Content-Transfer-Encoding Supported Types Multipart/mixed, text/plain, message/rfc822 Image/tiff US-ASCII, ISO 8859 X. Other types cannot be handled, and some garbage may appear in the data. Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
2. 3. 4.
MIME decoding errors File format not recognized as TIFF-F format Resolution, document size, or compression type cannot be accepted
B267
144
SM
Remaining SAF capacity error

The machine calls the server but does not receive e-mail if the remaining SAF capacity is less than a certain value (the value depends on IFAX Switch 08. The e-mail will be received printed). The error handling method for this type of error is the same as for Abnormal files. If the capacity of the SAF memory drops to zero during reception, the machine operates in the same way as when receiving an abnormal file (refer to Abnormal files above).
B267 Fax Option
when the SAF capacity increases (for example, after substitute reception files have been
Secure Internet Reception

To enable password encryption and higher level security: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP3/IMAP4 Settings> Encryption (set to On)
Transfer Request: Request By Mail

For details: Core Technology Manual Facsimile Processes Faxing from a PC Internet/LAN Fax Boards Transfer Request The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field From To Bcc Subject Content-Type
Content E-mail address of the requesting terminal Destination address (Transfer Station address) Blind carbon copy From TSI (Fax Message No. xxxx) Multipart/mixed Text/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff (for attached files)
Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-Bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable Mail body (text part) Message body RELAY-ID-: xxxx (xxxx: 4 digits for an ID code) RELAY: #01#*X#**01. MIME-converted TIFF-F.
E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode)

The following features are available as options for mail sending: entering a subject, designating the level of importance, confirming reception of the mail.
SM
145
B267
Subject and Level of Importance

You can enter a subject message with: Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options The Subject entry for the mail being sent is limited to 64 characters. The subject can also be prefixed with an Urgent or High notation.
How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type

Mail Type Subject Entry --Entry Condition 1. CSI (RTI) 2. RTI 3. CSI 4. None 1. CSI (RTI) CSI not registered RTI not registered CSI, RTI not registered Normal: Return Receipt (dispatched). Confirmation of Reception 2. RTI From CSI not registered You can select displayed with IFAX SW02 Bits 2 and 3. 3. CSI 4. None Mail delivery, memory transfer, SMTP receiving and delivery From RTI or CSI of the station designated for delivery RTI or CSI of sender Mail address of sender Mail sending from G3 memory Memory sending Mail delivery Fax Message No. + File Number RTI not registered Error:
Fax Message No. + File No.
No Subject Entry
Return Receipt CSI, RTI not registered (processed/error)
B267
146
SM
Mail address of sender Mail error notification Items
SMTP receiving and delivery (Off Ramp Gateway)

---
Error Message No. xxxx From CSI (RTI)
of the table above are in the Subject.
Subjects Displayed on the PC
E-mail Messages
After entering the subject, you can enter a message with: Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options An e-mail message (up to 5 lines) can be pre-registered with: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message Limitations on Entries Item Number of Lines Line Length Name Length 5 lines 80 characters 20 characters Maximum
Message Disposition Notification (MDN)

For details: Core Technology Manual Facsimile Processes Faxing from a PC Internet/LAN Fax Boards E-mail Options The network system administrator can confirm whether a sent mail has been received correctly or not. This function is enabled only when "I-FAX switch 02 Bit 4" is set to "1"This confirmation is done in four steps. 1. 2. 3. Send request for confirmation of mail reception. To enable or disable this request (known as MDN): Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options Mail reception (receive confirmation request)
SM
147
4. 5.
Send confirmation of mail reception Receive confirmation of mail reception
The other partys machine will not respond to the request unless the two conditions below are met: The other partys machine must be set up to respond to the confirmation request. The other partys machine must support MDN (Message Disposition Notification). - Setting up the Receiving Party The receiving party will respond to the confirmation request if: 1. 2. The Disposition Notification To field is in the received mail header (automatically inserted in the 4th line in the upper table on the previous page, if MDN is enabled), and Sending the disposition notification must be enabled (User Parameter Setting SW21 (15 [H]) Bit 1 for this model). The content of the response is as follows: Normal reception: IFAX SW02 (Bit 2, 3) Error: Return Receipt (dispatched) in the Subject line Return Receipt (displayed) in the Subject line Return Receipt (processed/error) in the Subject line
Handling Reports
1. Sending a Request for a Return Receipt by Mail After the mail sender transmits a request for a return receipt, the mail senders journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and a Q in the Mode column. 2. Mail Receipt (Request for Receipt Confirmation) and Sending Mail Receipt Response After the mail receiver sends a response to the request for a return receipt, the mail receivers journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and an A in the Mode column. 3. Receiving the Return Receipt Mail After the mail sender receives a return receipt, the information in the mail senders journal about the receipt request is replaced, i.e. the journal is annotated with OK in the Result column. When the return receipt reports an error, the journal is annotated with an E in the Result column. The arrival of the return receipt is not recorded in the journal as a separate communication. Its arrival is only reported by the presence of OK or E in the Result column. If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing list (i.e., a Group destination; the machine sends the mail to more than one location. See How to set
B267
148
SM
up Mail Delivery), the Result column of the Journal is updated every time a return receipt is received. For example, if the mailing list was to 5 destinations, the Result column indicates the result of the communication with the 5th destination only. The Exceptions: If one of the communications had an error, the Result column will indicate E, even if subsequent communications were OK. If two of the communications had an error, the Journal will indicate the destination for the first error only.
B267 Fax Option
results of the communications to the first 4 destinations are not shown.
Report Sample
SM
149
B267
5.5 IP-FAX
5.5.1 WHAT IS IP-FAX?
For details: Core Technology Manual Facsimile Processes Faxing from a PC Internet/LAN Fax Boards IP-FAX T.38 Packet Format TCP is selected by default for this machine, but you can change this to UDP with IPFAX SW 00 Bit 1. UDP Related Switches
IP-Fax Switch 01 No. FUNCTION Select IP FAX Delay Level Bit3 0 0-3 0 0 0 Bit2 0 0 0 0 Bit1 0 0 1 1 Bit0 0 1 0 1 Setting Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 COMMENTS Raise the level by selecting a higher setting if too many transmission errors are occurring on the network. If TCP/UDP is enabled on the network, raise this setting on the T.30 machine. Increasing the delay time allows the recovery of more lost packets. If only UDP is enabled, increase the number of redundant packets. Level 1~2: 3 Redundant packets Level 3: 4 Redundant packets Settings User parameter switch 34 (22[H]), bit 0 IP-Fax Gate Keeper usage 0: No, 1: Yes IP Fax Switches: Various IP-FAX settings (see the bit switch table)
B267
150
SM
6. SPECIFICATIONS
6.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Type: Circuit: Connection:
Desktop type transceiver PSTN PABX Direct couple Book (Face down) Maximum Length: 432 mm [17 ins] Maximum Width: 297 mm [11.7 ins] ARDF (Face up) (Single-sided document) Length: 128 - 1200 mm [5.0 - 47.2 ins] Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch] (Double-sided document) Length: 128 - 432 mm [5.0 - 17 inch] Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
Original Size:
Scanning Method:
Flat bed, with CCD G3 8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard) 8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Detail) 8 x 15.4 line/mm (Fine) 200 x 100 dpi (Standard) 200 x 200 dpi (Detail) G3: 3 s at 28800 bps; Measured with G3 ECM using memory for
Resolution:
Transmission Time:
an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at standard resolution
Data Compression:
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
SM
151
Protocol: Modulation:
Group 3 with ECM V.34, V.33, V.17 (TCM), V.29 (QAM), V.27ter (PHM), V.8, V.21 (FM) G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/
Data Rate:
19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps Automatic fallback
I/O Rate:
With ECM: 0 ms/line Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line ECM: 128 KB SAF
Memory Capacity:
Standard: 4 MB Page Memory: Standard: 4 MB (Print: 2 MB + Scanner: 2 MB)
B267
152
SM
6.2 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS

Local area network Connectivity: Ethernet 100base-Tx/10base-T IEEE1394 (IP over 1394) IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN) Main scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi Resolution: Sub scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi, 100 dpi To use 400 dpi, IFAX SW01 Bit 4 must be set to 1. 1 s (through a LAN to the server) Condition: ITU-T #1 test document (Selerexe Letter) MTF correction: OFF Transmission Time: TTI: None Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi Communication speed: 10 Mbps Correspondent device: E-mail server Line conditions: No terminal access Maximum message width is A4/LT. Document Size: To use B4 and A3 width, IFAX SW00 Bit 1 (B4) and/or Bit 2 (A3) must be set to 1. E-mail File Format: Single/multi-part MIME conversion Image: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR) Transmission: Protocol: SMTP, TCP/IP Reception: POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP Data Rate: 100 Mbps(100base-Tx) 10 Mbps (10base-T)
SM
153
Authentication Method: Remark:
SMTP-AUTH POP before SMTP A-POP The machine must be set up as an e-mail client before installation. Any client PCs connected to the machine through a LAN must also be e-mail clients, or some features will not work (e.g. Autorouting).
B267
154
SM
6.3 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS

Local Area Network Network: Ethernet/10base-T, 100base-TX IEEE1394 (IP over 1394) IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN) Scan line density: Original size: Maximum scanning size: Transmission protocol: Compatible machines: 8 x 3.85 lines/mm, 200 x 100dpi (standard characters) 8 x 7.7lines/mm, 200 x 200dpi (detailed characters) Maximum A3 or 11"x 17" (DLT) Standard: A3, 297mm x 432mm Irregular: 297mm x 1200mm Recommended: T.38 Annex protocol, TCP, UDP/IP communication IP-Fax compatible machines Specify IP address and send fax to an IP-Fax compatible fax IP-Fax transmission function: through a network. Also capable of sending fax from a G3 fax connected to the public telephone lines via a VoIP gateway. Receive a fax sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax through a IP-Fax reception function: network. Also capable of receiving fax from a G3 fax connected the public telephone lines via a VoIP gateway.
SM
155
6.4 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION
Component FCU MBU Speaker Handset Type 1018
Code
No. 1
Remarks
B267
2 3
Included with fax unit
B433
NA only. Common with J-C2
B267
156
SM
B806 DUPLEX UNIT AD2000
DUPLEX UNIT AD2000 B806

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................ 1
1.1 REPLACEMENTS ......................................................................................... 1 1.1.1 REAR COVER...................................................................................... 1 1.1.2 DRIVE BOARD..................................................................................... 2 1.1.3 INVERTER CLUTCH............................................................................ 2 1.1.4 DUPLEX TRANSPORTER MOTOR..................................................... 3 1.1.5 INVERTER MOTOR ............................................................................. 4
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS........................................... 6

2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ................................................................................ 6 2.1.1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT ............................................................... 6 2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................... 7 2.3 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM................................................................... 8 2.4 PAPER PATH TIMINMG CHART .................................................................. 9 2.4.1. PAPER PATH ...................................................................................... 9 2.4.2 TIMING CHART ................................................................................. 10
SM
B806
Replacements

1.1 REPLACEMENTS
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. This manual uses the following symbols. : See or Refer to, : Clamp : Screw, : Connector, : Clip ring, : E-ring
1.1.1 REAR COVER
(Color Photo)
SM
B806
Duplex Unit AD2000 B806
Replacements 1. Rear cover [A] of the duplex unit ( x 2: [B] is stepped screw.)
1.1.2 DRIVE BOARD
(Color Photo) 1. 2. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover") x 2, All s)
Drive board with bracket [A] (
(Color Photo) 3. Drive board [B] ( x 2, snap x 2)
1.1.3 INVERTER CLUTCH

1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover")
(Color Photo) 2. Inverter clutch [A] ( x 1, x 1)
B806
SM
Replacements
1.1.4 DUPLEX TRANSPORT MOTOR

1. 2. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover") Pull the duplex tray on the way.
(Color Photo) 3. 4. Remove the gear [A] to release the timing belt ( Duplex transport motor unit [B] ( x 4, x 1) x 1).
(Color Photo) 5. Duplex transport motor [C] ( Motor x 2)] When Reassembling the Duplex Transport
SM
B806
Replacements
(Color Photos) Make sure that timing belts are correctly engaged with three gears before securing gears and duplex transport motor unit.
1.1.5 INVERTER MOTOR

1. 2. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover") Pull the duplex tray on the way.
(Color Photo) 3. Inverter motor unit [A] ( x 4, x 2)
B806
SM
Replacements
(Color Photo) 4. Inverter motor [B] ( x 2)
When reassembling the inverter motor unit, make sure that the timing belt is correctly engaged with the gear [C].
SM
B806
Component Layout

2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
2.1.1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
1. Duplex Entrance Sensor 2. Duplex Left Cover Switch 3. Duplex Transport Motor 4. Tray Set Switch 5. Drive Board 6. Paper Wait Sensor
7. Inverter Motor 8. Duplex Right Cover Switch 9. Duplex Inverter Sensor 10. Duplex Clutch 11. Duplex Exit Sensor
B806
SM
Drive Layout
2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT
The duplex entrance roller [A] and transport roller 1 [B] are driven by the duplex transport motor [C] via timing belts and gears. The Transport roller 2 [D] and duplex exit roller [E] are driven by the inverter motor [F] via
Duplex Unit AD2000 B806 7 B806
timing belts, clutch and gears.
SM
Junction Gate Mechanism
2.3 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
When the paper reaches the engine exit sensor in duplex mode, the junction gate solenoid [A] is turned on. The junction gate solenoid pushes up junction gate edge [B]. As a result, the junction gate [C] opens the path[D] for the duplex unit.
B806
SM
Paper Path and Timing Chart
2.4 PAPER PATH AND TIMING CHART

2.4.1 PAPER PATH
(Color Illustration)
Duplex Unit AD2000 B806 SM 9 B806
Paper Path and Timing Chart
2.4.2 TIMING CHART
B806
10
SM
B813
DOCUMENT FEEDER DF2000
DOCUMENT FEEDER DF2000 B813

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. OVERALL INFORMATION ..............................................................1
1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT........................................................ 1 1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ......................................................... 2 1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................................ 3
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ...........................................4

2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION....................................................................... 4 2.2 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ....................................................................... 6 2.3 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT MECHANISM ...................................... 7 2.4 STAMP .......................................................................................................... 8 2.5 TIMING CHARTS .......................................................................................... 9 2.5.1 A3, STAMP MODE ............................................................................. 10 2.6 JAM DETECTION........................................................................................ 11 2.7 OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT ............................................................. 12 2.8 FREE RUN .................................................................................................. 13
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........................................14

3.1 EXTERIOR COVERS .................................................................................. 14 3.1.1 REAR COVER.................................................................................... 14 3.1.2 ORIGINAL TABLE .............................................................................. 14 3.1.3 FRONT COVER ................................................................................. 14 3.1.4 ORIGINAL ENTRANCE GUIDE ......................................................... 14 3.1.5 DF FEED COVER .............................................................................. 15 3.2 FEED UNIT.................................................................................................. 15 3.3 SEPARATION ROLLER .............................................................................. 15 3.4 PICK-UP ROLLER....................................................................................... 16 3.5 FEED BELT ................................................................................................. 16 3.6 ORIGINAL SENSORS (WIDTH, LENGTH, TRAILING EDGE).................... 17 3.7 ORIGINAL SET SENSOR ........................................................................... 18 3.8 TRANSPORT MOTOR ................................................................................ 18 3.9 FEED COVER OPEN SENSOR/ FEED CLUTCH/ROM/DF DRIVE BOARD19 3.10 REGISTRATION SENSOR.................................................................... 20 3.11 PICK-UP SOLENOID............................................................................. 20 3.12 STAMP SOLENOID ............................................................................... 21
SM
B813
MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
B813I901.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Separation roller Original feed belt Pick-up roller Original entrance guide Original table
6. 7. 8. 9.
Original exit roller 2nd transport roller Original exposure guide 1st transport roller
SM
B813
Document Feeder DF2000 B813
1. OVERALL INFORMATION
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1 14 13 12
4 5 6
11 10 9 8
B813I902.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
DF feed clutch Feed cover open sensor DF pick-up solenoid DF transport motor DF drive board DF position sensor Original length sensor 2
8. Original length sensor 1 9. Original trailing edge sensor 10. Original width sensor 1 11. Original width sensor 2 12. Original set sensor 13. Stamp solenoid 14. Registration sensor
B813
SM
DRIVE LAYOUT
8 1 2
B813I903.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4.
DF feed clutch DF transport motor 2nd transport roller Exit roller
5. 6. 7. 8.
Separation roller 1st transport roller Original feed belt Pick-up roller
SM
B813
1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
[B]
[C]
[A] [E]
[D]
B813D905.WMF
The DF uses two width sensors (width sensor 1 [A] and width sensor 2 [B]) to detect the original width, and two length sensors (length sensor 1 [C] and length sensor 2 [D]) to detect the original length. The DF detects the original size based on the combination of inputs from these sensors, as indicated in the table on the next page. If using a non-standard original size, the user must input the original length at the operation panel. The original width sensors have four possible output states: P1 to P4. The output depends on the position of the ridges on the toothed plate attached to the original rear fence. During one-to-one copying, copy paper is fed to the registration roller in advance to increase the copy speed. The original exit trailing edge sensor [E] monitors the stack of originals in the feeder, and detects when the trailing edge of the last page has been fed in. This stops the ADF from causing the feed of an unwanted extra sheet of copy paper.
B813
SM
NA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 A3 (297 x 420) B4 (257 x 364) A4 SEF (210 x 297) A4 LEF (297 x 210) B5 SEF (182 x 257) B5 LEF (257 x 182) A5 SEF (148 x 210) A5 LEF (210 x 148) 11" x 17" 11" x 15" 10" x 14" 81/2" x 14" 81/2" x 13" 8" x 13" 81/2" x 11" SEF 11" x 81/2" LEF 8" x 10" SEF 51/2" x 81/2" SEF 81/2" x 51/2" LEF
EU
1 1 2 4 2 3 3 4
Original Length 1 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON -
Original Length 2 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON -
P1 ON ON ON -
P2 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
P3 ON ON ON -
P4 ON ON ON ON ON -
NA: America (North, Middle, South) EU: Europe, Asia, China, Taiwan : No : Yes ON: Paper present 1, 2, 3, 4, 1: In NA, original size 11" x 15" is detected as 11" x 17" 2: In NA, original size 8" x 13" is detected as 81/2" x 14" 3: In NA, original size 8" x 10" is detected as 81/2" x 11" 4: In EU, original size 8" x 13" is detected as 81/2" x 13"
- Original Width Sensor States Width Sensor 1 Width Sensor 2 Detection State High High P1 Low High P2 Low Low P3 High Low P4
Low = Blocked High = Open
SM
B813
PICK-UP AND SEPARATION
2.2 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION

[D] [E] [F] [C]
[A]
B813D907.WMF
[B] [H]
[G] [I]
B813D908.WMF
An FRR (feed and reverse roller) system is used. Setting original(s) onto the feed table lifts the original set sensor feeler [A], causing the original set sensor [B] to issue a signal informing the main CPU that the DF is ready to start feeding. When the Start key ( ) is pressed, the DF pick-up solenoid [C] turns on, causing the transport guide [D] and pick-up roller [E] to lower onto the original, while at the same time causing the original stoppers [F] to drop down to clear the feed path for the original. After 200 ms, the DF transport motor [G] turns on, feeding the top original page to the paper feed belt [H], where it is separated by the separation roller [I].
B813
SM
ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT MECHANISM
[D]
[A] [B] [C]

B813D901.WMF
When the leading edge of the original reaches the registration sensor at [A], the DF transport motor turns off. After a short time the DF transport motor turns on again. The original is fed past the DF exposure glass [B], where it is scanned. It is then fed through to the 2nd transport roller [C] and fed out by the exit roller [D]. The DF transport motor uses a constant speed to feed the original up to the registration sensor. When the motor turns on again to feed the original to the DF exposure glass, however, the speed depends on the selected reproduction ratio. At 100%, the speed is 100 mm/s (Color mode: 66.7mm/sec).
SM
B813
2.3 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT MECHANISM
STAMP
2.4 STAMP
[C]
[A] [B]
B813D902.WMF
This function is only for fax mode. The fax unit includes the stamp. The stamp solenoid [A] is located between the 2nd transport roller [B] and the exit roller [C]. The copier controls this solenoid directly. When the original reaches the stamp position, the DF transport motor stops. Provided that the page was sent successfully (immediate transmission) or stored successfully (memory transmission), the stamp solenoid then comes on 300 ms after the DF motor stops. After stamping, the DF transport motor resumes feeding, at about 1.3 times the normal speed. The positioning of the stamp on the original can be adjusted using SP6-010.
B813
SM
SM
Feed, Scanning, Exit Feed, Scanning, Exit Next Original Preset Original Fed Next Original Preset Original Fed No Original Preset No Next Preset Original Exits 50ms 50ms 5mm 5mm 168.1mm 200ms 50ms 369.1mm 369.1mm 369.1mm (Paper length - ((Separation to Regist. Sensor) + 15mm)) 15mm JAM4 *1 JAM2, 3 *1
21.0mm(27.0-5-1mm)
Feed
Feed, Scanning, Exit
B813D903.WMF
RXD
Orig. Size Info
Original Fed
TXD
50ms
2.5 TIMING CHARTS
MAX Transport CW Motor READ OFF
5mm
200ms
JAM1 *1
DF Feed Clutch 15mm
ON OFF 15mm
9
420mm *2
Pick-up Solenoid
ON OFF
Original Set Sensor
ON OFF
Registration Sensor
ON OFF
FGATE
ENABLE
DISABLE
*1 For information about jam conditions, see Section 2.6.
TIMING CHARTS
*2 F Gate: This signal goes high when the laser start to wire a pate to the drum. The distance depends on SP mode setting 6-006-2 and -3.
B813 Document Feeder DF2000 B813
B813
Scanning, Stamp Position Stop Stamp Exit Stamp Exit Scanning, Stamp Position Stop Orig. Length & Next Orig. Present Stamp Finish Original Fed Original Exits Stamp Position Stop Orig. Length & Stamp No Original No Next Position Stamp Finish Orig. Set Stop 50ms 50ms 200mm 50ms 168.1mm 200ms 50ms JAM2, 3 *1 JAM4 *1
21.0mm(27.0-1mm) *2 71.2mm *2 71.2mm
Feed
RXD
TIMING CHARTS
Orig. Size Info
Original Fed
TXD
2.5.1 A3, STAMP MODE
MAX Transport CW Motor READ OFF
50ms
200ms
JAM1 *1
DF Feed Clutch
ON OFF
10
420mm *2 200mm
Pick-up Solenoid
ON OFF
Original Set Sensor
ON OFF
FGATE
ENABLE
DISABLE
200mm
Stamp
ON OFF
B813D904.WMF
*1 For information about jam conditions, see Section 2.6.
*2 F Gate: This signal goes high when the laser start to wire a pate to the drum. The distance depends on SP mode setting 6-006-2 and -3.
SM
JAM DETECTION
JAM 1: If the registration sensor fails to turn on within x1 ms after the DF transport motor comes on to feed the original from the original tray. x1 = 2267 ms JAM 2: If the registration sensor fails to turn off within x2 ms after the DF transport motor comes on to feed the original from the original tray. x2 = 1234 ms JAM 3: If there is no original at the registration sensor when scanning is started, even though the sensor had already turned on. JAM 4: The current original is stopped after the registration sensor detects its leading edge, but the previous original is still at the scanning position. JAM 5: If the original stopped at the stamp position is removed. JAM 6: If the cover is opened or the ADF is lifted up while the ADF is in operation. JAM 7: If the DF gate signal (indicating that the original is now in the correct position for scanning) is not asserted when the original trailing edge passes the DF exposure glass. JAM 7 occurs when the original is pulled out while it is being scanned.
SM
11
B813
2.6 JAM DETECTION
OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT
2.7 OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

The DF CPU controls the DF transport motor, DF feed clutch, DF pick-up solenoid, and stamp solenoid. The DF CPU also monitors all sensors and provides updated status when prompted at regular intervals by the mainframe, which may then take action based on this information. The DF/mainframe connection is checked automatically immediately after the mainframe is powered on.
Main Frame
Interface
ADF Control CPU
Driver Registration Sensor Original Set Sensor DF Position Sensor Feed Cover Open Sensor Original Width Sensor 1 Original Width Sensor 2 Original Length Sensor 1 Original Length Sensor 2 Original Trailing Edge Sensor
DF Feed Motor
DF Feed Clutch
Driver
DF Pick-up Solenoid
ADF Control Board
Stamp Solenoid
B813D906.WMF
B813
12
SM
FREE RUN
You can use DIP switch 100 (on the DF control board) to carry out a one-sided free run.
Mode\Bits Normal FR with paper Feed/Transport Motor Test Feed Solenoid Test Feed Clutch Test Stamp Solenoid Test Special I/F Test FR without paper Transport Motor Test Bit0 Off On On Off On Off Off On On Bit1 Off Off On Off Off On Off Off On Bit2 Off Off Off On On On Off Off Off FR: Free run Bit3 Off Off Off Off Off Off On On On
Procedure
1. Set bit 1 and/or bit 2 on SW100 (on the DF control board) to ON. 2. Set originals on the original table. 3. The free run starts automatically after about 2 seconds. 4. To stop the run, set SW100 bits 1 and 2 back to OFF. To ensure that the system correctly resets, turn power off and then back on.
Free Run Process

1. Set originals on the DF table. 2. The first original sheet feeds into the DF. 3. The sensor detects the original. 4. The DF outputs the original to the exit tray. 5. Steps 2 through 4 repeat for each subsequent original sheet. When all originals have been fed, the DF stops and waits for more.
SM
13
B813
2.8 FREE RUN
EXTERIOR COVERS

3.1 EXTERIOR COVERS
3.1.1 REAR COVER
1. Lift the DF. 2. Unhook the three latches [A] in the order marked on the DF body. 3. Close the DF. 4. Open the DF feed cover [B]. 5. Rear cover [C] ( x 1) [A]
3.1.2 ORIGINAL TABLE

1. Rear cover ( 3.1.1) x 2, x 2) [B] [F] [G]
B813R901.WMF
2. Original table [D] (
[C]
3.1.3 FRONT COVER

1. Open the DF feed cover [B]. 2. Original table. ( 3. Front cover [E] ( 3.1.2) x 2)
[D] [E]
B813R902.WMF
3.1.4 ORIGINAL ENTRANCE GUIDE

1. Feed unit ( 3.2) 3.1.2) x 4)
2. Original table ( 3. Roller cover [F]
4. Original entrance guide [G] (
B813
14
SM
FEED UNIT
1. Rear cover ( 2. Original table ( 3. Front cover ( 4. Clip [A] 5. Strap [B] (
3.1.1) 3.1.2) 3.1.3) x 1) x 2) [C]
[A] [B]
6. DF feed cover [C] (
B813R903.WMF
3.2 FEED UNIT

1. Open the DF feed cover [D] and detach the strap [E] ( x 1). 2. Raise the front guide flap [F] to about a 45-degree angle, and push the feed unit [G] into the spring so that it comes free. NOTE: 1) The feed unit comes off very easily if you first lift flap [H] to about a 45degree angle. 2) When reinstalling, be sure that the lever [I] is above the pin [J]. [I] [J]
[F]
[G]
[E]
[H]
[D]
B813R904.WMF
3.3 SEPARATION ROLLER

1. Feed unit ( 3.2) x 1). 2. Roller cover [K] 3. Separation roller [L] (
[L]
[K]
B813R905.WMF
SM
15
B813
3.1.5 DF FEED COVER
PICK-UP ROLLER
3.4 PICK-UP ROLLER

[B]
[A]
[C]
B813R906.WMF
1. Feed unit (
3.2)
2. Remove 2 clip rings and 1 bushing [A] 3. Pull the shaft [B] part way out at the gear end, so that the pick-up roller [C] can be taken off.
3.5 FEED BELT

[F] [D] [G]
[E]
B813R908.WMF
B813R907.WMF
1. Feed unit (
3.2)
2. Pick-up roller housing [D] 3. Push down on the lower wings [E] of the tensioning piece [F], so that the tensioning piece comes free of the shaft. 4. Take the tensioning piece out, and then remove the belt [G].
B813
16
SM
ORIGINAL SENSORS (WIDTH, LENGTH, TRAILING EDGE)
[A]
B813R909.WMF
[E] [D]
[F] [B]
[C]
B813R910.WMF
1. Original table (
3.1.2) x 3).
2. Sensor platform [A] (
3. Length sensors [B], [C] ( x 1 on each sensor) NOTE: Replace both sensors at the same time, together with the wiring and connectors. 4. Width sensors [D], [E], and trailing edge sensor [F] ( x 1 on each sensor) NOTE: Replace all three sensors at the same time, together with the wiring and connectors.
SM
17
B813
3.6 ORIGINAL SENSORS (WIDTH, LENGTH, TRAILING EDGE)
ORIGINAL SET SENSOR
3.7 ORIGINAL SET SENSOR

[B] [A]
B813R911.WMF
1. Original entrance guide ( 2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1) 3. Original set sensor [B] (
3.1.4) x 1)
3.8 TRANSPORT MOTOR
[D] [E] [C]

B813R912.WMF
1. Rear cover (
3.1.1)
2. Open the wire clamp [C] at the top of the motor bracket [D]. 3. Motor bracket [D] ( x 2 , 1 spring) NOTE: Unhook the spring at the board side. 4. Transport motor [E] ( x 2, x 1)
B813
18
SM
FEED COVER OPEN SENSOR/ FEED CLUTCH/ROM/DF DRIVE BOARD

Document Feeder DF2000 B813 B813
3.9 FEED COVER OPEN SENSOR/ FEED CLUTCH/ROM/DF DRIVE BOARD

[D] [B] [A] [C]
[E]
B813R913.WMF
Exterior
1. Rear cover ( 3.1.1)
Feed Cover Open Sensor

2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1) x 1) 3. Feed cover open sensor [B] (
Feed Clutch
2. Feed unit ( 3.2) 3. Feed clutch [C] ( x 1, 1 bushing, x 1). NOTE: Pull the shaft inward until the clutch can be removed.
ROM
2. Replace the ROM [D] on the DF drive board.
DF Drive Board
2. DF drive board [E] ( x 3, all connectors)
SM
19
REGISTRATION SENSOR
3.10 REGISTRATION SENSOR

[C] [B]
[A]
B813R914.WMF
1. DF feed cover (
3.1.5) 3.1.4) x x 2)
2. Original entrance guide ( 3. Outer turn guide [A] (
4. Pop out the inner turn guide [B], and remove the registration sensor [C] ( 1)
3.11 PICK-UP SOLENOID

[D]
B813R915.WMF
1. Rear cover (
3.1.1) x 2, x 1)
2. Pick-up solenoid [D] (
B813
20
SM
STAMP SOLENOID
[B]
B813R916.WMF
[A]
[D]
[C]
1. Rear cover (
3.1.1)
2. Disconnect the stamp solenoid connector. NOTE: Pull out the small connector piece from the large connector. (The large connector itself cannot fit through the hole in the frame.) 3. Lift the ADF upright and pull open the exit guide [A]. Release the front and rear hooks [B] and open the cover [C]. 4. Remove the stamp solenoid [D] ( x 1), and pull it out together with the wire.
SM
21
B813
3.12 STAMP SOLENOID
B814
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER DF2010
AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER DF2010 B814

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION............................................ 1
1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT........................................................ 1 1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ......................................................... 2 1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................................ 3
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS .......................................... 4

2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION ....................................................................... 4 2.2 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ....................................................................... 6 2.3 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT ............................................................. 7 2.3.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS................................................................ 7 2.3.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS .............................................................. 8 2.3.3 ORIGINAL TRAILING EDGE SENSOR................................................ 9 2.4 STAMP ........................................................................................................ 10 2.5 TIMING CHARTS ........................................................................................ 11 2.5.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE (A3)............................................. 11 2.5.2 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE (A3, STAMP MODE)................... 12 2.5.3 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE................................................... 13 2.5.4 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE (STAMP MODE) ....................... 14 2.6 JAM DETECTION........................................................................................ 15 2.7 OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT.............................................................. 16 2.8 FREE RUN .................................................................................................. 17
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......................................... 18

3.1 DF EXIT TABLE AND COVER ....................................................................18 3.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT................................................................................ 19 3.3 LEFT COVER .............................................................................................. 20 3.4 PICK-UP ROLLER....................................................................................... 21 3.5 FEED BELT ................................................................................................. 22 3.6 SEPARATION ROLLER .............................................................................. 23 3.7 ORIGINAL SET/ORIGINAL REVERSE SENSORS ..................................... 24 3.8 ORIGINAL L/W SENSORS, TRAILING EDGE SENSOR ............................ 25 3.9 FEED CLUTCH, PICK-UP SOL, TRANSPORT MOTOR, FEED MOTOR... 26 3.10 REGISTRATION SENSOR .................................................................... 27 3.11 STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR ........................... 28
SM
B814

ARDF DF2010 B814
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

3 2
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
B814I901.WMF
1. Separation Roller 2. Paper Feed Belt 3. Pick-up Roller 4. Original Set Sensor 5. Original Trailing Edge Sensor 6. Original Width Sensor Board 7. Original Length Sensor 1 8. Original Length Sensor 2 9. Original Table 10. Reverse Table
11. Reverse Roller 12. Junction Gate 13. Exit Roller 14. Original Exit Sensor 15. Stamp 16. 2nd Transport Roller 17. Original Exposure Guide 18. Registration Sensor 19. 1st Transport Roller
SM
B814

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 14
1 17 16 15
13 12 11
B814I902.WMF
9 10
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
DF Feed Clutch Feed Cover Sensor Original Width Sensor Board Original Length Sensor 1 DF Pick-up Solenoid Original Length Sensor 2 Junction Gate Solenoid DF Drive PCB DF Position Sensor
10. DF Feed Motor 11. DF Transport Motor 12. Original Exit Sensor 13. Stamp Solenoid 14. Original Trailing Edge Sensor 15. Original Set Sensor 16. Original Reverse Sensor 17. Registration Sensor
B814
SM
DRIVE LAYOUT
ARDF DF2010 B814
1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

4 3 2 1 5 6
10
9 8 7
B814I903.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Separation Roller Original Feed Belt Pick-up Roller DF Feed Clutch DF Transport Motor
6. DF Feed Motor 7. Reverse Table Roller 8. 2nd Transport Roller 9. Exit Roller 10. 1st Transport Roller
SM
B814

2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
[A] [B] [C]
B814D901.WMF
The original size detection mechanism consists of the original width sensor board [A] and two original length sensors-1 [B] and -2 [C]. Based on the combined output of the length sensors and the width sensor board, the machine can detect the size of the original. This integrated detection mechanism is detailed in the table on the next page. Note that the width sensors terminal plate is attached to the original guide, so the widths of the originals must all be the same.
B814
SM

ARDF DF2010 B814
NA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 A3 (297 x 420) B4 (257 x 364) A4 SEF (210 x 297) A4 LEF (297 x 210) B5 SEF (182 x 257) B5 LEF (257 x 182) A5 SEF (148 x 210) A5 LEF (210 x 148) 11" x 17" 11" x 15" 10" x 14" 81/2" x 14" 81/2" x 13" 8" x 13" 81/2" x 11" SEF 11" x 81/2" LEF 8" x 10" SEF 51/2" x 81/2" SEF 81/2" x 51/2" LEF
EU
1 1 2 4 2 3 3 4
Original Length 1 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON -
Original Length 2 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON -
P1 ON ON ON -
P2 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
P3 ON ON ON -
P4 ON ON ON ON ON -
NA: America (North, Middle, South) EU: Europe, Asia, China, Taiwan : No : Yes ON: Paper present 1, 2, 3, 4, 1: In NA, original size 11" x 15" is detected as 11" x 17" 2: In NA, original size 8" x 13" is detected as 81/2" x 14" 3: In NA, original size 8" x 10" is detected as 81/2" x 11" 4: In EU, original size 8" x 13" is detected as 81/2" x 13"
Original Width Sensor Board

Original Width 1 Original Width 2 Original Side Guide Position
P1 B5SEF/ A5SEF
P2 A4SEF/ A5LEF
P3 B4/B5LEF
P4 A3/A4LEF
B814D902.WMF
SM
B814
PICK-UP AND SEPARATION
2.2 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION
[B] [A] [C] [D] [E]
[B]
B814D903.WMF
[F]
[G]
B814D904.WMF
The original is set with the image facing up. The original pushes actuator [A] and the original set sensor [E] is activated. After pressing the start button, the pick-up solenoid [D] is activated and the lift plate [C] lifts the original up until it comes in contact with the pick-up roller [B]. The pickup roller then feeds the top sheet of paper. After being fed from the pick-up roller, the topmost sheet is separated from the stack by the separation roller and sent to the first transport roller. The mechanism is an FRR system, consisting of the original feed belt [F] and separation roller [G].
B814
SM
ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT

ARDF DF2010 B814
2.3 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT

2.3.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINALS
[E] [A] [F]
[B] [C] [D]

B814D905.WMF
The DF feed motor feeds the separated original to the first transport roller [A] at maximum speed. When the registration sensor [B] detects the leading edge, the motor stops for a short while. Then the feed and transport motors turn on again, and feed the original through the scanning area at a lower speed (the scanning area contains the original exposure guide [D] and DF exposure glass [C]). After scanning, the original is fed out by the second transport roller [E] and exit roller [F].
SM
B814
2.3.2 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINALS

[G] [F] [H] [A] [E]
[D] [B]
B814D906.WMF
[C]
[A]
[E] [D] [F]

B814D907.WMF
When the registration sensor [B] detects the leading edge of the original, the DF feed motor (which drives the feed roller) and transport motor (which drives the transport roller) both switch off. After a brief interval, the transport motor alone reactivates to drive the first transport roller [A] and second transport roller [G] and the exit roller [F]. The front side of the original is then scanned. When the original exit sensor [C] detects the leading edge of the original, the junction gate solenoid is activated and the junction gate [D] opens. The original is then transported towards the reverse table [H]. Soon after the trailing edge of the original passes the exit sensor [C], the junction gate solenoid switches off and the junction gate [D] is closed. When the original has been fed onto the reverse table, the DF feed motor switches on in reverse. The original is then fed by the reverse roller [E] and then by the exit roller [F] and first transport roller [A] to the scanning area (where the reverse side will be scanned).
B814
SM

ARDF DF2010 B814
[H]
[I]
B814D908.WMF
[J]
B814D909.WMF
The original is then sent to the reverse table [H] a second time to be turned over. This is done so that the duplex copies will be properly stacked front side down in the exit tray [J] in the correct order.
2.3.3 ORIGINAL TRAILING EDGE SENSOR

During one-to-one copying, copy paper is fed to the registration roller in advance (while the original is still being scanned), to increase the copy speed. The trailing edge sensor monitors the stack of originals in the feeder, and detects when the trailing edge of the last page has been fed in. The main CPU then stops the copier from feeding an unwanted extra sheet of copy paper.
SM
B814
STAMP
2.4 STAMP
[C]
[A] [B]
B814D910.WMF
This function is only for fax mode. There is a stamp [A] between the 2nd transport roller [B] and the exit roller [C], and its solenoid is controlled by the copier directly. When the original reaches the stamp position, the DF feed motor stops. At 300 milliseconds after stopping the DF feed motor, the stamp solenoid turns on if the page was sent successfully (immediate transmission) or stored successfully (memory transmission). After stamping, the DF feed motor starts again to feed out the document, and its speed is about 1.3 times the normal speed. The stamping position on the original can be changed by adjusting SP6-010.
B814
10
SM
SM
168.1mm 50ms 50ms 5mm 50ms 5mm 327.6mm 327.6mm 327.6mm JAM#4 420mm
RXD
TXD
2.5 TIMING CHARTS
CW
Feed Motor Transport Motor
MAX READ OFF
50ms
5mm
200ms
JAM#1A
2.5.1 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE (A3)
11
DF Feed Clutch
ON OFF
DF Pick-up Solenoid
ON OFF
Original Set Sensor
ON OFF
Original Exit Sensor
ON OFF
JAM#6 JAM#2, 3, 5 26.2mm (32.2-5-1mm)
Registration Sensor
ON OFF
B814D911.WMF
TIMING CHARTS
FGATE
ENABLE DISABLE
B814 ARDF DF2010 B814
B814
50ms JAM#8 200ms JAM#8 50ms 50ms 50ms 168.4mm 50ms JAM#4 74.5mm JAM#2, 3, 5 JAM#6 31.2mm 74.5mm 31.2mm 420mm 200ms 200ms
TIMING CHARTS
RXD
TXD
MAX READ Feed Motor Transport Motor OFF
CW
200ms
JAM#1A
DF Feed Clutch
ON OFF
2.5.2 SINGLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE (A3, STAMP MODE)
12
DF Pick-up Solenoid
ON OFF
Original Set Sensor
ON OFF
ON OFF
Registration Sensor
ON OFF
FGATE
ENABLE DISABLE
B814D912.WMF
Stamp
ON OFF
SM
SM
168.1mm 50ms 200ms 32.8mm JAM#7 JAM#7 50ms 50ms 5mm 200ms 200ms 50ms JAM#7 5mm 50ms 50ms 32.8mm JAM#7 50ms 50ms 5mm JAM#6 50.7mm JAM#6 JAM#6 50.7mm JAM#6 50.7mm JAM#6 JAM#1B JAM#1B JAM#2, 5 60mm JAM#2, 3, 5 26.2mm JAM#1B JAM#1B JAM#2, 3, 5 26.2mm JAM#2, 5 JAM#2, 3, 5 26.2mm
RXD
TXD
CW
Feed Motor
MAX READ OFF
50ms
CCW MAX
5mm
200ms
JAM#1A
200ms
MAX READ Transport Motor OFF
CW
2.5.3 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE
13
DF Feed Clutch
ON OFF
DF Pick-up Solenoid
ON OFF
Junction Gate Solenoid
ON OFF
Original Set Sensor
ON OFF
ON OFF
JAM#6 50.7mm
ON Original Reverse OFF Sensor
JAM#2, 3, 5
36.2mm (32.5-5-1mm)
Registration Sensor
ON OFF
B814D913.WMF
FGATE
ENABLE DISABLE
TIMING CHARTS
B814 ARDF DF2010 B814
B814
50ms 200ms JAM#8 32.8mm 50ms JAM#7 50ms JAM#7 JAM#8 200ms 50ms 50ms 50ms 50.7mm 50.7mm JAM#6 JAM#1B 74.5mm JAM#2, 3, 5 31.2mm 74.5mm JAM#1B 60mm JAM#2, 5 200ms 200ms
RXD
TXD
TIMING CHARTS
CW
Feed Motor
MAX READ OFF
50ms
CCW MAX
JAM#1A
200ms
MAX READ Transport Motor OFF
CW
DF Feed Clutch
ON OFF
DF Pick-up Solenoid
ON OFF
2.5.4 DOUBLE-SIDED ORIGINAL MODE (STAMP MODE)
14
Junction Gate Solenoid
ON OFF
Original Set Sensor
ON OFF
ON OFF
ON Original Reverse OFF Sensor
JAM#2, 3, 5 31.2 mm
Registration Sensor
ON OFF
FGATE
ENABLE DISABLE
B814D914.WMF
Stamp
ON OFF
SM
JAM DETECTION
ARDF DF2010 B814
2.6 JAM DETECTION

JAM 1A: If the registration sensor does not turn on within X1 ms after original feed starts. X1 = 1,000 ms JAM 1B: If the registration sensor does not turn on within 953 ms after the leading edge of the original reaches the original reverse sensor (duplex mode only) JAM 2: If the registration sensor does not turn off within X2 ms after receiving the feeding signal from the Mainframe and after turning on. X2 = (Original length/line speed) +2,000 ms If there is no original at the registration sensor when scanning is started, even though the sensor had already turned on. The operator may then remove the original from the ADF. The current original is stopped after the registration sensor detects its leading edge, but the previous original is still at the scanning position. If the original exit sensor does not turn on within X3 ms after receiving relaying signal from the Mainframe and after the registration sensor turns on. X3 = 140 mm/line speed If the original exit sensor does not turn off within X4 ms after the original exit sensor turns on. X4 = (Original length/line speed) +1,030 ms If the original reverse sensor does not turn on within 2,329 ms after the reversing process begins (Duplex mode only). If the original stopped at the stamp position is removed. If the cover is opened or the ADF is lifted up while the ADF is in operation. If the DF gate signal (indicating that the original is now in the correct position for scanning) is not asserted when the original trailing edge passes the DF exposure glass. JAM 10 occurs when the original is pulled out while it is being scanned.
JAM 3:
JAM 4: JAM 5:
JAM 6:
JAM 7: JAM 8: JAM 9: JAM 10:
SM
15
B814
OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT
2.7 OVERALL ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

The DF CPU controls the transport motor, DF feed motor, DF feed clutch, junction gate solenoid, stamp solenoid, and pick-up solenoid. The DF CPU also monitors all DF sensors and provides updated status information when prompted at regular intervals by the mainframe, which may then take action based on this information. The DFmainframe connection is checked automatically just after power is supplied to the mainframe.
Main Frame
Interface
ADF Control CPU DF Feed Motor Driver DF Transport Motor
Registration Sensor Original Set Sensor DF Position Sensor Feed Cover Open Sensor Original Width Sensor Board Original Length Sensor 1 Original Length Sensor 2 Original Trailing Edge Sensor Original Exit Sensor Original Reverse Sensor
DF Feed Clutch
Junction Gate Solenoid Driver DF Pick-up Solenoid
ADF Control Board
Stamp Solenoid
B814D915.WMF
B814
16
SM
FREE RUN
ARDF DF2010 B814
2.8 FREE RUN

Two types of free runs can be performed by using Dip Switch DPS 100 on the DF control board. The switch settings are as follows: DPS 100
Mode\Bits Normal One-sided FR with paper Two-sided FR with paper Feed/Transport Motor Test Feed Solenoid Test Feed Clutch Test Stamp Solenoid Test Inverter Solenoid Test Special I/F Test One-sided FR without paper Two-sided FR without paper Transport Motor Test Feed Motor Test Bit0 Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off Bit1 Off Off On On Off Off On On Off Off On On Off Bit2 Off Off Off Off On On On On Off Off Off Off On Bit3 Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off On On On On On
Procedure
1. Turn on SW 1 or 2 (DPS 100 on DF control board). 2. Set the original on the original table. 3. After 2 seconds, the free run will automatically start. 4. To stop the free run, turn all DIP switches OFF, then turn the main power off and on.
One-sided Free Run Process

1. The originals are set on the original table. 2. The first page of the original is fed into the DF. 3. The sensors detect the original. 4. The original is output to the exit tray. 5. Steps 2-4 above are repeated for any additional originals set on the original table. If there are no additional originals, the DF will stop and wait.
Two-sided Free Run Process

The process is the same, except that the original reverse cycle is added.
SM
17
B814
DF EXIT TABLE AND COVER

3.1 DF EXIT TABLE AND COVER
[B] [C]
[D] [A]
B814R901.WMF
1. Open the left cover. 2. [A] Front cover ( 3. [B] Rear cover ( x 2) x 2). Take care not to break the 3 hooks. x 3)
4. [C] Open the reverse table 5. [D] Original exit table (
B814
18
SM
ORIGINAL FEED UNIT

ARDF DF2010 B814
3.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT
[A]
B814R902.WMF
1. Open the left cover. 2. [A] Original feed unit
SM
19
B814
LEFT COVER
3.3 LEFT COVER
[B]
[A]
B814R903.WMF
1. Front and rear covers ( 2. [A] Left cover ( x 2) 3. [B] Lower left stay unit (
3.1) x 2)
B814
20
SM
PICK-UP ROLLER
ARDF DF2010 B814
B814R904.WMF
3.4 PICK-UP ROLLER

[A]
1. Original feed unit (
3.2)
2. [A] Pick-up roller (1 snap ring)
SM
21
B814
FEED BELT
3.5 FEED BELT

[A]
B814R905.WMF
[C]
[B]
B814R906.WMF
1. Original feed unit ( 2. [A] Paper feed guide 3. [B] Belt holders 4. [C] Feed belt
3.2)
B814
22
SM
SEPARATION ROLLER
ARDF DF2010 B814
3.6 SEPARATION ROLLER
[A]
[C]
[B]
B814R907.WMF
1. Lift the original feed guide [A]. 2. [B] Separation roller cover 3. [C] Separation roller
SM
23
B814
ORIGINAL SET/ORIGINAL REVERSE SENSORS
3.7 ORIGINAL SET/ORIGINAL REVERSE SENSORS
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B814R908.WMF
1. Open the left cover. 2. While pushing the left and right pawls [A], open the original feed guide plate [B]. 3. [C] Original set sensor ( x 1) x 1) 4. [D] Original reverse sensor (
B814
24
SM
ORIGINAL L/W SENSORS, TRAILING EDGE SENSOR

ARDF DF2010 B814
3.8 ORIGINAL L/W SENSORS, TRAILING EDGE SENSOR
[A]
[B] [C] [E] [D]
B814R909.WMF
B814R910.WMF
1. Open the original table. 2. [A] Upper part of the table ( 3. [B] Width sensor board ( 4. [C] Length sensor-1 ( 5. [D] Length sensor-2 ( x 1) x 1) x 1) [G] x 3) x 1)
6. [E] Trailing edge sensor (
To ensure proper detection of paper size, after wiping off the sensor board and terminal plate with a dry cloth (or cloth with alcohol), apply silicone grease (KS-660) to the terminal plate [G].
B814R912.WMF
SM
25
B814
FEED CLUTCH, PICK-UP SOL, TRANSPORT MOTOR, FEED MOTOR
3.9 FEED CLUTCH, PICK-UP SOL, TRANSPORT MOTOR, FEED MOTOR
[B]
[A] [C]
[D] [E]
B814R913.WMF
Exterior
1. Rear cover ( 3.1)
DF Feed Clutch
1. [A] DF feed clutch [A] ( x 1, x 1)
Pick-up Solenoid
1. [B] Pick-up solenoid ( x 3, 1 snap ring, x 1)
Transport Motor
1. [C] Bracket ( x 2) x 2, x 1) 2. [E] Transport motor (
DF Feed Motor
1. [C] Bracket ( x 2) x 2, x 1) 2. [D] DF feed motor (
B814
26
SM
REGISTRATION SENSOR
ARDF DF2010 B814
B814R914.WMF
3.10 REGISTRATION SENSOR
[B]
[A]
1. Front and rear covers ( 3. [A] Transport guide plate 4. [B] Registration sensor (
3.1) 3.3)
2. Left cover and lower left stay unit ( x 1)
SM
27
B814
STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR
3.11 STAMP SOLENOID AND ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR

[A] [B]
[C]
B814R915.WMF
[D]
B814R916.WMF
1. Front cover, Rear cover, Original exit table (
3.1)
2. Open the exit guide plate [A]. Next, detach the unit by inserting a screwdriver or other tool into one of the small openings [B] on either side of the guide plate holder and pushing firmly. 3. [C] Stamp solenoid ( x 1, x 1) x 1) 4. [D] Original exit sensor (
B814
28
SM
B384 PAPER TRAY UNIT PS450
PAPER TRAY UNIT PS450 B384

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION..............................................1
1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................... 1 1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT........................................................ 2 1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................... 3
2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................4

PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM ....................................... 4 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM .......................................................................... 5 PAPER END DETECTION ........................................................................... 7 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION ..................................................................... 8 PAPER SIZE DETECTION ...................................................................... 9 2.5 SIDE AND END FENCES .......................................................................... 10 Side Fences........................................................................................... 10 End Fence ............................................................................................. 10 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ...........................................11

3.1 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT............................................................... 11 3.2 TRAY MAIN BOARD REPLACEMENT ...................................................... 12 3.3 TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT................................................................ 12 3.4 RELAY CLUTCH REPLACEMENT ............................................................ 13 3.5 UPPER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT .................................... 14 3.6 LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT ................................... 15 3.7 LIFT MOTOR REPLACEMENT .................................................................. 16 3.8 PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT ................................................... 17 3.9 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR REPLACEMENT ............................... 17 3.10 PAPER SIZE SWITCH REPLACEMENT ................................................. 18
SM
B384

2 3
6
B384V101.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4.
Upper Paper Feed Roller Lower Paper Feed Roller Upper Tray Lower Tray
5. Upper Bottom Plate 6. Lower Bottom Plate 7. Optional Tray Heater
SM
B384
Paper Tray Unit PS450 B384

1 20 2 3 4 5 19 18 6 7 8 9 17 16 15 14 13
B384V102.WMF
10 12 11
1. Tray Main Board 2. Upper Lift Sensor 3. Upper Lift Motor 4. Upper Paper Height 2 Sensor 5. Upper Paper Height 1 Sensor 6. Upper Paper Feed Clutch 7. Relay Clutch 8. Tray Cover Switch 9. Lower Paper Feed Clutch 10. Lower Paper Height 2 Sensor
11. Lower Paper Height 1 Sensor 12. Vertical Transport Sensor 13. Upper Paper End Sensor 14. Lower Paper End Sensor 15. Lower Paper Size Switch 16. Upper Paper Size Switch 17. Optional Tray Heater 18. Lower Lift Motor 19. Lower Lift Sensor 20. Tray Motor
B384
SM
DRIVE LAYOUT
1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

1 2
Paper Tray Unit PS450 B384 B384
3 8 4
6 7
B384V103.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4.
Tray Motor Drive Belt Upper Paper Feed Clutch Relay Clutch
5. 6. 7. 8.
Lower Paper Feed Clutch Relay Roller Lower Paper Feed Roller Upper Paper Feed Roller
SM
PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM
[A]
[B]
[C]
B384D104.WMF
Each paper tray holds 500 sheets. The paper feed roller [A] drives the top sheet of paper from the paper tray to the copier/printer. The friction pad [B] allows only one sheet to feed at a time. The friction pad applies pressure to the feed roller with a spring [C].
B384
SM
PAPER LIFT MECHANISM
2.2 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM

[A] [B]
[C] [K] [H]

B384D106.WMF
[G]
[F]
[E] [I] [J] [C] [D] [E]
[A] [B]
B384D107.WMF
The paper size switch detects when the tray is pushed in. When the paper tray is pushed into the machine, the pin [A] for the lift motor pressure shaft engages the lift motor coupling [B] and the pin [C] for the bottom plate lift shaft in the tray engages the bottom plate pressure lever coupling [D]. The pin [E] on the rear of the tray pushes the lock lever so that the lift motor can lift the bottom plate pressure lever. The lift motor turns on, and turns clockwise as viewed on the lower diagram. The main pressure spring [K] pulls the bottom plate pressure lever, and this lifts the tray bottom plate. When the top of the stack touches the feed roller, the motor cannot pull up the plate any more, so it pulls the actuator [G] into the lift sensor [F]. The pressure of the feed roller on the paper is now too high, so the lift motor reverses to reduce this pressure. It reverses for 300 ms or 600 ms, depending on the paper size. For smaller paper, it reverses the larger amount (600 ms) to reduce the pressure more.
SM
B384
[D]
For A4-SEF paper or wider, a projection [H] on the side fence engages the secondary pressure spring [J] through a lever [I]. Then, the secondary pressure spring [J] applies paper feed pressure in addition to the main pressure spring [K], to ensure that extra pressure is applied to wider paper. When the paper tray is pulled out, the pins [A, C] disengage from the couplings [B, D], and the bottom plate drops. To make it easier to push the tray in, the lift motor rotates backwards 1.7 seconds to return the bottom plate pressure lever coupling [D] to the original position. The lift motor on timing can be adjusted with SP mode, to change the pressure from the main pressure spring. SP1-908-1 (1st tray), 1-908-2 (2nd tray) Default: 0 Increase the pressure: +1, +2 Decrease the pressure: 1, 2 If the pressure is too strong, the sheet of paper may not be fed smoothly, and if it is too weak, more than one sheet of paper may be fed at a time. The pressure depends on the paper size.
B384
SM
PAPER END DETECTION
2.3 PAPER END DETECTION

[A]
[B] [C]
B384D105.WMF
If there is some paper in the paper tray, the paper stack raises the paper end feeler [A] and the paper end sensor [B] is deactivated. When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout [C] in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated. When the paper tray is drawn out with no paper in the tray, the shape of the paper end feeler causes it to lift up.
SM
B384
PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION
2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION
[B] [A] [C]
[C]
B384D107.WMF
The amount of paper in the tray is detected by the combination of on/off signals from two paper height sensors [A] and [B]. When the amount of paper decreases, the bottom plate pressure lever [C] moves the actuator up. The following combination of sensor signals is sent to the copier/printer.
Amount of Paper Near End 30% 70% 100% Paper Height Sensor 1 OFF ON ON OFF Paper Height Sensor 2 ON ON OFF OFF
When the tray contains paper of a small width, the paper feed pressure may become too low when the thickness of the remaining stack of paper has decreased. The lift motor rotates forward 300 ms after the sensor detects a certain amount of paper remaining in the tray to increase paper feed pressure, simulating the pressure generated by a full tray.
B384
SM
PAPER SIZE DETECTION

SW Size A3, F (81/2" x 13") A4 short-edge A4 long-edge A5 long-edge 11" x 17" B4, 81/2" x 14" B5 long-edge, 81/2" x 11" B5 short-edge, 11" x 81/2" * (Asterisk)
[B]
[A]
: ON (Pushed) : OFF (Not pushed)
B384D108.WMF
There are four paper size microswitches [A] on the front right plate of the paper tray unit. The switches are actuated by a paper size actuator [B] behind the paper size indicator plate, which is on the front right of the tray. Each paper size has its own actuator, with a unique combination of notches. To determine which size has been installed, the CPU reads which microswitches the actuator has switched off. The CPU disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected. If the paper size actuator is broken, or if there is no tray installed, the Add Paper indicator will light. When the paper size actuator is at the * mark, the paper tray can be set up to accommodate one of a wider range of paper sizes by using user tools. If the paper size for this position is changed without changing the user tool setting, a paper jam will result.
SM
B384
SIDE AND END FENCES
2.5 SIDE AND END FENCES

[A]
[D] [B]
B384D110.WMF
[C]
B384D109.WMF
Side Fences
If the tray is full of paper and it is pushed in strongly, the fences may deform or bend. This may cause the paper to skew or the side-to-side registration to be incorrect. To correct this, each side fence has a stopper [A] attached to it. Each side fence can be secured with a screw [B], for customers who do not want to change the paper size.
End Fence
As the amount of paper in the tray decreases, the bottom plate [C] lifts up gradually. The end fence [D] is connected to the bottom plate. When the tray bottom plate rises, the end fence moves forward and pushes the back of the paper stack to keep it squared up.
B384
10
SM
FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT

3.1 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
B384R723.WMF
1. [A] Paper tray 2. Move the release lever [B] to the front. 3. Pull the feed roller [C] to the operation side and remove it.
SM
11
B384
[C]
TRAY MAIN BOARD REPLACEMENT
[A]
B384R101.WMF
[B]
[C]
B384R103.WMF
3.2 TRAY MAIN BOARD REPLACEMENT

1. [A] Rear cover ( x 5) x 4, x 8) 2. [B] Tray main board (
3.3 TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT

1. Rear cover ( x 5) x 2) 2. Disconnect 8 connectors from the tray main board [B]. 3. Tray main board with the bracket ( 4. [C] Tray motor ( x 6, x 1)
B384
12
SM
RELAY CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
3.4 RELAY CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
[A] [B]
B384R101.WMF
[D]
[C]
[E]
B384R102.WMF
1. [A] Rear cover ( 2. [B] Right cover ( 4. [D] Bushing 5. [E] Relay clutch (
x 5) x 2) x 1)
3. [C] Stopper bracket (
x 1)
SM
13
B384
UPPER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
3.5 UPPER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
[A]
B384R101.WMF
[B]
[D]
[C]
[E]
B384R102.WMF
1. [A] Rear cover ( 2. [B] Bracket ( 4. [D] Bushing
x 5) x 2) x 1)
x 2)
3. [C] Stopper bracket (
5. [E] Upper paper feed clutch (
B384
14
SM
LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
3.6 LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
[A]
B384R101.WMF
[C] [B]
B384R102.WMF
1. [A] Rear cover ( 2. [B] Snap ring
x 5)
3. [C] Lower paper feed clutch
SM
15
B384
LIFT MOTOR REPLACEMENT
3.7 LIFT MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
B384R101.WMF
[C] [D] [B] [E]

B384R104.WMF
1. Pull out the paper tray. 2. [A] Rear cover ( 3. [B] 2P connector 4. [C] Spring 5. [D] Lift motor unit ( 6. [E] Lift motor ( x 3) x 3) x 5)
B384
16
SM
PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT
3.8 PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[C] [B] [A]
B384R106.WMF
1. Paper tray 2. [A] Paper end sensor bracket ( 3. [B] Paper end sensor NOTE: After replacing the sensor, pull the sensor cable towards the right side of the frame [C] so that it does not touch the paper in the tray. x 1, x 1)
3.9 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[C]
[D]
[B]
[A]
B384R105.WMF
1. Open the right door [A]. 2. [B] Right guide plate ( x 2) x 1, x 1) 3. [C] Vertical transport sensor bracket ( 4. [D] Vertical transport sensor
SM
17
B384
PAPER SIZE SWITCH REPLACEMENT
3.10 PAPER SIZE SWITCH REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
B384R108.WMF
1. Upper and lower paper trays 2. [A] Inner cover ( x 2) x 1) 3. [B] Paper size switch (
B384
18
SM
B385 PAPER TRAY UNIT PS460
PAPER TRAY UNIT PS460 B385

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION..............................................1
1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................... 1 1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT........................................................ 2 1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................... 3
2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................4

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION .............................................................. 4 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM .......................................................................... 5 PAPER END DETECTION ........................................................................... 7 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION ..................................................................... 8 PAPER SIZE DETECTION........................................................................... 9 SIDE AND END FENCES .......................................................................... 10 Side Fences........................................................................................... 10 End Fence ............................................................................................. 10 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT............................................................... 11 TRAY MAIN BOARD REPLACEMENT ...................................................... 12 TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT................................................................ 13 LIFT MOTOR REPLACEMENT .................................................................. 14 PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT ................................................... 15 PAPER SIZE SWITCH REPLACEMENT ................................................... 15
3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ...........................................11

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6
SM
B385

B385V101.WMF
1. Paper Feed Roller 2. Tray
3. Bottom Plate 4. Optional Tray Heater
SM
B385

1 2 3 4 5 6
7 10 9
B385V102.WMF
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Tray Main Board Lift Sensor Lift Motor Paper Height 2 Sensor Paper Height 1 Sensor
6. Paper Feed Motor 7. Tray Cover Switch 8. Paper End Sensor 9. Paper Size Switch 10. Optional Tray Heater
B385
SM
DRIVE LAYOUT
1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
B385V103.WMF
1. Paper Feed Motor
2. Paper Feed Roller
SM
B385
PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION
[A]
[B]
[C]
B385D103.WMF
The paper tray holds 500 sheets. The paper feed roller [A] drives the top sheet of paper from the paper tray to the copier/printer. The friction pad [B] allows only one sheet to feed at a time. The friction pad applies pressure to the feed roller with a spring [C].
B385
SM
2.2 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM

[A] [B]
[C] [K] [H]

B385D106.WMF
[G]
[F]
[E] [I] [J] [C] [D] [E]
[A] [B]
B385D107.WMF
The paper size switch detects when the tray is pushed in. When the paper tray is pushed into the machine, the pin [A] for the lift motor pressure shaft engages the lift motor coupling [B] and the pin [C] for the bottom plate lift shaft in the tray engages the bottom plate pressure lever coupling [D]. The pin [E] on the rear of the tray pushes the lock lever so that the lift motor can lift the bottom plate pressure lever. The lift motor turns on, and turns clockwise as viewed on the lower diagram. The main pressure spring [K] pulls the bottom plate pressure lever, and this lifts the tray bottom plate. When the top of the stack touches the feed roller, the motor cannot pull up the plate any more, so it pulls the actuator [G] into the lift sensor [F]. The pressure of the feed roller on the paper is now too high, so the lift motor reverses to reduce this pressure. It reverses for 300 ms or 600 ms, depending on the paper size. For smaller paper, it reverses the larger amount (600 ms) to reduce the pressure more.
SM
B385
[D]
For A4-SEF paper or wider, a projection [H] on the side fence engages the secondary pressure spring [J] through a lever [I]. Then, the secondary pressure spring [J] applies paper feed pressure in addition to the main pressure spring [K], to ensure that extra pressure is applied to wider paper. When the paper tray is pulled out, the pins [A, C] disengage from the couplings [B, D], and the bottom plate drops. To make it easier to push the tray in, the lift motor rotates backwards 1.7 seconds to return the bottom plate pressure lever coupling [D] to the original position. The lift motor on timing can be adjusted with an SP mode, to change the pressure from the main pressure spring. SP1-908-1 Default: 0 Increase the pressure: +1, +2 Decrease the pressure: 1, 2 If the pressure is too strong, the sheet of paper may not be fed smoothly, and if it is too weak, more than one sheet of paper may be fed at a time. The pressure depends on the paper size.
B385
SM
PAPER END DETECTION
2.3 PAPER END DETECTION

[A]
[B] [C]
B385D105.WMF
If there is some paper in the paper tray, the paper stack raises the paper end feeler [A] and the paper end sensor [B] is deactivated. When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout [C] in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated. When the paper tray is drawn out with no paper in the tray, the shape of the paper end feeler causes it to lift up.
SM
B385
PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION
2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION
[B] [A] [C]
[C]
B385D107.WMF
The amount of paper in the tray is detected by the combination of on/off signals from two paper height sensors [A] and [B]. When the amount of paper decreases, the bottom plate pressure lever [C] moves the actuator up. The following combination of sensor signals is sent to the copier/printer.
Amount of Paper Near End 30% 70% 100% Paper Height Sensor 1 OFF ON ON OFF Paper Height Sensor 2 ON ON OFF OFF
When the tray contains paper of a small width, the paper feed pressure may become too low when the thickness of the stack of remaining paper has decreased. The lift motor rotates forward 300 ms after the sensor detects a certain amount of paper remaining in the tray to increase paper feed pressure, simulating the pressure generated by a full tray.
B385
SM
2.5 PAPER SIZE DETECTION

[B]
SW Size A3, F (81/2" x 13") A4 short-edge A4 long-edge A5 long-edge 11" x 17" B4, 81/2" x 14" B5 long-edge, 81/2" x 11" B5 short-edge, 11" x 81/2" * (Asterisk)
4 Paper Tray Unit PS460 B385
[A]
: ON (Pushed) : OFF (Not pushed)
B385D108.WMF
There are four paper size microswitches [A] on the front right plate of the paper tray unit. The switches are actuated by a paper size actuator [B] behind the paper size indicator plate, which is on the front right of the tray. Each paper size has its own actuator, with a unique combination of notches. To determine which size tray has been installed, the CPU reads which microswitches the actuator has switched off. The CPU disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected. If the paper size actuator is broken, or if there is no tray installed, the Add Paper indicator will light. When the paper size actuator is at the "*" mark, the paper tray can be set up to accommodate one of a wider range of paper sizes by using user tools. If the paper size for this position is changed without changing the user tool setting, a paper jam will result.
SM
B385
SIDE AND END FENCES
2.6 SIDE AND END FENCES

[A]
[D] [B]
B385D110.WMF
[C]
B385D109.WMF
Side Fences
If the tray is full of paper and it is pushed in strongly, the fences may deform or bend. This may cause the paper to skew or the side-to-side registration to be incorrect. To correct this, each side fence has a stopper [A] attached to it. Each side fence can be secured with a screw [B], for customers who do not want to change the paper size.
End Fence
As the amount of paper in the tray decreases, the bottom plate [C] lifts up gradually. The end fence [D] is connected to the bottom plate. When the tray bottom plate rises, the end fence moves forward and pushes the back of the paper stack to keep it squared up.
B385
10
SM
FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT

3.1 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT
[C]
[B]
[A]
B385R723.WMF
1. [A] Paper tray 2. Move the release lever [B] to the front. 3. Pull the feed roller [C] to the operation side and remove it.
SM
11
B385
TRAY MAIN BOARD REPLACEMENT
3.2 TRAY MAIN BOARD REPLACEMENT
[A]
B385R002.WMF
[B]
B385R939.WMF
1. [A] Rear cover (
x 4) x 3, x 5)
2. [B] Tray main board [B] (
B385
12
SM
TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT
3.3 TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
B385R102.WMF
1. [A] Rear cover ( 2. [B] Tray motor (
x 4) x 2, x 1)
SM
13
B385
LIFT MOTOR REPLACEMENT
3.4 LIFT MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
B385R152.WMF
[C] [D] [B] [E]

B385R104.WMF
1. Pull out the paper tray. 2. [A] Rear cover ( 3. [B] 2P connector 4. [C] Spring 5. [D] Lift motor unit ( 6. [E] Lift motor ( x 3) x 3) x 4)
B385
14
SM
PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT
3.5 PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[C] [B] [A]
B385R106.WMF
1. Paper tray 2. [A] Paper end sensor bracket ( 3. [B] Paper end sensor NOTE: After replacing the sensor, pull the sensor cable to the right side of the frame [C] so that the cable does not touch the paper in the tray. x 1, x 1)
3.6 PAPER SIZE SWITCH REPLACEMENT

[D] [E]
[B] [C]
[A]
B385R101.WMF
1. [A] Lower tray cover ( 2. [B] Paper tray 3. [C] Right front cover ( 5. [E] Paper size switch (
SM
x 2) x 1) x 1) x 1)
15 B385
4. [D] Paper size switch bracket (

B229 SM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

B229 SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B229 SERVICE MANUAL

B229 SERVICE MANUAL

B229 SERVICE MANUAL

2006 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

B229 TABLE OF CONTENTS

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

6.12.2 6.12.3 6.12.4

B267 FAX OPTION

B806 DUPLEX UNIT

B813 DOCUMENT FEEDER

B814 DOCUMENT FEEDER

B384 PAPER TRAY UNIT

B385 PAPER TRAY UNIT

Read This First

Health Safety Conditions

Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal

Observance of Electrical Safety Standards

Symbols, Abbreviations, and Trademarks

B813 DOCUMENT FEEDER B814 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER

B267 FAX OPTION PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

B806 DUPLEX UNIT

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

1.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Temperature Range: Humidity Range:

10C to 32C (50F to 89.6F) 15% to 80% RH

Less than 0.1 mg/m3 (2.7 x 10-6 oz/yd3)

1.2.2 MACHINE LEVEL

1.2.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

1.2.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS

1.3 COPIER INSTALLATION

1.3.2 ACCESSORY CHECK

1.3.3 BEFORE INSTALLING A COPIER

Using the Handles

(Color Photo) Remove filament tape and other padding.

1.3.4 INITIAL SETTING

1.3.5 CHECKING THE NOZZLE PATTERN

You must load A4/Letter papers in SEF direction.

1.3.6 HEAD GAP ADJUSTMENT

2. Check the gray scale line [A] on the printout.

1.3.7 SUB SCAN: SEND ADJUSTMENT

1.3.8 MOVING THE MACHINE

Remove the four brackets and covers [B]. (

1.3.9 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE

Platen Cover Installation

1.4 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION

1.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1.5 ARDF INSTALLATION

1.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Remove the strips of tape.

Attach the appropriate scale decal [I] as shown.

1.6 ADF INSTALLATION

1.6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Remove the strips of tape.

Remove the left scale [A] (

Attach the appropriate scale decal [I] as shown.

One-Tray Paper Tray Unit

1.7 ONE-TRAY PAPER TRAY UNIT

1.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

One-Tray Paper Tray Unit

Remove the cover [A] (

(Color Photo) 3. Remove the bracket [C] ( x 2).

One-Tray Paper Tray Unit